DGS8000 Series Switch CLI Reference Guide v10.4(3) - D-Link

DGS-8000
Basic Configuration Command
Reference Guide
Version 10.4(3)
.
i
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Revision No.:
Version 10.4(3)
Date:
2011/3/1
Copyright Statement
D-Link Corporation ©2011
All rights reserved.
Without our written permission, this document may not be excerpted, reproduced, transmitted, or
otherwise in all or in part by any party in any means.
.
ii
Preface
Version Description
This manual matches the firmware version 10.4(3).
Target Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
 Network engineers
 Technical salespersons
 Network administrators
Conventions in this Document
1. Universal Format Convention
Arial: Arial with the point size 10 is used for the body.
Note: A line is added respectively above and below the prompts such as caution and note to
separate them from the body.
Format of information displayed on the terminal: Courier New, point size 8, indicating the
screen output. User's entries among the information shall be indicated with bolded
characters.
2. Command Line Format Convention
Arial is used as the font for the command line. The meanings of specific formats are
described below:
Bold: Key words in the command line, which shall be entered exactly as they are displayed,
shall be indicated with bolded characters.
Italic: Parameters in the command line, which must be replaced with actual values, shall be
indicated with italic characters.
[ ]: The part enclosed with [ ] means optional in the command.
{ x | y | ... }: It means one shall be selected among two or more options.
[ x | y | ... ]: It means one or none shall be selected among two or more options.
//:Lines starting with an exclamation mark "//" are annotated.
.
iii
3. Signs
Various striking identifiers are adopted in this manual to indicate the matters that special
attention should be paid in the operation, as detailed below:
Warning, danger or alert in the operation.
Caution
Descript, prompt, tip or any other necessary supplement or explanation for
Note
the operation.
The port types mentioned in the examples of this manual may not be
consistent with the actual ones. In real network environments, you need
configure port types according to the support on various products.
Note
The display information of some examples in this manual may include the
information on other series products, like model and description. The details
are subject to the used equipments.
.
iv
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
1
1.1
CLI Authorization
Configuration Commands
alias
You can use the alias command to configure an alias of a command in the
global configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to remove the alias
of a specified command or all the aliases under one mode.
alias mode command-alias original-command
no alias mode command-alias
Parameter
Description
mode
Mode of the command represented by
the alias
Parameter
description
command-alias
Alias of the command
original-command
Syntax of the command represented
by the alias
Default
Some commands in the privileged EXEC mode have
Settings
default alias names.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The following table lists the default alias of the commands
in the privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
guidelines
Alias
Actual Command
h
help
p
ping
s
show
.
1-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
un
undebug
The default alias cannot be deleted by the no alias exec
command.
By setting the alias, you can use a word to replace a
command. For example, you can create an alias to
represent the first part of a command, and then type the
rest part of the command.
The mode of the command represented by the alias is the
command mode existing in the current system. In the
global configuration mode, you can use alias ? to list all
the modes under which you can configure alias for
commands.
DGS-8000(config)# alias ?
aaa-gs
AAA server group mode
acl
acl configure mode
bgp
Configure bgp Protocol
config
globle configure mode
......
The alias also has its help information that is displayed
after * in the following format:
*command-alias=original-command
For example, in the privileged EXEC mode, the default
alias s stands for show. You can enter s? to query the key
words beginning with s and the help information of the
alias.
DGS-8000#s?
*s=show
show
start-chat
start-terminal-service
If an alias represents more than one word, the command
will be displayed in brackets. For example, if you set sv
stand for show version in the privileged EXEC mode,
then:
DGS-8000#s?
*s=show
*sv="show version" show
start-chat
start-terminal-service
The alias must begin with the first letter of the command.
The first letter of the command cannot be a space. The
space before the command cannot be used as a valid
alias.
DGS-8000# s?
show
start-chat
start-terminal-service
The command alias also has its help information. For
example, if the alias ia represents ip address in the
.
1-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
interface configuration mode, then:
DGS-8000(config-if)#ia ?
A.B.C.D
dhcp
IP address
IP Address via DHCP
DGS-8000(config-if)# ip address
The above help information lists the parameters of ip
address and shows the actual command name.
You must enter an entire alias; otherwise it cannot be
recognized.
Use the show aliases command to show the aliases
setting in the system.
In the global configuration mode, use def-route to
represent the default route setting of ip route 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1:
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# alias config def-route ip route 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#def-route?
*def-route="ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1"
DGS-8000(config)# end
DGS-8000# show aliases config
globle configure mode alias:
def-route
ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
192.168.1.1
1.2
Related
Command
Description
commands
show aliases
Show the aliases settings.
privilege
To attribute the execution rights of a command to a command level, use
privilege in the global configuration mode. The no form of this command
recovers the execution rights of a command to the default setting.
privilege mode [all] [level level | reset ] command-string
no privilege mode [all] [level level ] command-string
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
mode
CLI mode of the command to which
the execution rights are attributed.
all
Alias of the command
level
Specify the execution right levels
.
1-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
(0–15)
of
a
command
or
sub-commands
Restore the command execution rights
reset
to its default level
command-string:
Command string to be authorized
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The following table lists some key words that can be
authorized by command privilege in the CLI mode. The
number of command modes that can be authorized may
vary with different devices. In the global configuration
mode, you can use privilege ? to list all CLI command
modes that can be authorized.
Mode
Descripton
Usage
config
Global configuration mode.
guidelines
exec
Privileged EXEC mode
interface
Interface configuration mode
ip-dhcp-pool
keychain
keychain-key
time-range
DHCP
address
pool
configuration mode
KeyChain configuration mode
KeyChain-key
configuration
mode
Time-Range configuration mode
Set the password of CLI level 1 as test and attribute the
reload rights to reset the device:
DGS-8000(config)#enable secret level 1 0 test
DGS-8000(config)#privilege exec level 1 reload
Examples
After the above setting, you can access the CLI window as
level-1 user to use the reload command:
DGS-8000>reload ?
LINE
Reason for reload
.
1-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
<cr>
You can use the key word all to attribute all sub-commands
of reload to level-1 users:
DGS-8000(config)# privilege exec all level 1 reload
After the above setting, you can access the CLI window as
level-1 user to use all sub commands of the reload
command:
DGS-8000>reload ?
LINE
Reason for reload
at
reload at a specific time/date
cancel
cancel pending reload scheme
in
reload after a time interval
<cr>
1.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
enable secret
Set CLI-level password
show aliases
To display all the command aliases or aliases in special command modes, run
the show aliases command in the privileged EXEC mode.
show aliases [mode]
Parameter
Description
mode
Mode of the command represented by
Parameter
description
the alias.
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
EXEC mode.
Usage
Show all the configuration of aliases if the command mode
guidelines
has not been input.
Examples
Following example shows the command alias in the EXEC
mode:
DGS-8000#show aliases exec
.
1-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 1 CLI Authorization Configuration Commands
exec mode alias:
h
help
p
ping
s
show
u
undebug
un
undebug
Related
Command
Description
commands
alias
Set the alias of a command.
.
1-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2
2.1
Switch Management
Configuration Commands
User Management Related Commands
2.1.1
disable
To exit from privileged user mode to normal user mode or lower the privilege
level, execute the privileged user command disable.
disable [ privilege-level ]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
privilege-level
Privilege level
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Use this command to return to user mode from privileged
mode. If a privilege level is added, the current privilege
Usage
level will be lowered to the specified level.
guidelines
The privilege level following the disable
command must be lower than the current
level.
Note
The example below lowers the current privilege level of the
Examples
device down to level 10:
DGS-8000# disable 10
Command
Related
commands
Description
From user mode enter to the
privileged mode or log on the
enable
higher level of authority.
.
2-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.1.2
enable
To enter into the privileged user mode, execute the normal user configuration
command enable.
For the details of the command, see the Security Configuration Command
Reference.
2.1.3
enable password
To configure the password for different privilege level, execute the global
configuration command enable password. The no form of this command is
used to delete the password of the specified level.
enable password [level level] {password | [0|7] encrypted-password}
no enable password [level level]
Parameter
password
Parameter
Level
Description
Password for user to enter into the
EXEC configuration layer
User's level.
description
Password encryption type, "0" for
no
0|7
encryption,
"7"
for
simple
encryption
encrypted-password
Password text.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
2-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
No encryption is required in general. The encryption type is
required generally when the password that has been
encrypted with the command for the device are to be
copies and pasted.
The effective password is defined as below:

Consists of 1 ~ 26 letter in upeer/lower case and
numerals

Usage
Leading spaces are allowed but ignored. Spaces in
between or at the end are regarded as part of the
guidelines
password.
If an encryption type is specified and then a
plaintext
password
is
entered,
it
is
impossible to enter into the privileged
EXEC mode. A lost password that has
Caution
been encrypted with any method cannot be
restored. The only way is to reconfigure the
device password.
Examples
The example below configures the password as pw10:
DGS-8000(config)# enable password pw10
Related
Command
Description
commands
enable secret
Set the security password
2.1.4
enable secret
To configure the security password for different privilege level, execute the
global configuration command enable secret. The no form of this command is
used to delete the password of the specified level.
enable secret [level level] {secret | [0|5] encrypted-secret}
no enable secret
Parameter
Password for user to enter into the
secret
Parameter
Description
EXEC configuration layer
level
User's level.
description
Password encryption type, "0" for
no
0|5
encryption,
"5"
for
security
encryption
encrypted-password
.
Password text
2-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
The password falls into "password" and "security"
passwords.
The
"password"
is
simple
encryption
password, which can be set only for level 15. The
"security" means the security encryption password, which
can be set for level 0 ~ 15. If the two kinds of passwords
exist in the system at the same time, the "password" type
password will not take effect. If a "password" type
Usage
guidelines
password is set for a level other than 15, an alert is
provided and the password is automatically converted into
the "security" password. If "password" type password is
set for level 15 and the same as the "security" password,
an alert is provided. The password must be saved in
encrypted manner, with simple encryption for the
"password" type password and security encryption for the
"security" type password.
The example below configures the security password as
Examples
pw10:
DGS-8000(config)# enable secret 0 pw10
Related
commands
2.1.5
Command
Description
enable
Set passwords for different privilege
password
levels.
enable service
To enable or disable the specified service such as SSH Server/Telnet
Server/Web Server/SNMP Agent, use the enable service command in the
global configuration mode:
enable service { ssh-sesrver | telnet-server | web-server | snmp-agent}
Parameter
Keyword
description
Description
Enable SSH Server, and the IPv4 and
ssh-server
IPv6 services are enabled at the same
time.
Enable Telnet Server, and the IPv4 and
telnet-server
IPv6 services are enabled at the same
time.
.
2-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Enable HTTP Server, and the IPv4 and
web-server
IPv6 services are enabled at the same
time.
Enable SNMP Agent, and the IPv4 and
snmp-agent
IPv6 services are enabled at the same
time.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to enable the specified service. Use
Usage
guidelines
Examples
the no enable service command to disable the specified
service.
The example below enables the SSH Server:
DGS-8000(Config)# enable service ssh-sesrver
Command
Related
commands
2.1.6
show service
Description
View the service status of the current
system.
execute
To execute the commands in the batch files, use the privileged EXEC mode
command execute.
execute [flash: ] filename
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Parameter
Description
flash:
Parent directory of the batch file
filename
Name of the batch file
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
.
2-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
This command is used to execute the commands in the
batch files. Users could self-specify the filename and
content of the batch file. In general, after finishing editting
the batch files on the user PC , the files are transmit to the
Flash of the device through the TFTP. The content of
batch files completely imitates the user entering, so the
content should be edited in order of CLI command
Usage
guidelines
configuration. Besides, for some interactive commands ,
the response message should be pre-wrote into the batch
files to ensure the commands can be normally executed.
Caution: The size of the batch file shall not exceed 128K,
otherwise the execution of batch files may fail. For the
over-sized batch files, you can divide them into several
small files with size less than 128K to complete the
execution.
The example below executes the batch file
line_rcms_script.text ,which is used to enable the reverse
Telnet function for all asynchronous Interfaces, and whose
contents are as follows:
configure terminal
line tty 1 16
transport input all
no exec
end
The execution result is as below:
Examples
DGS-8000# execute flash:line_rcms_script.text
executing script file line_rcms_script.text ......
executing done
DGS-8000# configure terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
End with
CNTL/Z.
DGS-8000(config)# line tty 1 16
DGS-8000(config-line)# transport input all
DGS-8000(config-line)# no exec
DGS-8000(config-line)# end
2.1.7
ip http authentication
When using the Http Server, it needs to perform the logon authentication to
enter the Web page. Use this command to set the mode of Web logon
authentication.
.
2-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
ip http authentication {enable | local }
Keyword
Description
Use the password set by the enable
Parameter
enable
password or enable secret, the password
must be of the level15.
description
Use the username and password set by the
local
local username command. The user must
bind to the privilege of level15.
Default
enable
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to set the mode of Web logon
Usage
guidelines
Examples
authentication. Use the no ip http authentication
command to restore it to the default setting.
The example below sets the mode of Web logon
authentication as local:
DGS-8000(Config)# ip http authentication local
Command
Related
commands
2.1.8
Description
enable service
Enable
or
disable
the
specified
service.
ip http port
To set the port of the HTTP service ,use this command in the global
configuration mode:
ip http port number
Keyword
Description
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Port number of the HTTP server, the default
number
value is 80.
80
.
2-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to set the port of the HTTP service.
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Use the no ip http port command to restore it to the
default setting.
The example below set the port of the HTTP service as
8080:
DGS-8000(Config)# ip http port 8080
Command
Related
commands
2.1.9
Description
enable service
Enable
or
disable
the
specified
service
ip http source-port
This command is used to configure the port for HTTPS services in the global
configuration mode.
ip http source-port number
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Configure the port for HTTPS services, and
number
the default value is 443.
443
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to configure the port for HTTPS
services. The no form of this command is used to restore
the default port configuration.
The example below sets the port for HTTPS services as
4443.
DGS-8000(config)# ip http secure-port 4443
Related
Command
.
Description
2-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.1.10
enable service
Enable or
service.
disable
the
specified
show
web-server
status
Show the status of the web server.
ip telnet source-interface
To specify the IP address of one interface as the source address for the Telnet
connection, use the ip telnet source-interface command in the global
configuration mode:
ip telnet source-interface interface-name
Parameter
Keyword
Description
description
interface-name
Name of the specified interface
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to specify the IP address of one
interface as the source address for the global Telnet
connetction. When using the telnet command to log in a
Usage
guidelines
Telnet server, if no source interface or source address is
specified for this connnetcion, the global setting is
used.Use the no ip telnet source-interface command to
restore it to the default setting.
Examples
The example below specifies the IP address of the
interface Loopback1 as the source address for the global
Telnet connection.
DGS-8000(Config)# ip telnet source-interface Loopback 1
Related
Command
Description
commands
telnet
log in a Telnet server
2.1.11
lock
To set a temporary password at the terminal, execute the EXEC mode
command lock.
lock
.
2-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
Privileged mode.
mode
You can lock the terminal interface but maintain the
continuity of session, to prevent it from being accessed by
setting the temporary password.The terminal interface can
be locked by the steps below:
1.
Enter the lock command, and the system will prompt
you to enter the password:
2.
Enter the password, which may be any string.The
Usage
system will prompt you to confirm the entered
guidelines
password, and then clear the screen as well as show
the "Locked" information.
3.
To enter into the terminal, enter the set temporary
password.
To use the terminal locked function at the terminal,
execute the lockable command in the line configuration
mode, and enable the characteristic to support the terminal
lock in corresponding line.
The example below locks a terminal interface:
DGS-8000(config-line)# lockable
DGS-8000(config-line)# end
DGS-8000# lock
Examples
Password: <password>
Again: <password>
Locked
Password: <password>
DGS-8000#
Command
Related
commands
2.1.12
Description
Set to support the terminal lock
lockable
function in the line.
lockable
To support the use of the lock command at the terminal, execute the lockable
command in the line configuration mode. The terminal doesn’t support the lock
command, by default.Use the no command to cancel the setting.
.
2-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
lockable
no lockable
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
Line configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to support the terminal lock function
Usage
guidelines
in corresponding line. To lock the terminal, execute the
lock command in the EXEC mode.
The example below enables the terminal lock function at
the console port and locks the console:
DGS-8000(config)# line console 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# lockable
DGS-8000(config-line)# end
DGS-8000# lock
Examples
Password: <password>
Again: <password>
Locked
Password: <password>
DGS-8000#
Related
Command
Description
commands
lock
Lock the terminal.
2.1.13
login
In case the AAA is disabled, to enable simple logon password authentication on
the interface, execute the interface configuration command login. The no form
of this command is used to delete the line logon password authentication.
login
no login
Parameter
description
N/A.
.
2-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
Line configuration mode.
mode
If the AAA security server is not enabled, this command is
Usage
used for the simple password authentication at logon. The
guidelines
password here is the one configured for VTY or console
interface.
The example below shows how to set the logon password
authentication on VTY.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# no aaa new-model
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# password 0
normatest
DGS-8000(config-line)# login
Related
Command
Description
commands
password
Configure the line logon password
2.1.14
login authentication
In case the AAA is enabled, the authentication with the AAA server must be
performed for logon. Use this command to associate logon authentication
method list. The no form of this command is used to delete the logon
authentication method list.
login authentication {default | list-name}
no login authentication {default | list-name}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
default
Name of the default authentication
description
method list
list-name
Name of the method list available
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Line configuration mode.
If the AAA security server is enabled, this command is
used for the logon authentication with the specified method
list.
.
2-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
The example below shows how to associate method list on
VTY and perform logon authentication with radius.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# aaa new-model
DGS-8000(config)# aaa authentication login default radius
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# login authentication default
Related
commands
Command
Description
aaa new-model
Enable the AAA security service
aaa
authentication
login
2.1.15
Configure the logon authentication
method list
login local
In case the AAA is disabled, to enable local user authentication on the interface,
execute the interface configuration command login local. The no form of this
command is used to delete the line local user authentication.
login local
no login local
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
mode
Line configuration mode.
If the AAA security server is not enabled, this command is
Usage
used for the local user authentication at logon. The user
guidelines
here means the one configured with the username
command.
The example below shows how to set the local user
authentication on VTY.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# no aaa new-model
DGS-8000(config)# username
test password 0 test
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# login local
Related
Command
Description
commands
username
Configure the local user information.
.
2-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.1.16
password
To configure the password for line logonexecute the line configuration command
password. The no form of this command is used to delete the line logon
password.
password {password | [0|7] encrypted-password}
no password
Parameter
Description
password
Password for line of remote user
Parameter
description
Password encryption type, "0" for
no
0|7
encryption,
"7"
for
simple
encryption
encrypted-password
Password text
Command
mode
Line configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to configure the authentication
guidelines
password for the line logon of remote user.
The example below configures the line logon password as
Examples
"red":
DGS-8000(config)# line
vty 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# password red
Command
Related
Description
From user mode enter to the
commands
privileged mode or log on the
login
higher level of authority.
2.1.17
privilege mode
Please refer to the chapter of configure CLI authorization commands.
Default
Please refer to the chapter of configure CLI authorization
configuration
commands.
Command
Please refer to the chapter of configure CLI authorization
mode
commands.
.
2-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Usage
Please refer to the chapter of configure CLI authorization
guidelines
commands.
Examples
Please refer to the chapter of configure CLI authorization
commands.
2.1.18
service password-encryption
To encrypt the password, execute this command. The no form of this command
restores to the default value, but the password in cipher text cannot be restored
to plain text.
service password-encryption
no service password-encryption
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is disabled by default. Various passwords
are displayed in form of plain text, unless it is directly
configured in cipher text form. After you execute the
Usage
guidelines
service password-encryption and show running or
write command to save the configuration, the password
transforms into cipher text. If you disable the command,
the password in cipher text cannot be restored to plain text.
Examples
The example below encrypts the password:
DGS-8000(config)# service password-encryption
Command
Related
commands
2.1.19
enable password
Description
Set
passwords
of
different
privileges.
telnet
To log in one server which supports the telnet connection, use the telnet
command to log on in the EXEC (privileged) mode.
.
2-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
telnet host [port] [/source {ip A.B.C.D | ipv6 X:X:X:X::X | interface
interface-name}] [/vrf vrf-name]
Parameter
Description
The IP address of host or host name to
host
be logged in.
Select the TCP port number to be used
port
for the login, 23 by default.
Specify the source IP or source interface
/source
used by the Telnet client.
Parameter
description
Specify the source IPv4 address used by
ip A.B.C.D
the Telnet client.
ipv6
Specify the source IPv6 address used by
X:X:X:X::X
the Telnet client.
interface
Specify the source interface used by the
interface-name
Telnet client.
Specify the VRF routing table to be
/vrf vrf-name
queried.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
This command is used to log in a telnet server.
Usage
guidelines
The /ipv6 keyword is only applied to
Caution
the IPv6 supported devices.
The example below commands telnet to 192.168.1.11, the
port uses the default value, and the source interface is
specified as Gi 0/1, the queried VRF route table is
specified as vpn1.
Examples
DGS-8000#
telnet
192.168.1.11
/source-interface
gigabitEthernet 0/1 /vrf vpn1
The
example
below
commands
telnet
to
2AAA:BBBB::CCCC
DGS-8000# telnet 2AAA:BBBB::CCCC
Related
Command
.
Description
2-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Ip
telnet
source-interface
show sessions
interface as the source address for
the Telnet connection.
Show
the
currently
established
Telnet sessions.
Exit current connection.
exit
2.1.20
Specify the IP address of the
username
To set the local username, execute the global configuration mode command
username.
username name {nopassword | password { password | [0|7]
encrypted-password }} username name privilege privilege-level
no username name
Parameter
Description
name
Username
password
User password
Parameter
description
Password encryption type, 0 for no
0|7
encryption, 7 for simple encryption
encrypted-password
Password text
privilege-level
User bound privilege level
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to establish local user database for
the purpose of authentication.
If the type of encryption is specified as 7,
the length of the entered legal cipher text
should be even.
Usage
In general, it is not necessary to specify
guidelines
the type of encryption as 7.
Commonly, it is necessary to specify the
Note
type of encryption as 7 only when the
encrypted
password
is
copied
and
pasted.
Examples
The example below configures a username and password
and bind the user to level 15.
.
2-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config)# username test privilege 15 password 0
pw15
2.2
Related
Command
Description
commands
login local
Enable local authentication
Basic System Management Related Commands
2.2.1
banner login
To configure the login banner, execute the banner login command in the global
configuration mode. You can use the no banner login command to remove the
configuration.
banner login c message c
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Separator of the message of logging
banner. Delimiters are not allowed in
c
the MOTD.
message
Contents of login banner
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command sets the logging banner message, which is
Usage
guidelines
Examples
displayed upon login.
All characters behind the
terminating symbol will be discarded by the system.
The following example shows the configuration of logging
banner:
DGS-8000(config)# banner login $ enter your password $
2.2.2
banner motd
To set the Message-of-the-Day (MOTD), run the banner motd command in the
global configuration mode. To delete the MOTD setting, run the no banner
motd command.
banner motd c message c
Parameter
Parameter
Description
c
Separator of the MOTD. Delimiters are
description
.
2-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
not allowed in the MOTD.
message
Contents of an MOTD
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command sets the MOTD, which is displayed upon
Usage
guidelines
login. The letters entered after the separator will be
discarded.
The following example shows the configuration of MOTD:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)
DGS-8000(config)# banner motd $ hello,world $
2.2.3
boot config
This command is used to set the boot configuration filename for the device. The
no form of this command is used to delete the configured boot configuration
filename.
boot config prefix:/[directory/]filename
no boot config
Parameter
Description
Prefix of file system type. Note that
Parameter
description
prefix can be used to locate and
prefix:
access files in V10.4(2) or later
versions. Refer to File System
Configuration Guide for details.
/[directory/]filename
Default
configuration
File directory and filename
None
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
2-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
This command is used to specify the device’s boot
configuration filename. When booting the device, the system
loads configuration file according to the following principles:

If the service config command is not configured, the
sequence of loading configuration files is as follows:
boot configuration filenames configured using the boot
config
command,
flash:/config.text,
network
boot
configuration filenames configured using the boot
network command, and the default factory-delivered
configuration (null configuration).

If the service config command is configured, the
sequence of loading the configuration file is as follows:
network boot configuration filename configured using
the boot network command, boot configuration filename
Usage
configured
guidelines
flash:/config.text, and the default factory-delivered
using
the
boot
config
command,
configuration (null configuration).

When loading the files in sequence, the system will not
load the other configuration files as long as one
configuration file is successfully loaded.
This function can be used for fast failure recovery when the
device’s main configuration file is damaged.
As this command configuration is used by
the system in the early boot stage, the
configuration is saved in the device Boot
Caution
ROM instead of the configuration file.
The following example sets the device’s boot configuration
Examples
filename as “flash:/config_main.text”:
DGS-8000(config)# boot config flash:/config_main.text
Command
boot network
Description
Set
the
device’s
network
boot
configuration filename.
Related
Allow the device to first download the
commands
service config
boot configuration file from a remote
network server.
show boot
.
Show the device’s boot configuration.
2-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.2.4
boot ip
This command is used to configure a local IP for TFTP transmission during
device booting. The no form of this command is used to delete the
configuration.
boot ip local-ip [gateway gateway-ip mask mask-ip]
no boot ip
Parameter
Description
Local IP for TFTP transmission during
local-ip
device booting.
Parameter
description
Gateway IP for TFTP transmission
gateway-ip
during device booting.
Mask IP for TFTP transmission during
mask-ip
Default
configuration
device booting.
None
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to configure a local IP for TFTP
transmission during device booting. When the device is
booting, the system uses this IP as the local IP for TFTP
transmission. If a gateway and mask are also configured, and
the local IP and gateway IP are not in the same network
segment, TFTP uses the gateway for file transmission during
system booting.
Usage
Only when the boot ip command is correctly
guidelines
configured, can the system download the
remote TFTP file configured by the boot
network or boot system command during
system booting.
As this command configuration is used by
Caution
the system in the early boot stage, the
configuration is saved in the device Boot
ROM instead of the configuration file.
.
2-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
The following example configures a local IP for TFTP
Examples
transmission during device booting:
DGS-8000(config)# boot ip 192.168.7.11
Command
Related
commands
2.2.5
show boot
Description
Show the boot related configuration of
the device.
boot network
This command is used to set the network boot configuration filename for the
divice. The no form of this command is used to delete the configured network
boot configuration filename.
boot network tftp:// location / filename
no boot network
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Parameter
Description
location
Address of the TFTP server.
filename
Filename on the TFTP server.
None
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
2-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
This command is used to specify the device’s network boot
configuration filename. When booting the device, the system
loads the configuration file according to the following
principles:

If the service config command is not configured, the
sequence of loading the configuration file is as follows:
boot configuration filename configured using the boot
config
command,
flash:/config.text,
network
boot
configuration filename configured using the boot
network command, and the default factory-delivered
configuration (null configuration).

If the service config command is configured, the
sequence of loading the configuration file is as follows:
network boot configuration filename configured using
the boot network command, boot configuration filename
configured
using
the
boot
config
command,
flash:/config.text, and the default factory-delivered
Usage
guidelines
configuration (null configuration).

When loading the files in sequence, the system will not
load the other configuration files as long as one
configuration file is successfully loaded.
This function can be used for fast failure recovery when the
device’s master configuration file is damaged accidentally.
You should use the boot ip command to
correctly configure the local IP address
used by the device during booting, before
the system can get the remote file through
TFTP. Otherwise any TFTP transmission
will fail during booting.
Caution
As this command configuration is used by
the system in the early boot stage, the
configuration is saved in the device Boot
ROM instead of the configuration file.
The following example configures the network boot
Examples
configuration filename for the device:
DGS-8000(config)#
boot
network
tftp://192.168.7.24/config.text
Related
Command
.
Description
2-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
show boot
boot config
Show the boot related configuration of
the device.
Set the device’s boot configuration
filename.
Configure
boot ip
the
local
IP
for
TFTP
transmission during device booting.
Allow the device to first download the
service config
boot configuration file from a remote
network server.
2.2.6
boot system
This command is used to set a filename for the device’s startup main program
and specify the boot priority. The no form of this command is used to delete the
filename of the main program corresponding to the priority.
boot system priority prefix:/[directory/]filename
no boot system [priority]
Parameter
Description
Boot priority of a main program, in
the range of 1 to 10, and 1 is for the
priority
highest priority.
Prefix of the file system. Note that
prefix can be used to locate and
Parameter
access files in V10.4(2) or later
prefix:
description
versions. Refer to File System
Configuration Guide for details.
Filename of a main program used
for booting. Note that when the
/[directory/]filename
prefix is used to locate a file, the
directory following “:” should be the
absolute path.
Default
The default filenameof the main boot program is
configuration
flash:/dnos.bin, with the priority being 5.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
2-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
This command can be used to set filenames for multiple
main programs used for booting and specify the booting
priority. The system will attempt to boot the main programs
according to their priority levels in the descending order (1 as
the top priority and 10 as the lowest priority) during the boot
stage. This function can be used for fast failure recovery
when the device’s main program is damaged.
You should use the boot ip command to
correctly configure the local IP address
used by the device during booting, before
the system can get the remote file
through TFTP. Otherwise any TFTP
transmission will fail during booting.
When using TFTP to transmit the boot
file, make sure the device’s built-in flash
has enough space for the boot file. The
boot file is saved in the built-in flash as a
hidden file during booting and it will be
deleted prior to the next booting.
Usage
The no boot system [priority] command
guidelines
can be used to delete the configured
name of the main program corresponding
to the boot priority level. If the priority
parameter is not set, the configured
Caution
filenames of all boot main programs will
be deleted.
If the no boot system command is used
to delete all the configured filenames of
boot main programs and no filenames of
boot main programs are configured, then
the system will automatically recover the
default configuration (filename of the
main program is “flash:/dnos.bin” with the
priority level of 5) during the next booting.
As this command configuration is used by
the system in the early boot stage, the
configuration is saved in the device Boot
ROM instead of the configuration file.
.
2-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Example 1: Configure the name of the main program to
“flash:/dnos.bin” and the name of the backup main program
to “flash:/dnos_bak.bin”.
DGS-8000(config)# boot system 5 flash:/dnos.bin
DGS-8000(config)# boot system 8 flash:/dnos_bak.bin
As “flash:/dnos.bin” is of a higher priority lever, the device
will first boot this file. If “flash:/dnos.bin” is damaged
accidentally, which results in booting failure, the system will
automatically boot “flash:/dnos_bak.bin” of a lower priority
level.
Example 2: Configure to boot the file from a TFTP server.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#
boot
tftp://192.168.7.24/dnos.bin
system
9
Example 3: Configure to boot the file from a USB drive.
DGS-8000(config)# boot system 1 usb1:/dnos.bin
Example 4: Delete the configured filename of the main
program corresponding to priority level 8.
DGS-8000(config)# no boot system 8
Delete boot system config: [Priority: 8; File Name:
flash:/dnos_bak.bin]? [no] yes
Example 5: Delete all configured filenames of boot main
programs.
DGS-8000(config)# no boot system
Clear ALL boot system config? [no] yes
Command
Related
show boot
commands
description
Show the boot related configuration of
the device.
Configure
boot ip
Platform
Description
the
local
IP
for
TFTP
transmission during device booting.
N/A
.
2-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.2.7
clock set
To configure system clock manually, execute one of the two formats of the
privileged user command clock set:
clock set hh:mm:ss month day year
Parameter
hh:mm:ss
Parameter
description
Description
Current time, in the format of Hour
(24-hour): Minute: Second
day
Date (1-31) of month
month
Month (1-12) OF year
Year (1993-2035), abbreviation is not
year
allowed.
Command
Privileged mode.
mode
Use this command to set the system time to facilitate the
management.
Usage
For devices without hardware clock, the time set by the
guidelines
clock set command takes effect for only the current
setting. Once the device powers off, the manually set time
becomes invalid.
The example below configures the current time as
10:20:30AM March 17th 2003.
Examples
DGS-8000# clock set 10:20:30 Mar 17 2003
DGS-8000# show clock
clock: 2003-3-17 10:20:32
Related
Command
Description
commands
show clock
Show current clock.
2.2.8
In
the
clock update-calendar
privileged
EXEC
mode,
you
can
execute
command
clock
update-calendar to overwrite the value of hardware clock by software clock.
clock update-calendar
.
2-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
Privileged EXEC mode.
mode
Some platforms use hardware clock to complement
software clock. Since battery enables hardware clock to
run continuously, even though the device is closed or
Usage
restarts, hardware clock still runs.
guidelines
If hardware clock and software clock are asynchronous,
then software clock is more accurate. Execute clock
update-calendar command to copy date and time of
software clock to hardware clock.
The example below copies the current time and date of
Examples
software clock to hardware clock:
DGS-8000# clock update-calendar
Related
commands
2.2.9
Command
Description
clock
Set the softwar clock with the hardware
read-calendar
clock value.
exec-timeout
To configure the connection timeout to this equipment in the LINE, use the
exec-timeout command.Once the connection timeout in the LINE is cancelled
by the no exec-timeout command, the connection will never be timeout.
exec-timeout minutes [seconds]
no exec-timeout
Parameter
Parameter
Description
minutes
The minutes of specified timeout.
description
(optional parameter) The seconds of
seconds
specified timeout.
.
2-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Default
configuration
The default timeout is 10min.
Command
Line configuration mode.
mode
If there is no input/output information for this connection
Usage
guidelines
within specified time, this connection will be interrupted,
and this LINE will be restored to the free status.
The example below specifies the connection timeout is
Examples
5’30“.
DGS-8000(config-line)#exec-timeout 5
2.2.10
30
hostname
To specify or modify the hostname of the device, execute the global
configuration command hostname.
hostname name
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Device hostname, the string, numeral or
name
hyphen
are
supported
only.
The
maximum length is 63 characters.
Default
configuration
The default hostname is DGS-8000.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global Configuration Mode.
This hostname is mainly used to identify the device and is
taken as the username for the local device in the dialup
and CHAP authentication.
The example below configures the hostname of the device
Examples
as BeiJingAgenda:
DGS-8000(config)# hostname BeiJingAgenda
BeiJingAgenda(config)#
.
2-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.2.11
prompt
To set the prompt command, run the prompt command in the global
configuration mode. To delete the prompt setting, run the no prompt command.
prompt string
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Character
string
of
the
prompt
command. The maximum length is 32
string
letters.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
If you have not set the prompt string, the prompt string is
Usage
guidelines
the system name, which varies with the system name. The
prompt command is valid only in the EXEC mode.
Set the prompt string to DGS-8006:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# prompt DGS-8006
DGS-8006(config)# end
DGS-8006#
2.2.12
reload
To restart the device system, execute the privileged user command reload.
reload [ text | in [ hh: ] mm [ text ] | at hh:mm [month day year ] [ text ] | cancel ]
Parameter
Description
text
Cause to restart, 1-255 bytes
in mmm hh:mm
at
Parameter
hh:mm
month day year
The system is restarted after specified
time interval.
The system is restarted at the specified
time. Up to 200 days is supported
description
Month
month
in
the
range
January
to
December
day
Date in the range 1 to 31
year
Year in the range 1993 to 2035
cancel
Cancel scheduled restart.
.
2-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command is used to restart the device at specified
guidelines
time, which may facilitate the management.
2.2.13
service config
This command is used to enable the device to first download the boot
configuration file from a remote network server. The no form of this command is
used to disable this function.
service config
no service config
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
2-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
This command needs to be used in combination with the boot
config and boot network commands. When booting the
device, the system loads the configuration file according to the
following principles:

If the service config command is not configured, the
sequence of loading the configuration file is as follows:
boot configuration filename configured using the boot
config
command,
flash:/config.text,
network
boot
configuration filename configured using the boot network
command, and the default factory-delivered configuration
(null configuration).

If the service config command is configured, the
Usage
sequence of loading the configuration file is as follows:
guideline
network boot configuration filename configured using the
s
boot network command, boot configuration filename
configured
using
flash:/config.text,
the
and
boot
the
config
default
command,
factory-delivered
configuration (null configuration).

When loading the files in sequence, the system will not
load the other configuration files as long as one
configuration file is successfully loaded.
As this command configuration is used by the
system
in
the
early
boot
stage,
the
configuration is saved in the device Boot
Caution
ROM instead of the configuration file.
The example below enables the device to first download
the boot configuration file from a remote network server
Examples
and configure the network boot configuration filename:
DGS-8000(config)# service config
DGS-8000(config)#
boot
network
tftp://192.168.7.24/config.text
Related
Command
Description
boot config
Set the boot configuration filename for
the device.
boot network
Set the network boot configuration
filename for the device.
commands
.
2-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.2.14
session-timeout
To configure the session timeout for the remote terminal established in current
LINE, use the session-timeout command.When the session timeout for the
remote terminal in the LINE is cancelled, the session will never be timeout.
session-timeout minutes [output]
no session-timeout
Parameter
Parameter
Description
minutes
The minutes of specified timeout.
description
Regard data output as the input to
output
determine whether timeouts.
Default
configuration
The default timeout is 0 min.
Command
LINE configuration mode.
mode
If there is no input/output information for the session to the
Usage
remote terminal established in current LINE within
guidelines
specified time, this connection will be interrupted, and this
LINE will be restored to the free status.
The example below specifies the timeout of session is 5
Examples
minutes.
DGS-8000(config-line)#exec-timeout 5 output
2.2.15
speed
To set speed at which the terminal transmits packets, execute the speed speed
command in the line configuration mode. To restore the speed to its default
value, run the no speed command.
speed speed
Parameter
Transmission rate (bps) on the terminal.
Parameter
description
Description
For serial ports, the optional rates are
speed
9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
bps. The default rate is 9600 bps.
.
2-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
Default
Configuration
The default rate is 9600.
Usage
This command sets the speed at which the terminal
guidelines
transmits packets.
The following example shows how to configure the rate of
the serial port to 57600 bps:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#
DGS-8000(config)# line console 0
DGS-8000(config-line)# speed 57600
DGS-8000(config-line)#
2.2.16
write
To perform the read/write operation for the device configurations (startup
configuration or system configuration), execute the privileged user command
write.
write [ memory | network | terminal ]
Parameter
Description
Write
the
system
configuration
(running-config) into NVRAM, which is
memory
equivalent to copy running-config
Parameter
startup-config.
description
Save the system configuration into the
TFTP server, which is equivalent to
network
copy running-config tftp.
Show the system configuration, which is
terminal
equivalent to show running-config.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
.
2-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Despite of the alternative command, these commands
Usage
guidelines
have been widely used and accepted, so they are
reserved to facilitate user's operation.
The no form with the command is equivalent to add the
memory operation.
The example below saves the device configuration:
Examples
DGS-8000# write
Building configuration...
[OK]
Command
Related
show
commands
running-config
Description
View the system configuration.
Copy the device configuration files.
copy
.
2-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
2.3
Showing Related Commands
2.3.1
show boot
Use this command to show the boot related configuration of the device.
show boot {config | network |system | ip}
Parameter
Show
config
Parameter
Description
the
configuration
of
the
startup-config filename.
network
description
system
Show the configuration of the network
startup-config filename.
Show the configuration of the startup
main program filename.
Show the configuration of local IP
ip
address used in the device starting.
Command
mode
Privileged mode
This command is used to show current boot related
configuration of the device.
The size and modified time of the
Usage
files in the remote TFTP servers are
guidelines
shown as “N/A”. When perform the
show boot system command, if the
Note
corresponding main program does
not exist, the size and modified time
of the file are also shown as “N/A”
1.The example below shows the configuration of the
startup-config filename:
DGS-8000# show boot config
Boot config file: [/config_main.text]
Examples
Service config: [Disabled]
2.The example below shows the configuration of network
startup-config filename:
DGS-8000# show boot network
.
36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Network config file: [tftp://192.168.7.24/config.text]
Service config: [Enabled]
3.The example below shows the configuration of the main
program filename and boot priority:
DGS-8000# show boot system
Boot system config:
==================================================
Prio
Size
Modified
Name
---- --------- ------------------- -----------------1
2
3
4
5
3205120 2008-08-26 05:22:46 flash:/dnos.bin
6
7
8
3205120 2008-08-26 05:25:09 flash:/dnos_bak.bin
9
N/A
N/A
tftp://192.168.7.24/
dnos.bin
10
==================================================
4.The example below shows the configuration of local IP
address that used in the device starting:
DGS-8000# show boot ip
System boot ip: [192.168.7.11]
2.3.2
show mainfile
This command is used to show the current filename of the boot main program.
show mainfile
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Command
mode
Privileged mode
Usage
This command is used to show the current filename of the
guidelines
boot main program.
.
37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
DGS-8000# show mainfile
Examples
MainFile name: /dnos.bin
Command
Description
commands
boot system
Set the filename of the boot main
program.
Platform
This command is not supported by some of DGS-8000
description
network devices.
Related
2.3.3
show clock
To view the system time, execute the privileged user command show clock.
show clock
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Command
Privileged mode
mode
Usage
guidelines
This command is used to view current system clock.
The example below is an execution result of the show
Examples
clock command:
DGS-8000# show clock
clock: 2003-3-17 10:27:21
Related
Command
Description
commands
clock set
Set the system clock.
2.3.4
show line
To show the configuration of a line, execute the show line command in the
privileged mode.
show line {console line-num | vty line-num | line-num}
.
38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Show the configuration of a console
console
line.
description
vty
Show the configuration of a vty line.
line-num
Number of the line
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command shows the configuration information of a
guidelines
line.
The following example shows the configuration of console
port:
DGS-8000# show line console 0
CON
Type
speed
Overruns
* 0
CON
9600
45927
Line 0, Location: "", Type: "vt100"
Length: 24 lines, Width: 79 columns
Examples
Special Chars: Escape
^^x
Timeouts:
Disconnect
none
Idle EXEC
never
Activation
^M
Idle Session
never
History is enabled, history size is 10.
Total input: 53564 bytes
Total output:
395756 bytes
Data overflow:
27697 bytes
stop rx interrupt:
2.3.5
0 times
show reload
To show the restart settings of the system, execute the show reload command
in the privileged EXEC mode.
show reload
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
.
39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Usage
Use this command to show the restart settings of the
guidelines
system.
The following example shows the restart settings of the
system:
Examples
DGS-8000# show reload
Reload scheduled in 595 seconds.
At 2003-12-29 11:37:42
Reload reason: test.
2.3.6
show running-config
To show the configuration information current device system is running, execute
the privileged user command show running-config.
show running-config
Command
Privileged mode.
mode
2.3.7
show startup-config
To view the configuration of device stored in the Non Volatile Random Access
Memory
(NVRAM),
execute
the
privileged
user
command
show
startup-config.
show startup-config
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
The configuration of device stored in the NVRAM is that
guidelines
executed when the device is startup.
2.3.8
show version
To view the information of the system, execute the command show version in
the privileged mode.
show clock [slots | devices| module]
Parameter
Description
slots
Current slot information of the device.
Parameter
description
module
devices
.
Current module information of the
device.
Current device information
40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
Command
Privileged mode
mode
This command is used to view current system information,
Usage
guidelines
mainly including the system start time, version information,
device information, serial number ,etc.
The example below shows the system information.
DGS-8000# show clock detail
clock: 2003-3-17 10:27:21
Clock read from calendar when system boot.
DGS-8000# show version
System description : DGS-8000 Dual Stack Multi-Layer
Examples
Switch(S3760-24) By DGS-8000 Network
System start time: 1970-6-14 11:49:53
System uptime: 3:17:1:17
System hardware version: 2.0
System software version: DNOS 10.3.00(4), Release(34679)
System boot version: 10.2.34077
System CTRL version: 10.2.24136
System serial number: 1234942570001
2.3.9
show web-server status
This command is used to show the configuration and status of a web server.
show web-server status
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Command
mode
Privileged mode
Usage
guidelines
N/A
The example below is an execution result of the show
web-server status command:
Examples
DGS-8000# show web-server status
http server status : enabled
http server port : 80
.
41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 2 Switch Management Configuration Commands
https server status:
enabled
https server port: 443
.
42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
3
3.1
SSH Configuration Commands
Related Configuration Commands
3.1.1
crypto key generate
In global configuration mode, use this command to generate a public key on the
SSH server:
crypto key generate {rsa|dsa}
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
rsa
Generate an RSA key.
dsa
Generate a DSA key.
Default
By default, the SSH server does not generate a public
configuration
key.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
When you need to enable the SSH Server service, use this
command to generate a public key on the SSH server and
enable the SSH SERVER service by command enable
service ssh-server at the same time. SSH 1 uses the RSA
key; SSH 2 uses the RSA or DSA key. Therefore, if a RSA
Usage
key has been generated, both SSH1 and SSH2 can use it. If
guidelines
only a DSA key is generated, only SSH2 can use it.
A key can be deleted by using the
crypto key zeroize command. The no
crypto key generate command is not
Caution
available.
.
3-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# crypto key generate rsa
Command
Show the current status of the SSH
show ip ssh
Related
commands
crypto
Server.
key
zeroize
{rsa
dsa}
3.1.2
Description
|
Delete DSA and RSA keys and
disable the SSH Server function.
crypto key zeroize
In global configuration mode, use this command to delete the public key on the
SSH server.
crypto key zeroize {rsa | dsa}
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
rsa
Delete the RSA key.
dsa
Delete the DSA key.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command deletes the public key of the SSH Server.
Usage
After the key is deleted, the SSH Server state becomes
guidelines
DISABLE. If you want to disable the SSH Server, run the
no enable service ssh-server command.
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# crypto key zeroize rsa
Related
Command
commands
show ip ssh
.
Description
Show the current status of the SSH
Server.
3-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
crypto
key
Generate DSA and RSA keys.
generate
{rsa|dsa}
3.1.3
ip ssh authentication-retries
Use this command to set the authentication retry times of the SSH Server. Use
the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ip ssh authentication-retries retry times
no ip ssh authentication-retries
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
retry times
Authentication retry times
Default
configuration
The default authentication retry times are 3.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
User authentication is considered failed if authentication is
Usage
not successful when the configured authentication retry
guidelines
times on the SSH server is exceeded. Use the show ip
ssh command to view the configuration of the SSH Server.
The following example sets the authentication retry times
Examples
to 2:
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip ssh authentication-retries 2
Command
Description
Related
commands
3.1.4
show ip ssh
Show the current status of the SSH
Server.
ip ssh time-out
Use this command to set the authentication timeout for the SSH Server. Use the
no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
.
3-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
ip ssh time-out time
no ip ssh time-out
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
time
Authentication timeout
Default
configuration
The timeout value is 120s by default.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
The authentication is considered timeout and failed if the
Usage
authentication is not successful within 120s starting from
guidelines
receiving a connection request. Use the show ip ssh
command to view the configuration of the SSH server.
The following example sets the timeout value as 100s:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip ssh time-out 100
Command
Description
Related
commands
3.1.5
show ip ssh
Show the current status of the SSH
Server.
ip ssh version
Use this command to set the version of the SSH server. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
ip ssh version {1 | 2}
no ip ssh version
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Support the SSH1 client connection
1
request.
description
Support the SSH2 client connection
2
request.
.
3-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
SSH1 and SSH2 are compatible by default. When a
version is set, the connection sent by the SSH client of
Default
configuration
this version is accepted only. The no ip ssh version
command can also be used to restore it to the default
setting.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
This command is used to configure the SSH connection
protocol version supported by SSH Server. By default, the
Usage
SSH Server supports SSH1 and SSH2. If Version 1 or 2 is
guidelines
set, only the SSH client of this version can connect to the
SSH Server. Use the show ip ssh command to show the
current status of SSH Server.
The following example sets the version of the SSH Server:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip ssh version 2
Command
Description
Related
commands
3.2
show ip ssh
Show the current status of the SSH
Server.
Showing Related Commands
3.2.1
disconnect ssh
Use this command to disconnect the established SSH connection.
disconnect ssh [vty] session-id
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
session-id
ID of the established SSH connection
session.
Default
configuration
N/A.
.
3-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
Command
Privileged EXEC mode.
mode
You can disconnect a SSH connection by entering the ID
Usage
of the SSH connection or disconnect a SSH connection by
guidelines
entering
the
specified
VTY
connection
ID.
Only
connections of the SSH type can be disconnected.
Examples
DGS-8000# disconnect ssh 1
Or
DGS-8000# disconnect ssh vty 1
Command
Related
show ssh
commands
clear line vty
line_number
3.2.2
Description
Show
the
information
about
the
established SSH connection.
Disconnect the current VTY connection.
show crypto key mypubkey
Use this command to show the information about the public key part of the
public key on the SSH Server.
show crypto key mypubkey {rsa/dsa}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Show the public key part of the
rsa
RSA key.
description
Show the public key part of the
dsa
DSA key.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to show the information about the
guidelines
public key part of the generated public key on the SSH
.
3-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
Server, including key generation time, key name, contents
in the public key part, etc.
Examples
DGS-8000# show crypto key mypubkey rsa
Command
Related
crypto key
commands
generate {rsa |
Description
Generate DSA and RSA keys.
dsa}
3.2.3
show ip ssh
Use this command to show the information of the SSH Server.
show ip ssh
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to show the information of the SSH
Server, including version, enablement state, authentication
Usage
timeout, and authentication retry times.
guidelines
Note: If no key is generated for the SSH Server, the SSH
version is still unavailable even if this SSH version has
been configured.
Examples
Related
DGS-8000# show ip ssh
Command
commands
ip ssh version {1 | 2}
ip ssh time-out time
.
Description
Configure the version for the SSH
Server.
Set the authentication timeout for
the SSH Server.
3-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 3 SSH Configuration Commands
3.2.4
ip ssh
Set the authentication retry times
authentication-retries
for the SSH Server.
show ssh
Use this command to show the information about the SSH connection.
show ssh
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to show the information about the
Usage
guidelines
established SSH connections, including VTY number of
connection, SSH version, encryption algorithm, message
authentication algorithm, connection status, and user
name.
Examples
DGS-8000# show ssh
Related
commands
N/A.
.
3-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 4 LINE Configuration Commands
4
4.1
LINE Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
4.1.1
access-class
Set the applied ACL (Access Control List) in Line. Use the access-class
{ access-list-number | access-list-name }
{ in | out } command to configure
the ACL in Line. Use the no access-class
{access-list-number |
access-list-name} {in | out} command to cancel the ACL configuration in LINE.
access-class { access-list-number | access-list-name } {in | out}
no access-class { access-list-number | access-list-name } {in | out}
Parameter
Description
access-list-number|
Specify
access-list-name
access-list
the
ACL
defined
by
Parameter
description
Perform access control over the
in
incoming connections
Perform access control over the
out
Default
configuration
outgoing connections
By default, no ACL is configured under Line. All
connections are accepted, and all outgoing connections
are allowed.
Command
mode
Line configuration mode.
This command is used to configure ACLs under Line. By
default, all the incoming and outgoing connections are
Usage
guidelines
allowed, and no connection is filtered. After access-class
is configured, only the connections that pass access list
filtering can be established successfully. Use the show
running command to view configuration information under
Line.
.
4-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 4 LINE Configuration Commands
In line vty 0 4, configure access-list for the accepted
connections to 10:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 0 4
DGS-8000(config-line)# access-class
10
Related
Command
Description
commands
show running
Show status information
4.1.2
in
line
To enter the specified LINE mode, use the following command:
line [console | vty] first-line [last-line]
Parameter
Description
console
Console port
vty
Virtual terminal line, applicable for
Parameter
description
telnet/ssh connection.
first-line
Number of first-line to enter
last-line
Number of last-line to enter
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Access to the specified LINE mode.
Enter the LINE mode from LINE VTY 1 to 3:
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 1 3
Related
commands
N/A.
.
4-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 4 LINE Configuration Commands
4.1.3
line vty
This command can be used to increase the number of VTY connections
currently available. The number of currently available VTY connections can be
decreased by using the no form of this command.
line vty line-number
no line vty line-number
Default
By default, there are five available VTY connections,
configuration
numbered 0--4.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
When you need to increase or decrease the number of
guidelines
available VTY connections, use the above commands.
Increase the number of available VTY connections to 20.
The available VTY connections are numbered 0--19.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 19
Decrease the number of available VTY connections to 10.
The available VTY connections are numbered 0-9.
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 10
Related
commands
4.1.4
N/A.
transport input
To set the specified protocol under Line that can be used for communication,
use the transport input command. Use default transport input to restore
the protocols under Line that can be used for communication to the default
value.
transport input {all | ssh | telnet | none}
default transport input
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Allow all the protocols under Line to be
all
used for communication
Allow only the SSH protocol under Line
ssh
to be used for communication
.
4-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 4 LINE Configuration Commands
Allow only the Telnet protocol under
telnet
Line to be used for communication
Allow none of protocols under Line to be
none
used for communication
By default, VTY allows all the protocols to be used for
communication. The default value of other types of TTYs
Default
is NONE, indicating that no protocols are allowed for
configuration
communication. After some protocols are set to be
available for communication, use the default transport
input command to restore the setting to the default value.
Command
mode
Line configuration mode.
This command is used to set the protocols in the Line
mode that are available for communication. By default,
VTY allows all the protocols for communication. After
protocols available for communication are set, only these
protocols can connect on the specific VTY successfully.
Usage
Use the show running command to view configuration
guidelines
information under Line.
Note: You can restore the default configuration by using
the default
transport
input command. The no
transport input command is used to disable all the
communication protocols in the LINE mode. The setting
result is the same as that of transport input none.
Specify that only the Telnet protocol is allowed to login in
line vty 0 4:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# line vty 0 4
DGS-8000(config-line)# transport input telnet
Related
Command
Description
commands
show running
Show status information
.
4-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
5
5.1
Network Connectivity Test Tool
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
5.1.1
ping
Use this command to test the connectivity of a network to locate the network
connectivity problem. The command format is as follows:
ping [vrf vrf-name | ip] [ip-address [length length ] [ntimes times] [timeout
seconds] [data data] [source source] [df-bit] [validate]]
Parameter
Description
vrf-name
VRF name
ip-address
Specifies an IPv4 address.
Specifies the length of the packet to be
length
sent.
Specifies the number of packets to be
times
Parameter
sent.
seconds
Specifies the timeout time.
data
Specifies the data to fill in.
description
Specifies the source IPv4 address or
the source interface. The loopback
seconds
interface
address(for
example:
127.0.0.1) is not allowed to be the
source address.
Sets the DF bit for the IP address. DF
bit=1 indicates not to segmentate the
df-bit
datagrams. By default, the DF bit is 0.
Sets whether to validate the reply
validate
Default
packets or not.
Five packets with 100Byte in length are sent to the
specified IP address within specified time (2s by default).
.
5-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The ping command can be used in the ordinary user mode
and the privileged mode. In the ordinary mode, only the
basic functions of ping are available. In the privileged
mode, in addition to the basic functions, the extension
functions of the ping are also available. For the ordinary
functions of ping, five packets of 100Byte in length are sent
Usage
guidelines
to the specified IP address within the specified period (2s
by default). If response is received, ‘!’ is displayed. If no
response is received, ‘.’ displayed, and the statistics is
displayed at the end. For the extension functions of ping,
the number, quantity and timeout time of the packets to be
sent can be specified, and the statistics is also displayed in
the end. To use the domain name function, configure the
domain name server firstly. For the concrete configuration,
refer to the DNS Configuration section.
The example below shows the ordinary ping.
DGS-8000# ping 192.168.5.1
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echoes to 192.168.5.1, timeout
is 2 seconds:
< press Ctrl+C to break >
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max
= 1/2/10 ms
Examples
The example below shows the extension ping.
DGS-8000# ping 192.168.5.197 length 1500 ntimes 100
timeout 3
Sending 100, 1500-byte ICMP Echoes to 192.168.5.197,
timeout is 3 seconds, data ffff source 192.168.4.10:
< press Ctrl+C to break >
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (100/100), round-trip
min/avg/max = 2/2/3 ms
DGS-8000#
Platform
description
The command is supported by all equipments.
.
5-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
5.1.2
ping ipv6
Use this command to test the connectivity of a network to locate the network
connectivity problem. The command format is as follows:
ping [ipv6] [ipv6-address [length length ] [ntimes times] [timeout seconds]
[data data] [source source]
Parameter
Description
Ipv6-address
Specifies an IPv6 address.
Specifies the length of the packet to be
length
sent.
Specifies the number of packets to be
times
sent.
Parameter
description
seconds
Specifies the timeout time.
data
Specifies the data to fill in.
Specifies the source IPv6 address or
the source interface. The loopback
source
interface
address(for
example:
127.0.0.1) is not allowed to be the
source address.
Default
Five packets with 100Byte in length are sent to the
specified IP address within specified time (2s by default).
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
.
5-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
The ping ipv6 command can be used in the ordinary user
mode and the privileged mode. In the ordinary mode, only
the basic functions of ping ipv6 are available. In the
privileged mode, in addition to the basic functions, the
extension functions of the ping ipv6 are also available. For
the ordinary functions of ping ipv6, five packets of 100Byte
in length are sent to the specified IP address within the
Usage
specified period (2s by default). If response is received, ‘!’
guidelines
is displayed. If no response is received, ‘.’ displayed, and
the statistics is displayed at the end. For the extension
functions of ping ipv6, the number, quantity and timeout
time of the packets to be sent can be specified, and the
statistics is also displayed in the end. To use the domain
name function, configure the domain name server firstly.
For the concrete configuration, refer to the DNS
Configuration section.
The example below shows the ordinary ping ipv6.
DGS-8000# ping ipv6 2000::1
Sending 5, 100-byte ICMP Echoes to 2000::1, timeout is
2 seconds:
< press Ctrl+C to break >
!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (5/5), round-trip min/avg/max
= 1/2/10 ms
Examples
The example below shows the extension ping ipv6.
DGS-8000# ping
ipv6 2000::1
length 1500 ntimes 100
timeout 3 data ffff source 192.168.4.10:
Sending 100, 1500-byte ICMP Echoes to 2000::1, timeout
is 3 seconds
< press Ctrl+C to break >
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
Success rate is 100 percent (100/100), round-trip
min/avg/max = 2/2/3 ms
Platform
description
5.1.3
The command is supported by all ipv6 equipments.
traceroute
Execute the traceroute command to show all gateways passed by the test
packets from the source address to the destination address.
.
5-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
traceroute [vrf vrf-name | ip] [ip-address [probe number ] [source source]
[timeout seconds] [ttl minimum maximum]]
Parameter
Description
vrf-name
VRF name
ip-address
Specifies an IPv4 address.
Specifies the number of probe packets
number
to be sent.
Parameter
Specifies the source IPv4 address or
description
the source interface. The loopback
source
interface
address(for
example:
127.0.0.1) is not allowed to be the
source address.
seconds
Specifies the timeout time.
minimum
Specifies the minimum and maximum
maximum
TTL values.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Use the traceroute command to test the connectivity of a
network to exactly locate the network connectivity problem
Usage
when the network failure occurs. To use the function
guidelines
domain name, configure the domain name server. For the
concrete configuration, refer to the DNS Configuration
part.
The following is two examples of the application bout
traceroute, the one is of the smooth network, and the other
is the network in which some gateways aren’t connected
successfully.
1. When the network is connected smoothly:
DGS-8000# traceroute 61.154.22.36
< press Ctrl+C to break >
Examples
Tracing the route to 61.154.22.36
1
192.168.12.1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
2
192.168.9.2
4 msec
4 msec
4 msec
3
192.168.9.1
8 msec
8 msec
4 msec
4 msec
28 msec
12 msec
192.168.9.2
4 msec
4 msec
4 msec
202.101.143.154
12 msec
8 msec
24 msec
61.154.22.36
12 msec
8 msec
22 msec
4
192.168.0.10
5
6
7
.
5-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
From above result, it’s clear to know that the gateways
passed by the packets sent to the host with an IP address
of 61.154.22.36 (gateways 1~6) and the spent time are
displayed. Such information is helpful for network analysis.
2. When some gateways in the network fail:
DGS-8000# traceroute 202.108.37.42
< press Ctrl+C to break >
Tracing the route to 202.108.37.42
1
192.168.12.1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
2
192.168.9.2
0 msec
4 msec
4 msec
3
192.168.110.1
16 msec
4
*
5
61.154.8.129
12 msec
28 msec
12 msec
6
61.154.8.17
8 msec
12 msec
16 msec
7
61.154.8.250
12 msec
12 msec
12 msec
8
218.85.157.222
12 msec
12 msec
12 msec
*
12 msec
16 msec
*
9
218.85.157.130
16 msec
16 msec
16 msec
10
218.85.157.77
16 msec
48 msec
16 msec
11
202.97.40.65
76 msec
24 msec
24 msec
12
202.97.37.65
32 msec
24 msec
24 msec
13
202.97.38.162
52 msec
52 msec
224 msec
14
202.96.12.38
84 msec
52 msec
52 msec
15
202.106.192.226
88 msec
52 msec
52 msec
16
202.106.192.174
17
210.74.176.158
100 msec
52 msec
84 msec
18
202.108.37.42
48 msec
48 msec
52 msec
52 msec
52 msec
88 msec
The above result clearly shown that the gateways passed
by the packets sent to the host with an IP address of
202.108.37.42 (gateways 1~17) and the spent time are
displayed, and gateway 4 fails.
DGS-8000# traceroute www.ietf.org
Translating "www.ietf.org"...[OK]
< press Ctrl+C to break >
Tracing the route to 64.170.98.32
1
192.168.217.1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
2
10.10.25.1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
3
10.10.24.1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
4
10.10.30.1
10 msec 0 msec
0 msec
5
218.5.3.254
0 msec
0 msec
6
61.154.8.49
10 msec 0 msec
0 msec
7
202.109.204.210
0 msec
0 msec
8
202.97.41.69
20 msec 10 msec 20 msec
9
202.97.34.65
40 msec 40 msec 50 msec
10
202.97.57.222
50 msec 40 msec 40 msec
11
219.141.130.122
40 msec 50 msec 40 msec
.
0 msec
0 msec
5-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
12
219.142.11.10
13
211.157.37.14
50 msec 40 msec 50 msec
14
222.35.65.1
40 msec 50 msec 40 msec
15
222.35.65.18
40 msec 40 msec 40 msec
16
222.35.15.109
50 msec 50 msec 50 msec
17
*
18
64.170.98.32
*
40 msec 50 msec 30 msec
*
40 msec 40 msec 40 msec
Platform
description
5.1.4
The command is supported by all equipments.
traceroute ipv6
Use this command to show all gateways passed by the test packets from the
source address to the destination address.
traceroute [ ipv6 ] [ ip-address [ probe number ] [ timeout seconds ] [ ttl
minimum maximum ] ]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Ipv6-address
Specifies an IPv6 address.
Specifies the number of probe packets
number
to be sent.
description
seconds
Specifies the timeout time.
minimum
Specifies the minimum and maximum
maximum
TTL values.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Use the traceroute ipv6 command to test the connectivity
of a network to exactly locate the network connectivity
Usage
problem when the network failure occurs. To use the
guidelines
function domain name, configure the domain name server.
For the concrete configuration, refer to the DNS
Configuration part.
The following is two examples of the application bout
traceroute ipv6, the one is of the smooth network, and the
Examples
other is the network in which some gateways aren’t
connected successfully.
1. When the network is connected smoothly:
DGS-8000# traceroute ipv6 3004::1
.
5-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide Chapter 5 Network Connectivity Test Tool Configuration Commands
< press Ctrl+C to break >
Tracing the route to 3004::1
1
3000::1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
2
3001::1
4 msec
4 msec 4 msec
3
3002::1
8 msec
8 msec
4
3004::1
4 msec
28 msec
4 msec
12 msec
From above result, it’s clear to know that the gateways
passed by the packets sent to the host with an IP address
of 3004::1 (gateways 1~4) and the spent time are
displayed. Such information is helpful for network analysis.
2. When some gateways in the network fail:
DGS-8000# traceroute ipv6 3004::1
< press Ctrl+C to break >
Tracing the route to 3004::1
1
3000::1
0 msec
0 msec
0 msec
2
3001::1
4 msec
4 msec 4 msec
3
3002::1
8 msec
8 msec
4
* * *
5
3004::1
4 msec
28 msec
4 msec
12 msec
The above result clearly shown that the gateways passed
by the packets sent to the host with an IP address of
3004::1 (gateways 1~5) and the spent time are displayed,
and gateway 4 fails.
.
5-8
DGS-8000
Ethernet Command Reference Guide
Version 10.4(3)
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Revision No.: Version 10.4(3)
i
Date:
2011/3/1
Copyright Statement
D-Link Corporation ©2011
All rights reserved.
Without our written permission, this document may not be excerpted, reproduced,
transmitted, or otherwise in all or in part by any party in any means.
ii
Preface
Version Description
This manual matches the firmware version 10.4(3).
Target Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
 Network engineers
 Technical salespersons
 Network administrators
Conventions in this Document
1. Universal Format Convention
Arial: Arial with the point size 10 is used for the body.
Note: A line is added respectively above and below the prompts such as caution and note to
separate them from the body.
Format of information displayed on the terminal: Courier New, point size 8, indicating the
screen output. User's entries among the information shall be indicated with bolded
characters.
2. Command Line Format Convention
Arial is used as the font for the command line. The meanings of specific formats are
described below:
Bold: Key words in the command line, which shall be entered exactly as they are displayed,
shall be indicated with bolded characters.
Italic: Parameters in the command line, which must be replaced with actual values, shall be
indicated with italic characters.
[ ]: The part enclosed with [ ] means optional in the command.
{ x | y | ... }: It means one shall be selected among two or more options.
[ x | y | ... ]: It means one or none shall be selected among two or more options.
//:Lines starting with an exclamation mark "//" are annotated.
iii
3. Signs
Various striking identifiers are adopted in this manual to indicate the matters that special
attention should be paid in the operation, as detailed below:
Warning, danger or alert in the operation.
Caution
Descript, prompt, tip or any other necessary supplement or explanation for
Note
the operation.
The port types mentioned in the examples of this manual may not be
consistent with the actual ones. In real network environments, you need
configure port types according to the support on various products.
Note
The display information of some examples in this manual may include the
information on other series products, like model and description. The details
are subject to the used equipments.
iv
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1
1.1
1.1.1
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Interface
Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
carrier-delay
In the interface configuration mode, execute the carrier-delay command to set
the carrier delay on the interface, and the no carrier-delay command to restore
it to the default value.
carrier-delay [ seconds ]
no carrier-delay
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
seconds
Optional parameter in the range of
1 to 60 seconds
Default
configuration
The default carrier delay is 2 seconds.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode
1-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
This parameter refers to the delay after which the carrier
detection signal DCD of the interface link changes from the
Down status to the Up status. If the DCD changes within
the delay, the system will ignore such changes without
disconnecting the upper data link layer for renegotiation.
Usage
If the DCD carrier is disconnected for a long time, the
guidelines
parameter should be set longer to accelerate route
aggregation so that the routing table can be converged
more quickly. On the contrary, if the DCD carrier
interruption period is shorter than the time used for route
aggregation, you should set the parameter to a higher
value to avoid unnecessary route vibration.
The following example shows how to configure the carrier
delay of serial interface to 5 seconds:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config)# carrier-delay 5
1.1.2
clear counters
Use this command to clear the counters on the specified interface.
clear counters [interface-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
Interface type and interface ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
In the privileged EXEC mode, use the show interfaces
Usage
command to display the counters or the clear counters
guidelines
command to clear the counters. If the interface is not
specified, the counters on all interfaces will be cleared.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000# clear counters gigabitethernet 1/1
Command
show
interfaces
Description
Show the interface information.
1-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.3
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
clear interface
Reset the interface hardware.
clear interface interface-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
Interface type and interface ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
This command is only used on the switch port, member
Usage
port of the L2 Aggregate port, routing port, and member
guidelines
port of the L3 aggregate port. This command is equal to
the shutdown and no shutdown commands.
1.1.4
Examples
DGS-8000# clear interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Related
Command
Description
commands
shutdown
Shutdown the interface.
description
Use this command to set the alias of interface.. Use the no form of the
command to restore the default setting.
description string
no description
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
string
Interface alias
Default
configuration
By default, there is no alias.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use show interfaces to display the interface information,
guidelines
including the alias.
1-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# description GBIC-1
1.1.5
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
duplex
Use the duplex command in the interface configuration mode to specify the
duplex mode for the interface. Use the no form of the command to restore it to
the default setting.
duplex {auto | full | half}
no duplex
Parameter
Description
Parameter
auto
Self-adaptive full duplex and half duplex
description
full
Full duplex
half
Half duplex
Default
configuration
Auto.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Related
commands
Interface configuration mode.
The duplex mode is associated with the interface type.
Use show interfaces to display the duplex mode of the
interface
DGS-8000(config-if)# duplex full
Command
show
interfaces
1.1.6
Description
Show the interface information.
flowcontrol
Use this command to enable or disable the flow control. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
1-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
flowcontrol {auto | off | on | receive {auto | off | on } | send {auto | off | on}}
no flowcontrol
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
auto
Self-negotiate the flow control.
off
Disable the flow control.
on
Enable the flow control.
receive
Receiving
direction
of
the
non-symmetric flow control.
send
Sending direction of the non-symmetric
flow control.
Default
configuration
By default, flow control is disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use show interfaces to display the flow control
guidelines
configurations.
This example shows how to enable flow control on
Examples
fastEthernet port 1/1:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# flowcontrol on
Related
commands
Command
show
interfaces
1.1.7
Description
Show the interface information.
interface aggregateport
Use this command to access or create an aggregate port and enter interface
configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to remove this port.
interface aggregateport port-number
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Aggregate port number. Its range
port-number
depends
on
the
equipment
and
extended modules.
1-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
According to some rules, you can add other ports to an
aggregate port. All the port members of an aggregate port
Usage
are considered in a whole, and their attributes depend on
guidelines
the ones of the aggregate port. You can use show
interfaces or show interfaces aggregateport commands
to display the interface configuration.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#interface aggregateport 3
DGS-8000(config-if)#
Related
commands
1.1.8
Command
Description
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
Platform
DGS-8000 series support up to 8 port members and
description
create up to 128 AP globally.
interface fastEthernet
Use this command to select a Ethernet interface, and enter the interface
configuration mode.
interface fastEthernet mod-num/port-num
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
mod-num/port-num
The range depends on the device
and the extended module.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The no form of the command is not available, and this
Usage
interface type cannot be deleted. Use show interfaces or
guidelines
show interfaces fastEthernet to display the interface
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 1/2
DGS-8000(config-if)#
1-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
Platform
Description
1.1.9
N/A
interface giagbitEthernet
Use this command to select a Gigabit Ethernet interface, and enter the interface
configuration mode.
interface gigabitEthernet mod-num/port-num
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
The range depends on the device
mod-num/port-num
and the extended module.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The no form of the command is not available, and this
Usage
interface type cannot be deleted. Use show interfaces or
guidelines
show interfaces gigabitEthernet to display the interface
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/2
DGS-8000(config-if)#
1.1.10
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
interface vlan
Use the interface vlan command in the global configuration mode to access or
create the SVI (Switch Virtual Interface). Use the no form of the command to
remove the SVI.
interface vlan vlan-id
no interface vlan vlan-id
1-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
vlan-id
VLAN
ID.
Its
range
depends
by
products.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Use show interfaces or show interfaces vlan to display
guidelines
the interface configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 2
DGS-8000(config-if)#
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
Platform
Description
1.1.11
DGS-8000 series devices support up to 2K SVI ports and
2K IP addresses.
medium-type
Use this command to select the medium type for an interface. Use the no form
of the command to restore it to the default setting.
medium-type { auto-select [prefer [fiber | copper]] | fiber | copper }
no medium-type
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
fiber
Optical interface.
prefer[fiber|
The preferred medium type for the
copper]
interface is selected.
auto-select
copper
Auto-select the medium type for the
interface.
Copper interface.
Default
configuration
Copper interface.
1-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Command
Interface configuration (physical interface, except for AP
mode
and SVI)
If a port can be selected as an optical port or electrical
port, you can only select one of them. Once the media type
Usage
guidelines
is selected, the attributes of the port, for example, status,
duplex, flow control, and rate, all mean those of the
currently selected media type. After the port type is
changed, the attributes of the new port type take the
default values, which can be modified as needed.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# medium-type copeer
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
The 12 SFP interfaces of the 24SFP/12GT line cards and
1210/100/1000M BASE-T interfaces allow for dynamic
Platform
switching.
description
The combo interface is not supported to automatically
determine whether the current port is the SFP interface or
the 10/100/1000M BASE-T interface.
1.1.12
mtu
Use this command to set the MTU supported on the interface.
mtu num
Parameter
Description
num
64 to 9216 (or 65536, which varies by
Parameter
description
products)
Default
configuration
By default, the num is 1500.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
1-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Set the maximum transmission unit (MTU) supported on
the interface. DGS-8000 series now supports the setting
on physical interfaces.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# mtu 9216
Related
commands
Command
show
interfaces
1.1.13
Description
Show the interface information.
shutdown
Use the shutdown command in the interface configuration mode to disable an
interface. Use the no form of the command to enable a disabled port.
shutdown
no shutdown
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode
Use this command to stop the forwarding on the interface
(Gigabit Ethernet interface, Aggregate port or SVI). You
Usage
can enable the port with the no shutdown command. If
guidelines
you shut down the interface, the configuration of the
interface exists, but does not take effect. You can view the
interface status by using the show interfaces command.
Shut down Ap 1:
DGS-8000(config)# interface aggregateport 1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# shutdown
Enable Ap 1:
DGS-8000(config)# interface aggregateport 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# no shutdown
Related
Command
Description
commands
clear interface
Reset the hardware.
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
1-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
If you use the script to run no
shutdown frequently and rapidly,
the system may prompt the
Note
1.1.14
interface status reversal.
snmp trap link-status
You can set whether to send LinkTrap on a port. If the function is enabled, the
SNMP will send the LinkTrap when the link status of the port changes. The no
form of this command prevents the SNMP from sending the LinkTrap.
snmp trap link-status
no snmp trap link-status
Default
This function is enabled. If the link status of the port
configuration
changes, the SNMP sends the LinkTrap.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
For an interface (for instance, Ethernet interface, AP
Usage
guidelines
interface, and SVI interface), this command sets whether
to send LinkTrap on the interface. If the function is
enabled, the SNMP sends the LinkTrap when the link
status of the interface changes.
Do not send LinkTrap on the interface:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# no snmp trap link-status
Examples
Following configuration shows how to configure the
interface to forwarding Link trap:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# snmp trap link-status
Related
Command
Function
DGS-8000(config-if)#
Enable sending LinkTrap on
snmp trap link-status
the interface.
commands
1-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config-if)#
no
snmp trap link-status
1.1.15
Disable sending LinkTrap on
the interface.
speed
Use this command to configure the speed on the port. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
Parameter
10
100
Parameter
description
1000
10G
auto
Description
Means that the transmission rate of the
interface is 10Mbps.
Means that the transmission rate of the
interface is 100Mbps.
Means that the transmission rate of the
interface is 1000Mbps.
Means that the transmission rate of the
interface is 10Gbps.
Self-adaptive
Default
configuration
Auto.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
If an interface is the member of an aggregate port, the rate
of the interface depends on the rate of the aggregate port.
Usage
guidelines
You can set the rate of the interface, but it does not take
effect until the interface exits the aggregate port. Use
show interfaces to display configuration. The rate varies
by interface types. For example, you cannot set the rate of
a SFP interface to 10M or 100M.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# speed 100
Related
commands
Command
show
interfaces
Description
Show the interface information.
1-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.16
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
switchport
In the interface configuration mode, you can use switchport without any
parameter to configure an interface as Layer 2 mode. Use the no switchport
command without any parameter to configure it as Layer 3 interface.
switchport
no switchport
Default
All the interfaces are in Layer 2 mode by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
This command is valid only for physical interfaces. The
switchport command is used to disable the interface and
Usage
re-enable it. In this status, the device will send the
guidelines
information to indicate the connect status. If the interface is
changed to Layer 3 mode from Layer 2, all the attributes in
Layer 2 mode will be cleared.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport
Related
Command
Description
commands
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
Platform
description
1.1.17
DGS-8000 series support the creation of L3 aggregate
ports, up to 128 L3 Aps globally. Up to 2000 IP addresses
are supported.
switchport access
Use this command to configure an interface as a statics access port and add it
to a VLAN. Use the no form of the command to assign the port to the default
VLAN.
switchport access vlan vlan-id
no switchport access vlan
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
vlan-id
The VLAN ID at which the port to be
added.
1-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Default
By default, the switch port is an access port and the VLAN
configuration
is VLAN 1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Enter one VLAN ID. The system will create a new one and
add the interface to the VLAN if you enter a new VLAN ID.
Usage
If the VLAN ID already exists, the command adds the
guidelines
interface to the VLAN.
If the port is a trunk port, the operation does not take
effect.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2
Related
Command
Description
switchport
Specify
mode
mode( switch port mode).
commands
switchport
trunk
1.1.18
the
interface
as
Layer
2
Use this command to specify a native
VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for the
trunkport.
switchport mode
Use this command to specify a L2 interface (switch port) mode. You can specify
this interface to be an access port or a trunk port or an 802.1Q tunnel. Use the
no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
switchport mode {access | trunk}
no switchport mode
Parameter
Parameter
description
access
trunk
Description
Configure the switch port as an access
port.
Configure the switch port as a trunk port.
Default
configuration
The default mode of switch port is access port.
1-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
If a switch port mode is access port, it can be the member
port of only one VLAN. Use switchport access vlan to
specify the member of the VLAN.
Usage
guidelines
A trunk port can be the member port of various VLANs
defined by the allowed-VLAN list. The allowed VLAN list of
the interface determines the VLANs to which the interface
may belong. The trunk port is the member of all the VLANs
in the allowed VLAN list. Use switchport trunk to define
the allowed-VLANs list.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
Command
switchport
Related
access
commands
Description
Use this command to configure an
interface as a statics access port and
assign it to a VLAN.
Use this command to specify a native
switchport trunk
VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for
the trunk port.
1.1.19
switchport trunk
Use this command to specify a native VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for the
trunk port. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
switchport trunk {allowed vlan {all | [add | remove | except] vlan-list }| native
vlan vlan-id}
no switchport trunk {allowed vlan | native vlan}
1-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Configure the list of VLANs allowed on
the trunk port. vlan-list can be a VLAN
or a range of VLANs starting with the
smaller VLAN ID and ending with the
larger VLAN ID and being separated by
hyphen, for example, 10 to 20. The
segments can be separated with a
comma (,), for example, 1 to 10, 20 to
Parameter
description
allowed vlan
25, 30, 33.
vlan-list
all means that the allowed VLAN list
contains all the supported VLANs;
add means to add the specified VLAN
list to the allowed VLAN list;
remove means to remove the specified
VLAN list from the allowed VLAN list;
except means to add all the VLANs
other than those in the specified VLAN
list to the allowed VLAN list;
native vlan
vlan-id
Specify the native VLAN.
Default
configuration
The allowed VLAN list is all, the Native VLAN is VLAN1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Native VLAN:
A trunk port belongs to one native VLAN. A native VLAN
means that the untagged packets received/sent on the
trunk port belong to the VLAN. Obviously, the default
VLAN ID of the interface (that is, the PVID in the IEEE
802.1Q) is the VLAN ID of the native VLAN. In addition,
Usage
when frames belonging to the native VLAN are sent over
guidelines
the trunk port, they are untagged.
Allowed-VLAN List:
By default, a trunk port sends traffic to and received traffic
from all VLANs (ID 1 to 4094). However, you can prevent
the traffic from passing over the trunk by configuring
allowed VLAN lists on a trunk.
Use show interfaces switchport to display configuration.
1-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
The example below removes port 1/15 from VLAN 2:
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastethernet 1/15
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove
2
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Examples
DGS-8000# show interfaces fastethernet1/15 switchport
Switchport is enabled
Mode is trunk port
Access vlan is 1,Native vlan is 1
Protected is disabled
Vlan lists is
1,3-4094
Related
commands
Command
Description
show interfaces
Show the interface information.
switchport
access
1.2
1.2.1
Use this command to configure an
interface as a statics access port and
assign it to a VLAN.
Showing Related Command
show interfaces
Use this command to show the interface information and optical module
information.
show interfaces [interface-id] [counters | description | status | switchport |
trunk | transceiver [alarm | diagnosis| line-detect]]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Interface (including Ethernet interface,
interface-id
aggregate
port,
SVI
or
loopback
interface).
counters
description
status
switchport
trunk
The counters on the interface.
The
description
of
the
interface,
including the link status.
All the link status of the Layer 2
interface, including the rate and duplex.
Layer 2 interface information.
Trunk port, applicable for physical port
and aggregate port.
1-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
transceiver
Basic optical module information.
Alarm information of the optical module.
alarm
The “None” is displayed when no fault
exists.
diagnosis
line-detect
Diagnosis parameter value of the optical
module.
Line detecting status of the port.
Default
configuration
Show all the information.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
Show the basic information if no parameter is specified.
The follow example shows the interface information when
the Gi0/1 is Trunk port:
SwitchA#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 0/1
Index(dec):1 (hex):1
GigabitEthernet 0/1 is DOWN
, line protocol is DOWN
Hardware is Broadcom 5464 GigabitEthernet
Interface address is: no ip address
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 1000000 Kbit
Encapsulation protocol is Bridge, loopback not set
Keepalive interval is 10 sec , set
Carrier delay is 2 sec
Examples
RXload is 1 ,Txload is 1
Queueing strategy: FIFO
Output queue 0/0, 0 drops;
Input queue 0/75, 0 drops
Switchport attributes:
interface's description:""
medium-type is copper
lastchange time:0 Day: 0 Hour: 0 Minute:13 Second
Priority is 0
admin duplex mode is AUTO, oper duplex is Unknown
admin speed is AUTO, oper speed is Unknown
1-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
flow receive control admin status is OFF,flow send control
admin status is OFF,flow receive control oper status is
Unknown,flow send control oper status is Unknown
broadcast
Storm
Control
is
OFF,multicast
Storm
Control is OFF,unicast Storm Control is OFF
Port-type: trunk
Native vlan:1
Allowed vlan lists:1-4094
Active vlan lists:1, 3-4
5 minutes input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer, 0 dropped
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 abort
0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns , 0 dropped
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets
The following example shows the interface information
when the Gi0/1 is Access port:
SwitchA#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 0/1
Index(dec):1 (hex):1
GigabitEthernet 0/1 is DOWN
, line protocol is DOWN
Hardware is Broadcom 5464 GigabitEthernet
Interface address is: no ip address
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 1000000 Kbit
Encapsulation protocol is Bridge, loopback not set
Keepalive interval is 10 sec , set
Carrier delay is 2 sec
RXload is 1 ,Txload is 1
Queueing strategy: FIFO
Output queue 0/0, 0 drops;
Input queue 0/75, 0 drops
Switchport attributes:
interface's description:""
medium-type is copper
lastchange time:0 Day: 0 Hour: 0 Minute:13 Second
Priority is 0
admin duplex mode is AUTO, oper duplex is Unknown
admin speed is AUTO, oper speed is Unknown
flow receive control admin status is OFF,flow send
1-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
control admin status is OFF,flow receive control oper
status is Unknown,flow send control oper status is Unknown
broadcast Storm Control is OFF,multicast Storm
Control is OFF,unicast Storm Control is OFF
Port-type: access
Vlan id : 2
5 minutes input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer, 0 dropped
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 abort
0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns , 0 dropped
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets
The following example shows the layer-2 interface
information when the Gi0/1 is Hybrid port.
SwitchA#show interfaces gigabitEthernet 0/1
Index(dec):1 (hex):1
GigabitEthernet 0/1 is DOWN
, line protocol is DOWN
Hardware is Broadcom 5464 GigabitEthernet
Interface address is: no ip address
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 1000000 Kbit
Encapsulation protocol is Bridge, loopback not set
Keepalive interval is 10 sec , set
Carrier delay is 2 sec
RXload is 1 ,Txload is 1
Queueing strategy: FIFO
Output queue 0/0, 0 drops;
Input queue 0/75, 0 drops
Switchport attributes:
interface's description:""
medium-type is copper
lastchange time:0 Day: 0 Hour: 0 Minute:13 Second
Priority is 0
admin duplex mode is AUTO, oper duplex is Unknown
admin speed is AUTO, oper speed is Unknown
flow receive control admin status is OFF,flow send control admin
status is OFF,flow receive control oper status is Unknown,flow send
control oper status is Unknown
broadcast Storm Control is OFF,multicast Storm
Control is OFF,unicast Storm Control is OFF
1-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
Port-type: hybrid
Tagged vlan id:2
Untagged vlan id:none
5 minutes input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer, 0 dropped
Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 abort
0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns , 0 dropped
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets
The following example shows the layer-2 information of the
Gi0/1.
DGS-8000# show interfacesgigabitEthernet 0/1 switchport
Interface Switchport ModeAccess Native Protected VLAN
lists
--------- ---------- --------- ------ ------ --------GigabitEthernet 0/1 enabled Access 11
Disabled
ALL
Command
Description
duplex
Duplex
flowcontrol
Flow control status.
interface
Select the interface and enter the
gigabitEthernet
interface configuration mode.
interface
aggregateport
Related
Create or access the aggregate port,
and enter the interface configuration
mode.
Create or access the switch virtual
commands
interface vlan
interface
(SVI),
and
enter
the
interface configuration mode.
shutdown
Disable the interface.
speed
Configure the speed on the port.
switchport
Configure
priority
interface priority.
switchport
Specify the interface as a protected
protected
port.
the
default
802.1q
1-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Interface Configuration Commands
The functions of showing the optical module information, alarming
the fault and diagnosing the parameters shall be used combining
with the optical module of the D-Link.
Caution
To show the optical module and alarm the fault and diagnose the
parameters, the function of Digital Diagnostic Monitoring must be
supported by the optical module.
1-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2
2.1
2.1.1
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
MAC
Address
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
address-bind
Use this command to configure IP address-MAC address binding.
address-bind ip-address mac-address
no address-bind ip-address
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address to be bound
mac-address
MAC address to be bound
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global configuration mode.
If you have bound an IP address and a MAC address, the
switch will discard the packets that have the same source
IP address but different source MAC address.
This is an example of binding the IP address 3.3.3.3 and
Examples
the MAC address 00d0.f811.1112.
DGS-8000(config)# address-bind 3.3.3.3 00d0.f811.1112
Related
commands
Command
show address-bind
Description
Show
the
IP
address-MAC
address binding table.
Platform
DGS-8000 series support up to 1000 IP address-MAC
description
address binding.
2-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.1.2
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
address-bind ip-address
Use this command to configure IP address-MAC address binding.
address-bind ip-address mac-address
no address-bind ip-address
Parameter
description
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address to be bound
mac-address
MAC address to be bound
Global configuration mode.
If you have bound an IP address and a MAC address, the
switch will discard the packets that have the same source
IP address but different source MAC address.
This is an example of binding the IP address 3.3.3.3 and
Examples
MAC address 00d0.f811.1112.
DGS-8000(config)# address-bind 3.3.3.3 00d0.f811.1112
Related
commands
2.1.3
Command
show address-bind
Function
Show the IP address-MAC
address binding table.
Platform
DGS-8000 series support up to 1000 IP address-MAC
description
address binding.
address-bind ipv6-mode
Use this command to set the IP mode of IP address binding.
Set the compatbile mode:
address-bind ipv6-mode compatible
Set the loose mode:
address-bind ipv6-mode loose
Set the compatbile mode:
2-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
address-bind ipv6-mode strict
Parameter
description
Command
mode
Default
value
N/A.
Global configuration mode.
Strict mode
There are three IP address binding modes: compatible,
loose and strict. The following table shows the forwarding
rules corresponding to binding modes.
Mode
Strict
IPv4
forwarding
forwarding
rule
rule
Only the packets
No IPv6 packets are
matching IPv4 and
forwarded (default).
MAC
are
forwarded.
Usage
guidelines
IPv6
Loose
Only the packets
All IPv6 packets are
matching IPv4 and
forwarded.
MAC
are
forwarded.
compatible
Only the packets
Only
matching IPv4 and
packets
MAC
source MAC address
are
forwarded.
the
IPv6
whose
is the bound MAC
address
are
forwarded.
Bind the IP address 192.168.5.2 and the MAC address
00do.f822.33aa and forward the corresponding packets:
DGS-8000# configure t
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
Examples
End with
CNTL/Z.
DGS-8000(config)#
address-bind
00d0.f822.33aa
ip
192.168.5.2
DGS-8000(config)# address-bind ipv6-mode compatible
2-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Command
Function
Related
commands
show
Show the exceptional port of
address-bind
the address binding.
uplink
2.1.4
address-bind install
Use this command to install or uninstall the exceptional port.
address-bind install
no address-bind install
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
Global configuration mode.
Usage
If you have installed the exceptional port, you can run this
guidelines
command to make installation policy take effect.
Install fa 0/1 port:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# address-bind uplink fa0/1
DGS-8000(config)# address-bind install
Command
Function
show
Show the exceptional port of
Related
commands
address-bind
uplink
2.1.5
the address binding.
address-bind uplink
Use this command to configure IP address-MAC address binding.
address-bind uplink intf-id
no address-bind uplink intf-id
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
intf-id
Exceptional port
2-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Global configuration mode.
If you have bound an IP address and a MAC address, the
switch will discard the packets that have the same source
Usage
IP address but different source MAC address.
guidelines
If the port is an exceptional port and is installed (see
address-bind install), this binding policy does not take
effect.
Following example is to set the fa 0/1 port as an
Examples
exceptional port for address binding.
DGS-8000(config)#address-bind uplink fa0/1
Command
Function
Related
commands
show
address-bind
address binding.
uplink
2.1.6
Show the exceptional port of
clear mac-address-table dynamic
Use this command to clear the dynamic MAC address.
clear mac-address-table dynamic [address mac-addr] [interface interface-id]
[ vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
dynamic
Clear all the dynamic MAC addresses.
address
Clear the specified dynamic MAC
mac-addr
address.
interface
Clear all the dynamic MAC addresses
interface-id
of the specified interface.
vlan vlan-id
Clear all the dynamic MAC addresses
of the specified VLAN.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use show mac-address-table dynamic to display all the
guidelines
dynamic MAC addresses.
2-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Clear all the dynamic MAC addresses:
DGS-8000# clear mac-address-table dynamic
Command
Related
show
commands
mac-address-table
dynamic
2.1.7
Description
Use this command to display
dynamic MAC address.
clear mac-address-table filtering
Use this command to clear the filtering MAC address.
clear mac-address-table filtering [address mac-addr] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
filtering
Parameter
description
address mac-addr
Description
Clear all the filtering MAC
addresses.
Clear
the
specified
filtering
MAC address.
Clear all the filtering MAC
vlan vlan-id
addresses
of
the
specified
VLAN.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use show mac-address-table filtering to display all the
guidelines
filtering MAC addresses.
Clear the filtering MAC address 00d0.f800.0c0c:
Examples
DGS-8000# clear mac-address-table filtering address
00d0.f800.0c0c
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Configure the filtering MAC
Related
filtering
address.
commands
show
mac-address-table
filtering
Show
the
filtering
MAC
address.
2-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.1.8
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
clear mac-address-table static
Use this command to clear the static MAC address.
clear mac-address-table static [address mac-addr] [interface interface-id]
[vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
static
address mac-addr
Parameter
Description
Clear all the static MAC
addresses.
Clear the specified static
MAC address.
Clear all the static MAC
description
interface interface-id
addresses of the specified
interface.
Clear all the static MAC
vlan vlan-id
addresses of the specified
VLAN.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use show mac-address-table static to display all the
guidelines
static MAC addresses.
The example below is to clear the static MAC address
Examples
00d0.f800.073c:
DGS-8000# clear mac-address-table static address
00d0.f800.073c
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Configure
Related
static
address.
commands
show
mac-address-table
the
static
MAC
Show the static MAC address.
static
2.1.9
mac-address-learning
Use this command to enable / disable the MAC address learning on the
interface.
mac-address-learning
2-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
N/A.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Enabled.
Interface configuration mode.
The MAC address learning could not be disabled on the
Usage
interface with the security function enabled. The interface
guidelines
with the MAC address learning function disabled could not
be configured the security function.
The following example disables the MAC address learning.
Examples
2.1.10
DGS-8000(config-if)# no mac-address-learning
mac-address-table aging-time
Use this command to specify the aging time of the dynamic MAC address. Use
the no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
mac-address-table aging-time seconds
no mac-address-table aging-time
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Aging
seconds
time
of
the
dynamic
MAC
address (in seconds). The time range
depends on the switch.
Default
configuration
300 seconds.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
2-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Use show mac-address-table aging-time to display
Usage
configuration.
guidelines
Use show mac-address-table dynamic to display the
dynamic MAC address table.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table aging-time 150
Command
Description
show
Use this command to display the
mac-address-table
aging time of the dynamic MAC
aging-time
address.
show
mac-address-table
dynamic
2.1.11
Use
this
command
to
display
dynamic MAC address.
mac-address-table filtering
Use this command to configure the filtering MAC address. Use the no form of
the command to remove the filtering address.
mac-address-table filtering mac-address vlan vlan-id [source | destination]
no mac-address-table filtering mac-address vlan vlan-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
mac-address
Filtering Address
vlan vlan-id
description
source
destination
VLAN ID. Its range depends on
the switch.
Filter the frame according to the
souce MAC address only.
Filter the frame according to the
destination MAC address only.
No filtering address is configured by default.
Default
configuration
When configuring this command without the source or
destination specified, the frame received in the specified
VLAN, which has the same source/destination MAC
address with the specified MAC address, will be filtered.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
2-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
The filtering MAC address shall not be a multicast address.
Use show mac-address-table filtering to display the
filtering MAC addresses.
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table filtering
00d0f8000000 vlan 1
Command
clear
Related
commands
mac-address-table
filtering
show
mac-address-table
filtering
2.1.12
Description
Clear
the
filtering
MAC
the
filtering
MAC
address.
Show
address.
mac-address-table notification
Use this command to enable the MAC address notification function. You can
use The no form of the command to disable this function.
mac-address-table notification [interval value | history-size value]
no mac-address-table notification [interval | history-size]
Parameter
Description
Specify
interval value
Parameter
the
interval
of
sending the MAC address
trap message, 1 second by
default.
description
Specify
history-size value
the
maximum
number of the entries in the
MAC
address
notification
table, 50 entries by default.
Default
By default, the interval is 1 and the maximum number of
configuration
the entries in the MAC address notification table is 50.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
2-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
The MAC address notification function is specific for only
dynamic MAC address and secure MAC address. No MAC
Usage
guidelines
address trap message is generated for static MAC
addresses. In the global configuration mode, you can use
the
snmp-server
enable
traps
mac-notification
command to enable or disable the switch to send the MAC
address trap message.
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table notification
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table notification
Examples
interval 40
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table notification
history-size 100
Command
Description
snmp-server enable
Set the method of handling the
traps
MAC address trap message..
Related
show
commands
mac-address-table
notification
snmp trap
mac-notification
2.1.13
Show
the
MAC
address
notification configuration and
the
MAC
address
trap
notification table.
Enable the MAC address trap
notification
function
on
the
specified interface.
mac-address-table static
Use this command to configure a static MAC address. Use the no form of the
command to remove a static MAC address.
mac-address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
no mac-address-table static mac-addr vlan vlan-id interface interface-id
Parameter
mac-addr
Parameter
description
vlan-id
Description
Destination MAC address of the
specified entry
VLAN ID of the specified entry.
Interface (physical interface or
interface-id
aggregate port) that packets are
forwarded to
Default
configuration
No static MAC address is configured by default.
2-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
A static MAC address has the same function as the
dynamic MAC address that the switch learns. Compared
with the dynamic MAC address, the static MAC address
will not be aged out. It can only be configured and removed
Usage
by manual. Even if the switch is reset, the static MAC
guidelines
address will not be lost. A static MAC address shall not be
configured
as
a
multicast
address.
Use
show
mac-address-table static to display the static MAC
address. Use clear mac-address-table static to clear
static MAC address.
When the packet destined to 00d0 f800 073c arrives at
VLAN4, it will be forwarded to the specified port
Examples
gigabitethernet 1/1:
DGS-8000(config)# mac-address-table static
00d0.f800.073c vlan 4 interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Command
Description
show
Related
commands
mac-address-table
Show the static MAC address.
static
clear
mac-address-table
Clear the static MAC address.
static
Platform
description
2.1.14
For DGS-8000 series, the global entry number in the MAC
address table is 16000 and the global static MAC address
number is 1000.
mac-manage-learning dispersive
Use this command to set the management and learning mode of the dynamic
MAC address to the dispersive mode.
Parameter
description
N/A.
2-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Global configuration mode.
After the management and learning mode of the dynamic
MAC address is set to the dispersive mode, the device can
learn more MAC addresses.
N/A.
Command
Related
commands
show mac-address-table
mac-manage-learning
2.1.15
Function
Show
the
MAC
address
management and learning
mode.
mac-manage-learning uniform
Use this command to set the management and learning mode of the dynamic
MAC address to the uniform mode.
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
Global configuration mode.
Setting the management and learning mode of the
Usage
guidelines
dynamic MAC address to the uniform mode can improve
the L2 switching efficiency. After changing the MAC
learning mode, you must save it and restart before the new
mode takes effect.
Examples
N/A.
Command
Function
show mac-address-table
Show the MAC management
mac-manage-learning
and learning mode.
Related
commands
2-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Platform
description
2.1.16
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
N/A
mac-manage-learning uniform learning-synchronization
Use this command to synchronize the dynamic MAC address in the whole
device in the uniform mode.
[no] mac-manage-learning uniform learning-sychronization
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
Global configuration mode.
In the uniform mode, the synchronization of the dynamic
Usage
MAC address in the whole device can further improve the
guidelines
L2 switching efficiency. You can use the no form of this
command to cancel the synchronization.
Examples
N/A.
Command
Function
Related
commands
show mac-address-table
mac-manage-learning
Platform
description
2.1.17
Show
the
MAC
address
management and learning
mode.
N/A
snmp trap mac-notification
Use this command to enable the MAC address trap notification on the specified
interface. You can use The no form of the command to disable this function.
snmp trap mac-notification {added | removed}
no snmp trap mac-notification {added | removed}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
added
Notify when a MAC address is
description
2-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
added.
removed
Notify when a MAC address is
removed
Default
Disabled.
configuration
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use show mac-address-table notification interface to
guidelines
display configuration.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# snmp trap mac-notification added
Related
commands
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Enable
notification
notification.
show
mac-address-table
notification
2.2
2.2.1
MAC
address
Show the MAC address
notification configuration and
the MAC address notification
table.
Showing Related Command
show address-bind
Use this command to show IP address-MAC address binding.
show address-bind
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
2-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
DGS-8000# show address-bind
IP Address
Examples
Related
commands
2.2.2
Binding MAC Addr
------------
-----------------
3.3.3.3
00d0.f811.1112
3.3.3.4
00d0.f811.1117
Command
Description
address-bind
Enable
IP
address-MAC
address binding.
show address-bind uplink
Use this command to show the exceptional port.
show address-bind uplink
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
DGS-8000# show address-bind uplink
Ports
Examples
State
------------ -----Fa0/1
Disabled
Fa0/2
Disabled
……
2.2.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
address-bind uplink
Set the exceptional port.
show mac-address-learning
Use this command to show the MAC address learning.
show mac-address-learning
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following example shows the MAC address learning
Examples
DGS-8000# show mac-address-learning
2-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.2.4
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
show mac-address-table address
Use this command to show all types of MAC addresses (including dynamic
address, static address and filtering address)
show mac-address-table [address mac-addr] [interface interface-id] [ vlan
vlan-id]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
address mac-addr
Specified MAC address.
description
interface interface-id
Interface ID
vlan vlan-id
VLAN ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table address 00d0.f800.1001
Command
Vlan
mode
---------1
Related
Command
commands
show
MAC Address
Type
Interface
-------------------- -------00d0.f800.1001
mac-address-table
STATIC
Gi1/1
Description
Show the static MAC address.
static
show
mac-address-table
filtering
show
mac-address-table
dynamic
Show the filtering MAC
address.
Show the dynamic MAC
address.
show
Show all types of MAC
mac-address-table
addresses of the specified
interface
interface
show
Show all types of MAC
mac-address-table
addresses of the specified
vlan
VLAN
show
mac-address-table
count
Show the address counts in the
MAC address table.
show
mac-address-table
Show the static MAC address.
static
2-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
show
Show the filtering MAC
mac-address-table
address.
filtering
2.2.5
show mac-address-table aging-time
Use this command to display the aging time of the dynamic MAC address.
show mac-address-table aging-time
Command
mode
Examples
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table aging-time
Aging time
Related
commands
2.2.6
: 300
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Specify the aging time of the
aging-time
dynamic MAC address.
show mac-address-table count
Use this command to display the mac-address-table count.
show mac-address-table count
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table count
Examples
Dynamic Address Count
: 51
Static
Address Count
: 0
Filter
Address Count
: 0
Total Mac Addresses
: 51
Total Mac Address Space Available: 8139
Related
Command
commands
show
mac-address-table
Description
Display the static address.
static
show
mac-address-table
Display the filtering address.
filtering
2-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
show
Display the dynamic address.
mac-address-table
dynamic
show
Display
mac-address-table
information of the specified
address
address.
show
Display
mac-address-table
information of the specified
interface
interface.
all
Display
show
mac-address-table vlan
2.2.7
all
all
the
the
the
address
address
address
information of the specified
vlan.
show mac-address-table dynamic
Use this command to show the dynamic MAC address.
show mac-address-table dynamic [address mac-addr] [interface interface-id]
[ vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
mac-addr
Parameter
vlan-id
Description
Destination MAC address of the
entry
VLAN of the entry
description
Interface that the packet is
interface-id
forwarded to.
(It may be a physical port or an
aggregate port)
Default
configuration
All the MAC addresses are displayed by default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table dynamic
Vlan
MAC Address
Type
Interface
------------------------- -------- -------------------
Examples
1
0000.0000.0001
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0001.960c.a740
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0007.95c7.dff9
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0007.95cf.eee0
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0007.95cf.f41f
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0009.b715.d400
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
0050.bade.63c4
DYNAMIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
2-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Command
Description
Related
clear
commands
mac-address-table
Clear
dynamic
MAC
address.
dynamic
2.2.8
the
show mac-address-table filtering
Use this command to show the filtering MAC address.
show mac-address-table filtering [addr mac-addr] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Destination MAC address of the
mac-addr
entry
vlan-id
VLAN ID of the entry
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table filtering
Examples
Vlan
------1
MAC Address
0000.2222.2222
Command
clear
2.2.9
Type
Interface
----------------- ------- -----------
Related
mac-address-table
commands
filtering
FILTER Not available
Description
Clear
the
filtering
MAC
address.
mac-address-table
Configure the filtering MAC
filtering
address.
show mac-address-table interface
Use this command to show all the MAC address information of the specified
interface (including static and dynamic MAC address).
show mac-address-table interface [interface-id] [vlan vlan-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Show the MAC address
interface-id
information of the specified
Interface(physical interface or
aggregate port).
2-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
Show
vlan-id
Command
mode
the
MAC
address
information of the VLAN.
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table interface
gigabitethernet 1/1
Vlan
Examples
MAC Address
-----
Type
Interface
------------- -------- ----------------
1
00d0.f800.1001
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1002
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1003
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1004
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
Command
Description
show
mac-address-table
Show the static MAC address.
static
show
mac-address-table
filtering
show
Related
commands
mac-address-table
dynamic
show
mac-address-table
address
show
mac-address-table vlan
show
mac-address-table
count
2.2.10
Show the filtering MAC
address.
Show the dynamic MAC
address.
Show all types of MAC
addresses.
Show all types of MAC
addresses of the specified
VLAN.
Show the address counts in
the MAC address table.
show mac-address-table mac-manage-learning
Use this command to show the management and learning mode of the dynamic
MAC address.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
2-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
N/A.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table mac-manage-learning
######MAC manage-learning
Examples
running mode: uniform
configuration mode: uniform
dynamic address learning-synchronization: off.
Command
Function
Set the management and
mac-manage-learning
learning
mode
of
the
uniform
dynamic MAC address to
the uniform mode.
Related
commands
mac-manage-learning
Synchronize the dynamic
uniform
MAC address in the whole
learning-synchronization
device.
Set the management and
mac-manage-learning
learning
dispersive
dynamic MAC address to
mode
of
the
the dispersive mode.
2.2.11
show mac-address-table notification
Use this command to show the MAC address notification configuration and the
MAC address notification table.
show mac-address-table notification [interface [interface-id] | history ]
Parameter
Description
Interface ID. Show the MAC
Parameter
interface interface-id
description
address
notification
configuration on the interface.
history
Show
the
MAC
address
notification history.
Default
The MAC address notification configuration is shown by
configuration
default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
2-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table notification interface
Interface
MAC Added Trap
---------
MAC Removed Trap
--------------
GigabitEthernet1/14
Disabled
-------------Disabled
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table notification
MAC Notification Feature: Disabled
Examples
Interval between Notification Traps: 1 secs
Maximum Number of entries configured in History Table:1
Current History Table Length: 0
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table notification history
History Index: 0
MAC Changed Message:
Operation:ADD Vlan: 1 MAC Addr: 00f8.d012.3456
GigabitEthernet 3/1
Related
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Enable
notification
notification.
commands
address
Enable the MAC address
snmp trap
mac-notification
2.2.12
MAC
trap notification function on
the specified interface.
show mac-address-table static
Use this command to show the static MAC address.
show mac-address-table static [addr mac-addr] [interface interface-id] [vlan
vlan-id ]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Destination MAC address of the
mac-addr
entry
vlan-id
VLAN ID of the entry
Interface of the entry (physical
interface-id
Command
mode
interface or aggregate port)
Privileged mode.
Show only static MAC addresses
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table static
Examples
Vlan
MAC Address
---------1
Type
Interface
-------------------- -------- ---------
00d0.f800.1001
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
2-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
1
00d0.f800.1002
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1003
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
Command
Description
mac-address-table
Configure
Related
static
address.
commands
clear
mac-address-table
the
static
MAC
Clear the static MAC address.
static
2.2.13
show mac-address-table vlan
Use this command to show all types of MAC addresses of the specified VLAN
show mac-address-table vlan [vlan-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vlan-id
VLAN ID of the entry
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table vlan 1
Vlan
Examples
MAC Address
----------
Type
Interface
-------------------- -------- ---------
1
00d0.f800.1001
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1002
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
1
00d0.f800.1003
STATIC
gigabitethernet 1/1
Related
Command
commands
show
mac-address-table
Description
Show the static MAC address.
static
show
mac-address-table
Show the filtering MAC address.
filtering
show
mac-address-table
dynamic
show
mac-address-table
address
Show
the
dynamic
MAC
address.
Show
all
types
of
MAC
addresses.
2-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 MAC Address Configuration Commands
show
Show
mac-address-table
addresses
interface
interface.
show
mac-address-table
count
all
types
of
the
of
MAC
specified
Show the address counts in the
MAC address table.
2-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3
3.1
3.1.1
Chapter 3 Aggregate Port Configuration Commands
Aggregate
Port
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
aggregateport load-balance
Specify a load-balance algorithm. Use the no command to return it to the
default setting.
aggregateport load-balance {dst-mac | src-mac | src-dst-mac | dst-ip |
src-ip | src-dst ip }
no aggregateport load-balance
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Traffic is distributed according to the
destination MAC addresses of the
incoming packets. For all the links of an
dst-mac
aggregate port, the messages with the
same destination MAC addresses are
sent to the same port, and those with
different destination MAC addresses
are sent to different ports.
Traffic is distributed according to the
source MAC addresses of the incoming
packets. For all the links of an
src-mac
aggregate port, the messages from
different addresses are distributed to
different ports, and those from the
same addresses are distributed to the
same port.
3-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 Aggregate Port Configuration Commands
Traffic is distributed according to the
source IP address and destination IP
address. Packets with different source
and destination IP address pairs are
Src-dst-ip
forwarded through different ports. The
packets with the same source and
destination
IP
address
pairs
are
forwarded through the same links. At
layer 3, this load balancing style is
recommended.
Traffic is distributed according to the
destination
IP
addresses
of
the
incoming packets. For all the links of an
dst-ip
aggregate port, the messages with the
same destination IP addresses are sent
to the same port, and those with
different destination IP addresses are
sent to different ports.
Traffic is distributed according to the
source IP addresses of the incoming
packets. For all the links of an
src-ip
aggregate port, the messages from
different addresses are distributed to
different ports, and those from the
same addresses are distributed to the
same port.
Traffic is distributed according to the
source
addresses.
and
destination
Packets
with
MAC
different
source and destination MAC address
src-dst-mac
pairs are forwarded through different
ports. The packets with the same
source and destination MAC address
pairs are forwarded through the same
port.
Default
Traffic is distributed according to the destination and
configuration
source MAC addresses of the incoming packets.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
3-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 Aggregate Port Configuration Commands
Usage
Use show aggregateport to display load-balance
guidelines
configuration.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# aggregateport load-balance dst-mac
Command
Related
show
commands
aggregateport
load-balance
Description
Use
this
command
to
display
aggregate port configurations.
Platform
description
3.1.2
N/A
port-group
Use this command to assign a physical interface to be a member port of an
aggregate port. Use the no form of the command to remove the membership
from the aggregate port.
port-group port-group-number
no port-group
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Number of the member group of an
port-group-number
aggregate port, the interface number
of the aggregate port
Default
By default, the physical port does not belong to any
configuration
aggregate port.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Interface configuration mode.
All the members of an aggregate port belong to a VLAN or
configured to be trunk ports. The ports belonging to
different native VLANs cannot form an aggregate port.
This example shows how to specify the Ethernet interface
Examples
1/3 and 1/4 as members of AP 3:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/3
DGS-8000(config-if)# port-group 3
3-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.2
3.2.1
Chapter 3 Aggregate Port Configuration Commands
Platform
DGS-8000 series support up to 8 member ports and
description
create up to 128 AP globally.
Showing Related Command
show aggregateport
Use this command to display the aggregate port configurations.
show aggregateport {[aggregate-port-number] summary | load-balance}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
aggregate-port-number
Number of the aggregate port.
load-balance
Show the load-balance algorithm
description
on the aggregate port.
summary
Show
the
summary
of
the
aggregate port.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
If the aggregate port number is not specified, all the
guidelines
aggregate port information will be displayed.
DGS-8000# show aggregateport 1 summary
Examples
AggregatePort
MaxPorts
SwitchPort Mode
-------------
--------
-------------
Ag1
Related
commands
8
Enabled
Command
Description
aggregateport
Configure
load-balance
algorithm of AP.
a
Ports
------
ACCESS
load-balance
3-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4
4.1
4.1.1
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
LACP
Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
port-group mode
Use this command to enable LACP and specify the group ID and the
aggregation mode. Use the no form of this command to disable the LACP.
port-group key mode {active | passive}
no port-group
Parameter
Description
key
Specify the group ID on the port to be
aggregated. The key values vary with
the
aggregation
group
numbers
supported for different products.
Places a port into an active negotiating
Parameter
description
active
state,
in
which
negotiations
with
the
port
remote
initiates
ports
by
sending LACP packets.
Places a port into a passive negotiating
passive
state, in which the port responds to
LACP packets it receives but does not
initiate LACP negotiation.
Default
configuration
By default, the LACP function is disabled on the interface.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
N/A
4-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
guidelines
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# port-group 1 mode active
4.1.2
Related
Command
Description
commands
lacp port-priority
Set the LACP port priority.
lacp port-priority
Use this command to set the LACP port priority. Use the no form of this
command to return to the default value.
lacp port-priority port-priority
no lacp port-priority
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
port-priority
The port priority, in the range of
0-65535.
Default
configuration
By default, the port priority is 32768.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When multiple ports are to be aggregated, the ports with
high priorities take precedence and the port with the
highest priority is selected as the master port. The port
priority sequence is determined according to the wire
quality.
The LACP cannot be enabled on the ports with the function
Usage
guidelines
of forbidding the member ports to add to or leave the AP
enabled; and the function of forbidding the member ports to
add to or leave the AP cannot be enabled on the LACP
member ports. The AP with the function of forbidding the
member ports to add to or leave cannot configured as the
LACP AP, and function of forbidding the member ports to
add to or leave the AP cannot be enabled on the LACP AP.
The SYSLOG will be displayed when the LACP fails to
leave the AP due to external function limitations, such as:
4-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
%LACP-5-UNBUNDLE_FAIL: Interface FastEthernet 0/1
failed to leave the AggregatePort 1. In this case, please
modify the configuration to cancel the related configuration
of forbidding the member ports to leave the AP, otherwise
the normal packets transmission on the AP will be
influenced.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# lacp port-priority 4096
Command
Description
Enable the LACP on the port
Related
commands
port-group
key
mode
{active | passive}
and specify the aggregation
group
ID
and
operation
mode.
4.1.3
lacp system-priority
Use this command to set the LACP system priority. The no form of it restores it
to the default.
lacp system-priority system-priority
no lacp system-priority
Parameter
Description
system-priority
The LACP system priority, in
Parameter
description
the range of 0-65535.
Default
configuration
By default, the system priority is 32768.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
LACP system priority consists of the Layer2 management
Usage
MAC address and its priority value, where the MAC
guidelines
address is fixed but the priority value is configurable. If two
priorities are equal, then the smaller the MAC address is,
4-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
the higher the priority is. All LACP groups on the switch
share the system priority. Changing the system priority
may influence the whole aggregation groups on the switch.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# lacp system-priority 4096
Command
Description
Related
port-group key mode
commands
{active | passive}
lacp port-priority
4.2
4.2.1
Enable the LACP on the port
and specify the aggregation
group ID and operation mode.
Set the LACP port priority.
Showing Related Command
show lacp summary
Use this command to show the LACP aggregation information.
show lacp summary [key]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
key
Specify the aggregation group id to
show.
description
If
it
is
not
specified,
all
aggregation group information is shown
by default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
DGS-8000# show LACP summary
Flags:S - Device is sending Slow LACPDUs
F - Device is sending
fast LACPDUs.
Example
A - Device is in active mode.
P - Device is in passive mode.
s
Aggregate port 3:
Local information:
LACP port
Oper
Port
Port
4-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
Port
Flags
State
Priority
Key
Number
State
-----------------------------------------------------------Gi0/1
SA
bndl
4096
0x3
0x1
SA
bndl
4096
0x3
0x2
SA
bndl
4096
0x3
0x3
0x3d
Gi0/2
0x3d
Gi0/3
0x3d
Partner information:
LACP port
Port
Flags
Priority
Oper
Dev ID
Key
Port
Number
Port
State
----------------------------------------------------------Gi0/1
SA
61440
00d0.f800.0002
0x3
0x1
0x3d
Gi0/2
SA
61440
00d0.f800.0002
0x3
0x2
0x3d
Gi0/3
SA
61440
00d0.f800.0002
0x3
0x3
0x3d
Field
Local information
Port
Description
Show the local LACP
information.
Show the system port
ID.
Show the port state flag:
“S” indicates that the
LACP is stable and in
Flags
the state of periodically
sending the LACPPDU;
“A” indicates that the
port is in the active
mode.
Show
the
port
aggregation
information:
“bndl”
indicates that the port is
State
aggregated;
represents
disconnection
“Down”
the
port
state; “susp” indicates
that the port is not
aggregated.
LACP Port Priority
Show the LACP port
4-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 LACP Configuration Commands
priority.
Oper Key
Port Number
Port State
Show the port operation
key.
Show the port number.
Show the flag bit for the
LACP port state.
Partly show the LACP
Partner infomation
information of the peer
port.
Partly show the system
Dev ID
MAC information of the
peer device.
Command
Related
commands
Description
Enable the LACP on the port and
port-group key mode
specify the aggregation group ID
and operation mode.
4-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5
5.1
5.1.1
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
VLAN
Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
add
Use this command to add one or a group Access interface into current VLAN.
Use the no form of the command to remove the Access interface.
add interface { interface-id | range interface-range }
no add interface { interface-id | range interface-range }
Parameter
Parameter
interface-id
description
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Description
Layer-2 Ethernet interface or layer-2 AP
port.
range
Range of the Layer-2 Ethernet interface
interface-range
or layer-2 AP port.
All layer-2 Ethernet interfaces are in the VLAN1.
VLAN configuration mode.
5-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands

This command is only valid for the access port.

The configuration of this command is the same as
specifying the VLAN to which interface belongs in the
interface configuration mode (that is the switchport
access vlan vlan-id). For the two commands of
Usage
adding the interface to the VLAN, the command
guidelines
configured later will overwrite the one configured
before and take effect.

The configuration of adding the layer-2 AP into
current VLAN through this command will only take
effect for the layer-2 AP port, but not for the member
port of the layer-2 AP port.
The following example adds the interface GigabitEthernet
0/10 into the VLAN20.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
SwitchA(config)#vlan 20
SwitchA(config-vlan)#add interface GigabitEthernet 0/10
DGS-8000# show interface GigabitEthernet 0/10 switchport
Interface
Switchport
Mode
Access
Native Protected
VLAN lists
----------
--------
-----
-----
---- ----------
------GigabitEthernet 0/10 enabled
ACCESS
20
1
Disabled
ALL
Examples
The following example adds the interface
GigabitEthernet 0/1-10 into the VLAN200.
range
DGS-8000# configure terminal
SwitchA(config)#vlan 200
SwitchA(config-vlan)#add interface range GigabitEthernet
0/1-10
DGS-8000# show vlan
SwitchA#show vlan
VLAN Name
----
Status
Ports
-------
------------
---------------------------1
VLAN0001
STATIC
Gi0/11,Gi0/12,Gi0/13,Gi0/1
4,Gi0/15,
Gi0/16,Gi0/17,Gi0/18,Gi0/1
9,Gi0/20,Gi0/21,
Gi0/22,
5-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
Gi0/23, Gi0/24
200
VLAN0200
STATIC
Gi0/1,Gi0/2,Gi0/3,Gi0/4,Gi0/5,
Gi0/6,Gi0/7,Gi0/8,Gi0
/9,Gi0/10
The following example adds the AggregatePort10 into the
VLAN20.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
SwitchA(config)#vlan 20
SwitchA(config-vlan)#add interface aggregateport 10
DGS-8000# show interface aggregateport 10 switchport
Interface
Switchport
Mode
Access
Native Protected
VLAN lists
----------
--------
-----
-----
---- ----------
------AggregatePort 10 enabled
Command
Related
show interface
commands
interface-id
ACCESS
20
1
Disabled
ALL
Description
Show the layer-2 interfaces.
switchport
5.1.2
name
Use the command to specify the name of a VLAN. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
name vlan-name
no name
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vlan-name
VLAN name
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Usage
The default name of a VLAN is the combination of
“VLAN” and VLAN ID, for example, the default name of
the VLAN 2 is “VLAN0002”.
VLAN configuration Mode.
You can view the VLAN settings by using the show vlan
5-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Examples
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
command.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 10
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# name vlan10
5.1.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
show vlan
Show member ports of the VLAN.
switchport access
Use this command to configure an interface as a statics access port and assign
it to a VLAN. Use the no form of the command to assign the port to the default
VLAN.
switchport access vlan vlan-id
no switchport access vlan
Parameter
description
Parameter
vlan-id
Description
The VLAN ID at which the port to be
added.
Default
By default, the switch port is an access port and the VLAN
configuration
is VLAN 1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Enter one VLAN ID. The system will create a new one and
add the interface to the VLAN if you enter a new VLAN ID.
Usage
If the VLAN ID already exists, the command adds the port
guidelines
to the VLAN.
If the port is a trunk port, the operation does not take
effect.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2
Related
Command
Description
commands
switchport
Specify the interface as Layer 2 mode
mode
(switch port mode).
5-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
switchport
trunk
5.1.4
Use this command to specify a native
VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for the
trunkport.
switchport mode
Use this command to specify a L2 interface (switch port) mode. You can specify
this interface to be an access port or a trunk port or an 802.1Q tunnel. Use the
no form of the command to restore the default setting.
switchport mode {access | trunk | hybrid | uplink | dot1q-tunnel}
no switchport mode
Parameter
access
trunk
Parameter
description
hybrid
uplink
dot1q-tunnel
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Description
Configure the switch port as an access
port.
Configure the switch port as a trunk
port.
Configure the switch port as a hybrid
port.
Configure the switch port as an uplink
port.
Configure the switch port as a 802.1Q
tunnel port.
By default, the switch port is an access port.
Interface configuration mode.
If a switch port mode is access port, it can be the member
port of only one VLAN. Use switchport access vlan to
specify the member of the VLAN.
Usage
guidelines
A trunk port can be the member port of various VLANs
defined by the allowed-VLAN list. The allowed VLAN list of
the interface determines the VLANs to which the interface
may belong. The trunk port is the member of all the VLANs
in the allowed VLAN list. Use switchport trunk to define
the allowed-VLANs list.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
5-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
Command
switchport
Related
access
commands
switchport
trunk
5.1.5
Description
Use this command to configure an
interface as a statics access port and
assign it to a VLAN.
Use this command to specify a native
VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for the
trunkport.
switchport trunk
Use this command to specify a native VLAN and the allowed-VLAN list for the
trunk port. Use the no form of the command to restore the default setting.
switchport trunk {allowed vlan { all | [add | remove | except] vlan-list }|
native vlan vlan-id}
no switchport trunk {allowed vlan | native vlan }
Parameter
Description
Configure the list of VLANs allowed on
the trunk port. vlan-list can be a VLAN
or a range of VLANs starting with the
smaller VLAN ID and ending with the
larger VLAN ID and being separated by
hyphen, for example, 10 to 20. The
segments can be separated with a
comma (,), for example, 1 to 10, 20 to
Parameter
description
allowed vlan
25, 30, 33.
vlan-list
all means that the allowed VLAN list
contains all the supported VLANs;
add means to add the specified VLAN
list to the allowed VLAN list;
remove means to remove the specified
VLAN list from the allowed VLAN list;
except means to add all the VLANs
other than those in the specified VLAN
list to the allowed VLAN list;
native vlan
vlan-id
Specify the native VLAN.
Default
The default allowed-VLAN list is all the VLANs, the default
configuration
native VLAN is VLAN 1.
5-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Native VLAN:
A trunk port belongs to one native VLAN. A native VLAN
means that the untagged packets received/sent on the
trunk port belong to the VLAN. Obviously, the default
VLAN ID of the interface (that is, the PVID in the IEEE
802.1Q) is the VLAN ID of the native VLAN. In addition,
Usage
when frames belonging to the native VLAN are sent over
guidelines
the trunk port, they are untagged.
Allowed-VLAN List:
By default, a trunk port sends traffic to and received traffic
from all VLANs (ID 1 to 4094). However, you can prevent
the traffic from passing over the trunk port by configuring
allowed VLAN lists on a trunk port .
Use show interfaces switchport to display configuration.
The example below removes port 1/15 from VLAN 2:
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastethernet 1/15
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan remove
2
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Examples
DGS-8000# show interfaces fastethernet1/15 switchport
Interface Switchport Mode Access Native Protected VLAN
lists
--------- --------- --------- --------FigabitEthernet 1/15
enabled
TRUNK
1
1
Disabled
1,3-4094
Command
show
Related
interfaces
commands
switchport
access
5.1.6
Description
Show the interface information.
Use this command to configure an
interface as a statics access port and
assign it to a VLAN.
vlan
Use this command to enter the VLAN configuration mode. Use the no form of
the command to remove the VLAN.
vlan vlan-id
5-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
no vlan vlan-id
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
VLAN ID
vlan-id
Default VLAN (VLAN 1) cannot be
removed.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Global configuration mode.
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, input end or
pressing Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, input exit.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-vlan)#
5.2
5.2.1
Related
Command
Description
commands
show vlan
Show member ports of the VLAN.
Showing Related Commands
show vlan
Show member ports of the VLAN.
show vlan [id vlan-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vlan-id
VLAN ID
Default
configuration
Show all the information by default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
5-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 VLAN Configuration Commands
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, input end or
Usage
guidelines
pressing Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, input exit.
DGS-8000# show vlan id 1
VLAN Name
Status
Ports
Examples
----------- ------------- -----------1
Related
commands
VLAN0001
STATIC
Fa0/1, Fa0/2
Command
Description
name
VLAN name.
switchport
access
Add the interface to a VLAN.
5-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
6
6.1
6.1.1
Chapter 6 Super-VLAN Configuration Commands
Super-VLAN
Configuration Commands
Configuring Related Commands
subvlan
Use this command to set the sub VLAN of this super VLAN or delete sub VLAN.
subvlan vlan-id-list
no subvlan [vlan-id-list]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Sub VLAN ID of the VLAN. Multiple
vlan-id-list
VLANs are supported.
Command
mode
VLAN configuration Mode.
Usage
Use no subvlan command to delete all sub VLANs of this
guidelines
super VLAN.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 3
Examples
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# supervlan
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# subvlan 5
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# subvlan 7-19
Related
commands
Command
show
supervlan
6.1.2
Description
Show the super VLAN information.
subvlan-address-range
Use this command to set the IP address range of the sub VLAN.
subvlan-address-range start-ip end-ip
6-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 Super-VLAN Configuration Commands
no subvlan-address-range
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
start-ip
The start IP address of this sub VLAN
end-ip
The end IP address of this sub VLAN
Command
mode
VLAN configuration Mode.
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, input end or press
Usage
guidelines
Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, input exit.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 3
Examples
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# subvlan-address-range
192.168.3.10 192.168.3.100
Related
commands
Command
show
supervlan
6.1.3
Description
Show the super VLAN information.
supervlan
Use this command to set the VLAN as a super VLAN.
supervlan
no supervlan
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
VLAN configuration Mode.
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, input end or press
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, input exit.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 3
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# supervlan
6-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 Super-VLAN Configuration Commands
Related
Command
Description
commands
show supervlan
Show the super VLAN information.
Platform
description
6.1.4
N/A.
proxy-arp
Use this command to enable the ARP agent function of a VLAN.
proxy -arp
no proxy -arp
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
mode
VLAN configuration Mode.
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, input end or press
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, input exit.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 3
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# proxy-arp
Related
commands
Command
show
supervlan
Description
Show the super VLAN information.
Platform
description
6.2
6.2.1
N/A.
Showing Related Command
show supervlan
Use this command to show the configuration of the super VLAN and its sub
VLANs.
show supervlan
6-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 Super-VLAN Configuration Commands
show supervlan id vlan-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vlan-id
VLAN ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
DGS-8000# show supervlan
supervlan id
Examples
supervlan arp-agent
arp-agent
subvlan ip range
-------
----------
subvlan id
subvlan
-------------
----------------3
ON
4
ON
5
ON
6-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7
7.1
7.1.1
Chapter 7 Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands
Protocol
VLAN
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
protocol-vlan ipv4 addr mask addr vlan id
Use this command to configure the IP address, subnet mask and VLAN
classification.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
addr
IP address in the x.x.x.x format.
description
VLAN ID, the maximal VLAN the
id
product supports
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Examples
Global configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# protocol-vlan ipv4 192.168.100.3 mask
255. 255.255.0 vlan 100
Command
show
Description
protocol-vlan
Related
ipv4
commands
no protocol-vlan ipv4
addr mask addr
no protocol-vlan ipv4
7-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7.1.2
Chapter 7 Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands
protocol-vlan ipv4
Use this command to enable configuring the IP address, subnet mask and
VLAN classification.
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
-
-
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
7.1.3
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# protocol vlan ipv4
Related
Command
commands
no protocol-vlan ipv4
Description
-
protocol-vlan profile num frame-type type ether-type type
Use this command to configure message type and Ethernet type profile.
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
num
Profile indexes
type
Type of message and Ethernet
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Examples
Global configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# protocol-vlan
profile 1 frame-type
ETHERII ether-type aarp
Related
Command
commands
show protocol-vlan
Description
profile
7-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands
show protocol-vlan
profile num
no protocol-vlan
profile
no protocol-vlan
profile num
7.1.4
protocol-vlan profile num vlan id
Use this command to apply some profile to an interface.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
num
Profile indexes
description
VLAN ID, the maximal VLAN the
id
product supports.
Command
mode
Interface mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# protocol-vlan profile 1 vlan 101
Command
show
Description
protocol-vlan
profile
Related
commands
show
protocol-vlan
profile num
no
protocol-vlan
profile
no protocol-vlan
profile num
7.2
7.2.1
Showing Related Commands
show protocol-vlan
Show the configuration of protocol VLAN.
show protocol-vlan
7-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Examples
DGS-8000# show protocol-vlan
7-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
8
8.1
8.1.1
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
Private
VLAN
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
private-vlan type
Use this command to configure the VLAN as the private VLAN.
private-vlan {community | isolated | primary}
no private-vlan {community | isolated | primary}
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
community
Configure it as the community VLAN.
isolated
Configure it as the isolated VLAN.
primary
Configure it as the primary VLAN.
no
Delete the corresponding private VLAN
configuration.
Default
configuration
No private VLAN is configured.
Command
mode
Examples
VLAN configuration Mode.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 22
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# private-vlan primary
Command
Description
Related
commands
show vlan
private-vlan
8-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
8.1.2
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
private-vlan association
Use this command to associate the secondary VLAN with the primary
command.
private-vlan association {svlist | add svlist | remove svlist}
no private-vlan association
Parameter
Parameter
Description
svlist
The secondary VLAN list
Remove the association between
description
the primary VLAN and all the
no
secondary VLANs.
Default
No association.
configuration
Command
Primary VLAN configuration Mode.
mode
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 22
Examples
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# private-vlan association add
24-26
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
vlan
private-vlan
8.1.3
private-vlan mapping
Use this command to map the secondary VLAN to the L3 SVI interface.
private-vlan mapping {svlist | add svlist | remove svlist}
no private-vlan mapping
Parameter
description
Command
Parameter
Description
svlist
secondary VLAN list
no
Delete the mapping.
The interface mode corresponding to the primary VLAN
8-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
mode
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 22
DGS-8000(config-if)# private-vlan mapping add 24-26
Command
Description
Related
commands
show vlan
private-vlan
8.1.4
switchport mode private-vlan
Use this command to declare the private VLAN mode of the interface.
switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous }
no switchport mode
Parameter
Description
host
Host mode of the private VLAN
Parameter
description
promiscuous
no
Promiscuous mode of the private
VLAN
Delete
the
private
VLAN
configuration of the port.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet0/2
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host
Command
Description
Related
commands
show vlan
private-vlan
8.1.5
switchport private-vlan host-association
Use this command to associate the primary VLAN, which is associated with the
private VLAN mode of the interface, with the secondary VLAN.
switchport private-vlan host-association p_vid s_vid
8-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
no switchport private-vlan host-association
Parameter
Description
p_vid
Primary VID.
s_vid
Secondary VID
Parameter
description
Delete the host port from the
no
private VLAN.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport private-vlan
host-association 22 23
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
vlan
private-vlan
8.1.6
switchport private-vlan association trunk
Use this command to associate the trunk port in the private VLAN mode, which
is associated with the primary VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
switchport private-vlan association trunk p_vid s_vid
no switchport private-vlan association trunk
Parameter
Description
p_vid
Primary VID.
s_vid
Secondary VID
Parameter
description
no
Delete the host port from the
private VLAN.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/2
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport private-vlan
8-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
association trunk 202 203
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
vlan
private-vlan
8.1.7
switchport private-vlan mapping
Use this command to configure the promiscuous secondary VLANs that the
promiscuous mode of the private VLAN maps.
switchport private-vlan mapping p_vid {svlist|add svist |remove svlist}
no switchport private-vlan mapping
Parameter
Description
p_vid
Primary VID
svlist
Secondary VLAN list.
Parameter
description
Remove
no
all
the
promiscuous
secondary VLANs.
Default
configuration
No promiscuous secondary VLAN is configured.
Command
mode
Hybrid interface configuration mode of private VLAN
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan
Examples
promiscuous
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 22
add 23-25
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
vlan
private-vlan
8-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
8.1.8
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
switchport private-vlan promiscuous trunk
Use this command to configure the ports as a promiscuous trunk port , which is
associated with the L2 port and the private VLAN. Multiple pairs are allowed to
associate.
[no] switchport private-vlan promiscuous trunk p_vid_s_list
Parameter
Parameter
Description
p_vid
Primary VID
svlist
Secondary VLAN list.
description
Remove
all
the
relationships
between the layer-2 ports and
no
private VLANs.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/2
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport private-vlan
promiscuous trunk 202 203
Related
Command
commands
Description
-
-
8.2
Showing Related Commands
8.2.1
show vlan private-vlan
Show the configuration of private VLAN.
show vlan private-vlan [community | primary | isolated]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
primary
Show
the
primary
VLAN
community
VLAN
information.
community
Show
the
8-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
information.
isolated
Show
the
isolated
VLAN
information.
Default
configuration
No private VLAN is configured.
Command
8.3
8.3.1
mode
Privileged mode.
Examples
DGS-8000# show vlan private-vlan
Hybrid Commands
switchport mode hybrid
Use this command to configure the port as a hybrid port.
switchport mode hybrid
no switchport mode
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
no
Delete the hybrid port.
Default
configuration
No hybrid port is configured.
Command
8.3.2
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode hybrid
switchport hybrid native vlan
Use this command to configure the default VLAN of a hybrid port.
switchport hybrid native vlan vid
no switchport hybrid native vlan
8-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 Private VLAN Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
no
Restore the hybrid port to the default
VLAN.
Default
configuration
No default VLAN is configured.
Command
8.3.3
mode
Interface mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport hybrid native vlan 3
switchport hybrid allowed vlan
Use this command to configure the output rules of a hybrid port.
switchport hybrid allowed vlan [[add] [tagged | untagged] | remove] vlist
no switchport hybrid allowed vlan
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
no
Restore the output rules of the hybrid
port to the default settings.
Default
configuration
No output rules are configured.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface mode.
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport hybrid allowed vlan add
untagged 3-5
8-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
9
9.1
9.1.1
Chapter 9 Share VLAN Configuration Commands
Share
VLAN
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
share
Use this command to set the share vlan.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
VLAN configuration mode.
Use the no share command to cancel the share vlan.
Usage
guidelines
Enter the end command or Ctrl+C to return to the
privileged EXEC mode.
Enter the exit command to return to the global
configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 2
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# share
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
9-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 9 Share VLAN Configuration Commands
9.2
Showing Related Commands
9.2.1
show mac-address-table share
Use this command to show the mac address status: original, duplicated and null.
The “null” item indicates that share vlan has not been configured.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
Any configuration mode.
Enter the end command or Ctrl+C to return to the
Usage
privileged EXEC mode.
guidelines
Enter the exit command to return to the global
configuration mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-table share
Examples
Vlan
MAC Address
Type
Interface
Status
----
-------------- ------- ----------- ----------
1
0040.4650.1e1e DYNAMIC Gigabit 0/1 original
2
0040.4650.1e1e DYNAMIC Gigabit 0/1 duplicated
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
9-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
10
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
MSTP
Configuration
Commands
10.1 Configuration Related Commands
10.1.1
spanning-tree
Use this command to enable MSTP and configure its basic settings globally.
The no form of the command disables the spanning-tree function. The no form
of the command with parameters only restores the corresponding parameters to
the default values, but does not disable the spanning-tree function.
spanning-tree [forward-time seconds|hello-time seconds |max-age seconds]
no spanning-tree [forward-time | hello-time | max-age]
Parameter
Description
forward-time
Interval at which the port status
seconds
changes
hello-time
Interval at which the switch sends the
seconds
BPDU message
max-age
seconds
Maximum aging time of the BPDU
Parameter
description
message
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
10-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
The values of forward-time, hello time and max-age are
interrelated. Modifying one of these three parameters will
affect the others. There is a restricted relationship among
Usage
the above three values.
guidelines
2*(Hello Time+1.0snd) <= Max-Age Time <=
2*(Forward-Delay–1.0snd)
If the values do not according with the condition, the
settings do not work.
Enable the spanning-tree function:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree
Configure the BridgeForwardDelay:
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree
Command
forward-time 10
Description
show spanning-tree
Show
the
global
STP
configuration.
Related
commands
spanning-tree
cost
spanning-tree
tx-hold-count
10.1.2
mst
Set the PathCost of an STP
interface.
Set the global TxHoldCount of
STP.
spanning-tree bpdufilter
Use this command to enable BPDU filter on the interface. You can use the
enabled or disabled option of the command to enable or disable the BPDU
filter function on the interface.
spanning-tree bpdufilter [enabled | disabled]
Parameter
Parameter
enabled
description
Disabled
Description
Enable
BPDU
filter
on
the
BPDU
filter
on
the
interface.
Disable
interface.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
10-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter enable
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Show the STP configuration of
interface
the interface.
Related
commands
10.1.3
spanning-tree bpduguard
Use this command to enable the BPDU guard function on the interface. You can
use the enabled or disabled option of the command to enable or disable the
BPDU guard function on the interface.
spanning-tree bpduguard [enabled | disabled]
Parameter
Parameter
enabled
description
disabled
Description
Enable
BPDU
guard
on
the
BPDU
guard
on
the
interface.
Disable
interface.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard enable
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Show the STP configuration of
interface
the interface.
Related
commands
10.1.4
spanning-tree link-type
Use this command to configure the link type of the interface. Use the no form of
the command to restore the configuration to the default value.
spanning-tree link-type [point-to-point | shared]
no spanning-tree link-type
10-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Parameter
Parameter
point-to-point
description
shared
Default
configuration
Description
Set the link type of the interface to
point-to-point.
Forcibly set the link type of the
interface to shared.
For a full-duplex interface, its link type is set to
point-to-point link; for a half-duplex interface, its link type
is set to shared.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type
point-to-point
Command
Related
show
commands
spanning-tree
interface
10.1.5
Description
Show the STP configuration of the
interface.
spanning-tree max-hops
Use this command to set the maximum number of hops(Max-hopsCount) of the
BPDU message in the global configuration mode, the number of hops in a
region that the BPDU message passes before being dropped. This parameter
takes effect for all instances. Use the no form of the command to restore it to
the default setting.
spanning-tree max-hops hop-count
no spanning-tree max-hops
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Number of hops in a region that the
hop-count
BPDU message passes before being
dropped. The range is 1 to 40 hops.
Default
configuration
The default is 20 hops.
10-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
In the region, the BPDU message sent by the root bridge
includes a Hot Count field. When the BPDU message
Usage
guidelines
passes a device, the Hop Count is decreased by 1 until it
reaches 0, which indicates the BPDU message times out.
The device will drop the BPDU message whose Hop
Count is 0.
Changing the max-hops command affects all instances.
This example shows how to set the max-hops of the
spanning tree to 10 for all instances:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree
max-hops 10
You can verify your setting by entering the show
spanning-tree
mst
command
in
the
privileged
configuration mode.
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
spanning-tree
10.1.6
Show the MSTP information.
spanning-tree mode
Use this command to set the STP version in the global configuration mode. Use
the no form of the command to restore the version of the spanning-tree to the
default setting.
spanning-tree mode [stp | rstp | mstp]
no spanning-tree mode
Parameter
Parameter
Description
stp
Spanning tree protocol(IEEE 802.1d)
rstp
Rapid spanning tree protocol(IEEE
description
802.1w)
mstp
Multiple spanning tree protocol(IEEE
802.1s)
Default
configuration
MSTP version.
10-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree mode stp
Command
Description
Related
commands
10.1.7
show spanning-tree
Show
the
spanning-tree
configuration.
spanning-tree mst configure
Use this command to enter the MST configuration mode in the global
configuration mode and configure the MSTP region. Use the no form of the
command to restore all parameters (name, revision, vlan map) to the default
values.
spanning-tree mst configuration
no spanning-tree mst configuration
Default
By default, all VLANs are mapped to the instance 0,name
configuration
is empty, and revision is 0.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
To return to the privileged EXEC mode, enter end or
Ctrl+C.
To return to the global configuration mode, enter exit.
After entering the MST configuration mode, you can use
the following commands to configure parameters:
instance instance-id vlan vlan-range: Adds the VLANs to
the MST instance. The range of instance-id is 0 to 64 and
Usage
the range of VLAN is 1 to 4095. The vlan-range can be a
guidelines
collection of some inconsecutive VLANs separated with
comma or some consecutive VLANs in the form of start
VLAN number–end VLAN number. For example, instance
10 vlan 2,3,6-9 means that VLANs 2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9 are
added to instance 10. By default, all VLANs are in
Instance0. To remove a VLAN from an instance, use the
no form of the command: no instance instance-id [vlan
vlan-range]. (In this case, the range of instance is 1 to 64).
name name: Specify the MST name, a string of up to 32
10-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
characters. You can use the no name command to restore
it to the default setting.
revision version: Set the MST versions in the range 0 to
65535. You can use the no name command to restore it
the default setting.
Show: Shows the information of the MST region.
This example shows how to enter the MST configuration
mode, and map VLANs 3. 5 to 10 to MST instance 1:
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration
DGS-8000(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan
3, 5-10
DGS-8000(config-mst)# name region 1
DGS-8000(config-mst)# revision
1
DGS-8000(config-mst)# show
MST configuration
Name [region1]
Revision 1
Instance
Vlans Mapped
----------
Examples
---------------------
0
1-2,4,11-4094
1
3,5-10
----------------------------------DGS-8000(config-mst)# exit
DGS-8000(config)#
To remove VLAN 3 from instance 1, execute this command
after entering the MST configuration mode:
DGS-8000(config-mst)# no instance 1 vlan 3
Delete instance 1:
DGS-8000(config-mst)# no instance 1
You can verify your settings by entering the show
command of the MST configuration commands.
Related
Command
Description
show
Show
spanning-tree
the
MST
region
mst
configuration.
instance instance-id
Add
vlan vlan-range
instance.
name
Configure the name of MST.
revision
Configure the version of MST.
VLANs
to
the
MST
commands
show
Show the MST mode in the
MST configuration mode.
10-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
10.1.8
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
spanning-tree mst cost
Use this command to set the path cost of an instance in the interface
configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default
setting.
spanning-tree [mst instance-id] cost cost
no spanning-tree [mst instance-id] cost
Parameter
Parameter
Description
instance-id
Instance ID in the range of 0 to 64
description
Path cost in the range of 1 to
cost
200,000,000
The default instance-id is 0.
The default value is calculated by the link rate of the
Default
configuration
interface automatically.

1000 Mbps—20000

100 Mbps—200000

10 Mbps—2000000
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
A higher cost value means a higher path cost.
This example shows how to set the path cost to 400 on the
interface associated with instances 3:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 3 cost 400
You can verify your settings by entering the show
spanning-tree mst interface interface-id command in the
privileged EXEC mode.
Related
Command
Description
commands
show
Show the MSTP information of
spanning-tree
mst
an interface.
spanning-tree mst
Configure the priority of an
port-priority
interface.
10-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
spanning-tree
Configure the priority of an
mst
instance.
priority
10.1.9
spanning-tree mst port-priority
Use this command to configure the interface priority for different instances in the
interface configuration mode. It will determine which interface of a loop in a
region is in charge of forwarding. Use the no form of the command to restore it
to the default setting.
spanning-tree [mst instance-id] port-priority priority
no spanning-tree [mst instance-id] port-priority
Parameter
Description
Instance-id
Instance ID in the range of 0 to 64
Parameter
Interface priority. Sixteen integers
description
are available: 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80,
priority
96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192,
208,
224,
240,
which
are
the
multiples of 16.
Default
The default instance-id is 0.
configuration
The default priority is 128.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
higher priority will be in charge of forwarding. If all
guidelines
interfaces have the same priority value, the interface of the
When a loop occurs in the region, the interface of the
smaller number will be in charge of the forwarding.
This
example
shows
how
to
set
the
priority
of
gigabitethernet 1/1 to 10 in instance 20:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 20 port-priority
0
You can verify your settings by entering the show
spanning-tree mst instance-id privileged command.
Related
Command
Description
10-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
show
Show the MSTP information of an
spanning-tree mst
interface.
spanning-tree mst
cost
Set the path cost.
spanning-tree mst
Set the device priority for different
priority
instances.
10.1.10 spanning-tree mst priority
Use this command to set the device priority for different instances in the global
configuration mode. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default
setting.
spanning-tree [mst instance-id] priority priority
no spanning-tree [mst instance-id] priority
Parameter
Description
instance-id
Instance ID in the range of 0 to 64
Device priority. Sixteen integers are
Parameter
available: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288,
description
priority
16384,
20480,
24576,
28672,
32768,
36864,
40960,
45056,
49152,53248, 57344 and 61440,
which are all multiples of 4096.
Default
The default instance ID is 0.
configuration
The default device priority is 32768.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The following example sets the device priority of the
Instance as 8192.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 20 priority 8192
You can verify your settings by entering the show
spanning-tree
mst
instance
interface
instance-id
command in the privileged EXEC mode.
Related
Command
Description
10-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
show spanning-tree
Show the MSTP information of an
mst
interface.
spanning-tree mst
cost
spanning-tree mst
port-priority
Set path cost.
Set the port priority of an instance.
10.1.11 spanning-tree reset
Use this command to restore the spanning-tree configuration to the default
value. This command does not have the no form.
spanning-tree reset
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree reset
Command
Related
show spanning-tree
commands
Description
Show the global STP
configuration.
show spanning-tree
Show the STP configuration of the
interface
interface.
10.1.12 spanning-tree tx-hold-count
Use this command to configure the TxHoldCount of the STP in the global
configuraiton mode, the maximum number of the BPDU messages sent in one
second. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
spanning-tree tx-hold-count tx-hold-count
no spanning-tree tx-hold-count
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Maximum number of
tx-hold-count
the BPDU
messages sent in one second in
the range 1 to 10.
10-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Default
configuration
The default value is 3.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree tx-hold-count 5
Command
Description
Related
commands
Show
show spanning-tree
the
global
MSTP
configuration.
10.1.13 spanning-tree pathcost method
Use this command to configure the path cost of the port. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
spanning-tree pathcost method [long [standard] | short]
no spanning-tree pathcost method
Parameter
Description
Adopt
the
802.1t
standard
to
configure path cost.
Parameter
Long [standard]
description
The standard indicates that use the
expression recommended by the
standard to calculate the cost value.
short
Adopt
the
802.1d
standard
to
configure path cost.
Default
configuration
Adopt the 802.1T standard to set path cost by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree pathcost method long
Related
Command
Description
10-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
show
spanning-tree
interface
Show the STP configuration of the
interface.
10.1.14 spanning-tree portfast
Use this command to enable the portfast on the interface. You can use the
disabled option of this command to disable the portfast feature on the interface.
spanning-tree portfast [disabled]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
disabled
Disable the portfast on the interface.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast
Command
Related
show
commands
spanning-tree
interface
Description
Show the STP configuration of the
interface.
10.1.15 spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default
Use this command to enable the GPDU guard globally. You can use the no form
of the command to disable the BPDU guard.
spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default
no spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
10-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Once the BPDU guard is enabled on the interface, it will
Usage
enter the error-disabled status if the BPDU message
guidelines
arrives at the interface. Use the show spanning-tree
command to display the configuration.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpduguard
default
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Show
interface
configuration.
Related
commands
the
global
STP
10.1.16 spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
Use this command to enable the BPDU filter function globally. You can use the
no form of the command to disable the BPDU filter.
spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
no spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Related
Global configuration mode.
Once the BPDU filter is enabled, the BPDU message is
neither received nor sent on the interface. Use the show
spanning-tree command to display the configuration.
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter
default
Command
Description
10-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
show spanning-tree
Show
the
interface
configuration.
global
STP
10.1.17 spanning-tree portfast default
Use this command to enable the portfast feature on all interfaces globally. Use
the no form of the command to disable the portfast on all interfaces globally.
spanning-tree portfast default
no spanning-tree portfast default
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree portfast default
Command
Description
Related
commands
show spanning-tree
interface
Show the global STP configuration.
10.1.18 spanning-tree tc-protection
Use this command to enable tc-protection globally. Use The no form of this
command to disable tc- protection globally.
spanning-tree tc- protection
no spanning-tree tc- protection
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
10-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree tc-protection
10.1.19 spanning-tree tc-protection tc-guard
Use this command to enable tc-guard globally to prevent the spread of TC
messages. Use the no form of this command to disable tc-guard globally.
spanning-tree tc- protection tc-guard
no spanning-tree tc- protection tc-guard
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree tc- protection tc-guard
10.1.20 spanning-tree tc-guard
Use this command to enable tc-guard on the interface to prevent the spread of
TC messages. Use the no form of this command to disable tc-guard on the
interface.
spanning-tree tc-guard
no spanning-tree tc-guard
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree tc-guard
10-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
10.1.21 spanning-tree ignore tc
Use this command to turn on the tc filtering switch on the interface. Use the no
form of this command to turn off the tc filtering switch on the interface. With tc
filtering enabled, the TC packets received on the interface will not be
processed.
spanning-tree ignore tc
no spanning-tree ignore tc
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
By default, the TC filtering function is enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree ignore tc
10.1.22 spanning-tree guard root
Use this command to enable root guard on the interface to prevent the change
of current root bridge position because of error configuration and illegal packet
attack. Use the no form of this command to disable root guard on the interface.
spanning-tree guard root
no spanning-tree guard root
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree guard root
10-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
10.1.23 spanning-tree loopguard default
Use this command to enable loop guard globally to prevent the root port or
backup port from generating loop since they can not receive bpdu. Use the no
form of this command to disable loop guard.
spanning-tree loopguard default
no spanning-tree loopguard default
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree loopguard default
10.1.24 spanning-tree guard loop
Use this command to enable loop guard on the interface to prevent the root
port or backup port from generating loop since they can not receive bpdu. Use
the no form of this command to disable loop guard.
spanning-tree guard loop
no spanning-tree guard loop
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree guard loop
10-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
10.1.25 spanning-tree guard none
Use this command to disable guard on the interface. Use the no form of this
command to delete guard on the interface.
spanning-tree guard none
no spanning-tree guard none
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree guard none
10.1.26 spanning-tree autoedge
Use this command to enable Autoedge on the interface. Use the disabled
option of this command to disable Autoedge on the interface.
spanning-tree autoedge [disabled]
Parameter
The disabled parameter is used to disable Autoedge on
description
the interface.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# spanning-tree autoedge disabled
Related
Command
Function
commands
10-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
show
spanning-tree
interface
Show the STP configuration
information of the interface.
10.1.27 bpdu src-mac-check
Use this command to enable the BPDU source MAC address check function on
the interface. Use the no form of this command to disable the function.
bpdu src-mac-check H.H.H
no bpdu src-mac-check
Parameter
Description
Indicate
Parameter
H.H.H
description
that
only
the
BPDU
messages from this MAC address are
received.
no
Indicate that the BPDU messages
from any MAC address are received.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# bpdu src-mac-check 00d0.f800.1e2f
10.1.28 clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
Use this command to force the interface to send the RSTP BPDU message and
check the BPDU messages.
clear spanning-tree detected-protocols [interface interface-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
ID of the interface
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged configuration mode.
10-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
DGS-8000# clear spanning-tree detected-protocols
Command
Description
show spanning-tree
Show the STP configuration of
interface
the interface.
Related
commands
10.1.29 spanning-tree compatible enable
Use this command to send the message selectively carried with MSTI
according to the interface attibute of current port to realize interconnection with
other vendors.
spanning-tree compatible enable
no spanning-tree compatible enable
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# spanning-tree compatible enable
10.2 Showing Related Command
10.2.1
show spanning-tree
Use this command to display the global spanning-tree configurations.
show spanning-tree [summary |forward-time | hello-time | max-age |
inconsistentports | tx-hold-count | pathcost method | max_hops]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Show the information of MSTP
summary
instances and forwarding status of
the interfaces.
inconsistentports
Show the block port due to root
10-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
guard or loop guard.
forward-time
Show BridgeForwardDelay.
hello-time
Show BridgeHelloTime.
max-age
Show BridgeMaxAge.
max-hops
tx-hold-count
pathcost method
Show the maximum hops of an
instance.
Show TxHoldCount.
Show
the
method
used
for
calculating path cost.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Examples
DGS-8000# show spanning-tree hello-time
Command
spanning-tree
pathcost method
spanning-tree
forward-time
Related
commands
spanning-tree
hello-time
spanning-tree
max-age
Set the pathcost method.
Set BridgeForwardDelay.
Set BridgeHelloTime.
Set BridgeMaxAge.
spanning-tree
Set the maximum hops of an
max-hops
instance.
spanning-tree
tx-hold-count
10.2.2
Description
Show TxHoldCount.
show spanning-tree interface
Use this command to show the STP configuration of the interface, including the
optional spanning tree.
show spanning-tree interface interface-id [{bpdufilter | portfast | bpduguard
| link-type } ]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
Interface ID
bpdufilter
Show the status of BPDU filter.
portfast
Show the status of portfast.
10-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
bpduguard
Show the status of BPDU guard.
link-type
Show the link type of an interface.
Command
mode
Examples
Related
commands
10.2.3
Privileged EXEC mode.
DGS-8000#
show spanning-tree interface gigabitethernet
1/5
Command
Description
spanning-tree
Enable the BPDU filter feature
bpdufilter
someone the interface.
spanning-tree
portfast
Enable the portfast on the interface.
spanning-tree
Enable the BPDU guard on the
bpduguard
interface.
spanning-tree
Set the link type of the interface to
link-type
point-to-point.
show spanning-tree mst
In privileged EXEC mode, use this command to display the information of MST
and instances.
show spanning-tree mst {configuration |instance-id [ interface interface-id ] }
Parameter
Description
configuration
The
Parameter
MST
configuration
of
the
equipment.
description
instance-id
Instance number
interface-id
Interface number
Default
configuration
All the instances are displayed by default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Examples
DGS-8000# show spanning-tree mst configuration
10-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 MSTP Configuration Commands
Command
Description
spanning-tree
mst
Configure the MST region.
configuration
spanning-tree
Show the path cost of the instance.
Related
mst cost
commands
spanning-tree
Show the maximum hops of the
mst max-hops
instance.
spanning-tree
Show the equipment priority of the
mst priority
instance.
spanning-tree
mst port-priority
Show the port priority of the instance.
10-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
11
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
Controllable
Multicast
Configuration Commands
11.1 Configuration Related Command
11.1.1
gvrp applicant state
Use this command to set the port advertising mode, which determines whether
to allow sending the GVRP advertisement on the port. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
gvrp applicant state {normal | non-applicant}
no gvrp applicant state
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Allow sending the GVRP advertisement on the port.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# gvrp applicant state normal
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
configuration
gvrp
Show the GVRP configurations.
11-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
11.1.2
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
gvrp dynamic-vlan-creation
Use this command to control whether to allow creating the vlan dynamically. Use
the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting. .
gvrp dynamic-vlan-creation enable
no gvrp dynamic-vlan-creation enable
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Creating the vlan dynamically is not allowed.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# gvrp dynamic-vlan-creation enable
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
gvrp
configuration
11.1.3
Show the GVRP configurations.
gvrp enable
Use this command to enable the GVRP function. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
gvrp enable
no gvrp enable
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
11-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#gvrp enable
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
gvrp
configuration
11.1.4
Show the GVRP configurations.
gvrp registration mode
Use this command to set the registration mode to control whether to allow
creating/registering/canceling the vlan dynamically on the port. Use the no form
of this command to restore it to the default setting.
gvrp registration mode {normal | disabled}
no gvrp registration mode
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Creating/registering/canceling the vlan dynamically is
allowed.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# gvrp registration mode normal
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
configuration
gvrp
Show the GVRP configurations.
11-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
11.1.5
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
gvrp timer
Use this command to set the GVRP timer. Use the no form of this command to
restore it to the default setting.
gvrp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no gvrp timer
Parameter
Description
Control the maximum delay before
join
sending the advertisement on the port.
timer_value
The actual sending interval is in the
range of 0 to the maximum delay.
Control the waiting time before removing
the VLAN from the port with the Leave
Message received. If the Join Message
is received again within this time range,
leave
the port-VLAN relation is still exist and
timer_value
the timer becomes invalid. If no Join
Parameter
Message is received on the port, the port
description
status will be the Empty and removed
from the VLAN member list.
Control the minimum interval of sending
the LeaveAll Message on the port. If the
LeaveAll Message is received before the
timer expires, the timer re-counts. If the
leave
all
timer_value
timer
expires,
send
the
LeaveAll
Message on the port and also send this
Message to the port, so that the Leave
timer
begins
counting.
The
actual
sending interval is ranging from leaveall
to leaveall+join.
Join timer: 200ms;
Default
Leave timer: 600ms;
Leaveall timer: 10000ms.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
11-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Examples
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
DGS-8000(config)# gvrp timer join 200
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
gvrp
configuration
Show the GVRP configurations.
11.2 Showing Related Commands
11.2.1
clear gvrp statistic
Use this command to clear the GVRP statistics for re-counting.
clear gvrp statistics { interface-id | all}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
Interface id.
Default
NA
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
Use the show gvrp statistics to show the statistics.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear gvrp statistics all
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
gvrp
statistics
11.2.2
Show the GVRP statistics.
show gvrp configuration
Use this command to show the GVRP configurations.
show gvrp configuration
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
11-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Default
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
NA
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp configuration to show the related
guidelines
configurations.
DGS-8000# show gvrp configuration
Global GVRP Configuration:
GVRP Feature:enabled
GVRP dynamic VLAN creation:enabled
Join Timers(ms):200
Join Timers(ms):600
Join Timers(ms):10000
Port based GVRP Configuration:
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/1 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/2 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/3 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Examples
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/4 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/5 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/6 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/7 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/8 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/9 app mode:normal reg mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/10 app mode:normal reg
mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/11 app mode:normal reg
mode:normal
Port:GigabitEthernet 3/12 app mode:normal reg
mode:normal
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
11-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
11.2.3
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
show gvrp statistics
Use this command to show the GVRP statistics of one interface or all interfaces.
show gvrp statistics {interface-id | all}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-id
Interface id.
Default
NA
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp statistics to show the statistics of one
guidelines
interface or all interfaces.
DGS-8000# show gvrp statistics gigabitethernet 1/1
Interface
GigabitEthernet 3/1
RecValidGvrpPdu
0
RecInvalidGvrpPdu
0
RecJoinEmpty
0
RecJoinIn
0
RecEmpty
0
RecLeaveEmpty
Examples
0
RecLeaveIn
0
RecLeaveAll
0
SentGvrpPdu
0
SentJoinEmpty
0
SentJoinIn
0
SentEmpty
0
SentLeaveEmpty
0
SentLeaveIn
0
SentLeaveAll
0
JoinIndicated
0
LeaveIndicated
0
JoinPropagated
0
LeavePropagated
0
11-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 11 Controllable Multicast Configuration
Command
Description
clear
Clear the statistics of one interface or all
Related
commands
gvrp
statistics
11.2.4
interfaces.
show gvrp status
Use this command to show the GVRP status.
show gvrp status
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
NA
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use the show gvrp status command to show the GVRP
guidelines
status.
Examples
DGS-8000# show gvrp status
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
11-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
12
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
QinQ
Configuration
Commands
12.1 Configuration Related Commands
12.1.1
dot1q outer-vid vid register inner-vid v_list
Use this command to configure the add policy list of outer vid based on protocol
on tunnel port.
dot1q outer-vid vid register inner-vid v_list
no dot1q outer-vid vid register inner-vid v_list
Parameter
Description
Parameter
v_list
Inner vlan id list
description
vid
Outer vlan id list
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring vid in the tag of input
message as 4-22,adding the vid in the tag as 3:
DGS-8000#configure
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)#switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
DGS-8000(config-if)#dot1q outer-vid 3 register inner-vid
4-22
DGS-8000(config-if)#end
Related
Command
Description
12-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
show
registration-table
[interface intf-id]
12.1.2
dot1q relay-vid vid translate local-vid v-list
Use this command to configure the modify policy list of outer vid based on
protocol on access,trunk,hybrid port.
dot1q relay-vid vid translate local-vid v-list
no dot1q relay-vid vid translate local-vid v-list
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Outer
v_list
vlan
list
of
input
message
description
vid
Modified outer vlan id list
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring vid in the outer tag of
input message as 10-20,modifying the vid as 100:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode access
DGS-8000(config-if)# dot1q relay-vid 100 translate
local-vid 10-20
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Command
Related
show
commands
translation-table
Description
[interface intf-id]
12-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
12.1.3
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
dot1q relay-vid vid translate inner-vid v-list
Use this command to configure the modify policy list of outer vid based on
protocol on access,trunk,hybrid port.
dot1q relay-vid vid translate inner-vid v-list
no dot1q relay-vid vid translate inner-vid v-list
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Outer
v_list
vlan
list
of
input
message
description
vid
Modified outer vlan id list
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring vid in the outer tag of
input message as 10-20,modifying the vid as 100:
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode access
DGS-8000(config-if)#
dot1q
relay-vid
100
translate
inner-vid 10-20
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Command
Related
show
commands
translation-table
Description
[interface intf-id]
12.1.4
dot1q new-outer-vlan vid translate old-outer-vlan vid inner-vlan v-list
Use this command to modify the policy list of outer vid based on the inner Tag
VID and outer Tag VID on the access, trunk, hybrid, uplink port.
dot1q new-outer-vlan vid translate old-outer-vlan vid inner-vlan v-list
no dot1q new-outer-vlan vid translate old-outer-vlan vid inner-vlan v-list
12-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Parameter
v_list
Vid list of the
description
vid
Vid of outer tag.
no
Remove the setting.
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guideline
N/A.
The following example modifies the vid to 3888 when the
input packets inner tag vid
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 1888, 3888
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
DGS-8000(config-if)# dot1q new-outer-vlan 3888 translate
old-outer-vlan 1888 inner-vlan 2001-3000
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show translate-table
[ interface intf-id ]
12.1.5
dot1q-tunnel cos inner-cos-value remark-cos outer-cos-value
Use this command to map the priority from the outer tag to the inner tag for the
packets on the interface.
dot1q-tunnel cos inner-cos-value remark-cos outer-cos-value
no dot1q-tunnel cos inner-cos-value remark-cos outer-cos-value
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
no
Cancel the priority mapping of the
packets on the interface.
12-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guideline
N/A.
Here is an example of configuring the priority mapping from
the outer tag to the inner tag:
DGS-8000# configure
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/2
DGS-8000(config-if)# dot1q-tunnel cos 3 remark-cos 5
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show interface
intf-name remark
12.1.6
frame-tag tpid tpid
Use this command to set the manufacturer tpid.
frame-tag tpid <tpid>
no frame-tag tpid
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
no
Remove the setting.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface g0/3
DGS-8000(config-if)# frame-tag tpid 0x9100
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Examples
DGS-8000# show frame-tag tpid
Port
-----Gi0/3
tpid
--------0x9100
12-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
12.1.7
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Related
Command
commands
show frame-tag tpid
Description
inner-priority-trust enable
Use this command to copy the priority of the inner tag to the outer tag of the
packets on the interface.
inner-priority-trust enable
no inner-priority-trust enable
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
no
Remove the settings.
Command
mode
Examples
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/2
DGS-8000(config-if)# inner-priority-trust enable
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
inner-priority-trust
12.1.8
mac-address-mapping x source-vlan src-vlan-list destination-vlan
dst-vlan-id
Use this command to copy the MAC address dynamically-learned from the
source VLAN to the destination VLAN.
mac-address-mapping
x
destination-vlan
dst-vlan-id
source-vlan
src-vlan-list
no mac-address-mapping x destination-vlan
dst-vlan-id source-vlan
src-vlan-list
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Cancel to copy the MAC address
no
dynamically-learned
from
the
source VLAN to the destination
12-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
VLAN.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
DGS-8000#configure
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/2
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)#
destination-vlan
mac-address-mapping
5 source-vlan
1
1-3
DGS-8000(config-if)#end
Command
Description
Related
show
commands
mac-address-mapping
interface
x
12.1.9
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
Use this command to configure the interface as the dot1q-tunnel interface.
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
no switchport mode
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Delete
no
the
corresponding
dot1q-tunnel
interface
configuration.
Default
configuration
No dot1q-tunnel interface is configured.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring the interface as the
dot1q-tunnel interface:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gi 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport access vlan 22
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
DGS-8000(config)# end
12-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Related
Command
commands
show vlan
Description
12.1.10 switchport mode uplink
Use this command to configure the interface as a uplink port.
switchport mode uplink
no switchport mode
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
No uplink port is configured.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring the interface as a uplink
port.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode up-link
DGS-8000(config)# end
Related
Command
commands
show vlan
Description
12.1.11 switchport dot1q-tunnel allowed vlan
Use this command to configure the allowed VLAN of dot1q-tunnel.
switchport dot1q-tunnel allowed vlan [add] {tagged|untagged} v_list
switchport dot1q-tunnel allowed vlan remove v_list
no switchport dot1q-tunnel allowed vlan
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
tagged
Tag-carried.
12-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
untagged
Not tag-carried.
v_list
vlan id list.
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
Allowed vlan 1,untagged.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring vlan 3-6 of dot1q-tunnel
port as allowed VLAN and outputting the frame with tag:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel allowed vlan
tagged 3-6
DGS-8000(config)#end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show interface
dot1q-tunnel
12.1.12 switchport dot1q-tunnel native vlan
Use this command to configure the default vlan id of dot1q-tunnel.
switchport dot1q-tunnel native vlan vid
no switchport dot1q-tunnel native vlan
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
vid
Configure default vlan id.
no
Configure default vlan as 1.
Default
configuration
Vlan 1
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
12-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Here is an example of configuring default vlan of
dot1q-tunnel port as 8:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel native vlan
8
DGS-8000(config)#end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show interface
dot1q-tunnel
12.1.13 traffic-redirect access-group acl outer-vlan
Use this command to configure the modify policy list of outer vid based on flow
on access,trunk,hybrid port.
traffic-redirect access-group acl outer-vlan vid in
no traffic-redirect access-group acl outer-vlan
Parameter
Description
Parameter
acl
Flow matching.
description
vid
Modified outer vid list
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring outer vid of input
message whose source address is 1.1.1.1 as 3:
DGS-8000# configure
DGS-8000(config)#ip access-list standard 2
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)# permit host 1.1.1.1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
DGS-8000(config-if)# traffic-redirect access-group 2
outer-vlan 3 in
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
12-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
commands
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Command
Description
show traffic-redirect
12.1.14 traffic-redirect access-group acl inner-vlan
Use this command to configure the modification policy of inner vid based on
flow for the packets outputted from the access,trunk,hybrid port.
traffic-redirect access-group acl inner-vlan vid out
no traffic-redirect access-group acl inner-vlan
Parameter
Description
Parameter
acl
Flow matching.
description
vid
Modified inner vid
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of configuring the outer vid of outgoing
messages whose source address is 1.1.1.2 as 6:
DGS-8000#configure
DGS-8000(config)#ip access-list standard to_6
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)#permit host 1.1.1.2
Examples
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)#exit
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
DGS-8000(config-if)# traffic-redirect access-group to_6
inner-vlan 6 out
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Related
commands
Command
Description
show traffic-redirect
12-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
12.1.15 traffic-redirect access-group acl nested-vlan
Use this command to configure vid add policy list based on flow on dot1q-tunne
port.
traffic-redirect access-group acl nested-vlan vid in
no traffic-redirect access-group acl nested –vlan
Parameter
Description
Parameter
acl
Flow matching.
description
vid
vid list to be added.
no
Remove the settings.
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Here is an example of adding the vid of input message
whose source address is 1.1.1.3 as 9:
DGS-8000#configure
DGS-8000(config)#ip access-list standard 20
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)#permit host 1.1.1.3
Examples
DGS-8000(config-std-nacl)#exit
DGS-8000(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# switchport mode dot1q-tunnel
DGS-8000(config-if)# traffic-redirect access-group 20
nested-vlan 10 in
DGS-8000(config-if)# end
Related
commands
Command
Description
show traffic-redirect
12.1.16 l2protocol-tunnel
Use this command to set the dot1q-tunnel port to receive L2 protocol message.
l2protocol-tunnel {stp | gvrp}
no l2protocol-tunnel {stp | gvrp}
12-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Parameter
stp
Receive stp message.
description
gvrp
Receive gvrp message.
no
Remove the settings.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Here is an example of enabling the function of receiving L2
protocol gvrp and stp:
Examples
DGS-8000#configure
DGS-8000(config)# l2protocol-tunnel stp
DGS-8000(config)# l2protocol-tunnel gvrp
DGS-8000(config)#end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show l2protocol-tunnel
{ gvrp | stp }
12.1.17 l2protocol-tunnel proto-type enable
Use this command to enable transparent transmission of L2 protocol message.
l2protocol-tunnel {stp | gvrp} enable
no l2protocol-tunnel {stp | gvrp} enable
Parameter
Description
Transparently
stp
transmit
stp
message.
Parameter
description
Transparently
gvrp
transmit
gvrp
message.
Remove the settings.
no
Command
mode
Examples
Intereface configuration mode.
Here is an example of enabling transparent transmission of
L2 protocol message
:
12-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
DGS-8000#configure
DGS-8000(config)# interface fa 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel gvrp enable
DGS-8000(config-if)#end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show l2protocol-tunnel
{gvrp|stp}
12.1.18 l2protocol-tunnel proto-type tunnel-dmac mac-address
Use this command to set the MAC address for the transparent transmission of
the corresponding protocol messages.
l2protocol-tunnel { stp|gvrp } tunnel-dmac mac-address
no l2protocol-tunnel { stp|gvrp } tunnel-dmac mac-address
Parameter
stp
Parameter
description
gvrp
Description
Set
the
STP
transmission address.
Set
the
GVRP
transparent
transmission address.
Restore
no
transparent
transimission
the
transparent
address
to
the
default value.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Here is an example of setting the MAC address for the
L2-protocol transparent transmission function:
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel gvrp tunnel-dmac
011AA9 000005
DGS-8000(config-if)#end
Command
Description
Related
commands
show l2protocol-tunnel
{gvrp|stp}
12-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
12.2 Showing Command
12.2.1
show dot1q-tunnel
Use this command to show whether dot1q-tunnel of interface is enabled or not.
show dot1q-tunnel [interface intf-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
The specified interface.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show dot1q-tunnel
Examples
Ports
Dot1q-tunnel
-----
---------
Gi0/1
12.2.2
Enable
show frame-tag tpid
Use this command to show the configuration of interface tpid.
show frame-tag tpid [interface <intf-id>]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
Specific Interface
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Examples
The tpid is not modified.
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show frame-tag tpid
Ports
tpid
12-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
12.2.3
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
-----
---------
Gi0/1
0x9100
show inner-priority-trust
Use this command to show the priority copy configuration.
show inner-priority-trust
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Command
mode
N/A.
Priority copy is disabled by default.
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show inner-priority-trust
Examples
Port
---Gi0/1
12.2.4
inner-priority-trust
---------enable
show interface dot1q-tunnel
Use this command to show dot1q-tunnel configuration.
show interface [intf-id] dot1q-tunnel
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
The specified interface.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show interface dot1q-tunnel
Examples
Interface: Gi0/3
Native vlan: 10
Allowed vlan list: 4-6,10,30-60
12-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Tagged vlan list: 4,6,30-60
12.2.5
show interface intf-name remark
Use this command to show the priority mapping configurations.
show interface intf-name remark
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show interface intf-name remark
Ports
Type
From value
To value
Examples
------------ ----------- ----------- -------Gi0/1
12.2.6
Cos-To-Cos
3
5
show interface mac-address-mapping x
Use this command to show the mac address mapping configurations.
show interface mac-address-mapping x
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show mac-address-mapping 1
Examples
Ports
Destination-VID
Source-VID-list
12-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
------------ ---------------- --------------Gi0/1
12.2.7
5
1-3
show traffic-redirect
Use this command to show flow-based vid change or add policy list.
show traffic-redirect [interface intf-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
Specific Interface
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Null policy list.
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show traffic-redirect
Ports
Type
VID
Match-filter
------------ ----------- ---- ------------
Examples
12.2.8
Gi0/3
Mod-outer
23
11
Gi0/3
Mod-outer
3
4
Gi0/3
Mod-outer
6
5
Gi0/3
Mod-inner
8
inner-to-8
Gi0/6
Mod-inner
9
100
Gi0/7
Nested-vid
13
nest-13
show registration-table
Use this command to show vid add policy list of prorocol-based dot1q-tunnel
port.
show registration-table [interface intf-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
Specific Interface
Default
configuration
Null policy list.
12-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show registration-table
Examples
Ports
Outer-VID
Inner-VID-list
------------ ---------- -----------------Gi0/7
12.2.9
5
7-10,15,20-30
show translation-table
Use this command to show vid modify policy list of prorocol-based access, trunk,
hybrid port.
show translation-table [interface intf-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
intf-id
Specific Interface
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Null policy list.
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show translation-table
Examples
Ports
Relay-VID
Local-VID-list
------------ ---------- -----------------Gi0/8
10
8-9,15,20-30
12.2.10 show l2protocol-tunnel
Use this command to show transparent transmission configuration of L2
protocol.
show l2protocol-tunnel { gvrp | stp }
Parameter
Parameter
gvrp
description
stp
Description
Show configuration of transparently
transmitting gvrp protocol.
Show configuration of transparently
transmitting stp protocol.
12-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Chapter 12 QinQ Configuration Commands
N/A .
Privileged mode.
DGS-8000# show l2protocol-tunnel stp
Examples
L2protocol-tunnel: Stp Enable
DGS-8000# show l2protocol-tunnel gvrp
L2protocol-tunnel: gvrp Disable
12-20
DGS-8000
IP Application Command Reference
Guide
Version 10.4(3)
.
i
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Revision No.: Version 10.4(3)
Date:
2011/3/1
Copyright Statement
D-Link Corporation ©2011
All rights reserved.
Without our written permission, this document may not be excerpted, reproduced,
transmitted, or otherwise in all or in part by any party in any means.
.
ii
Preface
Version Description
This manual matches the firmware version 10.4(3).
Target Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
 Network engineers
 Technical salespersons
 Network administrators
Conventions in this Document
1. Universal Format Convention
Arial: Arial with the point size 10 is used for the body.
Note: A line is added respectively above and below the prompts such as caution and note to
separate them from the body.
Format of information displayed on the terminal: Courier New, point size 8, indicating the
screen output. User's entries among the information shall be indicated with bolded
characters.
2. Command Line Format Convention
Arial is used as the font for the command line. The meanings of specific formats are
described below:
Bold: Key words in the command line, which shall be entered exactly as they are displayed,
shall be indicated with bolded characters.
Italic: Parameters in the command line, which must be replaced with actual values, shall be
indicated with italic characters.
[ ]: The part enclosed with [ ] means optional in the command.
{ x | y | ... }: It means one shall be selected among two or more options.
[ x | y | ... ]: It means one or none shall be selected among two or more options.
//:Lines starting with an exclamation mark "//" are annotated.
.
iii
3. Signs
Various striking identifiers are adopted in this manual to indicate the matters that special
attention should be paid in the operation, as detailed below:
Warning, danger or alert in the operation.
Caution
Descript, prompt, tip or any other necessary supplement or explanation for
Note
the operation.
The port types mentioned in the examples of this manual may not be
consistent with the actual ones. In real network environments, you need
configure port types according to the support on various products.
Note
The display information of some examples in this manual may include the
information on other series products, like model and description. The details
are subject to the used equipments.
.
iv
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1
1.1
1.1.1
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
IP Address Configuration
Commands
Interface Address Configuration Commands
ip-address
Use this command to configure the IP address of an interface. The no form of
this command can be used to delete the IP address of the interface.
ip address ip-address network-mask [ secondary ] | [ gateway ip-address]
no ip address [ip-address network-mask [ secondary ] | [ gateway]]
Parameter
Description
32-bit IP address, with 8 bits in one
ip-address
group in decimal format. Groups are
separated by dots.
32-bit network mask. 1 stands for the
network-mask
Parameter
mask bit, 0 stands for the host bit, with
8 bits in one group in decimal format.
Groups are separated by dots.
description
secondary
Indicates the secondary IP address
that has been configured.
Configure the gateway address for the
gateway
ip-address
layer-2 switch, which is only supported
on the layer-2 switches. No address is
followed by the gateway when using
the no form of this command.
Default
No IP address is configured for the interface.
Usage
guidelines
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
The equipment cannot receive and send IP packets before
1-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
it is configured with an IP address. After an IP address is
configured for the interface, the interface is allowed to run
the Internet Protocol (IP).
The network mask is also a 32-bit value that identifies
which bits among the IP address is the network portion.
Among the network mask, the IP address bits that
correspond to value “1” are the network address. The IP
address bits that correspond to value “0” are the host
address. For example, the network mask of Class A IP
address is “255.0.0.0”. You can divide a network into
different subnets using the network mask. Subnet division
means to use the bits in the host address part as the
network address part, so as to reduce the capacity of a
host and increase the number of networks. In this case,
the network mask is called subnet mask.
The DGS-8000 supports multiple IP address for an
interface, in which one is the primary IP address and
others are the secondary IP addresses. Theoretically,
there is no limit for the number of secondary IP addresses.
The primary IP address must be configured before the
secondary IP addresses. The secondary IP address and
the primary IP address must belong to the same network
or different networks. Secondary IP addresses are often
used in network construction. Typically, you can try to use
secondary IP addresses in the following situations:

A network hasn’t enough host addresses. At present,
the LAN should be a class C network where 254 hosts
can be configured. However, when there are more
than 254 hosts in the LAN, another class C network
address is necessary since one class C network is not
enough. Therefore, the device should be connected to
two networks and multiple IP addresses should be
configured.

Many older networks are layer 2-based bridge
networks that have not been divided into different
subnets. Use of secondary IP addresses will make it
very easy to upgrade this network to an IP
layer-based
routing
network.
The
equipment
configures an IP address for each subnet.

Two subnets of a network are separated by another
network. You can create a subnet for the separated
network, and connect the separated subnet by
configuring a secondary IP address. One subnet
1-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
cannot appear on two or more interfaces of a device.
In the example below, the primary IP address is configured
as 10.10.10.1, and the network mask is configured as
255.255.255.0.
Examples
ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
In the example below, the default gateway is configured as
10.10.10.254
ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0 gateway 10.10.10.254
Related
commands
Command
show interface
Description
Show
detailed
information
of
the
interface.
For the Layer 2 switch, the IP address can be configured
Platform
description
only for the Layer 3 interface. The Level-2 address is not
supported, that is, the secondary option is unavailable.
The keyword gateway is only supported by the layer-2
switches.
1.1.2
ip unnumbered
Use this command to configure an unnumbered interface. After an interface is
configured as unnumbered interface, it is allowed to run the IP protocol and can
receive and send IP packets. The no form can be used to remove this
configuration.
ip unnumbered interface-type interface-number
no ip unnumbered
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type
interface-number
Interface number
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
1-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Unnumbered interface is an interface that has IP enabled
on it but no IP address is assigned to it. The unnumbered
interface should be associated to an interface with an IP
address. The source IP address of the IP packet
generated by an unnumbered interface is the IP address of
the associated interface. In addition, the routing protocol
process determines whether to send route update packets
to an unnumbered interface according to the IP address of
the associated interface. The following restrictions apply
when an unnumbered interface is used:

An Ethernet interface cannot be configured as an
unnumbered interface.
Usage

A
serial
interface
can
be
configured
as
an
unnumbered interface when it is encapsulated with
guidelines
SLIP, HDLC, PPP, LAPB and Frame-relay. However,
when Frame-relay is used for encapsulation, only the
point-to-point interface can be configured as an
unnumbered interface. X.25 encapsulation does not
allow configuration as an unnumbered interface.

You cannot detect whether an unnumbered interface
works normally using the ping command, because no
IP address is configured for the unnumbered
interface. However, the status of the unnumbered
interface can be monitored remotely using SNMP.

The network cannot be started using an unnumbered
interface.
In the example below the local interface is configured as
an unnumbered interface, and the associated interface is
Examples
FastEthernet 0/1. An IP address must be configured for the
associated interface.
ip unnumbered fastEthernet 0/1
Related
commands
Command
show interface
Description
Show detailed information of the
interface.
Platform
description
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
1-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.2
1.2.1
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Configuration Commands
arp
Use this command to add a permanent IP address and MAC address mapping
to the ARP cache table. The no form of this command deletes the static MAC
address mapping.
arp ip-address MAC-address type [ alias ]
no arp ip-address MAC-address type [ alias ]
Parameter
Description
The IP address that corresponds to the
ip-address
MAC address. It includes four parts of
numeric values in decimal format
separated by dots.
Parameter
description
MAC-address
type
48-bit data link layer address
ARP encapsulation type. The keyword
is arpa for the Ethernet interface.
(Optional) DGS-8000 will respond to
alias
the ARP request from this IP address
after this parameter is defined.
Default
There is no static mapping record in the ARP cache table.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
DGS-8000 finds the 48-bit MAC address according to the
32-bit IP address using `the ARP cache table.
Usage
Since most hosts support dynamic ARP resolution, usually
guidelines
static ARP mapping is not necessary. The clear
arp-cache command can be used to delete the ARP
mapping that is learned dynamically.
The following is an example of setting an ARP static
Examples
mapping record for a host in the Ethernet.
arp 1.1.1.1 4e54.3800.0002 arpa
Related
Command
Description
1-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
clear
arp-cache
1.2.2
Clear the ARP cache table
arp anti-ip-attack
For the messages corresponds to the directly-connected route, if the switch
does not learn the ARP that corresponds to the destination IP address, it is not
able to forward the message in hardware, and it needs to send the message to
the CPU to resolve the address(that is the ARP learnning). Sending large
number of this messages to the CPU will influence the other tasks of the switch.
To prevent the IP messages from attacking the CPU, a discarded entry is set to
the hardware during the address resolution, so that all sequential messges with
that destination IP address are not sent to the CPU. After the address resolution,
the entry is updated to the forwarding status, so that the switch could forward
the message with that destination IP address in hardware.
In general, during the ARP request ,if the switch CPU receives three destination
IP address messages corresponding to the ARP entry, it is considered to be
possilble to attack the CPU and the switch sets the discarded entry to prevent
the unknown unicast message from attacking the CPU. User could set the num
parameter of this command to decide whether it attacks the CPU in specific
network environment or disable this function. Use the arp anti-ip-attack
command to set the parameter or disable this function. The no form of this
command restores it to default value 3.
arp anti-ip-attack num
no arp anti-ip-attack
Parameter
Description
The number of the IP message to
Parameter
description
trigger
num
the
ARP
to
set
the
discarded entry in the range of 0 to
100. 0 stands for disabling the arp
anti-ip-attack function.
Default
By default, set the discarded entry after 3 unknown
configuration
unicast messages are sent to the CPU.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
1-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
The arp anti-ip-attack function needs to occupy the switch
hardware routing resources when attacked by the
Usage
guidelines
unknown unicast message. If there are enough resources,
the arp anti-ip-attack num could be smaller. If not, in
order to preferential ensure the use of the normal routing,
the num could be larger or disable this function.
The following configuration sets the IP message number
that triggers to set the discarding entry as 5.
DGS-8000(config)# arp anti-ip-attack 5
Examples
The following configuration disables the ARP anti-ip-attack
function.
DGS-8000(config)# arp anti-ip-attack 0
Platform
description
1.2.3
This command is supported on the Layer 3 switch.
arp gratuitous-send interval
Use this command to set the interval of sending the free ARP request message
on the interface..The no form of this command disables this function on the
interface.
arp gratuitous-send interval seconds
no arp gratuitous-send
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
The time interval to send the free
seconds
ARP request message in the range
1 to 3600 seconds
Default
This function is not enabled on the interface to send the
configuration
free ARP request regularly.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
1-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
If an interface of the switch is used as the gateway of its
Usage
guidelines
downlink devices and counterfeit gateway behavior occurs
in the downlink devices, you can configure to send the free
ARP request message regularly on this interface to notify
that the switch is the real gateway.
The following configuration sets to send one free ARP
request to SVI 1 per second.
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# arp gratuitous-send interval 1
Examples
The following configuration stops sending the free ARP
request to SVI 1.
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# no arp gratuitous-send
1.2.4
arp retry interval
Use this command to set the frequency for sending the arp request message
locally, namely, the time interval between two continuous ARP requests sent for
resolving one IP address. The no form of this command is used to restore the
default value, that is, retry an ARP request per second.
arp retry interval seconds
no arp retry interval
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Time for retrying the ARP request
seconds
message in the range of 1 to 3600
seconds, 1 second by default.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
The retry interval of the ARP request is 1s.
Global configuration mode.
The switch sends the ARP request message frequently,
Usage
guidelines
and thus causing problems like network busy. In this case,
you can set the retry interval of the ARP request message
longer. In general, it should not exceed the aging time of
the dynamic ARP entry.
1-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
The following configuration sets the retry interval of the
Examples
ARP request as 30s.
arp retry interval 30
Command
Function
Related
commands
1.2.5
arp retry times number
Set the retry time of the ARP
request message.
arp retry times
Use this command to set the local retry times of the ARP request message,
namely, the times of sending the ARP request message to resolve one IP
address. The no form of this command can be used to restore the default 5
times of the ARP retry requests.
arp retry times number
no arp retry times
Parameter
Description
The times of sending the same ARP
Parameter
description
request in the range 1 to100..When it is set
number
as 1, it indicates that the ARP request is not
retransmitted, only 1 ARP request message
is sent.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
If the ARP response message is not received, the ARP
request message will be sent for 5 times, and then it will
be timed out.
Global configuration mode.
The switch sends the ARP request message frequently,
Usage
and thus causing problems like network busy. In this case,
guidelines
you can set the retry times of the ARP request smaller. In
general, the retry times should not be set too large.
Examples
The following configuration will set the local ARP request
not to be retried.
1-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
arp retry times 1
The following configuration will set the local ARP request
to be retried for one time.
arp retry times 2
Command
Function
Related
commands
arp
retry
interval
seconds
1.2.6
Set the retry interval of the
ARP request message.
arp timeout
Use this command to configure the timeout for the ARP static mapping record in
the ARP cache. The no form of this command restores it to the default
configuration.
arp timeout seconds
no arp timeout
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
seconds
Description
The timeout ranging 0 to 2147483
seconds
The default timeout is 3600 seconds.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The ARP timeout setting is only applicable to the IP
address and the MAC address mapping that are learned
dynamically. The shorter the timeout, the truer the
Usage
mapping table saved in the ARP cache, but the more
guidelines
network bandwidth occupied by the ARP. Hence the
advantages and disadvantages should be weighted.
Generally it is not necessary to configure the ARP timeout
unless there is a special requirement.
The following is an example of setting the timeout for the
dynamic ARP mapping record that is learned dynamically
Examples
from FastEthernet port 0/1 to 120 seconds.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
arp timeout 120
1-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
commands
1.2.7
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Command
Description
clear arp-cache
Clear the ARP cache list.
show interface
Show the interface information.
arp trusted
Use this command to set the maximun number of trusted ARP entries.The no
form of this command restores it to the default value.
arp trusted number
no arp trusted
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Maximum number of trusted ARP entries
number
in the range of 10 to 4096.
The default value is different for different products.
Global configuration mode.
To make this command valid, enable the trusted ARP
function firstly. The trusted ARP entries and other entries
Usage
share the memory. Too much trusted ARP entries may
guidelines
lead to insufficient ARP entry space. In general, you
should set the maximum number of trusted ARP entries
according to your real requirements.
Examples
The following configuration sets 1000 trusted ARPs.
arp trusted 1000
Command
Function
Related
commands
service trustedarp
Enable
the
trusted
ARP
function.
1-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Platform
description
1.2.8
N/A
arp unresolve
Use this command to configure the maximum number of the unresolved ARP
entries. The no form of this command can restore it to the default value 8192.
arp unresolve number
no arp unresolve
Parameter
The
Parameter
description
Description
maximum
number
of
the
unresolved ARP entries in the range
number
of 1 to 8192. The default value is
8192.
Default
The ARP cache table can contain up to 8192 unresolved
configuration
entries.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
If there are a large number of unresolved entries in the
Usage
ARP cache table and they do not disappear after a period
guidelines
of time, this command can be used to limit the quantity of
the unresolved entries.
The following configuration sets the maximum number of
Examples
the unresolved items as 500.
arp unresolve 500
1.2.9
ip proxy-arp
Use this command to enable ARP proxy funtion on the interface. The no form of
this command disables ARP function.
ip proxy-arp
no ip proxy-arp
Default
Disabled on the version higher than 10.2(3).
1-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Proxy ARP helps those hosts without routing message
obtain MAC address of other networks or subnet IP
address. For example, a device receives an ARP request.
Usage
The IP addresses of request sender and receiver are in
guidelines
different networks. However, the device that knows the
routing of IP address of request receiver sends ARP
response, which is Ethernet MAC address of the device
itself.
The following is an example of enabling ARP on
Examples
FastEthernet port 0/1:
interface fastEthernet 0/1
ip proxy-arp
Platform
description
1.2.10
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
service trustedarp
Use this command to enable the trusted ARP function.The no form of this
command disables the trusted ARP function.
service trustedarp
no service trustedarp
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
Global configuration mode.
The trusted ARP function of the device is to prevent the
Usage
guidelines
ARP fraud function. As a part of the GSN scheme, it
should be used together with the GSN scheme.
In the following three cases, the STP protocol clears not
only the dynamic MAC address of a port but also the
1-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
trusted entries, including trusted MAC and trusted ARP:
1
STP is enabled.
2
The port is set to neither root port nor designed port.
This may be caused when the port is up or down or
the port priority is modified.
3
TC packet is received on the port, and the addresses
of the ports not receiving PC packet are cleared.
The following configuration is to enable the trusted ARP
function in the global configuration mode.
Examples
config
service trustedarp
Platform
description
1.2.11
N/A
trusted-arp user-vlan
Use this command to execute the VLAN transformation while setting the trusted
ARP entries.The no form of this command deletes an ARP entry.
trusted-arp user-vlan vid1 translated-vlan vid2
no trusted-arp user-vlan vid1
Parameter
Parameter
description
vid1
vid2
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Description
VID set by the server.
VID after the transformation.
No VLAN transformation is executed.
Global configuration mode.
In order to validate this command, enable the trusted ARP
Usage
function first. This command is needed only when the
guidelines
VLAN sent by the server is different from the VLAN which
takes effect in the trusted ARP entry.
1-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
The following configuration is to set the VLAN sent by the
Examples
server to 3, but the VLAN which takes effect in the trusted
ARP entry to 5.
trusted-arp user-vlan 3 translated-vlan 5
Command
Function
Related
commands
service trustedarp
Enable
the
trusted
ARP
function.
Platform
description
1.3
1.3.1
N/A
Broadcast Message Processing Configuration Commands
ip broadcast-addresss
Use this command to define a broadcast address for an interface in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to remove
the broadcast address configuration.
ip broadcast-addresss ip-address
no ip broadcast-addresss
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip-address
Broadcast address of IP network
Default
The default IP broadcast address is 255.255.255.255.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
At present, the destination address of IP broadcast packet
Usage
guidelines
is all “1”, represented as 255.255.255.255. The DGS-8000
can generate broadcast packets with other IP addresses
through definition, and can receive both all “1” and the
broadcast packets defined by itself.
Examples
The following is an example of setting the destination
1-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
address of IP broadcast packets generated by this
interface to 0.0.0.0.
ip broadcast-address
0.0.0.0
Platform
description
1.3.2
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
ip directed-broadcast
Use this command to enable the conversion from IP directed broadcast to
physical broadcast in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to remove the configuration.
ip directed-broadcast [ access-list-number ]
no ip directed-broadcast
Parameter
Description
(Optional)
list
number
ranging 1 to 199 and 1300 to 2699.
Parameter
description
Access
access-list-number
After an access list number has been
defined,
only
the
IP
directed
broadcast packets that match this
access list are converted.
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
1-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
IP directed broadcast packet is an IP packet whose
destination address is an IP subnet broadcast address.
For example, the packet with the destination address
172.16.16.255 is called a directed broadcast packet.
However, the node that generates this packet is not a
member of the destination subnet.
The device that is not directly connected to the destination
subnet receives an IP directed broadcast packet and
handles this packet in the same way as forwarding a
unicast packet. After the directed broadcast packet
reaches a device that is directly connected to this subnet,
the device converts the directed broadcast packet into a
flooding broadcast packet (typically the broadcast packet
whose destination IP address is all “1”), and then sends
the packet to all the hosts in the destination subnet in the
manner of link layer broadcast.
Usage
guidelines
You can enable conversion from directed broadcast into
physical broadcast on a specified interface, so that this
interface can forward a direct broadcast packet to a
directly connected network. This command affects only the
final transmission of directed broadcast packets that have
reached the destination subnet instead of normal
forwarding of other directed broadcast packets.
You can also define an access list on an interface to
control which directed broadcast packets to forward. After
an access list is defined, only the packets that conform to
the conditions defined in the access list undergo
conversion
from
directed
broadcast
into
physical
broadcast.
If no ip directed-broadcast is configured on an interface,
DGS-8000 will discard the directed broadcast packets
received from the directly connected network.
The following is an example of enabling forwarding of
directed broadcast packet on the fastEthernet 0/1 port of a
Examples
device.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
ip directed-broadcast
Platform
description
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
1-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.4
1.4.1
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
IP Address Monitoring and Maintenance Commands
clear arp-cache
Use this command to remove a dynamic ARP mapping record from the ARP
cache table and clear an IP route cache table in the privileged mode.
clear arp-cache [vrf vrf_name | trusted ] [ip [mask] ] | interface
interface-name]
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command can be used to refresh an ARP cache
guidelines
table.
On a NFPP-based(Network Foundation Protection Policy) device,
it receives one ARP packet for every mac/ip address per second
by default. If the interval of two clear arp times is within 1s, the
Caution
second response packet will be filtered and the ARP packet will
not be resolved for a short time.
The following is an example of removing all dynamic ARP
mapping records.
clear arp-cache
The
Examples
following is an example of removing dynamic ARP
table entry 1.1.1.1
clear arp-cache 1.1.1.1
The following is an example of removing dynamic ARP
table entry on interface SVI1
clear arp-cache interface Vlan 1
Related
commands
Command
arp
Description
Add a static mapping record to the ARP
cache table.
Platform
description
N/A
1-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.4.2
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
clear ip route
Use this command to remove the entire IP routing table or a particular routing
record in the IP routing table in the privileged user mode.
clear ip route { * | network [ netmask ] }
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
*
Remove all the routes.
network
netmask
The network or subnet address to be
removed
(Optional) Network mask
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Once an invalid route is found in the routing table, you can
Usage
guidelines
immediately refresh the routing table to get the updated
routes. Note that, however, refreshing the entire routing
table will result in temporary communication failure in the
entire network.
The
Examples
example
below
refreshes
only
the
route
of
192.168.12.0.
clear ip route 192.168.12.0
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip route
Show the IP routing table.
Platform
description
1.4.3
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
show arp
Use this command to show the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache table
show arp [[vrf vrf-name] [trusted] ip [mask] | static | complete | incomplete |
mac-address ]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Show the ARP entry of the specified IP
ip
address.
1-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
VRF instance, which shows the ARP
vrf vrf-name
entry with specified VRF.
Show the ARP entries of the network
ip mask
segment included within the mask.
Show the ARP entry of the specified
mac-address
MAC address.
static
Show all the static ARP entries.
Show all the resolved dynamic ARP
complete
entries.
Show all the unresolved dynamic ARP
incomplete
entries.
Show the ARP entry with the specified
mac-address
Command
mode
mac address.
Any
The following is the output result of the show arp command:
DGS-8000# show arp
Total Numbers of Arp: 7
Protocol
Address
Age(min)
Hardware
Type
192.168.195.68
0
0013.20a5.7a5f
arpa
192.168.195.67
0
001a.a0b5.378d
arpa
192.168.195.65
0
0018.8b7b.713e
arpa
192.168.195.64
0
0018.8b7b.9106
arpa
192.168.195.63
0
001a.a0b5.3990
arpa
192.168.195.62
0
001a.a0b5.0b25
arpa
192.168.195.5
--
00d0.f822.33b1
arpa
Interface
Internet
VLAN 1
Internet
VLAN 1
Internet
VLAN 1
Examples
Internet
VLAN 1
Internet
VLAN 1
Internet
VLAN 1
Internet
VLAN 1
The meaning of each field in the ARP cache table is
described as below:
Table 1 Fields in the ARP cache table
1-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Field
Description
Protocol
Protocol
of
the
network
address,
always to be Internet
IP
Address
address
corresponding
to
the
hardware address
Age of the ARP cache record, in
minutes; If it is not locally or statically
Age (min)
configured, the value of the field is
represented with “-”.
Hardware address corresponding to
Hardware
the IP address
Hardware address type, ARPA for all
Type
Ethernet addresses
Interface
Interface
associated
with
the
IP
addresses
The following is the output result of show
arp 192.168.195.68
DGS-8000# show arp 192.168.195.68
Protocol
Address
Age(min)
Hardware
Type
Interface
Internet
192.168.195.68
1
0013.20a5.7a5f
arpa
VLAN
1
The following is the output result of
show arp 192.168.195.0
255.255.255.0
DGS-8000# show arp 192.168.195.0 255.255.255.0
Protocol
Address
Age(min)
Hardware
Type
Interface
Internet
192.168.195.64
0
0018.8b7b.9106
arpa
VLAN
192.168.195.2
1
00d0.f8ff.f00e
arpa
VLAN
00d0.f822.33b1
arpa
1
Internet
1
Internet
192.168.195.5
--
VLAN 1
Internet
192.168.195.1
0
00d0.f8a6.5af7
arpa
VLAN
192.168.195.51
1
0018.8b82.8691
arpa
VLAN
1
Internet
1
The following is the output result of show
arp 001a.a0b5.378d
DGS-8000# show arp 001a.a0b5.378d
1-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Protocol
Address
Age(min)
Internet
192.168.195.67
Hardware
4
Type
001a.a0b5.378d
Interface
arpa
VLAN
1
Platform
description
1.4.4
N/A
show arp counter
Use this command to show the number of ARP entries in the ARP cache table.
show arp counter
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
Any.
The following is the output result of the show arp counter
command:
DGS-8000# show arp counter
Examples
The Arp Entry counter:0
The Unresolve Arp Entry:0
The meaning of each field in the ARP cache table is
described in Table 1.
1.4.5
show arp detail
Use this command to show the details of the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP)
cache table.
show arp detail [interface-type interface-number| ip [mask] | mac-address |
static | complete | incomplete ]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Show the ARP of the layer 2 port or the
interface-number
layer 3 interface.
description
Show the ARP entry of the specified IP
ip
address.
1-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Show the ARP entries of the network
ip mask
segment included within the mask.
Show the ARP entry of the specified
mac-address
MAC address.
static
Show all the static ARP entries.
Show all the resolved dynamic ARP
complete
entries.
Show all the unresolved dynamic ARP
incomplete
Command
entries.
Privileged mode
mode
Use this command to show the ARP details, such as the
Usage
ARP type (Dynamic, Static, Local, Trust), the information
guidelines
on the layer2 port.
The following is the output result of the show arp detail
command:
DGS-8000# show arp detail
IP Address
Interface
MAC Address
Type
Age(min)
Port
20.1.1.1
000f.e200.0001
Static
--
--
-20.1.1.1
000f.e200.0001
Static
--
Vl3
000f.e200.0001
Static
--
Vl3
00e0.fe50.6503
Dynamic
1
Vl3
-20.1.1.1
Gi2/0/1
Example
s
193.1.1.70
Gi2/0/1
192.168.0.1
0012.a990.2241
Dynamic
10
Gi2/0/3
Gi2/0/3
192.168.0.1
0012.a990.2241
Dynamic
20
Ag1
0012.a990.2241
Dynamic
30
Vl2
0012.a990.2241
Local
--
Vl3
Ag1
192.168.0.1
Ag2
192.168.0.39
-192.168.0.39
0012.a990.2241
Local
--
Gi2/0/3
1-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
-192.168.0.1
0012.a990.2241
Local
--
Vl3
-192.168.0.1
0012.a990.2241
Local
--
Gi2/3/2
--
The meaning of each field in the ARP cache table is described
as below:
Table 1 Fields in the ARP cache table
Field
IP
Address
MAC
Address
Description
IP address corresponding to the hardware address
hardware address corresponding to the IP address
Age (min)
Age of the ARP learning, in minutes
Port
Layer2 port associated with the ARP
Type
Interface
ARP type, includes the Static, Dynamic, Trust,
Local.
Layer 3 interface associated with the
IP
addresses
Platform
description
1.4.6
N/A
show arp timeout
Use this command to show the aging time of a dynamic ARP entry on the
interface.
show arp timeout
Parameter
description
Command
mode
N/A.
Any.
The following is the output of the show arp timeout
command:
Examples
DGS-8000# show arp timeout
Interface
arp timeout(sec)
1-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
---------------------VLAN 1
----------------
3600
The meaning of each field in the ARP cache table is
described in Table 1.
Platform
description
1.4.7
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
show ip arp
Use this command to show the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache table
in the privileged user mode.
show ip arp
Parameter
description
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following is the output of show ip arp:
DGS-8000# show ip arp
Protocol Address
Age(min)Hardware
Type
Interface
Internet 192.168.7.233
23
0007.e9d9.0488
ARPA
10
0050.eb08.6617
ARPA
12
00d0.f808.3d5c
ARPA
50
00d0.f84e.1c7f
ARPA
36
00d0.f80d.1090
ARPA
0
0060.97bd.ebee
ARPA
57
0060.97bd.ef2d
ARPA
--
00d0.f8fb.108b
ARPA
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.112
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.79
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.1
Examples
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.215
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.127
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.195
FastEthernet 0/0
Internet 192.168.7.183
FastEthernet 0/0
Each field in the ARP cache table has the following
meanings:
Field
Description
1-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Protocol
Address
Network
address
protocol,
always Internet.
The IP address corresponding to
the hardware address.
Age of the ARP cache record, in
Age (min)
minutes; If it is not locally or
statically configured, the value of
the field is represented with “-”.
Hardware
Hardware address corresponding
to the IP address
The type of hardware address.
Type
The
value is
ARPA
for
all
Ethernet addresses.
Interface
Interface associated with the IP
address.
Platform
description
1.4.8
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
show ip interface
Use this command to show the IP status information of an interface. The
command format is as follows:
show ip interface [ interface-type interface-number | brief]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Specify interface type.
interface-number
Specify interface number.
Show the brief configurations about
description
brief
the
IP
of
the
layer-3
interface
(including the interface primary ip,
secondary ip and interface status)
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
1-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
When an interface is available, DGS-8000 will create a
direct route in the routing table. The interface is available
in that the DGS-8000 can receive and send packets
through this interface. If the interface changes from
available status to unavailable status, the DGS-8000
removes the appropriate direct route from the routing
Usage
guidelines
table.
If the interface is unavailable, i.e. two-way communication
is allowed, the line protocol status will be shown as “UP”. If
only the physical line is available, the interface status will
be shown as “UP”.
The results shown may vary with the interface type,
because some contents are the interface-specific options.
Presented below is the output of show ip interface brirf:
DGS-8000# show ip interface brief
Interface
IP-Address(Pri)
IP-Address(Sec)
Status
GigabitEthernet 0/10
2.2.2.2/24
3.3.3.3/24
DOWN
GigabitEthernet 0/11
no address
no address
DOWN
VLAN 1
1.1.1.1/24
no address
DOWN
Presented below is the output of show ip interface vlan
SwitchA#show ip interface vlan 1
VLAN 1
IP interface state is: DOWN
IP interface type is: BROADCAST
Example
IP interface MTU is: 1500
s
IP address is:
1.1.1.1/24 (primary)
IP address negotiate is: OFF
Forward direct-broadcast is: OFF
ICMP mask reply is: ON
Send ICMP redirect is: ON
Send ICMP unreachabled is: ON
DHCP relay is: OFF
Fast switch is: ON
Help address is:
Proxy ARP is: OFF
ARP packet input number:
Request packet:
0
0
1-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Reply packet:
0
Unknown packet:
0
TTL invalid packet number:
0
ICMP packet input number:
0
Echo request:
0
Echo reply:
0
Unreachable:
0
Source quench:
0
Routing redirect:
0
Description of fields in the results:
Field
Description
IP interface state is:
and both its interface hardware status
The network interface is available,
and line protocol status are “UP”.
IP interface type is:
IP interface MTU is:
Show the interface type, such as
broadcast, point-to-point, etc.
Show the MTU value of the interface.
Show the IP address and mask of the
IP address is:
interface.
IP address negotiate
Show whether the IP address is
is:
obtained through negotiation.
Forward
Show whether the directed broadcast
direct-boardcast is:
is forwarded.
ICMP mask reply is:
Show
whether
an
ICMP
mask
response message is sent.
Send ICMP redirect
Show whether an ICMP redirection
is:
message is sent.
Send
ICMP
unreachabled is:
DHCP relay is:
Fast switch is:
Show whether an ICMP unreachable
message is sent.
Show whether the DHCP relay is
enabled.
Show whether the IP fash switching
function is enabled.
Show whether horizontal split is
Route horizontal-split
enabled, which will affect the route
is:
update behavior of the distance
vector protocol.
Help address is:
Show the helper IP address.
1-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Show whether the agent ARP is
Proxy ARP is:
enabled.
ARP packet input
number:
0
Show the total number of ARP
Request
packets received on the interface,
packet:
0
including:

ARP request packet
0

ARP reply packet
Unknown

Unknown packet
Reply
packet:
packet:
0
TTL invalid
packet
number:
Show the TTL invalid packet number
ICMP packet input
number: 0
Echo request:
0
Show the total number of ICMP
packets received on the interface,
Echo reply:
0
Unreachable:
0
Source quench:
0
Routing
including:

Echo request packet

Echo reply packet

Unreachable packet

Source quench packet

Routing redirection packet
redirect:
0
Outgoing access list
Show whether an outgoing access list
is
has been configured for an interface.
Show whether an incoming access
Inbound access list is
list has been configured for an
interface.
1.4.9
show ip packet statistics
Use this command to show the statistics of IP packets.
show ip packet statistics [total | interface-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
interface-name
Interface name
description
total
Show
the
total
statistics
of
all
interfaces.
1-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands
Command
Privileged mode.
mode
Usage
N/A
guidelines
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
1-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2
2.1
2.1.1
Chapter 2 IP Service Configuration Commands
IP Service Configuration
Commands
IP Service Configuration Commands
ip mask-reply
Use this command to configure the DGS-8000 to respond the ICMP mask
request and send an ICMP response message in the interface configuration
mode. The no form of this command is used to prohibit from sending the ICMP
mask response message.
ip mask-reply
no ip mask-reply
Default
configuration
By default, no ICMP mask response message is sent.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Sometimes, a network device needs the subnet mask of a
Usage
guidelines
subnet on the Internet. To obtain such information, the
network device can send an ICMP mask request message,
and the network device that receives this message will
send a mask response message.
The following is an example of setting the FastEthernet 0/1
interface of a device to respond the ICMP mask request
Examples
message.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
ip mask-reply
Platform
This command is supported on the Layer 2 switch only.
description
2-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.1.2
Chapter 2 IP Service Configuration Commands
ip mtu
Use this command to set the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for an IP
packet in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is
used to restore it to the default configuration.
ip mtu bytes
no ip mtu
Parameter
description
Parameter
bytes
Description
Maximum transmission unit of IP packet
ranging 68 to 1500 bytes
Default
It is the same as the value configured in the interface
configuration
command mtu by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
If an IP packet is larger than the IP MTU, the DGS-8000
will split this packet. All the devices in the same physical
network segment must have the same IP MTU for the
Usage
guidelines
interconnected interface.
If the interface configuration command mtu is used to set
the maximum transmission unit value of the interface, IP
MTU will automatically match with the MTU value of the
interface. However, if the IP MTU value is changed, the
MTU value of the interface will remain unchanged.
The following is an example of setting the IP MTU value of
Examples
the fastEthernet 0/1 interface to 512 bytes.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
ip mtu 512
Related
Command
Description
commands
mtu
Set the MTU value of an interface.
Platform
This command is supported on the Layer 2 switch only.
description
2-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.1.3
Chapter 2 IP Service Configuration Commands
ip redirects
Use this command to allow the DGS-8000 to send an ICMP redirection
message in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is
used to disable the ICMP redirection function.
ip redirects
no ip redirects
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When the route is not optimum, it may make the device to
receive packets through one interface and send it though
the same interface. If the device sends the packet through
the interface through which this packet is received, the
Usage
device will send an ICMP redirection message to the data
guidelines
source, telling the data source that the gateway for the
destination address is another device in the subnet. In this
way the data source will send subsequent packets along
the optimum path.
The DGS-8000 enables ICMP redirection by default.
The following is an example of disabling ICMP redirection
Examples
for the fastEthernet 0/1 interface.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
no ip redirects
Platform
This command is supported on the Layer 2 switch only.
description
2.1.4
ip source-route
Use this command to allow the DGS-8000 to process an IP packet with source
route information in the global configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to disable the source route information processing function.
2-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 IP Service Configuration Commands
ip source-route
no ip source-route
Default
Enabled.
configuration
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
DGS-8000 supports IP source route. When the device
receives an IP packet, it will check the options of the IP
packet, such as strict source route, loose source route and
record route. Details about these options can be found in
Usage
RFC 791. If an option is found to be enabled in this packet,
guidelines
a response will be made. If an invalid option is detected,
an ICMP parameter problem message will be sent to the
data source, and then this packet is discarded.
The DGS-8000 supports IP source route by default.
The following is an example of disabling the IP source
Examples
route.
no ip source-route
Platform
This command is supported on the Layer 2 switch only.
description
2.1.5
ip unreachables
Use this command to allow the DGS-8000 to generate ICMP destination
unreachable messages. The no form of this command disables this function.
ip unreachables
no ip unreachables
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
2-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 IP Service Configuration Commands
DGS-8000 will send an ICMP destination unreachable
message
if
it
receives
unicast
message
with
self-destination-address and can not process the upeer
protocol of this message.
Usage
guidelines
DGS-8000 will send ICMP host unreachable message to
source data if it can not forward a message due to no
routing.
This
command
influences
all
ICMP
destination
unreachable messages.
The following example disables sending ICMP destination
Examples
unreachable message on FastEthernet 0/1.
interface fastEthernet 0/1
no ip unreachables
Platform
This command is not supported on the Layer 2 switch.
description
2-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3
3.1
3.1.1
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
IPv6
Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
ipv6 address
Use this command to configure an IPv6 address for a network interface. Use
the no form of this command to delete the configured address.
ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length
ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64
ipv6 address prefix-name sub-bits/prefix-length [eui-64]
no ipv6 address
no ipv6 address ipv6-address/prefix-length
no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64
no ipv6 address prefix-name sub-bits/prefix-length [eui-64]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
IPv6 address prefix in the format
defined in RFC4291. The address
ipv6-prefix
shall be in hex; the fields in the
address shall be separated by
comma, and each field shall contain
16 bits.
IPv6 address in the format defined
in RFC4291. The address shall be
ipv6-address
in hex; the fields in the address shall
be separated by comma, and each
field shall contain 16 bits.
3-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Length of the IPv6 prefix, the
network
address
of
the
IPv6
address.
prefix-length
Note: The prefix length range of the
IPv6 address of the interface of
DGS-8000 is 0 to 64 or 128 to 128.
The general prefix name.Use the
prefix-name
specified general prefix to generate
the interface address.
The value of the sub-prefix bit and
the host bit generates the interface
sub-bits
address combining with the general
prefix. The value shall be in the
format defined in the RFC4291.
The
generated
IPV6
address
consists of the address prefix and
eui-64
the 64 bit interface ID.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode
When an IPv6 interface is created and the link status is UP,
the system will automatically generate a local IP address for
the interface.
The IPv6 address could also be generated using the general
prefix. That is, the IPv6 address consists of the general prefix
and the sub-prefix and the host bit. The general prefix could
be configured using the ipv6 general-prefix command or
may be learned through the DHCPv6 agent PD (Prefix
Usage
Discovery)
function
(please
refer
to
the
DHCPv6
guidelines
Configuration). Use the sub-bits/prefix-length parameter of
this command to configure the sub-prefix and the host bit.
If no deleted address is specified when using no ipv6
address, all the manually configured addresses will be
deleted.
no ipv6 address ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64 can be used
to delete the addresses configured with ipv6 address
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length eui-64.
3-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
For the DGS-8000 series, The length of the
IPv6 address prefix is not limited, but there
are 512 IPv6 routings of which prefix length
Caution
supported by the switch is in the range of
65 to 127.
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 address 2001:1::1/64
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# no ipv6 address 2001:1::1/64
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 address 2002:1::1/64 eui-64
DGS-8000(config-if)# no ipv6 address 2002:1::1/64 eui-64
3.1.2
ipv6 address autoconfig
Use this command to automatically configure an IPv6 stateless address for a
network interface. Use the no form of this command to delete the
auto-configured address.
ipv6 address autoconfig[default]
no ipv6 address autoconfig
Parameter
Description
(Optional)
Parameter
description
If
this
keyword
is
configured, a default routing is
generated. Note that only one layer3
default
interface on the entire device is
allowed to use the default keyword.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode
The stateless automatic address configuration is that when
receiving the RA (Route Advertisement) message, the
device could use the prefix information of the RA message
to automatically generate the EUI-64 interface address.
Usage
guidelines
If the RA message contains the flag of the “other
configurations”, the interface will obtain these “other
configurations”
through
the
DHCPv6.
The
“other
configurations” usually means the IPv6 address of the
DNS server, the IPv6 address of the NTP server, etc.
Use the no ipv6 address autoconfig command to delete
the IPv6 address.
3-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 address autoconfig default
DGS-8000(config-if)# no ipv6 address autoconfig
Command
Description
Related
ipv6 address
commands
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
[eui-64]
3.1.3
Configure the IPv6 address for
the interface manually .
ipv6 enable
Use this command to enable the IPv6 function on an interface. Use the no form
of this command to disable this function.
ipv6 enable
no ipv6 enable
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The IPv6 function of an interface can be enabled by
configuring ipv6 enable or by configuring IPv6 address for
the interface.
Usage
If an IPv6 address is configured for the
guidelines
interface, the IPv6 function will be enabled
Caution
Examples
Related
commands
automatically on the interface and cannot
be disabled with no ipv6 enable.
DGS-8000(config-if)#
ipv6 enable
Command
Description
show ipv6
Show the related information of an
interface
interface.
3-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.4
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
ipv6 general-prefix
Use this command to configure the IPv6 general prefix in the global
configuration mode.
ipv6 general-prefix prefix-name ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
no ipv6 general-prefix prefix-name ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Parameter
Description
prefix-name
The general prefix name.
Parameter
description
The network prefix value of the
pv6-prefix
general-prefix following the format
defined in RFC4291.
prefix-length
The length of the general prefix.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
It is convenient to number the network by using the
general prefix, which defines a prefix so that many longer
specified prefixes could refer to it. These specified prefixes
Usage
are updated whenever the general prefix changes. If the
guidelines
network number changes, just modify the general prefix.
A general prefix could contain multiple prefixes.
These longer specified prefixes is usually used for the Ipv6
address configuration on the interface.
The following example configures manually a general
Examples
prefix as my-prefix.
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 general-prefix my-prefix
2001:1111:2222::/48
Command
ipv6 address
Related
prefix-name
commands
sub-bits/prefix-length
show ipv6
general-prefix
Description
Configure the interface address
using the general prefix.
Show the general prefix.
3-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.5
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
ipv6 hop-limit
Use this command to configure the default hopcount to send unicast messages
in the global configuration mode.
ipv6 hop-limit value
no ipv6 hop-limit
Default
configuration
The default is 64.
Command
3.1.6
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command takes effect for the unicast messages only,
guidelines
not for multicast messages.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 hop-limit 100
ipv6 neighbor
Use this command to configure a static neighbor. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
ipv6 neighbor ipv6-address interface-id hardware-address
no ipv6 neighbor ipv6-address interface-id
Parameter
Description
IPv6 address of the neighbor. It must
ipv6-address
follow the address format defined in
RFC4291.
Network interface of the neighbor
Parameter
description
interface-id
(including
routed
Port,
L3
AP
interface, or SVI interface).
Hardware address of the neighbor. It
hardware-address
shall be a 48-bit MAC address in the
format of XXXX.XXXX.XXXX, where
“X” is a hexadecimal number.
Default
configuration
No static neighbor is configured.
3-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Similar to the ARP command, the static neighbor can only
be configured on an IPv6 protocol enabled interface.
If the neighbor to be configured has been learned through
NDP and has been stored in the neighbor list, the
Usage
guidelines
dynamically generated neighbor will be automatically
switched to a static one. The configured static neighbor is
always in the Reachable status.
Use clear ipv6 neighbors to clear all the neighbors
dynamically learned through NDP.
Use show ipv6 neighbors to view the neighbor
information.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#
Command
Related
commands
show
neighbor
2001::1
vlan
1
Description
ipv6
neighbors
clear
neighbors
3.1.7
ipv6
00d0.f811.1111
ipv6
Show the neighbor information.
Clear
the
neighbors
learned
dynamically.
ipv6 nd dad attempts
Use this command to set the number of the NS packets to be continuously sent
for IPv6 address collision check on the interface. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 nd dad attempts value
no ipv6 nd dad attempts
Parameter
Number of the NS packets. If it is set to
Parameter
description
Description
value
0, it indicates that the IPv6 address
collision check is disabled on the
interface. The range is 0 to 600.
Default
configuration
1.
3-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When the interface is configured with a new IPv6 address,
the address collision shall be checked before the address
is assigned to the interface, and the address shall be in
the ”tentative” status. After the address collision check is
completed, if no collision is detected, the address can be
used normally; if collision is detected and the interface ID
Usage
guidelines
of the address is an EUI-64 ID, it indicates that the
link-layer address is repeated, and the system will
automatically shut down the interface (that is, to prohibit
IPv6 operations on the interface). In this case, you shall
modify and configure a new address manually, and restart
address collision check for the down/up interface.
Whenever the state of an interface changes from down to
up, the address collision check function of the interface will
be enabled.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd dad attempts 3
Command
show ipv6
interface
3.1.8
Description
Show the interface information.
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
Use this command to set the “managed address configuration” flag bit of the RA
message. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
no ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Interface configuration mode.
This flag determines whether the host that receives the RA
message obtains an IP address through stateful auto
configuration. If the flag is set, the host obtains an IP
3-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
address through stateful auto configuration, otherwise it
does not be used.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd managed-config-flag
Command
show
Related
Description
ipv6
Show the interface information.
interface
commands
ipv6
Set
nd
flag
for
obtaining
all
information except IP address through
other-config-flag
3.1.9
the
stateful auto configuration.
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
Use this command to set “other stateful configuration” flag bit of the RA
message. Use the no form of this command to delete the flag bit.
ipv6 nd other-config-flag
no ipv6 nd other-config-flag
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
configuration
The flag bit is not set by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
With this flag bit set, the flag bit of the RA message sent by
the device is set. After receiving this flag bit, the host uses
Usage
the dhcpv6 to acquire the information excluding the IPv6
guidelines
address for the purpose of automatic configuration. When
the managed address configuration is set, the default
other stateful configuration is also set.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd other-config-flag
Related
Command
Description
3-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
show ipv6
interface
3.1.10
Show the interface information.
ipv6 nd ns-interval
Use this command to set the interval for the interface to retransmitting NS
(Neighbor Solicitation). Use the no form of this command to restore it to the
default setting.
ipv6 nd ns-interval milliseconds
no ipv6 nd ns-interval
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Interval for retransmitting NS in the
description
milliseconds
range of 1000 to 429467295
milliseconds
Default
The default value in RA is 0 (unspecified); the interval for
configuration
retransmitting NS is 1000ms(1s).
Command
Interface configuration mode.
mode
The configured value will be advertised through RA and
Usage
will be used by the device itself. It is not recommended to
guidelines
set a too short interval.
Examples
DGS-8000(conifig-if)# ipv6 nd ns-interval 2000
Command
Related
show ipv6
commands
interface
3.1.11
Description
Show the interface information.
ipv6 nd prefix
Use this command to configure the address prefix included in the RA. Use the
no form of this command to delete the set prefix or restore it to the default
setting.
ipv6
nd
prefix
preferred-lifetime
{ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
]
|
[
at
valid-date
|
default
preferred-date
}[
[
]
valid-lifetime
|
[infinite
|
preferred-lifetime ] ] [no-advertise] | [[ off-link ] [ no-autoconfig ]]
3-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
no
ipv6
nd
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
prefix
{ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
|
default
}[
[off-link]
[no-autoconfig] | [no-advertise] ]
Parameter
ipv6-prefix
prefix-length
valid-lifetime
preferred-lifetime
at
valid-date
preferred-date
Parameter
description
Description
IPv6 network ID following the format
defined in RFC4291
Length of the IPv6 prefix. “/” shall be
added in front of the prefix
Valid lifetime of the RA prefix received
by the host
Preferred lifetime of the RA prefix
received by the host
Set the dead line for the valid lifetime
and that of the preferred lifetime, in
day, month, year, hour, minute.
infinite
Indicate that the prefix is always valid.
default
Set the default perfix.
no-advertise
The prefix will not be advertised by the
device.
When the host sends an IPv6 packet,
if the prefix of the destination address
matches the set prefix, it is considered
off-link
that the destination is on-link and is
directly reachable. If this option is set,
it indicates that the prefix is not used
for on-link judgment.
Indicate that the RA prefix received by
no-autoconfig
the host cannot be used for auto
address configuration.
By default, the advertised prefix is the one set with ipv6
address on the interface. The default parameters of the
prefix configured in the RA are as follows:
Default
configuration
valid-lifetime: 2592000s (30 days)
preferred-lifetime: 604800s (7 days),
The prefix is advertised and is used for on-link judgment
and auto address configuration.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
This command can be used to configure the parameters of
3-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
each prefix, including whether to advertise the prefix. By
default, the prefix advertised in RA is the one set with ipv6
address on the interface. To add other prefixes, use this
command.
ipv6 nd prefix default
Set the default parameters to be used by the interface. If
no parameter is specified for an added prefix, the
parameters set with ipv6 nd prefix default will be used.
Note that after a parameter is specified for the prefix, the
default configuration will not be used. That is to say, the
configuration of the prefix cannot be modified with ipv6 nd
prefix default; only the prefix that uses all the default
configurations can be modified with this command.
at valid-date preferred-date
The valid lifetime of a prefix can be specified in two ways.
One way is to specify a fixed time for each prefix in the RA;
the other way is to specify the end time (in this mode, the
valid lifetime of the prefix sent in RA will be gradually
reduced until the end time is 0).
The following example adds a prefix for SVI 1.
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 1
DGS-8000(conifig-if)# ipv6 nd prefix 2001::/64 infinite
Examples
2592000
The following example sets the default prefix parameters
for SVI 1 (they cannot be used for auto address
configuration):
DGS-8000(config)# interface vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 prefix default
no-autoconfig
If no parameter is specified, the default parameters will be
used, and the prefix cannot be used for auto address
configuration.
Related
commands
3.1.12
Command
Description
show ipv6
Show
interface
interface.
the
RA
information
of
an
ipv6 nd ra-hoplimit
Use this command to set the hopcount of the RA message. Use the no form of
this command to restore it to the default setting.
3-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
ipv6 nd ra-hoplimit value
no ipv6 nd ra-hoplimit
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
value
Hopcount
Default
configuration
The default value is 64.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
It is used to set the hopcount of the RA message.
Examples
DGS-8000(config -if)# ipv6 nd ra-hoplimit 110
Command
show
Description
ipv6
interface
Related
ipv6
commands
ra-lifetime
ipv6
3.1.13
nd
nd
Show the interface information.
Set the lifetime of the device.
Set the interval of sending the RA
ra-interval
message.
ipv6 nd ra-mtu
Set the MTU of the RA message.
ipv6 nd ra-interval
Use this command to set the interval of sending the RA. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 nd ra-interval {seconds | min-max min_value max_value}
no ipv6 nd ra-interval
Parameter
Parameter
description
seconds
min-max
min_value
Description
Interval of sending the RA message in
seconds, 3-1800s.
Maximum
and
minimum
interval
sending the RA message in seconds
Minimum
interval
sending
the
RA
message in seconds
3-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Maximum interval sending the RA
max_value
message in seconds
Default
200s. The actual interval of sending the RA message will
configuration
be fluctuated 20% based on 200s.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
If the device serves as the default device, the set interval
shall not be longer than the lifetime of the device. Besides,
to ensure other devices along the link occupies network
Usage
guidelines
bandwidth while sending the RA message, the actual
interval for sending the RA message will be fluctuated 20%
based on the set value.
If the key word min-max is specified, the actual interval for
sending the packet will be chosen between the range of
minimum value and maximum value.
Examples
DGS-8000(conifig-if)# ipv6 nd ra-interval 110
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd ra-interval min-max 110 120
Command
show
Description
ipv6
interface
Related
ipv6
commands
ra-lifetime
ipv6
nd
nd
ra-hoplimit
ipv6 nd ra-mtu
3.1.14
Show the interface information.
Set the lifetime of the device.
Set the hopfcount of the RA message.
Set the MTU of the RA message.
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
Use this command to set the device lifetime of the RA sent on the interface. Use
the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 nd ra-lifetime seconds
no ipv6 nd ra-lifetime
3-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Default life time of the device on the
seconds
interface, 0-9000.
Default
configuration
1800s.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The router lifetime field is available in each RA. It specifies
the time during which the hosts along the link of the
Usage
interface can select the device as the default device. If the
guidelines
value is set to 0, the device will not serve as the default
device any longer. If it is not set to 0, it shall be larger than
or equal to the interval of sending the RA (ra-interval).
Examples
DGS-8000(conifig-if)# ipv6 nd ra-lifetime 2000
Command
show
Description
ipv6
interface
Related
ipv6
commands
ra-interval
ipv6
nd
nd
ra-hoplimit
ipv6 nd ra-mtu
3.1.15
Show the interface information.
Set the interval of sending the RA.
Set the hopcount of the RA.
Set the MTU of the RA.
ipv6 nd ra-mtu
Use this command to set the MTU of the RA messag. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 nd ra-mtu value
no ipv6 nd ra-mtu
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
value
MTU value, 0-4294967295.
Default
configuration
IPv6 MTU value of the network interface.
3-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
If it is specified as 0, the RA will not have the MTU option.
Examples
DGS-8000(config -if)# ipv6 nd ra-mtu 1400
Command
show
Description
ipv6
interface
Related
commands
ipv6
nd
ra-lifetime
ipv6
nd
nd
ra-hoplimit
3.1.16
Set the lifetime of the device.
Set the interval of sending the RA
message.
ra-interval
ipv6
Show the interface information.
Set the hopcount of the RA message.
ipv6 nd reachable-time
Use this command to set the reachable time after the interface checks the
reachability of the neighbor dynamically learned through NDP. Use the no form
of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 nd reachable-time milliseconds
no ipv6 nd reachable-time
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
milliseconds
Reachable time for the neighbor in the
range 0 to 3600000 milliseconds.
The default value in RA is 0 (unspecified); the reachable
time for the neighbor is 30000ms(30s) when the device
discovers the neighbor.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
The device checks the unreachable neighbor through the
guidelines
set time. A shorter time means that the device can check
3-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
the neighbor failure more quickly, but more network
bandwidth
and
device
resource
will
be
occupied.
Therefore, it is not recommended to set a too short
reachable time.
The configured value will be advertised through RA and
will be used by the device itself. If the value is set to 0, it
indicates that the time is not specified, that is, the default
value is used.
According to RFC4861, the actual time to reach neighbor
is not consistent with the configured value, ranging from
0.5*configured value to 1.5*configured value.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd reachable-time 1000000
Command
Description
show ipv6
Show the interface information.
interface
3.1.17
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
Use this command to disable the interface from sending the RA message. Use
the no form of this command to enable the function.
ipv6 nd suppress-ra
no ipv6 nd suppress-ra
Default
The RA message is not sent on the IPv6 interface by
configuration
default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
This command suppresses the sending of the RA
guidelines
message on an interface.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 nd suppress-ra
Related
commands
Command
show
interface
Description
ipv6
Show the interface information.
3-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.18
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
ipv6 ns-linklocal-src
Use this command to set the local address of the link as the source IP address
to send neighbor requests. When no ipv6 ns-linklocal-src is executed, the
global IP address will be taken as the source address to send neighbor
requests.
ipv6 ns-linklocal-src
no ipv6 ns-linklocal-src
Default
The local address of the link is always used as the source
configuration
address to send neighbor requests.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
3.1.19
guidelines
None.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# no ipv6 ns-linklocal-src
ipv6 redirects
Use this command to control whether to send ICMPv6 redirect message when
the switch receives and forwards an IPv6 packet through an interface. Use the
no form of this command to disable the function.
ipv6 redirects
no ipv6 redirects
Default
The ICMPv6 redirect message is permitted to be sent on
configuration
the IPV6 interface.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
The transmission rate of any ICMPv6 error message is
guidelines
limited. By default, it is 10pps.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 redirects
Related
Command
Description
3-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
show
ipv6
interface
3.1.20
Show the interface information.
ipv6 route
Use this command to configure an IPv6 static route. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
ipv6 route ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {ipv6-address | interface-id [ipv6-address] }
[distance] [weight number]
Parameter
Description
IPV6 network number following the
format specified in RFC4291.
prefix-length: Length of the IPv6 prefix.
ipv6-prefix
“/” must be added in front of the prefix.
Note: The prefix length range of the
static routes of DGS-8000 is 0 to 64 or
128 to 128.
Next-hop IP address to the destination
address. It shall be in the format defined
in RFC4291. The next-hop IP address
ipv6-address
and the next-hop outgoing interface can
be specified at the same time. Note that
if the next-hop IP address is a link-local
address, the outgoing interface must be
Parameter
specified.
description
VRF in the nexthop, which must be the
vrf-name1
multi-protocol
VRF
with
the
IPv6
address family configured.
The outgoing interface toward the
destination network. If the static route is
configured with the outgoing interface
but no next-hop address is specified,
the
interface-id
destination
address
will
be
considered on the link connected with
the outgoing interface; that is to say, the
static route will be treated as a
directly-connected route. Note that if the
destination
network
or
next-hop
address is a link-local address, the
outgoing interface must be specified.
3-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Note: If the destination IP address or next-hop IP address
is a link-local IP address, the outgoing interface must be
specified; if the destination address is a link-local IP
address, the next-hop must be also a link-local IP address.
Usage
When configuring a route, the destination IP address and
guidelines
the next-hop IP address shall not be a multicast address. If
both the next hop IP address and the outgoing interface
are specified, the outgoing interface of the direct route that
matches the next hop shall be the same as the configured
outgoing interface.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 route 2001::/64 vlan 1 2005::1
Platform
description
Related
commands
None
Command
show
Description
ipv6
route
3.1.21
Show the IPv6 route information.
ipv6 source-route
Use this command to forward the IPv6 packet with route header. The no form of
this command disables the forwarding.
ipv6 source-route
no ipv6 source-route
Parameter
description
None.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Because of the potential security of the header of type 0
3-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
route, it’s easy for the device to suffer from the denial
service attack. Therefore, forwarding the IPv6 packet with
route header is disabled by default. However, the IPv6
packet of route header with type 0 that destined to the
local machine is processed.
Examples
Related
commands
3.1.22
DGS-8000(config)# no ipv6 source-route
None.
ping ipv6
Use this command to diagnose the connectivity of the IPv6 network.
ping ipv6 [ipv6-address]
Parameter
description
Parameter
ipv6-address
Description
Destination IP address to be
diagnosed.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
If no destination address is entered in the command, the
user interaction mode is entered, and you can specify
the parameters. The following table shows the meanings
of symbols returned by the ping command:
Signs
Meaning
!
The response to each request sent is
received.
Usage
.
guidelines
The response to the request sent is not
received within a regulated time.
U
The device has no route to the destination
host.
R
Parameter error.
F
No system resource is available.
A
The source IP address of the packet is not
selected.
3-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
D
The network interface is in the Down status,
or the IPv6 function is disabled on the the
interface (for example, IP address collision is
detected).
?
Examples
3.2
3.2.1
Unknown error
DGS-8000# ping ipv6 fec0::1
Showing Related Command
clear ipv6 neighbors
Use this command to clear the dynamically learned neighbors.
clrear ipv6 neighbors
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vrf-name
VRF name
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Privileged mode.
This command can be used to clear all the neighbors
dynamically learned by the neighbor discovering. Note that
the static neighbors will not be cleared.
DGS-8000# clear ipv6 neighbors
Command
Description
Related
ipv6 neighbor
Configure the neighbor.
commands
show ipv6
neighbors
Show the neighbor information.
Platform
description
3.2.2
N/A
show ipv6 address
Use this command to show the IPv6 addresses.
3-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
show ipv6 address [interface-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-name
Interface name
Command
mode
Usage
Privileged mode.
N/A
guidelines
Examples
N/A
Platform
description
3.2.3
N/A
show ipv6 general-prefix
Use this command to show the information of the general prefix.
show ipv6 general-prefix
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
Use this command to show the information of the general
prefix including the manually configured and learned from
the DHCPv6 agent.
The following example shows the information of the
general prefix
DGS-8000# show ipv6 general-prefix
Examples
There is 1 general prefix.
IPv6 general prefix my-prefix, acquired via Manual
configuration
2001:1111:2222::/48
2001:1111:3333::/48
Related
commands
Command
ipv6
general-prefix
Description
Configure the general prefix.
3-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.2.4
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
show ipv6 interface
Use this command to show the IPv6 interface information.
show ipv6 interface [interface-id] [ra-info]
Parameter
Parameter
interface-id
description
ra-info
Description
Interface (including Ethernet interface,
aggregateport, or SVI)
Show the RA information of the
interface.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
Use this command to show the address configuration, ND
guidelines
configuration and other information of an IPv6 interface.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 interface vlan 1
Interface vlan 1 is Up, ifindex: 2001
address(es):
Mac Address: 00:00:00:00:00:01
INET6: fe80::200:ff:fe00:1 , subnet is fe80::/64
Joined group address(es):
ff01:1::1
ff02:1::1
ff02:1::2
ff02:1::1:ff00:1
INET6: 2001::1 , subnet is 2001::/64 [TENTATIVE]
Joined group address(es):
ff01:1::1
Examples
ff02:1::1
ff02:1::2
ff02:1::1:ff00:1
MTU is 1500 bytes
ICMP error messages limited to one every 10 milliseconds
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 1
ND reachable time is 30000 milliseconds
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds
ND router advertisements are sent every 200
seconds<240--160>
ND device advertisements live for 1800 seconds
3-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
The following line is included in the above information:
2001::1, subnet is 2001::/64 [TENTATIVE]. The flag bit in
the [ ] following the INET6 address is explained as follows:
Flag
ANYCAST
Meaning
Indicate that the address
is an anycast address.
Indicate that the DAD is
TENTATIVE
underway. The address
is a tentative before the
DAD is completed.
DUPLICAT
Indicate that a duplicate
ED
address exists.
DEPRECAT
ED
Indicate
that
the
preferred lifetime of the
address expires.
Indicate that no DAD is
NODAD
implemented
for
the
address.
Indicate
interface
AUTOIFID
that
ID
the
of
the
address is automatically
generated
by
the
system, which is usually
an EUI-64 ID.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 interface vlan 1 ra-info
vlan 1: DOWN
RA timer is stopped
waits: 0, initcount: 3
statistics: RA(out/in/inconsistent): 4/0/0, RS(input):
0
Link-layer address: 00:00:00:00:00:01
Physical MTU: 1500
ND device advertisements live for 1800 seconds
ND device advertisements are sent every 200
seconds<240--160>
Flags: !M!O, Adv MTU: 1500
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised retransmit time is 0 milliseconds
ND advertised CurHopLimit is 64
Prefixes: (total: 1)
fec0:1:1:1::/64(Def,Auto,vltime: 2592000, pltime:
604800, flags: LA)
Description of the fields in ra-info:
3-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Field
Meaning
RA timer
is
Indicate whether the RA timer is
stopped
started.
(on)
Indicate that the RS is received
waits
but the number of the responses
is not available.
initcount
Indicate the number of the RAs
when the RA timer is restarted.
out: Indicate the number of the
RAs that are sent.
In: Indicate the number of the
RA(out/in/
RAs that are received.
inconsiste
inconsistent: Indicate the number
nt)
of the received RAs in which the
parameters are different from
those contained in the RAs
advertised by the device.
RS(input)
Indicate the number of the RSs
that are received.
Link-layer
Link-layer address of the
address
interface.
Physical
MTU
Link MTU of the interface.
!M indicates the
!M | M
managed-config-flag bit in the
RA is not set.
M: Conversely
!O indicates the other-config-flag
!O | O
bit in the RA is not set.
O: Conversely
Description of the fields of the prefix list in ra-info:
Field
total
Meaning
The number of the prefixes of
the interface.
3-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
fec0:1:1:
1::/64
Def
A specific prefix.
Indicate that the interfaces use
the default prefix.
Auto: Indicate the prefix is
automatically generated after
Auto |
the interface is configured with
CFG
the corresponding IPv6
address. CFG: Indicate that the
prefix is manually configured.
!Adv
vltime
pltime
Indicate that the prefix will not
be advertised.
Valid lifetime of the prefix,
measured in seconds.
Preferred lifetime of the prefix,
measured in seconds.
L: Indicate that the on-link in the
L | !L
prefix is set.
!L: Indicate that the on-link in
the prefix is not set.
A: Indicate that the
auto-configure in the prefix is
A | !A
set. !A: It indicates that the
auto-configure in the prefix is
not set.
3.2.5
show ipv6 neighbors
Use this command to show the IPv6 neighbors.
show ipv6 neighbors [verbose] [interface-id] [ipv6-address]
show ipv6 neighbors static
Parameter
Parameter
Description
verbose
Show the neighbor details.
static
description
interface-id
ipv6-addres
Show the validity status of static
neighbors.
Show the neighbors of the specified
interface.
Show the neighbors of the specified
IPv6 address.
3-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Show the neighbors on the SVI 1 interface:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 neighbors vlan 1
IPv6 Address Linklayer Addr
Interface
fa::1
vlan 1
00d0.0000.0002
fe80::200:ff:fe00:2
00d0.0000.0002
vlan 1
Show the neighbor details:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 neighbors verbose
IPv6 Address
2001::1
Linklayer Addr Interface
00d0.f800.0001 vlan 1
State: Reach/H Age: - asked: 0
fe80::200:ff:fe00:1
00d0.f800.0001 vlan 1
State: Reach/H Age: - asked: 0
Field
Meaning
IPv6 Address
IPv6 address of the Neighbor
Linklayer Addr
Interface
Link address, namely, MAC address. If it is
not available, incomplete is displayed.
Interface the neighbor locates.
State of the neighbor: state/H(R)
The values of STATE are as below:
Usage
INCMP
guidelines
resolution of the neighbor is underway, the
(Incomplete):
The
address
NS is sent, but the NA is not received.
REACH
(Reachable):
The
switch
is
connected with the neighbor. In this state,
the switch takes no additional action when
sending packets to the neighbor.
STALE: The reachable time of the neighbor
expires. In this state, the switch takes no
State
additional action; it only starts NUD
(Neighbor Unreachability Detection) after a
packet is sent to the neighbor.
DELAY: A packet is sent to the neighbor in
STALE state. If the STALE state changes
to DELAY, DELAY will be changed to
PROBE
if
notification
no
is
neighbor
reachability
received
DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME
within
seconds
(5s), the NS will be sent to the neighbor to
start NUD.
PROBE: The NUD is started to check the
3-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
reachability of the neighbor. The NS
packets are sent to the neighbor at the
interval of RetransTimer milliseconds until
the response from the neighbor is received
or the number of the sent NSs hits
MAX_UNICAST_SOLICIT(3).
?: Unknown state.
/R—indicate the neighbor is considered as
a device
/H: The neighbor is a host.
The
reachable
time
of
the
neighbor. ’-‘ indicates that the neighbor is
always
reachable.
Note
that
the
reachability of a static neighbor depends
Age
on the actual situation. ’expired’ indicates
that the lifetime of the neighbor expires,
and the neighbor is waits for the triggering
of NUD.
The number of the NSs that are sent to the
Asked
neighbor for the resolution of the link
address of the neighbor.
Examples
3.2.6
DGS-8000# show ipv6 neighbors
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 neighbor
Configure a neighbor.
show ipv6 neighbors statistics
Use the following command to show the statistics of one IPv6 neighbors.
show ipv6 neighbors statistics
Use the following command to show the statistics of all IPv6 neighbors.
show ipv6 neighbors statistics all
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
3-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
Platform
description
3.2.7
Supported on all platforms.
show ipv6 packet statistics
Use this command to show the statistics of IPv6 packets.
show ipv6 packet statistics [total | interface-name]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
total
Show total statistics of all interfaces.
interface-name
Interface name
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
N/A
guidelines
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
Platform
description
3.2.8
Supported on all platforms.
show ipv6 route
Use this command to show the IPv6 route information.
show ipv6 route [static | local | connected]
3-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Parameter
Description
Parameter
static
Show the static routes.
description
local
Show the local routes.
connected
Show the directly-connected routes.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
Use this command to view the routing table.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 route
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, R - RIP, B
- BGP
I1 - ISIS L1, I2 - ISIS L2, IA - IIS interarea
L
::1/128
via ::1, loopback 0
C
fa::/64
via ::, vlan 1
L
fa::1/128
via ::, loopback 0
Examples
C
2001::/64
via ::, vlan 2
L
2001::1/128
via ::, loopback 0
L
fe80::/10
via ::1, Null0
C
fe80::/64
via ::, vlan 1
L
fe80::200:ff:fe00:1/128
via ::, loopback 0
C
fe80::/64
via ::, vlan 2
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 route
Configure a static route.
Platform
description
N/A
3-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.2.9
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
show ipv6 route summary
Use the following command to show the statistics of one IPv6 route table.
show ipv6 route summary
Use the following command to show the statistics of all IPv6 route tables.
show ipv6 route summary all
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 route
Configure a static route.
Platform
description
3.2.10
N/A
show ipv6 routers
In the IPv6 network, some neighbor routers send out the advertisement
messages. Use this command to show the neighbor routers and the
advertisement.
show ipv6 routers [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
Parameter
description
interface-type
interface-number
Description
(
Optional
advertisement
)
Show
of
the
the
routing
specified
interface.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
3-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Chapter 3 IPv6 Configuration Commands
Use this command to show the neighbor routers and the
routing advertisement. If no interface is specified, all the
routing advertisement of this device will be displayed.
The following example shows the IPv6 router
DGS-8000# show ipv6 routers
Router FE80::2D0:F8FF:FEC1:C6E1 on VLAN 2, last update 62
sec
Hops 64, Lifetime 1800 sec, ManagedFlag=0, OtherFlag=0,
MTU=1500
Examples
Preference=MEDIUM
Reachable time 0 msec, Retransmit time 0 msec
Prefix 6001:3::/64 onlink autoconfig
Valid lifetime 2592000 sec, preferred lifetime 604800
sec
Prefix 6001:2::/64 onlink autoconfig
Valid lifetime 2592000 sec, preferred lifetime 604800
sec
3-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4
4.1
4.1.1
Chapter 4 IPv6 Tunnel Configuration Commands
IPv6 Tunnel Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
tunnel destination
Use this command to specify the destination address for the tunnel. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting.
tunnel destination {ipv4-address }
no tunnel destination
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Destination address of the tunnel,
ipv4-address
namely the IPv4 address in the other
side of the tunnle..
Default
The destination address encapsulated by the tunnel is not
configuration
configured by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
A device shall not be configured multiple tunnels with the
Usage
guidelines
same encapsulation type, source address and destination
address.
Note: For auto tunnel (isatap), the destination address
shall not be configured.
The following example configures an IPv6 manual tunnel.
DGS-8000(config)# interface tunnel 1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel mode ipv6ip
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel source vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel destination 192.168.5.1
4-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 IPv6 Tunnel Configuration Commands
Command
Related
commands
tunnel source
tunnel mode
4.1.2
Description
Configure the source IP address of the
tunnel.
Configure the mode of a tunnel.
tunnel mode ipv6ip
Use this command to configure static IPv6 tunnel mode. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default IPv6 tunnel mode.
tunnel mode ipv6ip [isatap]
no tunnel mode
Parameter
description
Parameter
isatap
Description
Configure
the
tunnel
as
an
auto
ISATAP tunnel.
Default
The type of the configured IPv6 tunnel is a tunnel
configuration
configured manually.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
After a tunnel is created, it is considered to be manual
Usage
tunnel by default. You can also use tunnel mode ipv6ip
guidelines
without any parameter to set a tunnel to manual tunnel.
For an auto tunnel, no destination address is specified.
The following example configures an isatap tunnel.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface tunnel 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel mode ipv6ip isatap
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel source vlan 1
Command
Related
tunnel source
commands
Description
Configure the source address of the
tunnel.
tunnel
Configure the destination address of a
destination
tunnel.
4-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.3
Chapter 4 IPv6 Tunnel Configuration Commands
tunnel source
Use this command to specify the source IP address for the tunnel. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting.
tunnel source {ipv4-address | interface-type interface-number}
no tunnel source
Parameter
Description
Source IPv4 address of the tunnel
ipv4-address
Parameter
used as the source IP address of the
packets to be transmitted through the
tunnel.
description
Interface referenced by the tunnel,
interface-type
which will be used as the source IPv4
interface-number
address
of
the
packets
to
be
transmitted through the tunnel.
Default
configuration
No tunnel source address is configured by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
The source IP address of a tunnel can be a specified IPv4
guidelines
address or an IPv4 address of an interface.
The following example configures an IPv6 manual tunnel.
DGS-8000(config)# interface tunnel 1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel mode ipv6ip
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel source vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)# tunnel destination 192.168.5.1
Command
Description
Related
tunnel mode
Configure the mode of a tunnel.
commands
tunnel
Configure the destination address of a
destination
tunnel.
4-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5
5.1
5.1.1
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
DHCP Configuration
Commands
DHCP Configuration Related Command
address range
Use this command to specify the network segment range of the addresses that
can be allocated by CLASS associated with DHCP address pool.The no form of
this command can be used to remove the network segment range.
address range low-ip-address
high-ip-address
no address range
Parameter
Parameter
low-ip-address
description
high-ip-address
Description
Start address in the network segment
range.
End adress in the network segment
range.
By default, the associated CLASS is not configured the
Default
network segment range. It is defaulted to the address pool
range.
Command
mode
Address pool CLASS configuration mode.
Each CLASS corresponds to one network range which
must be from low address to high address, so as to allow
the duplication of network segment range between
Usage
multiple CLASSs. If the CLASS associated with the
guidelines
address
pool
is
specified
without
configuring
the
corresponding network segment range, the default
network segment range of this CLASS is same as the
range of the address pool where this CLASS is.
5-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
The configuration example below configures the network
segment of class1 associated with address pool mypool0
ranging from 172.16.1.1 to 172.16.1.8.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp pool mypool0
DGS-8000(dhcp-config)# class class1
DGS-8000 (config-dhcp-pool-class)# address range
172.16.1.1 172.16.1.8
Command
Description
Define the name of the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool and enter into the DHCP address
Related
pool configuration mode.
commands
Configure the CLASS associated with
class
the DHCP address pool and enter into
the address pool CLASS configuration
mode.
5.1.2
bootfile
Use this command to define the startup mapping file name of the DHCP client in
the DHCP address pool configuration mode.The no form of this command can
be used to remove the definition.
bootfile file-name
no bootfile
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
file-name
Startup file name.
Default
No startup file name is defined, by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
Some DHCP clients need to download the operating
system and configure the file during the startup. The
Usage
guidelines
DHCP server should provide the mapping file name
required for the startup, so that DHCP clients can
download the file from the corresponding server (such as
TFTP). Other servers are defined by the next-server
command.
5-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
The configuration example below defines the device.conf
Examples
as the startup file name.
bootfile device.conf
Command
Description
Define the name of the DHCP address
Related
ip dhcp pool
commands
pool configuration mode.
next-server
5.1.3
pool and enter into the DHCP address
Configure the next server IP address of
the DHCP client startup process.
class
Use this command to configure the associted CLASS in the DHCP address
pool.The no form of this command is used to delete the associated CLASS.
class class-name
no class
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Class
class-name
name,
which
can
be
the
character string or numeric such as
myclass or 1.
Default
By default, no CLASS is associated with the address pool.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
5-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Each
DHCP
assignment
address
according
pool
to
performs
the
the
Option82
address
matching
information. We can divide this Option82 information into
classes and specify the available network segment range
for these classes in the DHCP address pool. These
classes are called CLASS. One DHCP address pool can
map to multiple CLASSes, and each CLASS can specify
different network segment range.
During the address assignment, firstly, ensure the
assignable address pool through the network segment
where the client is, then according to the Option82
Usage
guidelines
information further ensure the CLASS and assign the IP
address from the network segment range corresponding to
the CLASS. If one request packet matches multiple
CLASSes in the address pool, perform the address
assignment according to the sequencing of configuring the
CLASS in the address pool. If this CLASS’s assigned
addresses have been to the upper limit, then continue to
assign the address from the next CLASS, and so on. Each
CLASS corresponds to one network segment range that
must be from low addresses to high addresses and the
duplicated network ranges between multiple CLASSes are
allowed. If the CLASS corresponding to the address pool
is specified, this CLASS’s default network segment range
is same as the range of address pool where the CLASS is.
The configuration example below configures the address
Examples
mypool0 to associate with class1.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp pool mypool0
DGS-8000(dhcp-config)# class class1
Command
Related
commands
Description
Define the name of the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
5.1.4
client-identifier
Use this command to define the unique ID of the DHCP client (indicated in hex,
separated by dot) in the DHCP address pool configuration mode. The no form
of this command can be used to delete the client ID.
client-identifier unique-identifier
5-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
no client-identifier
Parameter
Description
The DHCP client ID, indicated in hex
Parameter
description
unique-identifier
and separated by dot, for instance,
0100.d0f8.2233.b467.6967.6162.6974.
4574.6865.726e.6574.302f.31.
Default
N/A.
Command
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
mode
When some DHCP clients request the DHCP server to assign
IP addresses, they use their client IDs rather then their
hardware addresses. The client ID consists of media type,
MAC address and interface name. For instance, the MAC
address
is
00d0.f822.33b4,
the
interface
name
is
GigabitEthernet 0/1, and the corresponding client ID is
Usage
0100.d0f8.2233.b467.6967.6162.6974.4574.6865.726e.6574.
guidelines
302f.31, where, 01 denotes the type of the Ethernet media.
The 67.6967.6162.6974.4574.6865.726e.6574.302f.31 is the
hex code of GigabitEthernet0/1. For the definition of the media
code, refer to the Address Resolution Protocol Parameters
section in RFC1700.
This command is used only when the DHCP is defined by
manual binding.
The configuration example below defines the client ID of the
Example
s
Ethernet DHCP client whose MAC address is 00d0.f822.33b4.
client-identifier
0100.d0f8.2233.b467.6967.6162.6974.4574.6865.726e.6574.302
f.31
Related
Command
commands
hardware-address
Description
Define the hardware address of
DHCP client.
Define the IP address and network
host
mask, which is used to configure the
DHCP manual binding.
5-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Define the name of the DHCP
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5.1.5
client-name
Use this command to define the name of the DHCP client in the DHPC address
pool configuration mode.The no form of this command is used to delete the
name of the DHCP client.
client-name client-name
no client-name
Parameter
Description
Name
DHCP
client,
a
set
of
standards-based ASCII characters.The
Parameter
description
of
client-name
name should not include the suffix
domain name. For instance, you can
define the name of the DHCP client as
river, not river.i-net.com.cn.
Default
No client name is defined.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
This command can be used to define the name of the
Usage
DHCP client only when the DHCP is defined by manual
guidelines
binding. This name should not include the suffix domain
name.
The configuration example below defines a string river as
Examples
the name of the client.
client-name river
Related
Command
commands
Description
Define the IP address and network
host
mask, which is used to configure the
DHCP manual binding.
5-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Define the name of the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
5.1.6
default-router
Use this command to define the default gateway of the DHCP client in the
DHPC address pool configuration mode.The no form of this command can be
used to delete the definition of the default gateway.
default-router ip-address [ ip-address2…ip-address8 ]
no default-router
Parameter
Description
Define the IP address of the
Parameter
equipment. It is required to
ip-address
configure one IP address at
description
least.
ip-address2…ip-address8
Default
(Optional) Up to 8 gateways
can be configured.
No gateway is defined by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
In general, the DHCP client should get the information of
Usage
guidelines
the default gateway from the DHCP server. The DHCP
server should specify one gateway address for the client at
least, and this address should be of the same network
segment as the address assigned to the client.
The configuration example below defines 192.168.12.1 as
Examples
the default gateway.
default-router 192.168.12.1
Command
Define the name of the DHCP
Related
commands
Description
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.7
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
dns-server
Use this command to define the DNS server of the DHCP client in the DHPC
address pool configuration mode. The no form of this command can be used to
delete the definition of the DNS server.
dns-server { ip-address [ ip-address2…ip-address8 ] | use-dhcp-client
interface-type interface-number }
no dns-server
Parameter
Description
Define the IP address of the
ip-address
DNS server. At least one IP
address should be configured.
Parameter
description
ip-address2…ip-address8
Up
to
8
DNS
servers can be configured.
Use the DNS server learned
use-dhcp-client
by the DHCP client of the
interface-type
DGS-8000 as the DNS server
interface-number
Default
(Optional)
of the DHCP client.
No DNS server is defined by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
When more than one DNS server is defined, the former will
possess higher priory, so the DHCP client will select the
Usage
guidelines
next DNS server only when its communication with the
former DNS server fails.
If the DGS-8000 software also acts as the DHCP client,
the DNS server information obtained by the client can be
transmitted to the DHCP client.
The configuration example below specifies the DNS server
Examples
192.168.12.3 for the DHCP client.
dns-server 192.168.12.3
Related
Command
commands
domain-name
Description
Define the suffix domain name of
the DHCP client.
5-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Enable the DHCP client on the
interface to obtain the IP address
ip address dhcp
information.
Define the name of the DHCP
address pool and enter into the
ip dhcp pool
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5.1.8
domain-name
Use this command to define the suffix domain name of the DHCP client in the
DHPC address pool configuration mode. The no form of this command can be
used to delete the suffix domain name.
domain-name domain-name
no domain-name
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
Define the suffix domain name
domain-name
string of the DHCP client.
No suffix domain name by default.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
After the DHCP client obtains specified suffix domain
name, it can access a host with the same suffix domain
name by the host name directly.
The configuration example below defines the suffix domain
Examples
name i-net.com.cn for the DHCP client.
domain-name i-net.com.cn
Command
Related
dns-server
commands
Description
Define the DNS server of the DHCP
client.
Define the name of the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
5-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.9
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
hardware-address
Use this command to define the hardware address of the DHCP client in the
DHPC address pool configuration mode.The no form of this command can be
used to delete the definition of the hardware address.
hardware-address hardware-address [type]
no hardware-address
Parameter
hardware-address
Description
Define the MAC address of the
DHCP client.
To indicate the hardware platform
protocol of the DHCP client, use
the string definition or digits
Parameter
definition.
description
String option:
type

Ethernet

ieee802
Digits option:

1 (10M Ethernet)

6 (IEEE 802)
No hardware address is defined by default.
Default
If there is no option when the hardware address is defined,
it is the Ethernet by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
Usage
This command can be used only when the DHCP is
guidelines
defined by manual binding.
The configuration example below defines the MAC
Examples
address 00d0.f838.bf3d with the type ethernet.
hardware-address 00d0.f838.bf3d
Related
Command
commands
Description
Define the unique ID of the DHCP
client-identifier
client
(Indicated
by
the
hexadecimal numeral, separated
by dot).
5-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Define the IP address and network
mask, which is used to configure
host
the DHCP manual binding.
Define the name of the DHCP
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5.1.10
host
Use this command to define the IP address and network mask of the DHCP
client host in the DHCP address pool configuration mode. The no form of this
command can be used to delete the definition of the IP address and network
mask for the DHCP client.
host ip-address [ netmask ]
no host
Parameter
Parameter
ip-address
description
netmask
Default
Description
Define the IP address of DHCP
client.
Define the network mask of DHCP
client.
No IP address or network mask of the host is defined.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
If the network mask is not defined definitely, the DHCP
server will use the natural network mask of this IP address:
Usage
255.0.0.0 for class A IP address, 255.255.0 for class B IP
guidelines
address, and 255.255.255.0 for class C IP address.
This command can be used only when the DHCP is
defined by manual binding.
The configuration example below sets the client IP address
Examples
as
192.168.12.91,
and
the
network
mask
as
255.255.255.240.
host 192.168.12.91 255.255.255.240
5-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Command
Description
Define the unique ID of the DHCP
client-identifier
client (Indicated in hex, separated
by dot).
Related
commands
hardware-address
Define the hardware address of
DHCP client.
Define the name of the DHCP
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5.1.11
ip address dhcp
Use this command to make the Ethernet interface or the PPP, HDLC and FR
encapsulated interface obtain the IP address information by the DHCP in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command can be used to
cancel this configuration.
ip address dhcp
no ip address dhcp
Default
The interface cannot obtain the ID address by the DHCP by
default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When requesting the IP address, the DHCP client of the
DGS-8000 also requires the DHCP server provide 5
configuration parameter information: 1) DHCP option 1,
client subnet mask, 2) DHCP option 3, it is the same as the
gateway information of the same subnet, 3) DHCP option
Usage
6, the DNS server information, 4) DHCP option 15, the
guidelines
host suffix domain name, and 5) DHCP option 44, the
WINS server information.
The client of the DGS-8000 is allowed to obtain the
address on the PPP, FR or HDL link by the DHCP, which
should be supported by the server. At present, our server
can support this function.
Examples
The configuration example below makes the FastEthernet
0 port obtain the IP address automatically.
5-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
interface fastEthernet 0
ip address dhcp
Related
Command
Description
dns-server
Define the DNS server of DHCP client.
Define the name of the DHCP address
commands
ip dhcp pool
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
5.1.12
ip dhcp class
Use this command to define a CLASS and enter the global CLASS
configuration mode. The no form of this command can be used to delete the
global CLASS.
ip dhcp class class-name
no ip dhcp class class-name
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
class-name
Description
Class name, which can be character
string or numeric such as myclass or 1.
By default, the class is not configured.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
After executing this command, it enters the global CLASS
Usage
guidelines
configuration
mode
(config-dhcp-class)#”.
which
is
shown
as
“DGS-8000
In this configuration mode, user
can configure the Option82 information that matches the
CLASS and the CLASS identification information.
The configuration example below configures a global
Examples
CLASS.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp class myclass
Related
commands
Command
-
Description
-
5-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.13
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
ip dhcp database write-delay
Use this command to configure the function of writing the DHCP lease
data-binding information into the FLASH timely in the global configuration mode.
The no form of this command can be used to disable the function of writing
timely.
ip dhcp database write-delay time
no ip dhcp database write-delay
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
The interval at which the system writes
time
the DHCP lease binding database
information into the flash.
Default
Disabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
By configuring this command, you can write the
Usage
information of DHCP lease binding database into the
guidelines
FLASH files to prevent the loss of user information after
restarting the device.
The configuration example below sets the interval at which
Examples
the switch writes the information into FLASH as 3600s.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp database write-delay 3600
Related
commands
5.1.14
Command
Description
-
-
ip dhcp database write-to-flash
Use this command to write the information of DHCP lease binding data into
FLASH files in the real-time..
ip dhcp database write-to-flash
Parameter
description
Parameter
-
Description
-
5-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
N/A
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global configuration mode.
By configuring this command, you can write the
information of DHCP lease binding database into the
FLASH files in real-time.
The configuration example below writes the binding
Examples
database information into FLASH manually.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp database write-to-flash
Related
Command
commands
5.1.15
Description
-
-
ip dhcp excluded-address
Use this command to define some IP addresses and make the DHCP server not
assign them to the DHCP client in the global configuration mode. The no form
of this command can be used to cancel this definition.
ip dhcp excluded-address low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
no ip dhcp excluded-address low-ip-address [ high-ip-address ]
Parameter
Description
Exclude the IP address, or exclude the
Parameter
low-ip-address
description
IP address.
high-ip-address
Default
start IP address within the range of the
Exclude the end IP address within the
range of the IP address.
The DHCP server assigns the IP addresses of the whole
address pool by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
5-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
If the excluded IP address is not configured, the DHCP
server attempts to assign all IP addresses in the DHCP
Usage
guidelines
address pool. This command can reserve some IP
addresses for specific hosts to prevent these addresses
are assigned to the DHCP client, and define the excluded
IP address accurately to reduce the conflict detecting time
when the DHCP server assigns the address.
In the configuration example below, the DHCP server will
Examples
not
attempt
to
assign
the
IP
addresses
within
192.168.12.100~150.
ip dhcp excluded-address 192.168.12.100 192.168.12.150
Command
Description
Define the name of the DHCP address
Related
ip dhcp pool
commands
5.1.16
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
network
Define the network number and network
(DHCP)
mask of the DHCP address pool.
ip dhcp ping packet
Use this command to configure the times of pinging the IP address when the
DHCP server detects address conflict in the global configuration mode. The no
form of this command is used to restore it to the default configuration.
ip dhcp ping packet [ number ]
no ip dhcp ping packet
Parameter
(Optional) Number of packets in the
Parameter
description
Description
number
range of 0 to 10, where 0 indicates
disabling the ping operation. The Ping
operation sends two packets by default.
Default
The Ping operation sends two packets by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
5-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
When the DHCP server attempts to assign the IP address
from the DHCP address pool, use the ping operation to
Usage
check whether this address is occupied by other hosts.
guidelines
Record it if the address is occupied, otherwise, assign it to
the DHCP client. The Ping operation will send up to 10
packets, two packets by default.
The configuration example below sets the number of the
Examples
packets sent by the ping operation as 3.
ip dhcp ping packets 3
Command
clear ip dhcp
conflict
Description
Clear the DHCP history conflict record.
Configure the timeout time that the
DHCP
Related
commands
ip dhcp ping
packet
server
waits
for
the
Ping
response. If all the ping packets are not
responded within the specified time, it
indicates that this IP address can be
assigned. Otherwise, it will record the
address conflict.
5.1.17
show ip dhcp
Show the DHCP server detects address
conflict
conflict when it assigns an IP address.
ip dhcp ping timeout
Use this command to configure the timeout that the DHCP server waits for
response when it uses the ping operation to detect the address conflict in the
global configuration mode. The no form of this command can be used to restore
it to the default configuration.
ip dhcp ping timeout milli-seconds
no ip dhcp ping timeout
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Time that the DHCP server waits for
milli-seconds
ping response in the range 100 to
10000 milliseconds.
Default
The default timeout is 500 seconds.
5-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command defines the time that the DHCP server
guidelines
waits for a ping response packet.
In the configuration example below, the waiting time of the
Examples
ping response packet is 600ms.
ip dhcp ping timeout 600
Command
clear ip dhcp
conflict
Description
Clear the DHCP history conflict record.
Define the number of the data packets
Related
ip dhcp ping
commands
packets
sent by the ping operation for the
detection of the address conflict when
the
DHCP
server
assigns
an
IP
address.
show ip dhcp
conflict
5.1.18
Show the address conflict the DHCP
server detects when it assigns an IP
address.
ip dhcp pool
Use this command to define a name of the DHCP address pool and enter into
the DHCP address pool configuration mode in the global configuration
mode.The no form of this command can be used to delete the DHCP address
pool.
ip dhcp pool pool-name
no ip dhcp pool pool-name
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
pool-name
Description
A string of characters and positive
integers, for instance, mypool or 1.
No DHCP address pool is defined by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
5-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Execute the command to enter into the DHCP address
Usage
guidelines
pool configuration mode:
DGS-8000(dhcp-config)#
In this configuration mode, configure the IP address range,
the DNS server and the default gateway.
The configuration example below defines a DHCP address
Examples
pool with the name mypool0.
ip dhcp pool mypool0
Command
Description
Define the IP address and network
mask, which is used to configure the
host
DHCP manual binding.
Related
commands
Define the IP addresses that the
ip dhcp
excluded-address
DHCP server cannot assign to the
clients.
Define the network number and
network (DHCP)
network mask of the DHCP address
pool.
5.1.19
ip dhcp use class
Use this command to enable the CLASS to allocate addresses in the global
configuration mode.The no form of this command can be used to disable the
CLASS.
ip dhcp use class
no ip dhcp use class
Parameter
Parameter
description
Default
Description
-
-
Enabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
5-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
The configuration example below enables the CLASS to
Examples
allocate addresses.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp use class
Related
Command
commands
5.1.20
Description
-
-
lease
Use this command to define the lease time of the IP address that the DHCP
server assigns to the client in the DHCP address pool configuration mode. The
no form of this command can be used to restore it to the default configuration.
lease { days [ hours ] [ minutes ] | infinite }
no lease
Parameter
Description
days
Lease time in days
(Optional) Lease time in hours. It is
Parameter
hours
necessary to define the days before
defining the hours.
description
(Optional) Lease time in minutes. It is
minutes
necessary to define the days and hours
before defining the minutes.
infinite
Default
Infinite lease time.
The lease is 1 days, by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
When the lease is getting near to expire, the DHCP client
Usage
will send the request of renewal of lease. In general, the
guidelines
DHCP server will allow the renewal of lease of the original
IP address.
The configuration example below sets the DHCP lease to
1 hour.
Examples
lease 0 1
The configuration example below sets the DHCP lease to
1 minute.
5-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
lease 0 0 1
Command
Define the name of the DHCP
Related
commands
Description
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5.1.21
netbios-name-server
Use this command to configure the WINS name server of the Microsoft DHCP
client NETBIOS in the DHCP address pool configuration mode. The no form of
this command can be used to delete the WINS server.
netbios-name-server ip-address [ ip-address2…ip-address8 ]
netbios-name-server
Parameter
Description
IP address of the WINS server.
Parameter
ip-address
It is required to configure one
IP address at least.
description
(Optional) IP addresses of
ip-address2…ip-address8
WINS servers. Up to 8 WINS
servers can be configured.
Default
No WINS server is defined, by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
When more than one WINS server is defined, the former
Usage
has higher priory. The DHCP client will select the next
guidelines
WINS server only when its communication with the former
WINS server fails.
The configuration example below specifies the WINS
Examples
server 192.168.12.3 for the DHCP client.
netbios-name-server 192.168.12.3
Related
Command
Description
5-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
ip
Enable the DHCP client on the interface
address
to obtain the IP address.
dhcp
Define the name of the DHCP address
pool and enter into the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool configuration mode.
5.1.22
netbios-node-type
Use this command to define the node type of the master NetBIOS of the
Microsoft DHCP client in the DHCP address configuration mode. The no form of
this command can be used to delete the configuration of the NetBIOS node
type.
netbios-node-type type
no netbios-node-type
Parameter
Description
Type of node in two modes:
Digit in hexadecimal form in the range of 0
to FF. Only the following numerals are
available:
Parameter
description
type

1: b-node.

2: p-node.

4: m-node.

8: h-node.
String:
Default

b-node: broadcast node

p-node: peer-to-peer node

m-node: mixed node

h-node: hybrid node
No type of the NetBIOS node is defined, by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
5-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
There are 4 types of the NetBIOS nodes of the Microsoft
DHCP client: 1) Broadcast, which carries out the NetBIOS
name resolution by the broadcast method, 2) Peer-to-peer,
which directly requests the WINS server to carry out the
NetBIOS name resolution, 3) Mixed, which requests the
name resolution by the broadcast method firstly, and then
carry out the name resolution by the WINS server
Usage
connection, 4) Hybrid, which requests the WINS server to
guidelines
carry out the NetBIOS name resolution firstly, and it will
carry out the NetBIOS name resolution by the broadcast
method if the response is not received.
By default, the node type for Microsoft operating system is
broadcast or hybrid. If the WINS server is not configured,
broadcast node is used. Otherwise, hybrid node is used. It
is recommended to set the type of the NetBIOS node as
Hybrid.
The configuration example below sets the NetBIOS node
Examples
of Microsoft DHCP client as Hybrid.
netbios-node-type h-node
Command
Description
Define
Related
ip dhcp pool
commands
the
name
of
DHCP
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
Configure the WINS name server
netbios-name-server
of the Microsoft DHCP client
NETBIOS.
5.1.23
network (DHCP)
Use this command to define the network number and network mask of the
DHCP address pool in the DHCP address pool configuration mode. The no
form of this command can be used to delete the definition.
network net-number net-mask
no network
Parameter
Parameter
description
net-number
Description
Network number of the DHCP
address pool
5-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Network
net-mask
mask
of
the
DHCP
address pool. If the network mask is
not defined, the natural network
mask will be used by default.
Default
No network number or network mask is defined, by default.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
This command defines the subnet and subnet mask of a
DHCP address pool, and provides the DHCP server with
an address space which can be assigned to the clients.
Unless excluded addresses are configured, all the
addresses of the DHCP address pool can be assigned to
the clients. The DHCP server assigns the addresses in the
Usage
address pool orderly. If the DHCP server found an IP
guidelines
address is in the DHCP binding table or in the network
segment, it checks the next until it assigns an effective IP
address.
The show ip dhcp binding command can be used to view
the address assignment, and the show ip dhcp conflict
command can be used to view the address conflict
detection configuration.
The configuration example below defines the network
Examples
number of the DHCP address pool as 192.168.12.0, and
the network mask as 255.255.255.240.
network 192.168.12.0 255.255.255.240
Command
ip dhcp
Related
excluded-address
commands
Description
Define the IP addresses that the
DHCP server cannot assign to the
clients.
Define the name of the DHCP
ip dhcp pool
address pool and enter into the
DHCP address pool configuration
mode.
5-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.24
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
next-server
Use this command to define the startup sever list that the DHCP client accesses
during startup in the DHCP address configuration mode. The no form of this
command can be used to delete the definition of the startup server list.
next-server ip-address [ ip-address2…ip-address8 ]
no next-server
Parameter
Description
Define the IP address of the
startup server, which is usually
Parameter
ip-address
the TFTP server. It is required
description
to configure one IP address at
least.
ip-address2…ip-address8
Default
(Optional) Up to 8 startup
servers can be configured.
N/A.
Command
mode
DHCP address pool configuration mode.
When more than one startup server is defined, the former
Usage
will possess higher priory. The DHCP client will select the
guidelines
next startup server only when its communication with the
former startup server fails.
The configuration example below specifies the startup
Examples
server 192.168.12.4 for the DHCP client.
next-server 192.168.12.4
Command
bootfile
Description
Define the default startup mapping file
name of the DHCP client.
Define the name of the DHCP address
Related
ip dhcp pool
commands
pool and enter into the DHCP address
pool configuration mode.
ip help-address
option
Define the Helper address on the
interface.
Configure the option of the DGS-8000
DHCP server.
5-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.25
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
option
Use this command to configure the option of the DHCP server in the DHCP
address pool configuration mode. The no form of this command can be used to
delete the definition of option.
option code { ascii string | hex string | ip ip-address }
no option
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
code
Define the DHCP option codes.
ascii string
Define an ASCII string.
hex string
Define a hex string.
ip ip-address
Define an IP address list.
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The DHCP provides a mechanism to transmit the
configuration information to the host in the TCP/IP
network. The DHCP message has a variable option field
Usage
guidelines
that can be defined according to the actual requirement.
The DHCP client needs to carry the DHCP message with
32 bytes of option information at least. Furthermore, the
fixed data field in the DHCP message is also referred to as
an option. For the definition of current DHCP option, refer
to RFC 2131.
The configuration example below defines the option code
19, which determines whether the DHCP client can enable
the IP packet forwarding. 0 indicates to disable the IP
packet forwarding, and 1 indicates to enable the IP packet
forwarding. The configuration below enable the IP packet
Examples
forwarding on the DHCP client.
DGS-8000(dhcp-config)# option 19 hex 1
The configuration example below defines the option code
33, which provides the DHCP client with the static route
information. The DHCP client will install two static routes:
1) the destination network 172.16.12.0 and the gateway
5-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
192.168.12.12, 2) the destination network 172.16.16.0 and
the gateway 192.168.12.16.
option 33 ip 172.16.12.0 192.168.12.12 172.16.16.0
192.168.12.16
Command
Description
Related
commands
Define the name of the DHCP address
pool and enter into the DHCP address
ip dhcp pool
pool configuration mode.
5.1.26
relay agent information
Use this command to enter the Option82 matching information configuration
mode in the global CLASS configuration mode. The no form of this command
can be used to delete the Option82 matching information of the CLASS.
relay agent information
no relay agent information
Parameter
Parameter
description
Default
Description
-
-
N/A.
Command
mode
Global CLASS configuration mode.
After executing this command, it enters the Option82
Usage
guidelines
matching information configuration mode which is shown
as “DGS-8000
(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#”.
In this configuration mode, user can configure the class
matching multiple Option82 information.
The configuration example below configures a global
CLASS and enter the Option82 matching information
configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp class myclass
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class)# relay agent information
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#
Related
Command
Description
5-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
ip dhcp class
5.1.27
Define a CLASS and enter the global
CLASS configuration mode.
relay-information hex
Use this command to enter the Option82 matching information configuraiton
mode. The no form of this command can be used to delete a piece of matching
information.
relay-information hex aabb.ccdd.eeff… [*]
no relay-information hex aabb.ccdd.eeff… [*]
Parameter
Description
Hexadecimal
Parameter
description
Option82
matching
information. The ‘*’ symbol means
aabb.ccdd.eeff…[*]
partial matching which needs the
front part matching only. Without the
‘*’ means needing full matching.
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global CLASS configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
The configuration example below configures a global
CLASS which can match multiple Option82 infomration.
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp class myclass
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class)# relay agent information
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#
relay-information
hex 0102256535
Examples
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#
relay-information
hex 010225654565
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#
relay-information
hex 060225654565
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class-relayinfo)#
5-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
relay-information
hex 060223*
Command
Related
Description
ip dhcp class
commands
relay
agent
information
5.1.28
Define a CLASS and enter the global
CLASS configuraiton mode.
Enter
the
Option82
matching
information configuratin mode.
remark
Use this command to configure the identification which is used to describe the
CLASS in this global CLASS configuraiton mode. The no form of this command
can be used to delete the identification.
remark class-remark
no remark
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Information
class-remark
used
to
indentify
the
CLASS, it can be the character strings
with space in them.
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global CLASS configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
The configuration example below configures
identification information for a global CLASS.
Examples
the
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp class myclass
DGS-8000(config-dhcp-class)# remark used in #1 build
Related
commands
Command
ip dhcp class
Description
Define a CLASS and enter the global
CLASS configuration mode.
5-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.29
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
service dhcp
Use this command to enable the DHCP server and the DHCP relay on the
device in the global configuration mode. The no form of this command can be
used to disable the DHCP server and the DHCP relay.
service dhcp
no service dhcp
Parameter
N/A.
description
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The DHCP server can assign the IP addresses to the
clients automatically, and provide them with the network
Usage
configuration information such as DNS server and default
guidelines
gateway. The DHCP relay can forward the DHCP requests
to other servers, and the returned DHCP responses to the
DHCP client, serving as the relay for DHCP packets.
In the following configuration example, the device has
Examples
enabled the DHCP server and the DHCP relay feature.
service dhcp
Related
commands
5.2
5.2.1
Command
Description
show ip dhcp
Show various statistics information of
server statistics
the DHCP server.
Showing and Monitoring Commands
clear ip dhcp binding
Use this command to clear the DHCP binding table in the privileged user mode:
clear ip dhcp binding { * | ip-address }
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
*
Delete all DHCP bindings.
5-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
ip-address
Default
Delete the binding of the specified IP
addresses.
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
This command can only clear the automatic DHCP
binding, but the manual DHCP binding can be deleted by
the no ip dhcp pool command.
The example below clears the DHCP binding with the IP
Examples
address 192.168.12.100.
clear ip dhcp binding 192.168.12.100
Related
commands
5.2.2
Command
Description
show ip dhcp
Show the address binding of the DHCP
binding
server.
clear ip dhcp conflict
Use this command to clear the DHCP address conflict record in the privileged
user mode:
clear ip dhcp conflict { * | ip-address }
Parameter
Parameter
*
description
ip-address
Default
Description
Delete
all
DHCP
address
conflict
records.
Delete
the
conflict
record
of
the
specified IP addresses.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
5-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
The DHCP server uses the ping session to detect the
Usage
guidelines
address conflict, while the DHCP client uses the address
resolution protocol (ARP) to detect the address conflict.
The clear ip dhcp conflict can be used to delete the
history conflict record.
Examples
The example below clears all address conflict records.
clear ip dhcp conflict *
Command
Description
Define the number of the data packets
Related
ip dhcp ping
sent by the ping operation for the
packets
detection of the address conflict when the
commands
5.2.3
DHCP server assigns an IP address.
show ip
Show the address conflict that the DHCP
dhcp
server detects when it assigns an IP
conflict
address.
clear ip dhcp server statistics
Use this command to reset the counter of the DHCP server in the privileged
user mode.
clear ip dhcp server statistics
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The DHCP server carries out the statistics counter,
records the DHCP address pool, automatic binding,
manual binding and expired binding. Furthermore, it also
Usage
carries out the statistics to the number of sent and
guidelines
received DHCP messages. The clear ip dhcp server
statistics command can be used to delete the history
counter record and carry out the statistics starting from
scratch.
The example below clears the statistics record of the
Examples
DHCP server.
clear ip dhcp server statistics
5-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
commands
5.2.4
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Command
Description
show ip dhcp
Show the statistics record of the
server statistics
DHCP server.
debug ip dhcp client
Use this command to carry out the DHCP client debugging in the privileged user
mode:
debug ip dhcp client
no debug ip dhcp client
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
This command is used to show the main message content
of the DHCP client during the interaction of the servers and
the processing status.
The example below turns on the debugging switch of the
Examples
DHCP client in the equipment.
debug ip dhcp client
5.2.5
debug ip dhcp server
Use this command to carry out the DHCP Server debugging in the privileged
user mode:
debug ip dhcp server { event | packet }
no debug ip dhcp server { event | packet }
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
event
Show the DHCP message.
packet
Show the DHCP packet.
Disabled.
5-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
This command is used to show the main message content
of the dhcp server during the interaction of the clients and
the processing status.
The example below turns on the debugging switch of the
Examples
DHCP server in the equipment.
DGS-8000# debug ip dhcp server packet
5.2.6
show dhcp lease
Use this command to show the lease information of the IP address obtained by
the DHCP client.
show dhcp lease
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
If the IP address is not defined, show the binding condition
of all addresses. If the IP address is defined, show the
binding condition of this IP address.
The following is the result of the show dhcp lease.
DGS-8000# show dhcp lease
Temp IP addr: 192.168.5.71
for peer on Interface:
FastEthernet0/0
Temp
Examples
sub net mask: 255.255.255.0
DHCP Lease server: 192.168.5.70, state: 3 Bound
DHCP transaction id: 168F
Lease: 600 secs,
Renewal: 300 secs,
Rebind: 525 secs
Temp default-gateway addr: 192.168.5.1
Next timer fires after: 00:04:29
Retry count: 0
Client-ID:
5-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
redgaint-00d0.f8fb.5740-Fa0/0
5.2.7
show ip dhcp binding
Use this command to show the binding condition of the DHCP address.
show ip dhcp binding [ ip-address ]
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
(Optional)
ip-address
Only
show
the
binding
condition of the specified IP addresses.
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
If the IP address is not defined, show the binding condition
of all addresses. If the IP address is defined, show the
binding condition of this IP address.
The following is the result of the show ip dhcp binding.
DGS-8000# show ip dhcp binding
IP address
Client-Identifier/
Lease expiration
Type
Hardware address
192.168.1.2
00d0.f866.4777
IDLE
Manual
The meaning of various fields in the show result is described
Examples
as follows.
Field
Description
The
IP address
IP
assigned
address
to
the
to
be
DHCP
client.
Client-Identifier
The
client
identifier
or
/Hardware
hardware address of the
address
DHCP client.
5-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
The expiration date of the
lease. The Infinite indicates
it is not limited by the time.
Lease expiration
The
IDLE
indicates
the
address is in the free status
currently
for
it
is
not
renewed or the DHCP client
releases it actively.
The type of the address
binding.The
Automatic
indicates an IP address is
Type
assigned automatically, and
the Manual indicates an IP
address
is
assigned
by
manual.
Related
commands
5.2.8
Command
Description
clear ip dhcp
Clear the DHCP address binding
binding
table.
show ip dhcp conflict
Use this command to show the conflict history record of the DHCP sever.
show ip dhcp conflict
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command can show the conflict address list and
guidelines
excluded address list detected by the DHCP server.
The following is the output result of the show ip dhcp
Examples
conflict command.
DGS-8000# show ip dhcp conflict
IP address
Detection Method
5-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
192.168.12.1
Ping
dhcpd excluded ipaddress
192.168.12.100
The meaning of various fields in the show result is
described as follows.
Field
IP
address
Detection
Method
dhcpd
excluded
ipaddress
Related
commands
Description
The IP addresses which cannot
be assigned to the DHCP
client.
The conflict detection method.
The
of
excluded
addresses.
Command
clear ip dhcp
confict
5.2.9
range
Description
Clear the DHCP conflict record.
show ip dhcp server statistics
Use this command to show the statistics of the DHCP server.
show ip dhcp server statistics
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command shows the statistics of the DHCP server.
The following is the output result of the show ip dhcp
Examples
server statistics command.
DGS-8000# show ip dhcp server statistics
5-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Lease count
7
Address pools
4
Automatic bindings
4
Manual bindings
0
Expired bindings
0
Malformed messages 2
Message
Received
BOOTREQUEST
216
DHCPDISCOVER
33
DHCPREQUEST
25
DHCPDECLINE
0
DHCPRELEASE
1
DHCPINFORM
150
Message
Sent
BOOTREPLY
16
DHCPOFFER
9
DHCPACK
7
DHCPNAK
0
The meaning of various fields in the show result is described
as follows.
Field
Description
Address pools
Number of address pools.
Lease count
Number of allocated lease.
Automatic
Number of automatic address
bindings
bindings.
Manual bindings
Expired bindings
Malformed
messages
Message
Received or Sent
Number of manual address
bindings.
Number of expired address
bindings.
Number
of
malformed
messages received by the
DHCP.
Number
of
the
messages
received and sent by the
DHCP server respectively.
5-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 DHCP Configuration Commands
Command
Description
Related
clear ip dhcp
commands
Delete the DHCP server statistics.
server statistics
5.2.10
show dhcp-server pool
Use this command to show the information about the address pool.
show dhcp-server pool
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Any mode.
Currently, two commands should be used to show the
related configuration and status information respectively
and several commands are needed for showing various
Usage
status information that the user want, which is not
guidelines
convenient for users. Users want to see various main
statuses
after
the
configuration.
So
showing
the
information combining the related configuration with
running status information is necessary.
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
commands
-
-
Platform
description
Only supported by switches.
5-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
6
6.1
6.1.1
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
DHCP Relay
Configuration Commands
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
ip dhcp relay check server-id
Use this command to enable the ip dhcp relay check server-id function. The
no form of this command is used to disable the ip dhcp relay check server-id
function.
[no] ip dhcp relay check server-id
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Switch will select the server to be sent according to
Usage
guidelines
server-id option when forwarding DHCP REQUEST via
this command. Wihout this comand configured, the switch
forwards the DHCP REQUEST to all configured DHCP
servers.
The following example enables the ip dhcp relay check
Examples
server-id function.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp relay check server-id
Related
Command
Description
commands
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP Relay.
6-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Platform
description
6.1.2
This command is only supported by the switches.
ip dhcp relay information option dot1x
Use this command to enable the dhcp option dot1x function.. The no form of
the command is used to disable the dhcp option dot1x function.
[no] ip dhcp relay information option dot1x
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global configuration mode.
It is necessary to enable the DHCP Relay, and combine
with the 802.1x related configuration to configure this
command.
The following example enables the DHCP option dot1x
Examples
function on the device.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp relay information option dot1x
Command
Description
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP Relay.
Related
ip
commands
information
dhcp
option
relay
dot1x
Configure the option dot1x acl.
access-group
Platform
description
6.1.3
This command is only supported by switches.
ip dhcp relay information option dot1x access-group
Use this command to configure the dhcp option dot1x acl. The no form of this
command is used to disable the dhcp option dot1x acl.
[no] ip dhcp relay information option dot1x access-group acl-name
Default
No ACL is associated with.
6-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Be sure that the ACL does not conflict with the existing
guidelines
ACE of the configured ACL on the interface.
The following example enables the dhcp option dot1x acl
function.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)#
ip
access-list
extended
DenyAccessEachOtherOfUnauthrize
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any host 192.168.3.1
//Permit sending the packets to the gateway.
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any host 192.168.4.1
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any host 192.168.5.1
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip host 192.168.3.1 any
// Permit the communication between the packets whose
source IP address is that of the gateway.
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip host 192.168.4.1 any
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip host 192.168.5.1 any
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# deny ip 192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
192.168.3.0 0.0.0.255
Examples
//Deny the exchange between the unauthenticated users.
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
192.168.4.0
192.168.5.0
192.168.4.0
192.168.5.0
192.168.5.0
192.168.3.0
192.168.4.0
deny
ip
192.168.4.0
deny
ip
192.168.4.0
deny
ip
192.168.5.0
deny
ip
192.168.5.0
ip
192.168.5.0
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
192.168.3.0
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
ip
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
deny
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
192.168.3.0
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
ip
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)#
0.0.0.255
deny
deny
0.0.0.255
DGS-8000(config-ext-nacl)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# ip dhcp relay information option dot1x
access-group DenyAccessEachOtherOfUnauthrize
6-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
commands
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Command
Description
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP Relay.
ip dhcp relay
information
option dot1x
Enable the DHCP option dot1x
function.
Platform
description
6.1.4
This command is only supported by switches.
ip dhcp relay information option82
Use this command to configure to enable the ip dhcp relay information
option82 function. The no form of this command is used to disable the ip dhcp
relay information option82 function.
[no] ip dhcp relay information option82
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command is exclusive with the option dot1x
guidelines
command.
The following example enables the option82 function on
Examples
the DHCP relay.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# Ip dhcp relay information option82
Related
commands
Command
Description
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP Relay.
ip dhcp relay
information option
dot1x
Enable
the
DHCP
option
dot1x function.
Platform
description
This command is only supported by switches.
6-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
6.1.5
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
ip dhcp relay information option vpn
Use this command to configure to enable the DHCP Relay Aware VRF function
on the DHCP Relay device. The no form of this command is used to disable this
function.
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command is exclusive with the option dot1x and
guidelines
option82 command.
The following example enables the DHCP Relay Aware
Examples
VRF function on the DHCP Relay device.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)#Ip dhcp relay information option vpn
Related
commands
Command
Description
ip dhcp relay
Enable the DHCP option82
information option82
function.
ip dhcp relay
information option
dot1x
Enable
the
DHCP
option
dot1x function.
Platform
description
6.1.6
This command is only supported by switches.
ip dhcp relay suppression
Use this command to enable the DHCP binding globally. The no form of this
command disables the DHCP binding globally and enables the DHCP relay
suppression on the port.
[no] ip dhcp relay suppression
Default
configuration
Disabled.
6-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
After executing this command, the system will not relay the
guidelines
DHCP request message on the interface.
The following example enables the relay suppression
function on the interface 1.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# ip dhcp relay suppression
DGS-8000(config-if)# exit
DGS-8000(config)#
Related
Command
Description
commands
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP Relay.
Platform
description
6.1.7
This command is only supported by switches.
ip helper-address
Use this command to add an IP address of the DHCP server. The no form of
this command deletes an IP address of the DHCP server.
The server address can be configured globally or on a specific interface.
Therefore, this command can run in the global configuration mode or the
interface configuration mode to add the DHCP server information.
[no] ip helper-address [vrf vrf-name]A.B.C.
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode, interface configuration mode.
6-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
Up to 20 DHCP server can be configured globally or on a
layer-3 interface.
One DHCP request of this interface will be sent to these
servers. You can select one for confirmation.
Usage
The global configuration and port-based configuration of
guidelines
the vrf are slightly different. In the global configuration
mode, if the vrf is not specified, the default address of the
current server does not belong to any vrf. In the port-based
configuration, if the vrf is not specified, the current default
server and port configurations belong to the same vrf.
The following example configures the addresses for two
servers.
1. Set the IP address for the global server to 192.168.1.1
Examples
2. Set the IP address for the vrf instance-based server
delp1 to 192.168.2.1
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip helper-address 192.168.1.1
DGS-8000(config)# ip helper-address vrf dep1 192.168.2.1
6.1.8
Related
Command
Description
commands
service dhcp
Enable the DHCP relay.
service dhcp
Use this command to enable the DHCP relay in the global configuration mode.
The no form of this command can disable the DHCP relay.
service dhcp
no service dhcp
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Global configuration mode.
The DHCP relay can forward the DHCP requests to other
servers, and the returned DHCP response packets to the
DHCP client, serving as the relay for DHCP packets.
In the following configuration example, the device has
6-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
enabled the DHCP server and the DHCP relay.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# service dhcp
Command
Description
Related
commands
ip helper-address
Add an IP address of the
DHCP server.
6-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7
7.1
7.1.1
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
DHCPv6 Server
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Commands
clear ipv6 dhcp binding
Use this command to clear the DHCPv6 binding information.
clear ipv6 dhcp binding [ipv6-address]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
ipv6-address
Set the IPv6 address or the
prefix.
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
If the ipv6-address is not specified, all DHCPv6 binding
Usage
information are cleared. If the ipv6-address is specified,
guidelines
the binding information for the specified address is
cleared.
Examples
The following example shows how to clear the DHCPv6
binding information:
DGS-8000(config)# clear ipv6 dhcp binding
Platform
description
N/A
7-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7.1.2
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
clear ipv6 dhcp server statistics
Use this command to clear the DHCPv6 server statistics.
clear ipv6 dhcp server statistics
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to clear the DHCPv6 server
guidelines
statistics.
Examples
The following example shows how to clear the DHCPv6
server statistics:
DGS-8000(config)# clear ipv6 dhcp server statistics
Platform
description
7.1.3
N/A
dns-server
Use this command to set the DNS Server list information for the DHCPv6
Server. Use the no form of this command to remove the configuration.
dns-server ipv6-address
no dns-server ipv6-address
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
ipv6-address
Set the IPv6 address or the DNS
server.
Default
Settings
By default, no DNS server list is configured.
7-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
Command
mode
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
To configure several DNS Server addresses, use the
Usage
dns-server
guidelines
newly-configured DNS Server address will not overwrite
command
for
several
times.
The
the former ones.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)# dns-server 2008:1::1
Command
Related
domain-name
commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
7.1.4
Description
Set the DHCPv6 domain name
information.
Set a DHCPv6 pool.
domain-name
Use this command to set the domain name for the DHCPv6 server. Use the no
form of this command to remove the domain name.
domain-name domain
no domain-name domain
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
domain
Set the domain name.
Default
Settings
By default, no domain name is configured.
Command
mode
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
To
configure
several
command
domain
for
names,
several
use
the
times.
The
Usage
domain-name
guidelines
newly-configured domain name will not overwrite the
former ones.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)# domain-name example.com
7-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
Command
Related
dns-server
commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
Description
Set the DHCPv6 DNS server list.
Set the DHCPv6 pool.
Platform
description
7.1.5
N/A
iana-address prefix
Use this command to set the IA_NA address prefix for the DHCPv6 Server. Use
the no form of this command to remove the IA_NA address prefix.
iana-address
prefix
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
[lifetime
{valid-lifetime
|
preferred-lifetime}]
no iana-address prefix
Parameter
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Description
Set the IPv6 prefix and prefix
length.
Set the lifetime of the address
allocated to the client.
With
Parameter
lifetime
description
the
configured,
keyword
both
lifetime
parameters
valid-lifetime
preferred-lifetime
amd
shall
be
configured.
valid-lifetime
preferred-lifetime
Set the valid lifetime of using the
allocated address for the client.
Set the preferred lifetime of the
address allocated to the client.
By default, no IA_NA address prefix is configured;
Default
Settings
The default valid-lifetime is 3600s(1 hour).
The default preferred-lifetime is 3600s(1 hour).
Command
mode
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
7-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
This command is used to set the IA_NA address prefix for
the DHCPv6 Server, and allocate the IA_NA address to
the client.
Usage
The Server attempts to allocate a usable address within
guidelines
the IA_NA address prefix range to the client upon
receiving the IA_NA address request from the client. That
address will be allocated to other clients if the client no
longer uses that address again.
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)# iana-address prefix 2008:50::/64
Examples
lifetime 2000 1000DGS-8000(config-if)# ip verify urpf
drop-rate notify
Command
Related
ipv6 dhcp pool
commands
Description
Set the DHCPv6 pool.
show ipv6 dhcp
Show
pool
information.
the
DHCPv6
pool
Platform
description
7.1.6
N/A
ipv6 dhcp server
Use this command to enable the DHCPv6 server on the interface. Use the no
form of this command to disable this function.
ipv6 dhcp server poolname [rapid-commit] [preference value]
no ipv6 dhcp server
Parameter
Parameter
Description
poolname
Define the DHCPv6 pool name.
rapid-commit
description
Allow to use the two-message
interaction process.
Set the preference level for the
preference value
advertise message. The valid
range is 1-100 and the default
value is 0.
7-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
Default
Settings
Disabled
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Use the ipv6 dhcp server command to enable the
DHCPv6 service.
Configuring the keyword rapid-commit allows the
two-message interaction for the server and the client when
allocating
the
address
prefix
and
setting
other
configurations. With this keyword configured, if the client
solicit message includes the rapid-commit item, the
DHCPv6
Server
will
send
the
Reply
message
immediately.
Usage
guidelines
DHCPv6 Server carries with the preference value when
sending the advertise message if the preference level is
not 0.
If the preference level is 0, the advertise message will not
include this field. If the preference value is 255, the client
sends the request message to the server to obtain the
configurations.
DHCPv6 Client, Server and Relay functions are exclusive,
and only one of the functions can be configured on the
interface.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp server pool1
Related
commands
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp pool
Set the DHCPv6 pool.
show ipv6 dhcp
Show
pool
information.
the
DHCPv6
pool
Platform
description
N/A
7-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7.1.7
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
Use this command to set the DHCPv6 server pool. Use the no form of this
command to remove the information pool.
ipv6 dhcp pool poolname
no ipv6 dhcp pool poolname
Parameter
Description
description
poolname
Define the DHCPv6 pool name.
Default
By default, the DHCPv6 server information pool is not
Settings
configured.
Parameter
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to create a DHCPv6 Server
configuration pool. After configuring this command, it
enters the DHCPv6 pool configuration mode, in which the
Usage
administrator can set the pool parameters, such as the
guidelines
prefix and the DNS Server information, ect.
After creating the DHCPv6 Server configuration pool, use
the ipv6 dhcp server command to associate the pool and
the DHCPv6 Server on one interface.
DGS-8000# configure terminal
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool pool1
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)#
Command
Related
ipv6 dhcp server
commands
Description
Enable the DHCPv6 server function
on the interface.
show ipv6 dhcp
Show
pool
information.
the
DHCPv6
pool
Platform
description
N/A
7-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7.1.8
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
prefix-delegation
Use this command to set the static binding address prefix information for the
DHCPv6 server. Use the no form of this command to delete the address prefix
information.
prefix-delegation ipv6-prefix/prefix-length client-DUID [lifetime]
no prefix-delegation ipv6-prefix/prefix-length client-DUID [lifetime]
Parameter
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Parameter
description
client-DUID
lifetime
Description
Set the IPv6 address prefix and
the prefix length.
Set the client DUID.
Set the interval of using the
prefix by the client.
Default
Settings
By default, no address prefix information is configured.
Command
mode
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
The administrator uses this command to manually set the
address prefix information list for the client IA_PD and set
the valid lifetime for those prefixes.
The parameter client-DUID allocates the address prefix to
Usage
guidelines
the first IA_PD in the specified client.
Before receiving the request message for the address
prefix from the client, DHCPv6 Server searches for the
corresponding static binding first. If it succeeds, the server
returns to the static binding; otherwise, the server will
attempt to allocate the address prefix from other prefix
information sources.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)# prefix-delegation 2008:2::/64
0003000100d0f82233ac
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp pool
Set a DHCPv6 pool.
ipv6 local pool
Set a local prefix pool.
7-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
prefix-delegation
Specify the DHCPv6 local prefix
pool
pool.
show ipv6 dhcp
Show
pool
information.
the
DHCPv6
pool
Platform
description
7.1.9
N/A
prefix-delegation pool
Use this command to specify the local prefix pool for the DHCPv6 server. Use
the no form of this command to remove the local prefix pool.
prefix-delegation pool poolname [lifetime {valid-lifetime | preferred-lifetime}]
no prefix-delegation pool poolname
Parameter
Description
poolname
Set the local prefix pool name.
Set the lifetime of the address
prefix allocated to the client.
With
lifetime
the
configured,
keyword
both
lifetime
parameters
valid-lifetime
Parameter
preferred-lifetime
description
amd
shall
be
configured.
Set the valid lifetime of using the
valid-lifetime
allocated address prefix for the
client.
Set the preferred lifetime of the
preferred-lifetime
address prefix allocated to the
client.
By default, no address prefix pool is specified.
Default
Settings
The default valid-lifetime is 3600s(1 hour).
The default preferred-lifetime is 3600s(1 hour).
Command
mode
Usage
DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.
Use the prefix-delegation pool command to set the
prefix pool for the DHCPv6 Server and allocate the prefix
7-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
to the client. Use the ipv6 local pool command to set the
guidelines
prefix pool.
The Server attempts to allocate a usable prefix from the
prefix pool to the client upon receiving the prefix request
from the client. That prefix will be allocated to other clients
if the client no longer uses that prefix again.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-dhcp)#
prefix-delegation
pool
client-prefix-pool lifetime 2000 1000
Related
Command
Description
ipv6 dhcp pool
Set a DHCPv6 pool.
ipv6 local pool
Set a local prefix pool.
commands
Staticlly bind the client with the
prefix-delegation
address prefix.
show ipv6 dhcp
Show
the
pool
information.
DHCPv6
pool
Platform
description
7.2
7.2.1
N/A
Showing Related Commands
show ipv6 dhcp
Use this command to show the device DUID.
show ipv6 dhcp
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
7-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
Usage
The server, client and relay on the same device share a
guidelines
DUID.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp
Examples
This device's DHCPv6 unique identifier(DUID):
00:03:00:01:00:d0:f8:22:33:b0
Platform
description
7.2.2
N/A
show ipv6 dhcp binding
Use this command to show the address binding information for the DHCPv6
server.
show ipv6 dhcp binding [ipv6-address]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ipv6-address
Set the IPv6 address or the prefix.
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
If
Usage
guidelines
the
ipv6-address
is
not
specified,
all
prefixes
dynamically assigned to the client and IANA address
binidng information are shown. If the ipv6-address is
specified, the binding information for the specified address
is shown.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp binding
Client
DUID: 00:03:00:01:00:d0:f8:22:33:ac
IAPD: iaid 0, T1 1800, T2 2880
Examples
Prefix: 2001:20::/72
preferred lifetime 3600, valid lifetime 3600
expires at Jan 1 2008 2:23 (3600 seconds)
Platform
description
N/A
7-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
7.2.3
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
show ipv6 dhcp interface
Use this command to show the DHCPv6 interface information.
show ipv6 dhcp interface [interface-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
interface-name
Set the interface name.
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged EXEC mode.
If the interface-name is not specified, all DHCPv6 interface
information are shown. If the interface-name is specified,
the specified interface information is shown.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp interface
VLAN 1 is in server mode
Examples
Server pool dhcp-pool
Rapid-Commit: disable
Platform
description
7.2.4
N/A
show ipv6 dhcp pool
Use this command to show the DHCPv6 pool information
show ipv6 dhcp pool [poolname]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
poolname
Define the DHCPv6 pool name.
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
7-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
If the poolname is not specified, all DHCPv6 interface
Usage
information are shown. If the poolname is specified, the
guidelines
specified interface information is shown.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp pool
DHCPv6 pool: dhcp-pool
Examples
DNS server: 2011:1::1
DNS server: 2011:1::2
Domain name: example.com
Platform
description
7.2.5
N/A
show ipv6 dhcp server statistics
Use this command to show the DHCPv6 server statistics.
show ipv6 dhcp server statistics
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to show the DHCPv6 server
guidelines
statistics.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp server statistics
DHCPv6 server statistics:
Examples
Packet statistics:
DHCPv6 packets received:
7
Solicit received:
7
Request received:
0
7-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
Confirm received:
0
Renew received:
0
Rebind received:
0
Release received:
0
Decline received:
0
Relay-forward received:
0
Information-request received:
0
Unknown message type received:
0
Error message received:
0
DHCPv6 packet sent:
0
Advertise sent:
0
Reply sent:
0
Relay-reply sent:
0
Send reply error:
0
Send packet error:
0
Binding statistics:
Bindings generated:
0
IAPD assigned:
0
IANA assigned:
0
Configuration statistics:
Related
DHCPv6 server interface:
1
DHCPv6 pool:
0
DHCPv6 iapd binding:
0
Command
Description
7-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration Commands
ipv6 dhcp pool
Set a DHCPv6 pool.
Platform
description
N/A
7-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
8
8.1
8.1.1
Chapter 8 DHCPv6 Client Configuration Commands
DHCPv6
Client
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Command
ipv6 dhcp client pd
Use this command to enable the DHCPv6 client and request for the prefix
address information. Use the no form of this command to disable the prefix
address request.
ipv6 dhcp client pd prefix-name [rapid-commit]
no ipv6 dhcp client pd
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
prefix-name
Define the IPv6 prefix name.
rapid-commit
Allow the simplified interaction process.
Disabled
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
With the DHCPv6 client mode disabled, use this command
to enable the DHCPv6 client mode on the interface.
With the ipv6 dhcp client pd command enabled, the
Usage
guidelines
DHCPv6 client sends the prefix request to the DHCPv6
server
The keyword rapid-commit allows the client and the
server
two-message
interaction
process.
With
this
keyword configured, the solicit message sent by the client
includes the rapid-commit item.
Examples
The following example shows how to enable the prefix
8-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 DHCPv6 Client Configuration Commands
information request on the interface:
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastethernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp client pd pd_name
Related
commands
8.2
8.2.1
Command
Description
clear ipv6
Reset the DHCPv6 client function on
dhcp client
the interface.
show ipv6
Show
dhcp interface
configuration.
the
DHCPv6
interface
Showing Related Commands
show ipv6 dhcp
Use this command to show the device DUID information.
show ipv6 dhcp
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
N/A.
Command
Privileged EXEC mode / Global / Interface configuration
mode
mode.
Usage
One DUID is shared by the server, client and relay on the
guidelines
same device.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp
Examples
This device's DHCPv6 unique identifier(DUID):
00:03:00:01:00:d0:f8:22:33:b0
8.2.2
show ipv6 dhcp interface
Use this command to show the DHCPv6 interface information.
show ipv6 dhcp interface [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Set the interface type and the interface
interface-number
number.
8-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 8 DHCPv6 Client Configuration Commands
Default
N/A.
Command
Privileged EXEC mode / Global / Interface configuration
mode
mode.
If the interface-type interface-number is not defined, show
Usage
the
information
of
all
DHCPv6
interfaces.
If
the
guidelines
interface-type interface-number is defined, show the
information of this interface.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp interface
VLAN 1 is in server mode
Examples
Server pool dhcp-pool
Rapid-Commit: disable
8.2.3
clear ipv6 dhcp client
Use this command to reset the DHCPv6 client.
clear ipv6 dhcp client interface-type interface-number
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Set the interface type and the interface
interface-number
number.
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to reset the DHCPv6 client, which
may lead the client to request for the configurations from
the server again.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ipv6 dhcp client vlan 1
8-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
9
9.1
9.1.1
Chapter 9 DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configuration Commands
DHCPv6 Relay Agent
Configuration Commands
Configuration Related Command
ipv6 dhcp relay destination
Use this command to enable the DHCPv6 Relay Agent function and specify the
destination address and the destination interface. Use the no form of this
command to disable this function or remove the destination address.
ipv6 dhcp relay destination ipv6-address [interface-type interface-number]
no ipv6 dhcp relay destination ipv6-address [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
ipv6-address
Parameter
description
interface-type
interface-number
Default
Description
Specify
the
Relay
Agent
destination address.
(Optional) Specify the destination
interface type.
(Optional) Specify the destination
interface number.
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
9-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 9 DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configuration Commands
With the DHCPv6 Relay function enabled on the interface,
all DHCPv6 client messages will be encapsulated and
forwarded to the specified interface and the configured
destination addresses.
Usage
 Caution
guidelines

The dhcpv6 relay destination command can only be
enabled on the layer-3 interface.

There can be up to 20 Relay Agent Destinations on
one device.

The interface number must be defined if the
destination address is the multicast address.
The following example shows how to enable DHCPv6
Relay service on the interface VLAN1 and specify the
destination address 3001::2:
DGS-8000#configure terminal
Examples
Enter configuration commands, one per line.
End with
CNTL/Z.
DGS-8000(config)#interface vlan 1
DGS-8000(config-if)#ipv6 dhcp relay destination 3001::2
DGS-8000(config-if)#end
Command
ipv6
Description
Related
show
dhcp
relay
commands
destination { all | interface
Show
interface-type
destination address list.
the current
Relay
interface-number }
Platform
description
9.2
9.2.1
N/A
Showing Related Commands
show ipv6 dhcp relay destination
Use this command to show the DHCPv6 Relay Agent destination address and
interface information.
9-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 9 DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configuration Commands
show ipv6 dhcp relay destination
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Show all destination address and
all
interface information.
description
interface interface-type
interface-number
Default
Show the specified destination
address
and
interface
information.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Usage
guidelines
N/A
The following example shows all current Relay destination
address configurations:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp relay destination all
Examples
Interface: Vlan1
Destination address(es)
Output Interface
3001::2
FF02::1:2
Vlan2
Platform
description
9.2.2
N/A
show ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Use this command to show the packet sending and receiving condition with the
DHCPv6 Relay function enabled.
show ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
N/A.
9-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 9 DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
DGS-8000# show ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Packets dropped
Error
:
:
2
Excess of rate limit
:
Packets received
Examples
2
0
:
28
SOLICIT
:
0
REQUEST
:
0
CONFIRM
:
0
RENEW
:
0
REBIND
:
0
RELEASE
:
0
DECLINE
:
0
INFORMATION-REQUEST
:
14
RELAY-FORWARD
:
0
RELAY-REPLY
:
14
:
16
Packets sent
ADVERTISE
:
0
RECONFIGURE
:
0
REPLY
:
8
RELAY-FORWARD
:
8
RELAY-REPLY
:
0
Command
Description
clear ipv6 dhcp relay
Clear
statistics
information.
Related
commands
the
statistical
Platform
description
N/A
9-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
9.2.3
Chapter 9 DHCPv6 Relay Agent Configuration Commands
clear ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Use this command to clear the packet sending and receiving condition with the
DHCPv6 Relay function enabled.
clear ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ipv6 dhcp relay statistics
Command
Description
show ipv6 dhcp relay
Show
statistics
information.
Related
commands
the
statistical
Platform
description
N/A
9-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
10
Chapter 10 DNS Module Configuration Commands
DNS
Module
Configuration Commands
10.1 Configuring Related Commands
10.1.1
ip domain-lookup
Use this command to enable the DNS to carry out the domain name resolution.
Use the no form of this command to disable the DNS domain name resolution
function.
ip domain-lookup
no ip domain-lookup
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command enables the domain name resolution
guidelines
function.
The following example enables the DNS domain name
Examples
resolution function.
DGS-8000(config)# ip domain-lookup
Related
commands
Command
show hosts
Description
Show the DNS related configuration
information.
10-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
10.1.2
Chapter 10 DNS Module Configuration Commands
ip host
Use this command to configure the mapping of the host name and the IP
address by manual. Use the no form of the command to remove the host list.
ip host host-name ip-address
no ip host host-name ip-address
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
host-name
The host name of the equipment
ip-address
The IP address of the equipment
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
To delete the host list, use the no ip host host-name
guidelines
ip-address command.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ip host switch 192.168.5.243
Related
commands
10.1.3
Command
show hosts
Description
Show the DNS related configuration
information.
ip name-server
Use this command to configure the IP address of the domain name server. Use
the no form of this command to delete the configured domain name server.
ip name-server {ip-address | ipv6-address}
no ip name-server [ip-address| ipv6-address ]
Parameter
Parameter
ip-address
description
ipv6-address
Description
The IP address of the domain name
server.
The IPv6 address of the domain name
server.
Default
configuration
N/A.
10-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 DNS Module Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Add the IP address of the DNS server. Once this
command is executed, the equipment will add a DNS
Usage
guidelines
server. When the device cannot obtain the domain name
from a DNS server, it will attempt to send the DNS request
to subsequent servers until it receives a response.
Up to 6 DNS servers are supported. You can delete a DNS
server with the ip-address option or all the DNS servers.
DGS-8000(config)# ip name-server 192.168.5.134
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ip name-server
2001:0DB8::250:8bff:fee8:f800 2001:0DB8:0:f004::1
Related
commands
10.1.4
Command
show hosts
Description
Show the DNS related configuration
information.
ipv6 host
Use this command to configure the mapping of the host name and the IPv6
address by manual. Use the no form of the command to remove the host list.
ipv6 host host-name ipv6-address
no ipv6 host host-name ipv6-address
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
host-name
The host name of the equipment
ipv6-address
The IPv6 address of the equipment
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
To delete the host list, use the no ipv6 host host-name
guidelines
ipv6-address command.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 host switch
2001:0DB8:700:20:1::12
10-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
commands
Chapter 10 DNS Module Configuration Commands
Command
show hosts
Description
Show the DNS related configuration
information.
10.2 Show Related Commands
10.2.1
clear host
Use this command to clear the dynamically learned host name in the privileged
user mode.
clear host [host-name]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Delete the dynamically learned host. “*”
host-name
denotes to clear all the dynamically
learned host names.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
table in two ways: 1) the ip host static configuration, 2) the
guidelines
DNS dynamic learning. Execute this command to delete
You can obtain the mapping record of the host name buffer
the host name records learned by the DNS dynamically.
The following configuration will delete the dynamically
Examples
learned mapping records from the host name-IP address
buffer table.
clear host *
10.2.2
Related
Command
Description
commands
show hosts
Show the host name buffer table.
show hosts
Use this command to display DNS configuration.
show hosts [hostname]
10-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 10 DNS Module Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
Show the DNS related configuration information.
DGS-8000# show hosts
Name servers are:
192.168.5.134 static
Examples
Host
type
Address
TTL(sec)
switch
www.DGS-8000.com
static
192.168.5.243
dynamic
---
192.168.5.123
126
Command
Related
commands
ip host
ipv6 host
ip name-server
Description
Configure the host name and IP
address mapping by manual.
Configure teh host name and IPv6
address mapping by manual.
Configure the DNS server.
10-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
11
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
FTP Server Configuration
Commands
11.1 Configuration Related Commands
11.1.1
debug ftp server
Use this command to enable outputting the debugging messages in the FTP
server. Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
debug ftpserver
no debug ftpserver
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
-
-
Default
Settings
Disabled
Command
mode
Privileged user mode.
Usage
Use this command to display the detailed debugging
guidelines
information during FTP server operation.
The following example shows how to enable outputting the
debugging messages in the FTP Server:
DGS-8000# debug ftpserver
FTPSRV_DEBUG:(RECV)
SYST
FTPSRV_DEBUG:(REPLY)
215 DNOS Type: L8
FTPSRV_DEBUG:(RECV)
PORT 192,167,201,82,7,120
FTPSRV_DEBUG:(REPLY)
200 PORT Command okay.
Examples
The following example shows how to disable outputting the
debugging messages in the FTP Server:
11-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
DGS-8000# no debug ftpserver
Platform description
11.1.2
N/A
ftp-server enable
Use this command to enable the FTP server. Use the no form of this command
to disable the FTP server.
ftp-server enable
no ftp-server enable
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
-
-
Default
Settings
Disabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to enable the FTP server to
connect the FTP client to upload/download the files.
Usage
guidelines
 Caution
To enable the FTP client to access to the FTP server files,
this command shall be co-used with the ftp-server topdir
command.
The following example shows how to enable the FTP
Server and make the FTP client access to the syslog
content only:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server topdir /syslog
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server enable
The following example shows how to disable the FTP
Server:
DGS-8000(config)# no ftp-server enable
11-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
11.1.3
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
ftp-server password
Use this command to set the login password for the FTP server. Use the no
form of this command to cancel the password configuration.
ftp-server password [type] password
no ftp-server password
Parameter
Description
Define the encryption type of the
password: 0 or 7. The default type
is 0.
Parameter
type
0 indicates the password is not
encrypted.
description
7
indicates
the
password
is
encrypted.
password
The login password for the FTP
server.
Default
Settings
By default, there is no password.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
For the FTP server, the login username and the login
password must be configured to verify the client
connection. One password can be set at most.
The password must include the letter or number. The
space in front of / behind the password is allowed, but it is
ignored. While the space in the middle of the password is
a part of password.
Usage
The minimum and maximum lengths of the plain-text
guidelines
password are 1 character and 25 characters.
The minimum and maximum lengths of the encrypted
password are 4 characters and 52 characters respectively.
The encrypted password is generated by plain-text
password encryption and its format must comply with the
encryption specification. If the encrypted password is used
for the setting, the client must use the corresponding
plain-text password for the purpose of successful login.
11-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
 Caution
Null password is not supported by the FTP server. Without
the password configuration, the client fails to pass the
identity verification of the server.
The following example shows how to set the plain-text
password as pass:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server password pass
OR:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server password 0 pass
Examples
The following example shows how to set the cipher-text
password as 8001:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server password 7 8001
The following example shows how to delete the password
configuration:
DGS-8000(config)# no ftp-server password
Platform description
11.1.4
N/A
ftp-server topdir
Use this command to set the directory range for the FTP client to access to the
FTP server files. Use the no form of this command to prevent the FTP client
from accessing to the FTP server files.
ftp-server topdir directory
no ftp-server topdir
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
directory
Set the top-directory.
Default
Settings
By default, no top-directory is configured.
Command
mode
Usage
Global configuration mode.
The FTP server top directory specifies the directory range
11-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
of the files accessed by the client. Can the FTP client
accesses to the files on the FTP server with the top
directory correctly specified.
Without this command configured, FTP client fails to
access to any file or directory on the FTP server.
The following example shows how to enable the FTP
Server and make the FTP client access to the syslog
content only:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server topdir /syslog
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server enable
The following example shows how to remove the
top-directory configuration:
DGS-8000(config)# no ftp-server topdir
Platform description
11.1.5
N/A
ftp-server timeout
Use this command to set the FTP session idle timeout. Use the no form of this
command to restore the idle timeout to the default value(30 minutes).
ftp-server timeout time
no ftp-server timeout
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Set the session idle timeout, in
time
minutes.
The
valid
range
is
1-3600.
Default
Settings
Default time is 30 minutes.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
11-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
Use this command to set the FTP session idle timeout. If
the session is idle, the FTP server deems the session
connection is invalid and disconnects with the user.
Usage
guidelines
 Caution
The session idle time refers to the time for the FTP
session between two FTP operations.
The following example shows how to set the session idle
timeout as 5m:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server timeout 5
Examples
The following example shows how to restore the session
idle timeout to the default value(30m):
DGS-8000(config)# no ftp-server timeout
11.1.6
ftp-server username
Use this command to set the login username for the FTP server. Use the no
form of this command to cancel the username configuration.
ftp-server username username
no ftp-server username
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
username
Set the login username.
Default
Settings
By default, no username is set.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
11-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
Use this command to set the login username for the FTP
server. To log in to the FTP server, the correct username
and password shall be provided.
The maximum length of the username is 64 characters
and the spaces are not allowed in the middle of the
username. The username consists of letters, semiangle
Usage
number and semiangle mark. One username can be
guidelines
configured for the FTP server at most.
Caution
The anonymous user login is not supported on the FTP
server. The client fails to pass the identity verification if the
username is removed.
The following example shows how to set the username as
user:
DGS-8000(config)# ftp-server username user
Examples
The following example shows how to remove the
username configuration:
DGS-8000(config)# no ftp-server username
Platform description
N/A
11.2 Showing Related Commands
11.2.1
show ftp-server
Use this command to show the status information of the FTP server.
show ftp-server
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
11-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 11 FTP Server Configuration Commands
The FTP server status information includes:

Enabled/Disabled server

The control connection is set up or not (the related IP,
Port are shown)
Usage

The data connection is set up or not (the related IP,
Port and the working mode are shown)
guidelines

The current file transmission type

The login username and password

The FTP server top directory

The session idle timeout setting
The following example shows the related status information
of the FTP server:
DGS-8000# show ftp-server
ftp-server information
=======================================
enable : Y
topdir : /
timeout: 20min
username config : Y
Examples
password config : Y
type: BINARY
control connect : Y
ftp-server: ip=192.167.201.245
ftp-client: ip=192.167.201.82
port=21
port=4978
port data connect : Y
ftp-server: ip=192.167.201.245
ftp-client: ip=192.167.201.82
port=22
port=4982
passive data connect : N
11-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
12
Chapter 12 TCP Configuration Commands
TCP Configuration
Commands
12.1 Configuration Related Commands
12.1.1
ip tcp path-mtu-discovery
Use this command to enable PMTU(Path Maximum Transmission Unit)
discovery function for TCP in the global configuration mode. Use the no form of
this command to disable this function.
ip tcp path-mtu-discovery [age-timer {minutes | infinite}]
no ip tcp path-mtu-discovery [age-timer {minutes | infinite}]
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Set the interval for the
re-detection
Parameter
age-timer minutes
after
the
TCP
discovers PMTU, in minutes. The
default time is 10m. The valid
description
range is 10-30m.
age-timer infinite
(Optional) No re-detection after
the TCP discovers the PTMU.
Default
Settings
Disabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Based on the RFC1191, the TCP path mtu function
improves the network bandwidth utilization and data
Usage
transmission when the user uses TCP to transmit the data
guidelines
in batch.
Enabling or disabling this function takes no effect for the
existent TCP connection and is only effective for the TCP
12-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 TCP Configuration Commands
connection to be created. This command is valid for both
the IPv4 and IPv6 TCP.
According to the RFC1191, after discovering the PMTU,
the TCP uses greater MSS to detect the new PMTU at
some interval, which is specified by the parameter
age-timer. If the PMTU discovered is smaller than the
MSS negotiated between both ends of the TCP
connection, the device will be trying to discover the greater
PMTU at the specified interval untill the PMTU value
reaches the MSS or the user stops using this timer. Use
the parameter age-timer infinite to stop this timer.
Examples
The following example shows how to enable the TCP
PMTU discovery function:
DGS-8000(config)# ip tcp path-mtu-discovery
Command
Related
commands
Description
Show the PMTU value for the TCP
show tcp pmtu
connection.
12.2 Showing Related Commands
12.2.1
show tcp pmtu
Use this command to view the TCP PMTU information.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
Use this command to view the PMTU value for the TCP
guidelines
connection.
Examples
DGS-8000# show tcp pmtu
12-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 12 TCP Configuration Commands
No.
Local Address
[1]
[2]
Foreign Address
2002::1.18946
2002::2.23
192.168.195.212.23
PMTU
1440
192.168.195.112.13560
1440
The following table is the field description :
Field
Description
No.
Sequence number.
Local Address
The local address and the
port number. The number
after the last “.” is the
port number. For example,
“2002::2.23”
and
“192.168.195.212.23”
,
“23” is the port number.
Foreign Address
The remote address and
the
port
number.
The
number after the last “.”
is the port number. For
example, “2002::2.23” and
“192.168.195.212.23”
,
“23” is the port number.
PMTU
The PMTU value.
Command
Description
Related
commands
ip
tcp
path-mtu-discovery
Enable
the
TCP
PMTU
discovery function.
12-3
DGS-8000
Network Management Command
Reference Guide
Version 10.4(3)
.
i
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Revision No.: Version 10.4(3)
Date:
2011/3/1
Copyright Statement
D-Link Corporation ©2011
All rights reserved.
Without our written permission, this document may not be excerpted, reproduced,
transmitted, or otherwise in all or in part by any party in any means.
.
ii
Preface
Version Description
This manual matches the firmware version 10.4(3).
Target Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
Network engineers
Technical salespersons
Network administrators
Conventions in this Document
1. Universal Format Convention
Arial: Arial with the point size 10 is used for the body.
Note: A line is added respectively above and below the prompts such as caution and note to
separate them from the body.
Format of information displayed on the terminal: Courier New, point size 8, indicating the
screen output. User's entries among the information shall be indicated with bolded
characters.
2. Command Line Format Convention
Arial is used as the font for the command line. The meanings of specific formats are
described below:
Bold: Key words in the command line, which shall be entered exactly as they are displayed,
shall be indicated with bolded characters.
Italic: Parameters in the command line, which must be replaced with actual values, shall be
indicated with italic characters.
[ ]: The part enclosed with [ ] means optional in the command.
{ x | y | ... }: It means one shall be selected among two or more options.
[ x | y | ... ]: It means one or none shall be selected among two or more options.
//:Lines starting with an exclamation mark "//" are annotated.
.
iii
3. Signs
Various striking identifiers are adopted in this manual to indicate the matters that special
attention should be paid in the operation, as detailed below:
Warning, danger or alert in the operation.
Caution
Descript, prompt, tip or any other necessary supplement or explanation for
Note
the operation.
The port types mentioned in the examples of this manual may not be
consistent with the actual ones. In real network environments, you need
configure port types according to the support on various products.
Note
The display information of some examples in this manual may include the
information on other series products, like model and description. The details
are subject to the used equipments.
.
iv
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1
1.1
1.1.1
Chapter 1 SNMP
SNMP
Command
Configuration Command
Configuration
Configuration Related Commands
no snmp-server
Use this command to disable the SNMP agent function in the global
configuration mode.
no snmp-server
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command disables the SNMP agent services of all
guidelines
versions supported on the device.
Examples
The example below disables the SNMP agent service.
DGS-8000(config)# no snmp-server
1.1.2
snmp-server chassis-id
Use this command to specify the SNMP system sequential number in the global
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the
initial value.
snmp-server chassis-id text
no snmp-server chassis-id
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Text of the system sequential number,
text
numerals or characters.
.
1-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Default
configuration
The default sequence number is 60FF60.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The SNMP system sequence number is generally the
Usage
sequence number of the machine to facilitate the device
guidelines
identification. The sequence number can be viewed
through the show snmp command.
The example below specifies the SNMP system sequence
Examples
number as 123456:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server chassis-id 123456
1.1.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
show snmp
Show the SNMP information.
snmp-server community
Use this command to specify the SNMP community access string in the global
configuration mode. The no format of the command cancels the SNMP
community access string.
snmp-server community string [view view-name] [[ro | rw] [host ipaddr] [ipv6
ipv6-aclname] [aclnum] [aclname]
no snmp-server community string
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Community string, which is equivalent
string
to
the
password
communication
between the NMS and the SNMP agent
view-name
Name
of
the
view
used
for
management
Indicate that the NMS can only read the
ro
variables of the MIB.
Indicate that the NMS can read and
rw
write the variables of the MIB.
.
1-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Sequence number of the ACL, which
specifies the IPV4 address range of the
aclnum
NMS that are permitted to access the
MIB.
Name of the ACL, which specifies the
IPV4 address range of the NMS that
aclname
are permitted to access the MIB.
Name of the IPv6 ACL, which specifies
ipv6-aclname
the IPv6 address range of the NMS that
are permitted to access the MIB
IP address of the NMS accessing the
ipaddr
MIB
Default
configuration
All communities are read only by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is the first important command to enable
the SNMP agent function. It specifies the community
Usage
attribute, range of the NMSs that can access the MIB, and
guidelines
more.
To disable the SNMP agent function, execute the
command no snmp-server.
The example below restricts the access to the MIB through
the access list, which allows only the NMS of the IP
Examples
address 192.168.12.1 to access the MIB.
DGS-8000(config)# access-list 2 permit 192.168.12.1
DGS-8000(config)# access-list 2 deny any
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server community public ro 2
Related
Command
Description
commands
access-list
Define the access list.
.
1-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.4
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
snmp-server contact
Use this command to specify the SNMP system contact in the global
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the system
contact.
snmp-server contact text
no snmp-server contact
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
text
String describing the system contact.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The example below specifies the SNMP system contract
Examples
i-net800@i-net.com.cn:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server contact
i-net800@i-net.com.cn
Command
Related
show
commands
snmp-server
no snmp-server
1.1.5
Description
Check the SNMP information.
Disable the SNMP agent function.
snmp-server enable traps
Use this command to enable the SNMP server to actively send the SNMP Trap
massage to NMS when some emergent and important events occur in the
global configuration mode. The no format of this command is used to disable
the SNMP server to actively send the SNMP Trap massage to NMS.
snmp-server enable traps [snmp ]
no snmp-server enable traps
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Enable the trap notification of SNMP
snmp
events.
.
1-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global configuration mode.
This command must work with the global configuration
command snmp-server host to send the SNMP Trap
message.
The example below enables the SNMP server to actively
send the SNMP Trap message.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server enable traps snmp
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.12.219 public
snmp
Related
commands
1.1.6
Command
Description
snmp-server
Specify the SNMP host to send the
host
SNMP Trap message.
snmp-server group
Use this command to set the SNMP user group in the global configuration mode.
The no form of this command is used to remove the user group.
snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}} [read
readview][write writeview] [access {[ipv6 ipv6_aclname ] [aclnum |aclname]
num|name}]
no snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 }
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
v1,v2c,v3
SNMP version
Authenticate the messages transmitted
by the user group without encryption.
auth
This applies to only SNMPv3.
Neither authenticate nor encrypt the
messages transmitted by the user
noauth
group. This applies to only SNMPv3.
Authenticate
and
encrypt
the
messages transmitted by the user
priv
group. This applies to only SNMPv3.
.
1-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
readview
Configuration Command
Associate with a read-only view.
Sequence number of the ACL in the
range of 1 to 99, which specifies the
aclnum
IPV4 address range of the NMS that
are permitted to access the MIB.
Name of the ACL, which specifies the
IPV4 address range of the NMS that
aclname
are permitted to access the MIB.
Name of the IPv6 ACL, which specifies
the IPv6 address range of the NMS that
ipv6_aclname
are permitted to access the MIB
writeview
Associate with a read-write view.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
The example below sets a user group.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server group mib2user v3 priv read
mib2
Command
Related
commands
show
Description
snmp
the
SNMP
user
group
configuration.
group
1.1.7
Show
snmp-server host
Use this command to specify the SNMP host (NMS) to send the trap message
in the global configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to
remove the specified SNMP host.
snmp-server host {host-addr| ipv6 ipv6-addr} [vrf vrfname] [traps] [version {1
|
2c
|
3
[auth
|
noauth
|
priv]]
community-string
[udp-port
port-num][notification-type]
no snmp-server host { host-addr | ipv6 ipv6-addr } [ vrf vrfname ] [ traps ]
[ version { 1 | 2c | 3 { auth | noauth | priv } ] community-string [ udp-port
port-num ]
Parameter
Parameter
.
Description
1-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
description
Chapter 1 SNMP
host-addr
SNMP host address
ipv6-addr
SNMP host address(ipv6)
vrfname
Set the name of vrf forwarding table
version
SNMP version: V1, V2C or V3
auth | noauth |
priv
community-string
port-num
configuration
Security level of SNMPv3 users
Community
string
or
username
(SNMPv3 version)
Port of the SNMP host
notification-type
Default
Configuration Command
The type of the SNMP trap message
sent actively, such as snmp.
By default, no SNMP host is specified.
If no type of the SNMP trap message is specified, all types
of the SNMP trap message will be included.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command must work with the snmp-server enable
traps command in the global configuration mode to
actively send the SNMP trap messages to NMS.
It is possible to configure multiple SNMP hosts to receive
Usage
guidelines
the SNMP Trap messages. One host can use different
combinations of the types of the SNMP trap message, but
the last configuration for the same host will overwrite the
previous configurations. In other words, to send different
SNMP trap messages to the same host, different
combination of SNMP trap messages have to be
configured.
The example below specifies an SNMP host to receive the
Examples
SNMP event trap:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server host 192.168.12.219 public
snmp
Related
commands
Command
Description
snmp-server
Enable to send the SNMP trap
enable traps
message.
.
1-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.8
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
snmp-server location
Use this command to set the SNMP system location information in the global
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to remove the
specified SNMP system location information.
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
text
String describing the system
Default
configuration
Null
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The example below specifies the system information:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server location
start-technology-city 4F of A Buliding
Related
commands
Command
snmp-server
contact
1.1.9
Description
Specify the system contact information.
snmp-server packetsize
Use this command to specify the maximum size of the SNMP packet in the
global configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to
the default value.
snmp-server packetsize byte-count
no snmp-server packetsize
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
byte-count
Packet size in the range of 484 to
17876 bytes
Default
configuration
1472 bytes.
.
1-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The example below specifies the maximum SNMP packet
Examples
size as 1,492 bytes:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server packetsize 1492
Related
commands
1.1.10
Command
Description
snmp-server
Specify the length of the SNMP trap
queue-length
message queue.
snmp-server queue-length
Use this command to specify the length of the SNMP trap message queue in
the global configuration mode.
snmp-server queue-length length
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Queue length in the range of 1 to
length
1000
Default
configuration
10.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The SNMP trap message queue is used to store the
SNMP trap messages. This command can be used to
Usage
adjust the size of the SNMP trap message queue to control
guidelines
the speed to sending the SNMP trap messages.
The maximum speed to send messages is 4 messages
per second.
The example below specifies the speed to send the trap
Examples
message to 4 messages per second:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server queue-length 4
Related
Command
.
Description
1-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.11
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
snmp-server
Specify the maximum size of the SNMP
packetsize
packet.
snmp-server system-shutdown
Use this command to enable the SNMP system restart notification function in
the global configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to disable
the SNMP system notification function.
snmp-server system-shutdown
no snmp-server system-shutdown
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
This command is used to enable the SNMP system restart
Usage
notification function. The DGS-8000 sends the SNMP trap
guidelines
messages to the NMS to notify the system pending before
the device is reloaded or rebooted.
The example below enables the SNMP system restart
Examples
notification function:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server system-shutdown
1.1.12
snmp-server trap-source
Use this command to specify the source of the SNMP trap message in the
global configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it
to the default value.
snmp-server trap-source interface
no snmp-server trap-source
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Interface to be used as the source of
interface
the SNMP trap message
Default
The IP address of the interface where the NMP message
configuration
is sent from is just the source address.
.
1-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
By default, the IP address of the interface where the NMP
Usage
guidelines
message is sent from is just the source address. For easy
management and identification, this command can be
used to fix a local IP address as the SNMP source
address.
The example below specifies the IP address of Ethernet
Examples
interface 0 as the source of the SNMP trap message:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server trap-source fastethernet 0
Related
commands
1.1.13
Command
Description
snmp-server
Enable the sending of the SNMP trap
enable traps
message.
snmp-server
Specify the NMS host to send the
host
SNMP trap message.
snmp-server trap-timeout
Use this command to define the retransmission timout time of the SNMP trap
message in the global configuration mode. The no form of this command is
used to restore it to the default value.
snmp-server trap-timeout seconds
no snmp-server trap-timeout
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Timeout ( in seconds) of retransmit the
seconds
SNMP trap message
Default
configuration
30s.
Command
mode
Examples
Global configuration mode.
The example below specifies the timeout period as 60
seconds.
.
1-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server trap-timeout 60
Related
commands
1.1.14
Command
Description
snmp-server
Specify the length of the SNMP trap
queue-length
message queue.
snmp-server
Specify the NMS host to send the
host
SNMP trap message.
snmp-server user
Use this command to set the SNMP name in the global configuration mode. The
no form of this command is used to delete the user.
snmp-server user username groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 [encrypted] [auth
{md5 | sha} auth-password ] [priv des56 priv-password]} [access {[ipv6
ipv6_aclname ][aclnum | aclname}] ]
no snmp-server user username groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 }
Parameter
Description
username
User name
groupname
Group name of the user.
SNMP
v1 | v2c | v3
version.
supports
But
the
only
SNMPv3
following
security
parameters.
Input the password in cipher text mode.
In cipher text mode, input continuous
HEX alphanumeric characters. Note that
the authentication password of MD5 has
encrypted
a length of 16 characters, while that of
Parameter
SHA has a length of 20 bytes. Two
description
characters make a byte. The encrypted
key can only be used by the local SNMP
engine on the switch.
Specify
auth
whether
to
use
the
authentication.
Password string (no more than 32
characters) used by the authentication
auth-password
protocol. The system will change the
password
to
the
corresponding
authentication key.
Encryption mode. des56 refers to 56-bit
DES encryption protocol.
priv
priv-password: password string (no more
.
1-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
than 32 characters) used for encryption.
The system will change the password to
the corresponding encryption key.
Enable the MD5 authentication protocol.
md5
While
the
sha
enables
the
SHA
authentication protocol.
Sequence number of the ACL in the
aclnumber
range of 1 to 99, which specifies the IPV4
address range of the NMS that are
permitted to access the MIB.
Name of the ACL, which specifies the
IPV4 address range of the NMS that are
aclname
permitted to access the MIB.
Name of the IPv6 ACL, which specifies
ipv6_aclname
the IPv6 address range of the NMS that
are permitted to access the MIB
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The example below configures an SNMPv3 user with MD5
Examples
authentication and DES encryption:
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server user user-2 mib2user v3
auth md5 authpassstr priv des56 despassstr
Related
commands
Command
show
snmp
user
1.1.15
Description
Show the SNMP user configuration.
snmp-server view
Use this command to set a SNMP view in the global configuration mode. The
no form of this command is sued to delete the view.
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {include | exclude}
no snmp-server
view view-name [oid-tree]
.
1-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
Chapter 1 SNMP
Parameter
Description
view-name
View name
Configuration Command
Specify the MIB object to associate with
oid-tree
the view.
description
Include the sub trees of the MIB object
include
in the view.
Exclude the sub trees of the MIB object
exclude
from the view.
Default
configuration
By default, a default view is set to access all MIB objects.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The example below sets a view that includes all MIB-2
Examples
sub-trees (oid is 1.3.6.1).
DGS-8000(config)# snmp-server view mib2 1.3.6.1 include
1.1.16
Related
Command
Description
commands
show snmp view
Show the view configuration.
snmp trap link-status
For this command, please refer to the INTF-CREF.doc
Parameter
description
N/A
Default
configuration
Please refer to the INTF-CREF.doc.
Command
mode
Please refer to the INTF-CREF.doc.
Examples
Please refer to the INTF-CREF.doc
.
1-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.2
1.2.1
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
Showing Related Command
show snmp
Use this comand to show the SNMP information in the privileged mode.
show snmp [mib | user | view | group | host]
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
show snmp: Show the SNMP information.
show snmp mib: Show the SNMP MIBs supported in the
system.
Usage
show snmp user: Show the SNMP user information.
guidelines
show snmp view: Show the SNMP view information.
show snmp group: Show the SNMP user group
information.
Show snmp host: show the configuration set by users.
The example below shows the SNMP information:
DGS-8000# show snmp
Chassis: 60FF60
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
Examples
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
0 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 1472)
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
0 Trap PDUs
SNMP global trap: disabled
SNMP logging: disabled
SNMP agent: enabled
Related
Command
.
Description
1-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 SNMP
Configuration Command
snmp-server
Specify the SNMP system sequence
chassis-id
number.
.
1-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2
2.1
2.1.1
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
RMON
Configuration
commands
Configuration Related Commands
rmon alarm
Use this command to monitor a MIB variable. The no form of this command
cancels the logging.
rmon alarm number variable interval {absolute | delta } rising-threshold
value
[event-number]
falling-threshold
value
[event-number]
[owner
ownername]
no rmon alarm number
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The DGS-8000 allows you to modify the configured history
information of the Ethernet network, including variable,
Usage
absolute/delta,
guidelines
threshold, and the corresponding events. However, the
owner,
rising-
threshold
/falling-
modification does not take effect immediately until the
system triggers the monitoring event at the next time.
The example below monitors the MIB variable instance
ifInNUcastPkts.6.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# rmon alarm 10 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.6 30
delta rising-threshold 20 1 falling-threshold 10 1 owner
zhangsan
Related
Command
.
Description
2-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
rmon event number [log] [trap
community] description string
Add an event definition.
[owner owner-string]
2.1.2
rmon collection history
Use this command to log the history of an Ethernet interface. The no form of
this command cancels the logging.
rmon collection history index [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number]
[interval seconds]
no rmon collection history index
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The DGS-8000 allows you to modify the configured history
Usage
guidelines
information of the Ethernet network, including owner,
buckets, and interval. However, the modification does not
take effect immediately until the system records history at
the next time.
The example below Logs the history of Ethernet port 1.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fast-Ethernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# rmon collection history
1 zhansan
buckets 10 interval 10
Related
commands
Command
rmon collection stats index
[owner owner-name]
2.1.3
Description
Add a statistical entry.
rmon collection stats
Use this command to monitor an Ethernet interface. The no form of this
command remove the configuration.
rmon collection stats index [owner owner-string]
no rmon collection stats index
Default
N/A.
.
2-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below enables monitoring the statistics of
Examples
Ethernet port 1.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fast-Ethernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# rmon collection stats 1 zhansan
Command
Description
Related
rmon
collection
commands
index [owner owner-name]
[buckets
history
bucket-number]
Add a history control entry.
[interval seconds]
2.1.4
rmon event
Use this command to define an event. The no form of this command cancels
the logging.
rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description-string] [description
description-string] [owner owner-name]
no rmon alarm number
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below defines the event actions: log event
Examples
and send trap message.
DGS-8000(config)# rmon event 1 log trap rmon description
"ifInNUcastPkts is too much " owner zhangsan
Related
Command
.
Description
2-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
rmon alarm number variable
interval {absolute | delta }
rising-threshold value
[event-number] falling-threshold
Add an alarm entry.
value [event-number] [owner
ownername]
2.2
2.2.1
Showing Related Commands
show rmon alarm
Use this command to show the rmon alarm table.
show rmon alarm
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below shows the rmon alarm table.
DGS-8000#
show rmon alarm
rmon alarm table:
index: 10,
interval: 30,
oid = 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.12.6
sampleType: 2,
Examples
alarmValue: 0,
startupAlarm: 3,
risingThreshold: 20,
fallingThreshold: 10,
risingEventIndex: 1,
fallingEventIndex: 1,
owner: zhangesan,
stats: 1,
Related
Command
.
Description
2-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
rmon alarm number variable
interval {absolute | delta }
rising-threshold value
[event-number]
Add an alarm entry.
falling-threshold value
[event-number] [owner
ownername]
2.2.2
show rmon event
Use this command to show the event information.
show rmon event
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below shows the event information.
DGS-8000#
show rmon event
rmon event table:
index = 1
description = ifInNUcastPkts
Examples
type = 4
community = rmon
lastTimeSent = 0 d:0 h:0 m:0 s
owner = zhangsan
status = 1
Command
Description
rmon event number [log]
Related
[trap
commands
[description
community]
description-string]
Add an event entry.
[owner
ownername]
.
2-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
2.2.3
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
show rmon history
Use this command to show the history information.
show rmon history
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below shows the history information.
DGS-8000#
show rmon history
rmon history control table:
index = 1
interface = FastEthernet 0/1
bucketsRequested = 10
bucketsGranted = 10
interval = 1800
owner = zhangsan
stats = 1
rmon history table:
index = 1
Examples
sampleIndex = 198
intervalStart = 0d:14h:0m:47s
dropEvents = 0
octets = 67988
pkts = 726
broadcastPkts = 502
multiPkts = 189
crcAllignErrors = 0
underSizePkts = 0
overSizePkts = 0
fragments = 0
jabbers = 0
collisions = 0
utilization = 0
.
2-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
Command
Description
Related
rmon collection history index
commands
[owner ownername] [buckets
Add a history control
bucket-number] [interval
entry.
seconds]
2.2.4
show rmon statistics
Use this command to show the statistics.
show rmon statictics
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
The example below shows the statistics.
DGS-8000#
show rmon statistics
ether statistic table:
index = 1
interface = FastEthernet 0/1
owner = zhangsan
status = 0
dropEvents = 0
octets = 1884085
pkts = 3096
Examples
broadcastPkts = 161
multiPkts = 97
crcAllignErrors = 0
underSizePkts = 0
overSizePkts = 1200
fragments = 0
jabbers = 0
collisions = 0
packets64Octets = 128
packets65To127Octets = 336
.
2-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 2 RMON
Configuration commands
packets128To255Octets = 229
packets256To511Octets = 3
packets512To1023Octets = 0
packets1024To1518Octets = 1200
Related
commands
Command
rmon
collection
Description
stats
index [owner owner-string]
.
Add a statistical entry.
2-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3
3.1
3.1.1
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
NTP
Configuration
Commands
NTP Configuring Related Commands
no ntp
Use this command to disable the ntp synchronization service with the time
server and clear all configuration information of ntp.
no ntp
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
By default, the NTP function is disabled. However, once
Usage
the NTP server or the NTP security identification
guidelines
mechanism is configured, the NTP function will be
enabled.
The configuration example below disables the NTP
Examples
service.
DGS-8000(config)#no ntp
Related
Command
Description
commands
ntp server
Specify a NTP server.
.
3-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.2
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
ntp access-group
Use this command to configure the access control priority of the ntp service.
Use the no form of this command to cancel the access control priority.
ntp
access-group
{peer
|
serve
|
serve-only
|
query-only}
access-list-number | access-list-name
no
ntp
access-group
{peer
|
serve
|
serve-only
|
query-only}
access-list-number | access-list-name
Parameter
Description
Not only allow to request for the time
of and control the local NTP service,
but
peer
also
allow
the
time
synchronization of the local and the
peer.
Allow to request for the time of and
Parameter
control the local NTP service only,
serve
the time synchronization of the local
description
and the peer is not allowed.
serve-only
query-only
access-list-number
access-list-name
Default
Allow to request for the time of local
NTP service only.
Allow to control and search for the
local NTP service.
The IP access control list number, in
the range of 1-99 and 1300-1999.
The IP access control list name.
No NTP access control rule has been configured by
default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
3-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
Use this command to configure the access control priority
of the ntp service. NTP services access control function
provides a minimal security measures (more secure way is
to use the NTP authentication mechanism).
When an access request arrives, NTP service matches the
rules in accordance with the sequence from the smallest to
the largest to access restriction, and the first matched rule
shall prevail. The matching order is peer, serve,
serve-only, query-only.
Usage
guidelines
Caution:
Control query function is not supported in the current
system. Although it matches with the order in accordance
with the above rules, the related requests about the control
and query are not supported.
If you do not configure any access control rules, then all
accesses are allowed. However, once the access control
rules are configured, only the rule that allows access can
be carried out.
The following example shows how to allow the peer device
in acl1 to control the query, request for and synchronize the
time with the local device; and limit the peer device in acl2
Examples
to request the time for the local device:
DGS-8000(config)# ntp access-group peer 1
DGS-8000(config)# ntp access-group serve-only 2
3.1.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
ip access-list
Create the IP access control list.
ntp authenticate
Use this command to enable NTP authentication globally.
ntp authenticate
no ntp authenticate
.
3-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
If the global security identification mechanism is not used,
the synchronization communication is not encrypted. To
Usage
guidelines
enable encrypted communication on the server, enable the
security identification mechanism and configure other keys
globally.
The authentication standard is the trusted key specified by
ntp authentication-key and ntp trusted-key.
After an authentication key is configured and specified as
the
Examples
global
trusted
key,
enable
the
authentication
mechanism.
DGS-8000(config)#ntp authentication-key 6 md5 wooooop
DGS-8000(config)#ntp trusted-key 6
DGS-8000(config)#ntp authenticate
Command
Related
ntp
commands
authentication-key
ntp trusted-key
3.1.4
Description
Set the global authentication key.
Configure the global trusted key.
ntp authentication-key
Use this command to configure a global NTP authentication key for the NTP
server.
ntp authentication-key key-id md5 key-string [enc-type]
no ntp authentication-key key-id
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
key-id
Key ID
key-string
Key string
(Optional)
enc-type
Whether
this
key
is
encrypted, where, 0 indicates the key is
.
3-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
not encrypted, 7 indicates the key is
encrypted simply.
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Configure the global authentication key and adopt md5 for
encryption.
Each
key
presents
the
unique
key-id
Usage
identification. Customers can use the ntp trusted-key to
guidelines
set the key of key-id as the global trusted key.
The upeer limit of the keys is 1024. However, each server
can only support one key.
The following example configures an authentication key
Examples
with ID 6.
DGS-8000(config)ntp authentication-key 6 md5 wooooop
Related
commands
3.1.5
Command
Description
ntp
Enable the global security identification
authenticate
mechanism.
ntp trusted-key
Configure the global trusted key.
ntp server
Specify a NTP server.
ntp disable
Use this command to disable the function of receiving the NTP message on the
interface.
ntp disable
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
The NTP message is received on the interface, by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
.
3-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
The NTP message received on any interface can be
provided to the client to carry out the clock adjustment.
Usage
guidelines
The function can be set to shield the NTP message
received from the corresponding interface.
Note: The interface that is configured with this command
can receive and send IP packets. No this command is
configured on other interfaces.
The configuration example below disables the function of
Examples
receiving the NTP message on the interface.
DGS-8000(config)#no ntp disable
3.1.6
ntp master
Use this command to configure the local time as the NTP master(the local time
reference source is reliable), providing the synchronizing time for other devices.
Use the no form of this command to cancel the NTP master settings.
ntp master [stratum]
no ntp master
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Specify the stratum where the local time
stratum
is, in the range of 1-15. The defaut
stratum is 8.
Default
No NTP master is configured, by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
3-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
In general, the local system synchronizes the time from the
external time source directly or indirectly. However, if the
time synchronization of local system fails for the network
connection trouble, ect, use the command to set the
reliable reference source of the local time, providing the
synchronized time for other devices.
Once set, the system time can not be synchronized to the
time source with higher starum.
Usage
Caution:
guidelines
Using this command to set the local time as the master (in
particular, specify a lower starum value), is likely to be
covered by the effective clock source. If multiple devices in
the
same
network
use
this
command,
the
time
synchronization instability may occur due to the time
difference between the devices.
In addition, before using this command, if the system has
never been synchronized with an external clock source, it
is necessary to manually calibrate the system clock to
prevent too much bias.
The configuration example below configures the reliable
Examples
local time reference source and set the time stratum 12:
DGS-8000(config)# ntp master 12
3.1.7
ntp server
Use this command to specify a NTP server for the NTP client.
ntp server ip-addr [ version version ] [ source if-name ] [ key keyid][prefer]
no ntp server ip-addr
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip-addr
Set the IP address of the NTP server.
(Optional) Specify the version (1-3) of
version
NTP, NTPv3 by default.
(Optional) Specify the source interface
if-name
from which the NTP message is sent
(L3 interface).
keyid
(Optional) Specify the encryption key
.
3-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
adopted when communication with the
corresponding server.
(Optional) Specify the corresponding
prefer
Default
server as the prefer server.
No NTP server is configured, by default.
Command
Global configuration mode.
mode
At present, our system only support clients other than
servers, and the upeer limit of supported synchronous
servers are 20.
To carry out the encrypted communication with the server,
set the global encryption key and global trusted key firstly,
and then specify the corresponding key as the trusted key
of the server to launch the encrypted communication of the
Usage
server. It requires the server presents identical global
guidelines
encryption key and global trust key to complete the
encrypted communication with the server.
In the same condition (for instance, precision), the prefer
clock is used for synchronization.
It should be noted that the configured interface is that
configured with the IP address and can communicate with
the corresponding NTP server when you configure the
source interface of the NTP message.
The
configuration
example
below
configures
the
equipment in the network as NTP server.
Examples
3.1.8
For IPv4: DGS-8000(config)#
ntp server 192.168.210.222
For IPv6: DGS-8000(config)#
ntp server 10::2
Related
Command
Description
commands
no ntp
Disable the NTP service function.
ntp synchronize
Use this command to synchronize the realtime.
ntp synchronize
no ntp synchronize
.
3-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
8 consecutive packets are synchronized for the first
Usage
guidelines
synchronization of NTP and each server. Then the
synchronization occurs every one minute. This command
is used to complete the instant synchronization during the
interval of auto-sync.
Examples
The following example synchronizes the NTP realtime.
DGS-8000(config)#ntp synchronize
Related
Command
Description
commands
ntp server
Specify a NTP server.
Platform
description
3.1.9
Supported by parts of products.
ntp trusted-key
Use this command to set a key at the global trusted key.
ntp trusted-key key-id
no ntp trusted-key key-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
key-id
Global trusted key ID
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
3-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
The NTP communication parties must use the same
trusted key. The key is identified by ID and is not
transmitted to improve security.
The following configures an authentication key and sets it
as the corresponding server trusted key.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#ntp authentication-key 6 md5 wooooop
DGS-8000(config)#ntp trusted-key 6
DGS-8000(config)#ntp server 192.168.210.222 key 6
Command
ntp authenticate
Related
commands
ntp
authentication-key
ntp server
3.1.10
Description
Enable the security authentication
mechanism.
Set the NTP authentication key.
Specify a NTP server.
ntp update-calendar
Use this command to update the calendar for the NTP client using the
synchronization time of the external time source. Use the no form of this
command to disable the update-calendar function
ntp update-calendar
no ntp update-calendar
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
By default, update the calendar periodically is not
configured.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
By default, the NTP update-calendar is not configured.
Usage
guidelines
After configuration, the NTP client updates the calendar at
the same time when the time synchronization of external
time source is successful. It is recommended to enable this
function for keeping the accurate calendar.
.
3-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
The following configures the NTP update calendar
Examples
periodically.
DGS-8000(config)# ntp update-calendar
3.2
3.2.1
Showing and Monitoring Commands
debug ntp
Use this command to show the NTP debugging information.
debug ntp
no debug ntp
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode.
To carry out the NTP function debugging, output
necessary debugging information to implement the failure
diagnosis and troubleshooting by this command.
The example below enables the NTP debugging switch.
Examples
3.2.2
DGS-8000(config)#debug ntp
show ntp status
Use this command to show the NTP information.
show ntp status
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
.
3-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 NTP Configuration Commands
If the NTP service of the system is enabled, show current
Usage
NTP information. This command will not print any
guidelines
information before the synchronization server is added for
the first time.
The example below shows the NTP information of current
Examples
system.
DGS-8000(config)#show ntp status
.
3-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4
4.1
4.1.1
Chapter 4 SNTP Configuration Commands
SNTP
Configuration
Commands
Configuring Related Commands
sntp enable
Use this command to enable the SNTP function. Use the no form of this
command to restore the default value.
[no] sntp enable
Default
configuration
Disabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command shows the parameters of SNTP.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# sntp enable
Related
commands
Command
Description
show sntp
Show the SNTP configuration.
clock
Synchronize the software clock with
update-calendar
the hardware clock.
clock set
Set the software clock.
Platform
description
N/A
.
4-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.2
Chapter 4 SNTP Configuration Commands
sntp interval
Use this command to set the interval for the SNTP Client to synchronize its
clock with the NTP/SNTP Server.
sntp interva seconds
no sntp interval
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Synchronization interval in 60 to 65535
seconds
seconds
Default
configuration
1800s
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
The show sntp command shows the parameters of SNTP.
Note that the set interval will not take
effect immediately. To this end, execute
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Related
commands
Caution
the sntp enable command after setting
the interval.
DGS-8000(config)# sntp interval 3600
Command
Description
sntp enable
Enable SNTP.
show sntp
Show the SNTP configuration.
clock
Synchronizes the software clock with
update-calendar
the hardware clock.
Platform
description
N/A
.
4-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.3
Chapter 4 SNTP Configuration Commands
sntp server
Use this command to set the SNTP server. Since the SNTP protocol is
completely compatible with the NTP protocol, you can configure the SNTP
server as the public NTP server on the Internet.
sntp server ip-address
no sntp server
Parameter
description
Parameter
ip-address
Description
The IP address of the NTP/SNTP
server.
Default
configuration
No NTP/SNTP server is configured.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
The show sntp command shows the parameters of SNTP.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# sntp server 192.168.4.12
Related
commands
Command
Description
show sntp
Show the SNTP configuration.
sntp enable
Enable SNTP.
Platform
description
4.2
4.2.1
N/A
Showing Related Command
show sntp
Use this command to show the parameters of SNTP.
show sntp
.
4-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 SNTP Configuration Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command shows the parameters of SNTP.
DGS-8000# show
Examples
Related
commands
sntp
SNTP state
: Enable
SNTP server
: 192.168.4.12
SNTP sync interval
: 60
Time zone
: +8
Command
Description
sntp enable
Enable SNTP.
show sntp
Show the SNTP configuration.
Platform
description
N/A
.
4-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5
5.1
5.1.1
Chapter 5 SPAN Configuration Commands
SPAN Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
monitor session
Use this command to create a SPAN session and specify the destination port
(monitoring port) and source port (monitored port). The no form of the
command is used to delete the session or delete the source port or destination
port separately.
monitor session session_number {source interface interface-id [both | rx | tx]
| destination interface interface-id { encapsulation | switch } | mac {source
mac-addr| destination mac-addr } [both | rx | tx]} [acl name]
no monitor session session_number [source interface interface-id [both | rx
| tx] | destination interface interface-id { encapsulation | switch }] | mac
{source mac-addr| destination mac-addr } [both | rx | tx] [acl name]
no monitor session all
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
session_number
SPAN session number
Specify the source port.
source interface
interface-id: interface ID, which can be
interface-id
physical interface, not SVI. DGS-8000
series support AP.
destination
Specify the destination port.
interface
interface-id: interface ID, which can be
interface-id
physical interface, not SVI.
mac
The source MAC address of the
source
mac-addr
mirrored frame.
mac destination
The destination MAC address of the
mac-addr
mirrored frame.
.
5-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 SPAN Configuration Commands
Monitor
both acl name
the
inbounding
and
outbounding frames simultaneously.
acl name/id of monitored flow
rx
Monitor only the inbounding frames.
tx
Monitor only the outbounding frames.
all
Delete all sessions.
Support the encapsulation function for
the monitored port. Once this function
encapsulation
is enabled, the tag of the mirrored
frame is peeled off forcibly. This
function is disabled by default.
Enable switching on the mirroring
destination port. It is disabled by
switch
default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Both switch port and routed port can be configured as the
source port or destination port. The SPAN session has no
effect on the normal operation of the equipment. You can
configure a SPAN session on disabled ports. However, the
SPAN does not work unless you enable the source and
destination ports.
Usage
A port can not be configured as the source port and the
guidelines
destination port at the same time.
You will remove the whole session if you do not specify the
source port or the destination port.
Use show monitor to display SPAN session status.
Note: 1). session 1 supports global port mirroring crossing
line cards. To configure the SPAN crossing the line cards,
only the session 1 can be used.
The example below describes how to create a SPAN
session: session 1: If this session is set previously, clear
the configuration of current session 1 firstly, and then set
Examples
the frame mapping of port 1 to port 8.
DGS-8000(config)# no monitor session 1
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 1 source interface
gigabitEthernet 1/1 both
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 1 destination
.
5-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 SPAN Configuration Commands
interface gigabitEthernet 1/8
Related
commands
Command
show monitor
z
Use this command to display the
SPAN configurations.
DGS-8000 series switches support up to 128
sessions.
Platform
description
Description
z
DGS-8000
series
do
not
support
the
source/destination MAC-based frame mirror.
5.1.2
show monitor
Use this command to display the SPAN configurations.
show monitor [session session_number]
Default
configuration
Parameter
description
All SPAN sessions are displayed by default.
Parameter
session
session_number
Description
SPAN session number.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
This example shows how to use show monitor to display
SPAN session 1:
DGS-8000# show monitor session 1
Examples
sess-num: 1
src-intf:
GigabitEthernet 3/1 frame-type Both
dest-intf:
GigabitEthernet 3/8
Related
Command
.
Description
5-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 SPAN Configuration Commands
Specify a SPAN session and the
monitor
destination port (mirroring port) and the
session
source port (mirrored port).
.
5-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
6
6.1
6.1.1
Chapter 6 RSPAN Configuration Commands
RSPAN Configuration
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
monitor session
Use this command to set RSPAN session.
Set mirror device attribute:
monitor session session_num {remote-destination | remote-source}
Set destination mirror:
monitor session session-num destination remote vlan vlan-id interface
interface-name [switch]
Set remote source mirror:
monitor session session-num source interface interface-id [rx | tx | both]
Set mirror reflector port:
monitor session session-num destination remote vlan vlan-id reflector-port
interface interface-name [switch]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
session-num
Session number.
description
vlan-id
Remote span vlan id.
interface-id
Interface number .
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Key in end or Ctrl+C to return to the privileged mode.
guidelines
Key in exit to return to the global configuration mode.
.
6-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 RSPAN Configuration Commands
The following example configures the source switch:
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 remote-source
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 source interface
gigabitEthernet
1/2
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 destination remote
vlan 7 interface gigabitEthernet 1/3 switch
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 destination remote
vlan 7 reflector-port interface gigabitEthernet 1/1
switch
The following example configures the destination switch:
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 remote-destination
DGS-8000(config)# monitor session 2 destination remote
vlan 7 interface gigabitEthernet 1/1 switch
6.1.2
Related
Command
Description
commands
show monitor
Show monitor session information.
Platform
The reflector-port keyword is unnecessary for the products
description
that do not support the reflector port.
remote-span
Use this command to set RSPAN VLAN.
[no] remote-span
Parameter
description
N/A .
Command
mode
VLAN configuration mode.
Usage
Key in end or Ctrl+C to return to the privileged mode.
guidelines
Key in exit to return to the global configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config)# vlan 5
Examples
DGS-8000(config-vlan)# remote-span
.
6-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 6 RSPAN Configuration Commands
Related
Command
Description
commands
show vlan
Show VLAN information.
Platform
description
-
.
6-3
DGS-8000
IP Routing Command Reference Guide
Version 10.4(3)
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Revision No.: Version 10.4(3)
.
i
Date:
2011/3/1
Copyright Statement
D-Link Corporation ©2011
All rights reserved.
Without our written permission, this document may not be excerpted, reproduced,
transmitted, or otherwise in all or in part by any party in any means.
.
ii
Preface
Version Description
This manual matches the firmware version 10.4(3).
Target Readers
This manual is intended for the following readers:
 Network engineers
 Technical salespersons
 Network administrators
Conventions in this Document
1. Universal Format Convention
Arial: Arial with the point size 10 is used for the body.
Note: A line is added respectively above and below the prompts such as caution and note to
separate them from the body.
Format of information displayed on the terminal: Courier New, point size 8, indicating the
screen output. User's entries among the information shall be indicated with bolded
characters.
2. Command Line Format Convention
Arial is used as the font for the command line. The meanings of specific formats are
described below:
Bold: Key words in the command line, which shall be entered exactly as they are displayed,
shall be indicated with bolded characters.
Italic: Parameters in the command line, which must be replaced with actual values, shall be
indicated with italic characters.
[ ]: The part enclosed with [ ] means optional in the command.
{ x | y | ... }: It means one shall be selected among two or more options.
[ x | y | ... ]: It means one or none shall be selected among two or more options.
//:Lines starting with an exclamation mark "//" are annotated.
.
iii
3. Signs
Various striking identifiers are adopted in this manual to indicate the matters that special
attention should be paid in the operation, as detailed below:
Warning, danger or alert in the operation.
Caution
Descript, prompt, tip or any other necessary supplement or explanation for
Note
the operation.
The port types mentioned in the examples of this manual may not be
consistent with the actual ones. In real network environments, you need
configure port types according to the support on various products.
Note
The display information of some examples in this manual may include the
information on other series products, like model and description. The details
are subject to the used equipments.
.
iv
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1
1.1
1.1.1
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Protocol-independent
Commands
Configuration Related Commands
dampening
Use this command to enable the ip event dampening function on the interface.
Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
dampening [half-life-period [reuse-threshold suppress-threshold max-suppress
[restart [restart-penalty]]]]
no dampening
Parameter
Description
half-life-period
Configure the half-life period of
suppression penalty, in the range of
1-30. The default value is 5s.
reuse-threshold
Configure the penalty threshold to
unsuppress the interface, in the
range of 1-20000. The default value
is 1000.
suppress-threshold
Configure the penalty threshold to
Parameter
suppress the interface, in the range
description
of 1-20000. The default value is
2000.
max-suppress
Configure the maximum suppress
time, in the range of 1-255. The
default value is 4 times of the
half-life-period.
restart
Activate the restart penalty.
restart-penalty
Configure the default penalty value
on the interface, in the range of
1-20000. The default value is 2000.
.
1-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Disabled
Command
mode
Layer-3 interface configuration mode.
This
function
will
influence
the
modules
of
the
directly-connected/host route, static route, dynamic route
and VRRP. If one interface meets the configuration
condition of this command, which is in the suppression
status, the above influenced modules consider the status
of this interface as DOWN, so as to delete the
corresponding route and not transcieve the data packets
on this interface.
Re-configuring the dampening command on the interface
that has been configured this command makes all
dampening information on this interface cleared. However,
the interface flapping times will be remained unless use the
clear
counters
command
to
clear
the
statistical
information of the interface.
Too small max-suppress configured may cause the
maximum penalty value obtained from the calculation
smaller than the suppression threshold to make this
Usage
interface will not be suppressed forever. Therefore, it
guidelines
belongs to the erroneous configuration. In this case, the
following message will prompt for the configuration error:
% Maximum penalty (10) is less than suppress penalty
(2000). Increase maximum suppress time
Besides, when configuring this command, it will prompt the
following message as well if the system memory is not
enough to save this configuration:
% No memory, configure dampening fail!
For the interface layer switching of the switches (Layer-3
interface to the Layer-2 interface), for example, if one
routed port is switched to the switch port, the dampening
command configured on this interface will be removed.
Note: For routers, this function can be configured on the
master interface only. This function takes effect for all
sub-interfaces of the master interface with this command
configured, but this command cannot be configured on the
sub-interface directly. This command cannot be configured
on the virtual template.
.
1-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The following example enables the event
DGS-8000(config)# interface FastEthernet 0/0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# no switchport
DGS-8000(config-if)# dampening 30 1500 10000 120
Command
clear
counters
1.1.2
Description
Clear the interface counters.
Related
show
Show the statistical information of the ip
commands
dampening
event
interface
interfaces.
show
Show the detailed information of the ip
interface
event
dampening
interfaces.
dampening
dampening
function
function
on
on
all
all
distribute-list in
Use distribute-list in to control the route update processing in order to filter
routes. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name [gateway
prefix-list-name]} in [interface-type interface-number]
no distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name
[gateway prefix-list-name]} in [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
Description
ACL
access-list-number
number.
Only
the
routes
permitted in the access list can be
received.
Parameter
prefix
description
prefix-list-name
Default
configuration
Command
Use the prefix list to filter routes.
gateway
Use the prefix list to filter the sources
prefix-list-name
of the routes.
interface-type
(Optional)
interface-number
distribution list is applied to.
Interface
that
the
No distribution list is defined.
Routing process configuration mode.
.
1-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
mode
To deny some specified routes, you can configure the
route distribution list to process all the received route
Usage
guidelines
update messages. This command does not apply to the
OSPF routing protocol, because the OSPF receives the
link state messages instead of specific routes.
If no interface is specified, the route update messages
received by all the interfaces will be processed.
The following example allows Fastethernet 0/0 to receive
the routes beginning with 172.16 in RIP.
router rip
Examples
network 200.168.23.0
distribute-list 10 in fastethernet 0/0
no auto-summary
!
access-list 10 permit 172.16.0.0 0.0.255.255
Related
commands
1.1.3
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
prefix-list
Set the prefix list.
distribute-list out
Use distribute-list out to control the route update for the purpose of route
filtering. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name} out
[interface | protocol | process-id]
no distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name} out
[interface | protocol | process-id]
Parameter
Description
ACL number. Only the routes
access-list-number
permitted in the access list can be
transmitted.
Parameter
prefix
description
prefix-list-name
Use the prefix list to filter routes.
(Optional) Interface that the
interface
distribution list is applied to.
(Optional) The routes of the specified
protocol
routing protocol are redistributed.
.
1-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
None.
configuration
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
If no optional parameter is used in this command, the route
update applies to all the interfaces. If the interface option is
used, the route update applies to only the interface. If other
Usage
routing process parameters are used, the routes of the
guidelines
specified routing process are filtered for redistribution.
The route update in the OSPF routing process only applies
to the external routes of the OSPF AS, and no interface
shall be specified.
The following example advertises 192.168.12.0/24 in RIP.
router rip
network 200.4.4.0
Examples
network 192.168.12.0
distribute-list 10 out
version 2
!
access-list 10 permit 192.168.12.0
1.1.4
Command
Description
Related
access-list
Define the access list.
commands
prefix-list
Define the prefix list.
redistribute
Redistribute routes.
ip community-list
Use this command to define a community list and control access to it. Use the
no form of this command to remove the setting.
ip
community-list
{[standard
|
expanded]
community-list-name
|
community-number } {permit | deny} [community-number]
no ip community-list {standard | expanded} {community-list-name |
community-number}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
community-list-name
Name of the community list of no
description
.
1-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
more than 32 characters
Set a standard community list
standard
numbered in 1 to 99.
expanded
Set an expanded community list
numbered over 100.
Permit access to the community
permit
list.
Deny access to the community
deny
list.
Community number in the form of
AA:NN(AS
number/2-byte
numerical) in the range of 1 to
255 characters. It may also be
one of the following value:
Internet: Indicates the Internet
community. All paths belong to
this community.
no-export: Indicates that this path
community-number
will not be advertised to any
EBGP peers.
no-advertise:Indicates that this
path will not be advertised to any
BGP peers.
local-as:Indicates that this path
will not be advertised to out of the
AS. When AS confederation is
configured, this path will not be
advertised
to
other
ASs
or
sub-ASs.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
None
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to define the community list for
guidelines
BGP.
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list standard 1 deny
Examples
100.20.200.20
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list standard 1 permit
internet
.
1-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
match
Match the community list.
community
Related
set
Remove the community value of the
commands
community-list
BGP path according to the community
delete
list.
show
ip
community-list
1.1.5
Show the community list information.
ip default-network
Use this command to configure the default network globally. Use the no form of
this command to remove the setting.
ip default-network network
no ip default-network network
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
network
Default network
Default
configuration
Command
mode
0.0.0.0/0
Global configuration mode.
The goal of this command is to generate the default route.
The default network must be reachable in the routing table,
but not the directly connected network.
Usage
The default network always starts with an asterisk (“*”),
guidelines
indicating that it is the candidate of the default route. If
there is connected route and the route without the next hop
in the default network, the default route must be a static
route.
The following example sets 192.168.100.0 as the default
network. Since the static route to the network is configured,
Examples
the device will automatically generate a default route.
ip route 192.168.100.0 255.255.255.0 serial 0/1
ip default-network 192.168.100.0
.
1-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The following example sets 200.200.200.0 as the default
network. The route becomes the default one only when it is
available in the routing table.
ip default-network 200.200.200.0
1.1.6
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip route
Show the routing table.
ip prefix-list
Use this command to create a prefix list or add an entry to the prefix list. Use the
no form of this command to remove the prefix list or an entry.
ip prefix-list prefix-list-name [ seq seq-number] { deny | permit } ip-prefix [ge
minimum-prefix-length][ le maximum-prefix- length]
no ip prefix-list prefix-list-name [ seq seq-number] { deny | permit } ip-prefix
[ge minimum-prefix-length][ le maximum-prefix- length]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
prefix-list-name
Name of the prefix list
Sequence number of an entry in
the range of 1 to 2147483647.
When you execute this command
to
add
an
entry
without
a
sequence number, the system
allocates
seq-number
a default
sequence
number for the entry. The default
sequence number of the first
entry is 5. Every subsequential
entry
withtout
a
sequence
number uses the time of 5 larger
than
the
previous
sequence
number as the default sequence
number.
Deny the route matching the
deny
prefix list.
Permit the route matching the
permit
prefix list.
Network
address
nad
mask.
Network address can be any
ip-prefix
valid IP address and the mask
length is in the range of 0 to 32.
minimum-prefix-length
.
(Optional) Minimum length of the
1-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
prefix (the starting length)
Note: “ge” indicates the operation
of “larger than” and “equivalent
to”.
(Optional) Maximum length of the
maximum-prefix-length
prefix (the ending length)
Note: “le” indicates the operation
of “less than” and “equivalent to”.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
None
Global configuration mode.
The ip prefix-list command configures the prefix list, with
the permit or deny keyword to determine the action in
case of matching.
You can execute this command to define an exact match,
Usage
guidelines
or use “ge” or “ le” to define a range match for a prefix for
flexible
configuration.
“ge”
indicates
the
range
of
minimum-prefix-length to 32; “le” indicates the range of the
mask length of the IP prefix to maximum-prefix-length; “ge”
and “le” indicates the range of minimum-prefix-length to
maximum-prefix-length, namely, mask length of IP prefix <
minimum-prefix-length < maximum-prefix-length <=32.
The following example filters the RIP routes the OSPF
redistributes by the destination IP address following the
rule defined in the associated IP prefix list, for example,
redistribute the routes whose destination IP address is in
the range 201.1.1.0/24.
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip prefix-list pre1 permit 201.1.1.0/24
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)# distribute-list prefix pre1 out
rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# end
1.1.7
ip prefix-list description
Use this command to add the description of a prefix list. Use the no form of this
command to delete the description.
.
1-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
ip prefix-list prefix-list-name description description-text
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
prefix-list-name
Name of the prefix list
description-text
Description of the prefix list
Default
configuration
No description is added for a prefix list, by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
The example below adds the description for the prefix list:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip prefix-list pre description Deny
routes from Net-A
1.1.8
ip prefix-list sequence-number
Use this command to enable sort funciton for a prefix list. Use the no form of
this command to disable the sort function.
ip prefix-list sequence-number
Parameter
description
Disabled
Default
configuration
No sequence number is added for a prefix list, by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
.
1-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The example below adds a sequence number for the
prefix list:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ip prefix-list pre description deny
routes from Net-A
1.1.9
Related
Command
Description
commands
ip prefix-list
Configure the prefix list.
ip ref ecmp load-balance
Use this command to set the equivalent path selection algorithm of the
hardware.
ip ref ecmp load-balance {[crc32_lower | crc32_upper] [dip] [port] [udf
number]}
no ip ref ecmp load-balance {[crc32_lower | crc32 upper] [dip] [port] [udf
number]}
Parameter
Description
crc32_upper
Select the high bits of crc32 for the
egress nexthhop.
crc32_lower
Select the low bits of crc32 for the
egress nexthhop.
Parameter
description
Select the destination address as the
dip
hash key.
Select the tcp/udp port number as the
port
hash key.
udf number
Select the user-defined field as the hash
key.
Default
configuration
crc32_upper.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to configure the IPv4/IPV6 ecmp/wcmp
guidelines
path selection algorithm.
.
1-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The following example sets the hash algorithm as
CRC32_Lower, with the packet keyword being SIP +
DIP+TCP/UDP port +UDF:
DGS-8000(config)# ip ref ecmp load-balance crc32_lower dip
port udf 50
Command
Description
maximum-paths
Configure
Related
commands
the
number
of
the
equivalent path.
1.1.10
ip route
Use this command to configure a static route. Use the no form of this command
to remove the configured route.
ip route [vrf vrf_name] network net-mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address]}
[distance] [tag tag] [permanent] [weight number] [disable | enable]
no ip route [vrf vrf_name] network net-mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address]}
[distance] [tag tag] [permanent] [weight number] [disable | enable]
Parameter
Description
Name of the VRF, which can be the
single
vrf-name
protocol
IPv4
VRF
or
configured IPv4 address family
multi-protocol VRF.
network
Network address of the destination
net-mask
Mask of the destination
ip-address
Parameter
description
The next hop IP address of the
static route
(Optional) The next hop egress of
interface
the static route
(Optional)
distance
The
management
distance of the static route
(Optional) The tag of the static
tag
route
permanent
(Optional) Permanent rotue ID
(Optional) Weight number of the
number
static route
disable/enable
.
(Optional)
Disablement
or
enablement ID of the static route
1-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
None
Global configuration mode.
The default management distance of the static route is 1.
Setting the management distance allows the learnt
dynamic route to overwrite the static route. setting the
management distance of the static route can enable route
backup, which is called floating route in this case. For
example, the management distance of the OSPF is 110.
You can set its management distance to 125. Then the
data can switch over the static route when the route
running OSPF fails.
You can specify the VRF that the static route belongs to.
The default weight of the static route is 1. To view the static
route of non default weight, execute the show ip route
weight command. The parameter weight is used to enable
WCMP. When there are load-balanced routes to the
destination, the device assigns data flows by their weights.
The higher the weight of a route is, the more data flows the
Usage
route carries. WCMP limit is generally 32 for routers.
guidelines
However, WCMP limit varies by switch models for their
chipsets support different weights. When the sum of the
weights of load balanced routes is beyond this weight limit,
the excessive ones will not take effect.
Enablement/disablement shows the state of the static
route. Disablement means the static route is not used for
forwarding. The forwarding table used the permanent route
until administrator deletes it.
When you configure the static route on an Ethernet
interface, do not set the next hop as an interface, for
example, ip route 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Fastethernet 0/0. In this
case, the switch may consider that all unknown destination
networks are directly connected to the Fastethernet 0/0.
So it sends an ARP request to every destination host,
which occupies many CPU and memory resources. It is not
recommended to set the static route to an Ethernet
interface.
Examples
The following example adds a static route to the
.
1-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
destination network of 172.16.100.0/24 whose next hop is
192.168.12.1 and management distance is 15.
ip route 172.16.199.0 255.255.255.0 192.168.12.1 155
If the static route has not a specific interface, data flows
may be sent thought other interface in case of interface
failure. The following example configures that data flows
are sent through fastehternet 0/0 to the destination
network of 172.16.100.0/24.
ip route 172.16.199.0 255.255.255.0 fastethernet 0/0
192.168.12.1
Related
commands
1.1.11
Not supported by layer-2 devices.
ip routing
Use this command to enable IP routing in the global configuration mode. Use
the no form of this command to disable the function.
ip routing
no ip routing
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Enabled
Global configuration mode.
Usage
IP routing is not necessary when the switch serves as
guidelines
bridge or VoIP gateway.
Examples
The following example disables IP routing
no ip routing
Related
commands
1.1.12
ip static route-limit
Use this command to set the upper threshold of the static route. Use the no
form of this command to restore the setting to the default value.
.
1-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
ip static route-limit number
no ip static route-limit number
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
number
Upeer threshold of static routes
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
1024
Global configuration mode.
The goal is to control the number of static routes. You can
view the upeer threshold of the configured non-default
static routes with the show running config command.
The following example sets the upeer threshold of the
Examples
static routes to 900 and then restores the setting to the
default value.
ip static route-limit 900
Related
commands
1.1.13
ipv6 prefix-list
Use this command to create an IPv6 prefix list or add an entry in the prefix list.
Use the no form of this command to delete an IPv6 prefix list or an entry in the
prefix list.
Ipv6 prefix-list prefix-list-name[ seq seq-number] { deny | permit} ipv6-prefix
[ge minimum-prefix-length][ le maximum-prefix- length]
no ipv6 prefix-list prefix-list-name[ seq seq-number] { deny | permit}
ipv6-prefix [ge minimum-prefix- length][ le maximum-prefix- length]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
prefix-list-name
Name of the prefix list
.
1-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Sequence number of an entry in the
prefix list. Its range is 1 to 4294967294.
If the sequence number is not specified
in this command, the system will
seq-number
allocate a default one for the entry. The
default sequence number of the first
entry is 5, and that of each subsequent
one is the product of adding 5 to the
sequence number of the proceeding
entry.
Permit the access to the matching
permit
result.
Deny the access to the matching result.
deny
Network address and its mask. The
ipv6-prefix
network address can be any valid IP
address. The mask can be 0 to 32
characters.
(Optional) Minimum length of the prefix
minimum-prefix-
(the starting length)
length
Note: “ge” indicates the operation of
“larger than” and “equivalent to”.
(Optional) Maximum length of the prefix
maximum-prefix
(the ending length)
- length
Note: “le” indicates the operation of
“less than” and “equivalent to”.
Default
configuration
No prefix list is created.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
The ipv6 prefix-list command configures the prefix list,
with the permit or deny keyword to determine the action
Usage
in case of matching.
guideline
You can execute this command to define an exact match,
or use “ge” or “ le” to define a range match for a prefix for
flexible
configuration.
.
“ge”
indicates
the
range
of
1-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
minimum-prefix-length to 128; “le” indicates the range of
the mask length of the IP prefix to maximum-prefix-length;
“ge” and “le” indicates the range of minimum-prefix-length
to maximum-prefix-length, namely, Ipv6-prefix mask
length < minimum-prefix-length < maximum-prefix-length
<= 128
The following example filters the RIP routes the OSPF
redistributes by the destination IP address following the
rule defined in the associated IP prefix list, for example,
redistribute the routes whose destination IP address is in
the range 2222::/64.
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 prefix-list pre1 permit 2222::64
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)# distribute-list prefix pre out
rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# end
1.1.14
ipv6 prefix-list description
Use this command to add the description of an IPv6 prefix list. Use the no form
of this command to delete the description.
ipv6 prefix-list prefix-lis-name description description-text
no ipv6 prefix-list prefix-lis-name description description-text
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
prefix-lis-name
Name of the ipv6 prefix list
description-text
Description of the ipv6 prefix list
Default
configuration
No description is added for an IPv6 prefix list, by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
.
1-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The example below adds the description for the prefix list:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 prefix-list pre description Deny
routes from Net-A
1.1.15
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 prefix-list
Configure the IPv6 prefix list.
ipv6 prefix-list sequence-number
Use this command to enable the sorting function for an IPv6 prefix list. Use the
no form of this command to remove the settings.
ipv6 prefix-list sequence-number
no ipv6 prefix-list sequence-number
Parameter
description
Disabled.
Default
configuration
No sequence number is added for a prefix list, by default.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
The example below adds a sequence number for the
prefix list:
Examples
DGS-8000# configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 prefix-list pre description Deny
routes from Net-A
1.1.16
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 prefix-list
Configure the IPv6 prefix list.
ipv6 route
Use this command to configure an ipv6 static route. Use the no form of this
command to delete the configured route.
.
1-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
ipv6 route [ vrf vrf-name] ipv6-prefix/prefix-length {ipv6-address [nexthop-vrf
{vrf-name1 | default } ] | interface [ipv6-address[ nexthop-vrf {vrf-name1
|default }]]} [distance] [weight number]
Parameter
Description
network
Network address of the destination
Name of VRF, which must be the
vrf-name
configured IPv6 address family
multi-protocol VRF.
prefix-length
Ipv6-address
Mask length of the destination
The next hop IP address of the
static route
(Optional) The next hop egress of
interface
the static route
VRF the nexthop belongs, which
Parameter
vrf-name1
must
be
the
configured
IPv6
address family multi-protocol VRF.
description
(Optional)
distance
The
management
distance of the static route
(Optional) The weight value of the
static route, which is specified
when configuring the equivalent
routes,in range of 1 to 128. The
sum of the weight of all equivalent
number
paths of one route could not exceed
the number of the configurable
maximum equivalent paths. The
weight ratio between the equivalent
routes of the same route shows the
flow rate between these paths.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
None
Global configuration mode.
When the multi-protocol VRF deletes the IPv6 address
Usage
guidelines
family, the IPv6 static route of VRF that the route or
nexthop belongs is deleted.
If the VRF of the IPv6 static route interface is not same as
the nexthop’s VRF, then this IPv6 static route takes no
.
1-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
effect.
The default management distance of the static route is 1.
Setting the management distance allows the learnt
dynamic route to overwrite the static route. Setting the
management distance of the static route can enable route
backup, which is called floating route in this case. For
example, the management distance of the OSPF is 110.
You can set its management distance to 125. Then the
data can switch over the static route when the route
running OSPF fails.
The following example adds a static route to the
destination network of 2001::/64 whose next hop is 2002::2
and management distance is 115.
ipv6 route 2001::/64 2002::2 115
If the static route has not a specific interface, data flows
Examples
may be sent thought other interface in case of interface
failure. The following example configures that data flows
are sent through fastehternet 0/0 to the destination
network of 2001::/64.
ipv6 route 2001::/64 fastethernet 0/0 2002::2
Command
Related
show
commands
Description
ipv6
route
1.1.17
Show IPv6 routing table .
ipv6 static route-limit
Use this command to set the upper threshold of the static route. Use the no
form of this command to restore the setting to the default value.
Ipv6 static route-limit number
no ipv6 static route-limit number
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
Parameter
Description
Upper threshold of static routes in
number
the range of 1 to 10000.
1000
.
1-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Global configuration mode.
The goal is to control the number of static routes. You can
view the upper threshold of the configured non-default
static routes with the show running config command.
The following example sets the upper threshold of the ipv6
static routes to 900 and then restores the setting to the
Examples
default value.
DGS-8000# ipv6 static route-limit 900
DGS-8000# no ipv6 static route-limit
1.1.18
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 route
Configure the IPv6 static route.
show ipv6 route
Show IPv6 routing table
ipv6 unicast-routing
Use this command to enable the IPv6 route function. Use the no form of this
command to disable this function.
ipv6 unicast-routing
no ipv6 unicast-routing
Parameter
description
None
Default
configuration
Enabled
Command
mode
Global configuration mode
Usage
This function can be disabled if the device is just used as
guidelines
the bridge-connection device or the VOIP gateway device.
.
1-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The example disables the IPv6 route function
DGS-8000# no ipv6 unicast-routing
Command
Related
Description
Configure the IPv6 static
ipv6 route
route
commands
Show the IPv6 routing
show ipv6 route
1.1.19
table
match as-path
Use this command to redistribute the routes of AS_PATH attribute permitted by
the access list in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
match as-path as-path-acl-list-num [ as-path-acl-list-num......]
no match as-path as-path-acl-list-num [ as-path-acl-list-num......]
Parameter
Parameter
description
as-path-acl-list-num
access-list-name
Description
ACL number, in the range of 1 to
500.
Name of the access list
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
The match as-path can be followed by an access list
number or name.
Usage
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
guidelines
configure one route map. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
!
Examples
route-map ROUTEMAP2IBGP
match as-path 20 30
.
1-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
match
community
Related
commands
1.1.20
Description
Match the community.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source of routes.
set as-path
Set
prepend
redistributed routes
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
the
AS_PATH
attribute
of
match community
Use this command to redistribute the routes matching the Community attribute
permitted by the ACL in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of
this command to remove the setting.
match
community
[exact-match]
{
[
community-list-number
{community-list-number
|
|
community-list-name}
community-list-name}
[exact-match] …]
no match community { community-list-number | community-list-name}
[exact-match]
[
{
community-list-number
|
community-list-name}
[exact-match] …]
Parameter
Description
Number
of
the
standard
community list in the range 1 to
Parameter
community-list-number
99.
Number
of
the
extended
community list in the range of 100
description
to 199
communitys-list-name
exact-match
Name of the community list in the
range of less than 80 characters
Match the community list exactly.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
.
1-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The match community can be followed by more than one
community list number or name, but the total of community
lists and names should not be greater than 6.
Each exact-match applies to only the previous list, not all
Usage
the lists.
guidelines
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure one route map. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
ip community-list 1 permit 100:2 100:30
route-map set lopref
Examples
match community 1 exact-match
set local-preference 20
Related
commands
1.1.21
Command
Description
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH attribute.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
match interface
Use match interface command to redistribute the routes whose next hop is the
specified interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
match
interface
interface-type
interface-number
[…interface-type
interface-number]
no
match
interface
[interface-type
interface-number
[…interface-type
interface-number]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type
interface-number
Interface number
Default
configuration
None.
.
1-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
This command can be followed by multiple interfaces.
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
Usage
routing protocols.
guidelines
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
The route map can be configured very flexibly for route
redistribution and policy-based routing. No matter how the
route map is used, the configuration principle is the same,
except that different command sets are used. Even if it is
used on the route redistribution, different routing protocols
can use different commands with the route map.
Examples
The following example redistributes the RIP route with the
next hop of fastethernet 0/0 in the OSPF routing protocol.
router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
route-map redrip permit 10
match interface fastethernet 0/0
Related
Command
Description
commands
match ip address
Match the address in the access list.
match ip next-hop
Match the next-hop IP address in the
access list.
match ip
Match the source IP address in the
route-source
access list.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
.
1-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.22
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
match ip address
Use match ip address command to redistribute the routes matching the IP
address permitted by the ACL or the prefix list. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
match
ip
address
{access-list-number
[access-list-number...
|
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]}
no
match
ip
address
[access-list-number
[access-list-number...
|
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
access-list-number
Number of the access list
access-list-name
Name of the access list
prefix-list
prefix-list-name
Specify the prefix list to match.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
Multiple access list numbers or names may follow match
ip address.
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
Usage
guidelines
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
routing protocols.
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
.
1-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
The route map can be configured very flexibly for route
redistribution and policy-based routing. No matter how the
route map is used, the configuration principle is the same,
except that different command sets are used. Even if it is
used on the route redistribution, different routing protocols
can use different commands with the route map.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
to redistribute RIP routes that match access list 10, with
the route type being type-1 external type and the default
Examples
metric being 40.
router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
access-list 10 permit 200.168.23.0
route-map redrip permit 10
match ip address 10
set metric 40
set metric-type type-1!
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match interface
Match the next-hop interface of the
route.
match ip
Match the next-hop address in the
next-hop
access list.
match ip
Match the route source address in the
Related
route-source
access list.
commands
match metric
Match the metric.
match
route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
.
1-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.23
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match ip next-hop
Use match ip next-hop command to redistribute the routes whose next-hop IP
address matches the access list or the prefix list. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
match
ip
next-hop
{access-list-number
[access-list-number...
|
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]}
no
match
ip
next-hop
[access-list-number
[access-list-number...
|
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
access-list-number
Number of the access list
access-list-name
Name of the access list
prefix-list
prefix-list-name
Specify the prefix list to match.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
Multiple access list numbers or names may follow match
ip next-hop.
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
Usage
guidelines
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
routing protocols.
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
Examples
In the example below, the OSPF routing protocol
.
1-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
redistributes the RIP routes. As long as the next hop
address of the RIP route matches the access list 10 or 20,
the OSPF allows for redistribution.
router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
access-list 10 permit 192.168.100.1
access-list 20 permit 172.16.10.1
route-map redrip permit 10
match ip next-hop 10 20
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match ip
Match the IP address in the access list.
address
match interface
route.
match ip
Match the route source address in the
Related
route-source
access list.
commands
match metric
Match the metric.
match
route-type
1.1.24
Match the next-hop interface of the
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
match ip route-source
Use match ip route-source command to redistribute the routes whose source
IP address matches the access list. Use the no form of this command to
remove the setting.
match
ip
route-source
{access-list-number
[access-list-number...
|
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]}
no match ip route-source [access-list-number [access-list-number... |
access-list-name...] |access-list-name [access-list-number...|access-list-name] |
prefix-list prefix-list-name [prefix-list-name...]]
.
1-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Description
access-list-number
Number of the access list
access-list-name
Name of the access list
prefix-list
prefix-list-name
Specify the prefix list to match.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
Multiple access list numbers may follow match ip
route-source.
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
Usage
guidelines
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
routing protocols.
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
In the example below, the OSPF routing protocol
redistributes the RIP routes. As long as the source IP
address of the RIP route matches the access list 5, the
OSPF allows for redistribution.
router ospf
Examples
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
access-list 5 permit 192.168.100.1
route-map redrip permit 10
match ip route-source
.
1-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match ip
Match the IP address in the access list.
address
match
Match the next-hop interface of the
interface
route.
match ip
Match the next-hop IP address in the
Related
next-hop
access list.
commands
match metric
Match the metric.
match
route-type
1.1.25
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
match ipv6 address
Use this command to redistribute the network routes permitted in the IPv6
access list or the IPv6 prfix list. Use the no form of this command to delete the
setting.
match ipv6 address { access-list-name] | prefix-list prefix-list-name }
no match ipv6 address
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
access-list-name
Name of the access list.
prefix-list
Specify the IPv6 prefix list to
prefix-list-name
match.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Usage
guideline
Route map configuration mode
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
.
1-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
The route map can be configured very flexibly to be used
for route redistribution and policy-based routing. No matter
how the route map is used, the configuration principle is
the same, except that different command sets are used.
Even if it is used on the route redistribution, different
routing protocols can use different commands with the
route map.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
Examples
to redistribute RIP routes that match access list v6acl, with
the default metric being 30.
ipv6 router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
ipv6 access-list v6acl
10 permit ipv6 2620::64 any
route-map redrip permit 10
match ipv6 address v6acl
set metric 30
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 access-list
Set the IPV6 access list.
match interface
match ipv6 next-hop
Match the next-hop interface
of the route.
Match the next-hop address
in the IPv6 access list.
Match
match ipvr route-source
the
route
source
address in the IPv6 access
list.
.
1-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match metric
Match the route metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the route tag.
set metric
set metric-type
the
metric
for
route
for
route
for
route
redistribution.
Set
the
type
redistribution.
Set
set tag
1.1.26
Set
the
tag
redistribution.
match ipv6 next-hop
Use this command to redistribute the network routes whose next-hop IP
address matches the IPv6 access list or the IPv6 prefix list. Use the no form of
this command to delete the setting.
match ipv6 next-hop { access-list-name] | prefix-list prefix-list-name}
no match ipv6 next hop
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
access-list-name
Name of the IPv6 access list.
prefix-list
Specify the IPv6 prefix list to
prefix-list-name
match.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
routing protocols.
Usage
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
guideline
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
The route map can be configured very flexibly to be used
for route redistribution and policy-based routing. No matter
how the route map is used, the configuration principle is
the same, except that different command sets are used.
Even if it is used on the route redistribution, different
routing protocols can use different commands with the
route map.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
Examples
to redistribute RIP routes that only match access list v6acl,
with the default metric being 40.
ipv6 router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
ipv6 access-list v6acl
10 permit ipv6 2620::64 any
route-map redrip permit 10
match ipv6 address v6acl
set metric 40
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 access-list
Set the IPV6 access list.
match interface
match ipv6 address
.
Match the next-hop interface
of the route.
Match the IP address in the
IPv6 access list.
1-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Match
match ipv6 route-source
the
route
source
address in the IPv6 access
list.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the route tag.
set metric
set metric-type
the
metric
for
route
for
route
for
route
redistribution.
Set
the
type
redistribution.
Set
set tag
1.1.27
Set
the
tag
redistribution.
match ipv6 route-source
Use this command to redistribute the network routes whose next-hop IP
address matches the IPv6 access list or the IPv6 prefix list. Use the no form of
this command to delete the setting.
match ipv6 route-source { access-list-name] | prefix-list prefix-list-name }
no match ipv6 route-source
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
access-list-name
Name of the IPv6 access list.
prefix-list
Specify the IPv6 prefix list to
prefix-list-name
match.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
Usage
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
guideline
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
The route map can be configured very flexibly to be used
for route redistribution and policy-based routing. No matter
how the route map is used, the configuration principle is
the same, except that different command sets are used.
Even if it is used on the route redistribution, different
routing protocols can use different commands with the
route map.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
Examples
to redistribute RIP routes that only match access list v6acl,
with the default metric being 50.
ipv6 router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
ipv6 access-list v6acl
10 permit ipv6 5200::64 any
route-map redrip permit 10
match ipv6 address v6acl
set metric 50
Related
Command
Description
commands
ipv6 access-list
Set the IPV6 access list.
match interface
match ipv6 address
.
Match the next-hop interface
of the route.
Match the IP address in the
IPv6 access list.
1-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match ipv6 next-hop
IPv6 access list.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the route tag.
set metric
set metric-type
Set
the
metric
for
route
for
route
for
route
redistribution.
Set
the
type
redistribution.
Set
set tag
1.1.28
Match the next hop in the
the
tag
redistribution.
match length
Use this command to implement the policy-based routing based on the IP
packet length in the route map configuration mode. The no form of Use this
command to remove the setting.
match length min-length max-length
no match length min-length max-length
Parameter
Parameter
Description
min-length
Minimum length of the IP
packet
description
max-length
Maximum length of the IP
packet
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Policy-based routing is a packet forwarding mechanism
that is more flexible than the routing based on the
destination network. After the policy-based routing is used,
the device will decide how to process the packets needed
to route according to the route map, which decides the
next-hop device of the packets.
To apply the policy-based routing, you must specify the
route map for it and create the route map. A route map
Usage
guideline
contains multiple policies, and each policy defines one or
more match rules and the corresponding operations. After
policy-based routing is applied to an interface, the packets
received by the interface will be checked. The packets that
do not match any policy in the route map will be forwarded
to the usual route. The packets that match a policy in the
route map will be processed according to the operation
defined in the policy.
To route interactive traffic and mass traffic respectively,
use the packet size based policy-based routing.
In the example below, the policy-based routing is enabled
on fastethernet 1/0 to send the traffic with packet size
smaller than 500 bytes through fastethernet 1/2 interface.
interface fastethernet 1/0
Examples
ip policy route-map smallpak
route-map smallpak permit 10
match length 0 500
set interface fastethernet 1/2
Related
Command
Description
commands
route-map
Define the route map
match ip address
set
default
Match the address in the access
list
Set the default packet output
interface
interface.
set interface
Set the packet output interface
set
Set the default next hop of the
ip
default
next-hop
set ip next-hop
.
packets.
Set the next-hop IP address of the
packets
1-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set ip precedence
1.1.29
Set the priority of the packets.
match metric
Use match metric command to redistribute the routes of the specified metric.
Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
match metric metric
no match metric metric
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Route metric, in the range 0 to
metric
4294967295
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
Usage
guidelines
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
In the example below, the OSPF routing protocol
redistributes the RIP routes of metric 10.
router ospf 1
Examples
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
route-map redrip permit 10
match metric 10
.
1-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match ip
Match the IP address.
address
match interface
match ip
next-hop
Related
commands
match ip
route-source
match
route-type
1.1.30
Match the interface.
Match the next-hop IP address.
Match the source IP address.
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
match origin
Use this command to redistribute the routes whose source IP address is
permitted by the ACL in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of
this command to remove the setting.
match origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
no match origin [egp | igp | incomplete]
Parameter
Description
egp
Redistribute the routes from
the remote EGP.
Parameter
description
Redistribute the routes from
igp
the local IGP.
incomplete
Redistribute the routes from
an imcomplete type.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Usage
Use this command to set the origin of the routes to be
guideline
redistributed. Only one origin can be set.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map MY_MAP 10 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match origin egp
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set community 109
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map MAP20 20 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match origin incomplete
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set community no-export
Command
match as-path
Related
commands
1.1.31
Description
Match
the
AS_PATH
attribute.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set origin
Set the source.
match route-type
Use this command to redistribute the network routes of the specified type. Use
the no form of this command to delete the setting.
match route-type {local | internal | external [type-1 | type-2] | level-1 |
level-2 | sdg_owner | sdg_slave}
no match route-type [local | internal | external [type-1 | type-2] | level-1 |
level-2 | sdg_owner | sdg_slave]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
local
Resdistribute the local rotues.
Redistribute the routes in the
internal
OSPF routing domain.
Redistribute the routes out of
the BGP or OSPF routing
external
domain.
.
1-41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Redistribute the OSPF type-1
type-1 | type-2
or type-2 routes.
Redistribute the ISIS level-1
level-1 | level-2
or level-2 routes.
sdg_owner
SDG master route.
sdg_slaver
SDG slaver route.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
Usage
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
guideline
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
In
the
example
below,
the
RIP
routing
protocol
redistributes only the internal routes in the OSPF routing
domain.
router rip
Examples
redistribute ospf route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0
route-map redrip permit 10
match route-type internal
!
.
1-42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip next-hop
Related
commands
1.1.32
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the access list.
set tag
Match the IP address.
match tag
Use this command to redistribute the network routes with the specified tag. Use
the no form of this command to delete the setting.
match tag tag […tag]
no match tag [tag […tag]]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
tag
Route tag
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-43
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Multiple tags may follow the match tag command.
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
Usage
guideline
between all the IP routing protocols.
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
In
the
example
below,
the
RIP
routing
protocol
redistributes only the routes with tag 50 and 80 in the
OSPF routing domain.
router rip
Examples
redistribute ospf 100 route-map redrip
network 192.168.12.0
route-map redrip permit 10
match tag 50 80
Command
Description
access-list
Set the access list.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match interface
Match
the
next-hop
IP
interface.
Related
commands
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match ip next-hop
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match route-type
Match the route type.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
.
1-44
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.33
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
maximum-paths
Use this command to specify the number of equivalent routes. The no form of
this command is used to restore the setting to the default value.
maximum-paths number
no maximum-paths number
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Number of equivalent routes in the
number
range of 1 to 32
Default
configuration
32 for routers. For switches, it depends on switch models.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode.
With this command executed, the number of routes for
Usage
load balancing is no more than the specified number of
guidelines
equivalent routes. You can view the number of equivalent
routes with the show running config command.
The following example sets the number of equivalent
Examples
routes to 10 and then restore it to the default value.
maximum-paths 10
no maximum-paths 10
1.1.34
route-map
Use route-map to enter the route map configuration mode and define a route
map. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
route-map route-map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number]
no route-map route-map-name [{permit | deny}sequence-number]
.
1-45
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Description
Name
of
the
route
map.
The
redistribute command references
the route map according to its name.
route-map-name
Multiple
routing
policies
can
be
defined in a route map, and each
policy corresponds to one sequence
number.
(Optional) If the permit keyword is
defined and the rule defined by
match is met, The set command
controls the redistributed routes. For
policy-based
command
routing,
controls
the
the
set
packet
forwarding, and exits the route map
permit
operation.
If the permit keyword is defined but
the rule defined by match is not met,
Parameter
the system performs the routing
description
policy of the second route map till the
set command is executed finally.
(Optional) If the deny keyword is
defined and the rule defined by
match is met, no operation will be
performed.
Neither
route
redistribution nor policy-based routing
is supported in the route map. The
deny
system exits the route map operation.
If the deny keyword is defined but the
rule defined by match is not met, the
system performs the routing policy of
the second route map till the set
command is executed finally.
Sequence number of the route map.
sequence-number
The policy with a lower sequence
number is preferred, so it’s noted
when setting the sequence number.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
.
1-46
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
At present, the route map is used for route redistribution
and policy-based routing.
1. Route redistribution control
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process to
another routing process. For example, you can redistribute
the route in the OSPF routing domain and then advertise it
to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The mutual
route redistribution can be implemented between all the IP
routing protocols.
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
When configuring route maps, pay attention to the
following when using the sequence number of a route
map:
Usage
1)
When you create the first route map policy, if
sequence-number is not specified, it is 10 by default;
guidelines
2)
If
only
one
route
map
policy
exists
and
sequence-number is not specified, no new route map
policy will be created, and the existing route map
policy will be accessed for configuration;
If more than one route map policy is available, the
sequence number of each policy shall be specified;
otherwise an error message will be displayed.
2. policy-based routing
Policy-based routing refers to a routing mechanism based
on user defined policies. Compared with traditional
destination IP address-based routing, policy-based routing
offers a flexibility for routing based on source IP address,
length and port of IP packets. Policy-based routing can
apply to the IP packets received on an interface or the IP
packets sent from the local device.
Policy-based routing utilizes route map to define routing
and forwarding policy. The match command defines
packet filtering rule and the set command defines the
action for the packets matching the filtering rules. The
.
1-47
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match command used includes match ip address and
match length; the set command includes set ip tos, set
ip precedence, set ip dscp, set ip [default] nexthop, set
ip next-hop verify-availability, set [default] interface.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
to redistribute the RIP routes with the hop count of 4. In the
OSPF route domain, the route type is the external route
type-1, the default metric is 40 and the tag is 40.
!
router ospf
redistribute rip subnets route-map redrip
Examples
network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255 area 0
!
!
route-map redrip permit 10
match metric 4
set metric 40
set metric-type type-1
set tag 40
1.1.35
Related
Command
Description
commands
redistribute
Redistribute the routes.
set aggregator as
Use this command to specify the AS_PATH attribute for the aggregator of the
routes that match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Excute the no
form of this command to remove the setting. This command is only used to
configure policy-based routing.
set aggregator as as-number ip_addr
no set aggregator as [as-number ip_addr]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
as-number
AS number of the aggregator
ip_address
IP address of the aggregator
Default
configuration
None
.
1-48
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Use this command to set the AS_PATH attribute for the
Usage
matched routes in the BGP routing domain. Only one
guideline
group of parameters (as-number, ip-addr) is allowed to set
at a time.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map set-as-path
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set aggregator as 3 2.2.2.2
Related
commands
Command
Description
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH.
match community
Match the community.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match origin
Match the route source.
set community
1.1.36
Set the COMMUNITY
attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the type.
set as-path prepend
Use this command to specify the AS_PATH attribute for the routes that match
the rule in the route map configuration mode. Excute the no form of this
command to remove the setting. This command is only used to configure
policy-based routing.
set as-path prepend as-number
no set as-path prepend
Parameter
Description
AS number of the AS_PATH
Parameter
description
attribute to be configured.
as-number
The AS number ranges from
1 to 4294967295, and 1 to
65535.65535 in dot mode.
.
1-49
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
None
configuration
Command
mode
Usage
guideline
Route map configuration mode
Use this command to configure the AS_PATH attribute for
the matched routes. Up to 15 ass can be added into the
as-path for one time.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map set-as-path
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set as-path prepend 100 101
102
Related
commands
Command
Description
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH.
match community
Match the community.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match origin
Match the route source.
set community
1.1.37
Set
the
COMMUNITY
attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the type.
set comm-list delete
Use this command to delete the COMMUNITY_LIST attribute for the routes that
match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting. This command is only used to configure
policy-based routing.
set comm-list community-list-number | community-list-name delete
no set comm-list community-list-number | community-list-name delete
.
1-50
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Description
community-list-number
Number of the community list.
Standard
community
list number : 1-99.
Parameter
extended
description
community
list
number : 100-199.
community-list-name
Name of the community list,
which should be no more than
80 characters.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the community attribute value for
guideline
the matched routes that will be deleted.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 100
DGS-8000(config-router)#
neighbor
172.16.233.33
neighbor
172.16.233.33
neighbor
172.16.233.33
remote-as 120
DGS-8000(config-router)#
route-map ROUTEMAPIN in
DGS-8000(config-router)#
route-map ROUTEMAPOUT out
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list 500 permit 100:10
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list 500 permit 100:20
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list 120 deny 100:50
DGS-8000(config)# ip community-list 120 permit 100:.*
DGS-8000(config)# route-map ROUTEMAPIN permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set comm-list 500 delete
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map ROUTEMAPOUT permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set comm-list 120 delete
.
1-51
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
match as-path
Related
commands
Match the AS_PATH attribute
value.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set local-preference
set metric-type
1.1.38
Description
Set the local priority of the
route to be redistributed.
Set the metric type.
set community
Use this command to specify the community for the routes that match the rule in
the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove
the setting. This command is only used to configure policy-based routing.
set community {community-number[community-number…] [additive | none}
no set community
Parameter
Description
Community number in the
form of AA:NN or a large
numeral. In addition, it can be
community-number
well-known
Parameter
attributes
description
local-AS,
community
like
internet,
no-export
and
no-advertise.
additive
Increase
on
the
original
COMMUNITY attribute.
Set the community attribute
none
as blank.
Default
configuration
None
.
1-52
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the community attribute for the
guideline
matched route.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_COMMUNITY 10 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set community 109:10
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_COMMUNITY 20 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set community no-export
1.1.39
Command
Description
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH.
match community
Match the community.
Related
match metric
Match the metric.
commands
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set origin
Set the source.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set dampening
Use this command to specify the dampening parameters for the routes that
match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting. This command is only used to configure
policy-based routing.
set dampening half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time
no set dampening
.
1-53
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Description
Half dampening life for the reachable
or unreachable route in the range of
half-life
1 to 45 minutes, 15 minutes by
default
When the route penalty is lower than
Parameter
this value, the route suppression is
reuse
released. It is in the range 1 to
description
20000, 750 by default
When the route penalty is higher than
this value, the route is suppressed. It
suppress
is in the range 1 to 20000, 2000 by
default
Maximum duration a route can be
max-suppress-time
suppressed in the range 1 to 20000
minutes, 4* half-life by default.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the dampening parameter for the
guideline
matched routes.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map tag
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as path 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set dampening 30 1500 10000
Examples
120
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 172.16.233.52
route-map tag in
.
1-54
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Related
commands
Command
Description
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH value.
match community
Match the community.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set local-preference
1.1.40
Set the local priority of the
route to be redistributed.
set default interface
Use this command to specify the default interface for forwarding the packets
whose route matches the rule but without an egress in the route map
configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
set default interface interface-type interface-number […interface-type
interface-number]
no set default interface interface-type interface-number […interface-type
interface-number]
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type.
interface-number
Interface number.
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Multiple interfaces may follow the set default interface
command.
Usage
Policy-based routing is a packet forwarding mechanism
guideline
more flexible than the routing based on the target network.
If policy-based routing is used, the device will determine
how to process the packets to be routed according to the
.
1-55
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
route map, which determines the next-hop device of the
packets.
To use the policy-based routing, you must specify the
route map for it and create the route map. A route map
contains multiple policies, and each policy defines one or
more match rules and the corresponding operations. After
policy-based routing is applied to an interface, the packets
received by the interface will be checked. The packets that
do not match any policy in the route map will be forwarded
to the usual route. The packets that match a policy in the
route map will be processed according to the operation
defined in the policy.
If the first defined interface becomes down, the interface
set by the second set command will be attempted. A
route-map policy may contain multiple set operations.
In the example below, the policy-based routing is enabled
on serial 1/0 to send the traffic whose packet size is less
than 500 bytes and the route is not defined through
fastEthernet 1/0 interface.
DGS-8000(config)# interface serial 1/0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)# ip policy route-map smallpak
DGS-8000(config-if)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map smallpak permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match length 0 500
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set default interface
fastethernet 1/0
Related
commands
Command
Description
route-map
Define a route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match length
Match the packet length.
set interface
Set the outgoing interface.
set ip default next-hop
set ip next-hop
set ip precedence
.
Set the default next hop of the
packets.
Set the next-hop IP address
of the packets.
Set the priority of the packets.
1-56
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.41
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set extcommunity
Use this command to specify the extended COMMUNITY attribute for the routes
that match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting. This command is only used to configure
policy-based routing.
set extcommunity {rt extend-community-value | soo extend-community-value}
no set extcommunity {rt | soo }
Parameter
Description
Specify
the
extended
community value in the form of
rt
Parameter
RT.
description
Specify
the
extended
community value in the form of
soo
SOO.
extend-community-value
Extended community value.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the extended community attribute
guideline
for the matched route.
DGS-8000(config)#
access-list
2
permit
192.168.78.0
255.255.255.0
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# route-map MAP_NAME permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match ip-address 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set extcommunity rt 100:2
Related
Command
Description
commands
match as-path
Match the AS_PATH value
.
1-57
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.42
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match community
Match the community.
match metric
Match the metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set interface
Use this command to specify the interface for forwarding the packets matching
the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command
to remove the setting.
set
interface
interface-type
interface-number
[…interface-type
interface-number]
no
set
interface
interface-type
interface-number
[…interface-type
interface-number]
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
interface-type
Interface type.
interface-number
Interface ID
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Multiple interfaces may follow the set interface command.
Policy-based routing is a packet forwarding mechanism
more flexible than the routing based on the target network.
Usage
guideline
If policy-based routing is used, the device will determine
how to process the packets to be routed according to the
route map, which determines the next-hop device of the
packets.
To use the policy-based routing, you must specify the
route map for it and create the route map. A route map
.
1-58
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
contains multiple policies, and each policy defines one or
more match rules and the corresponding operations. After
policy-based routing is applied to an interface, the packets
received by the interface will be checked. The packets that
do not match any policy in the route map will be forwarded
to the usual route. The packets that match a policy in the
route map will be processed according to the operation
defined in the policy.
If the first defined interface becomes down, the interface
set by the second set command will be attempted. A
route-map policy may contain multiple set operations.
If the interface is set as null 0, the packets will be
discarded.
In the example below, the policy-based routing is enabled
on serial 1/0 to send the traffic whose packet size is less
than 500 bytes through fastethernet 0/0 interface.
DGS-8000(config)#interface serial 1/0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map smallpak
DGS-8000(config)#route-map smallpak permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match length 0 500
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set interface fastethernet
0/0
Command
Description
route-map
Define a route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match length
Match the packet length.
Set
Related
set default interface
the
default
outgoing
interface when there is no
route in the routing table.
commands
Set the default next hop of the
set ip default next-hop
packets when there is no
route in the routing table.
set ip next-hop
set ip precedence
.
Set the next-hop IP address
of the packets.
Set the priority of the packets.
1-59
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.43
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set ip default next-hop
Use this command to specify the default next-hop IP address for the packets
that match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting.
set ip default next-hop ip-address [weight] […ip-address[weight]]
no set ip default next-hop [ip-address [weight] […ip-address[weight]]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address of the next hop.
weight
Weight of the next hop.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-60
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
This command supports two operation modes: WCMP load
balancing mode and non-WCMP load balancing mode. In
the former mode, the system implements WCMP load
balancing according to the weight inputted.
Up to 32 IP addresses may follow the set ip default
next-hop command.
If a weight follows ip address, up to 4 next hop IP
addresses can be configured.
Note: If a weight follows any next-hop, the operation mode
of this command will be automatically switched to the
WCMP load balancing mode. In this mode, the weight of
those next hop IP addresses whose weight is not
configured is 1 by default.
Differences between set ip next-hop and set ip default
next-hop: After the set ip next-hop command is configured,
the policy-based routing takes precedence over the routing
Usage
table; while after the set ip default next-hop command is
guideline
configured, the routing table takes precedence over the
policy-based routing.
Use this command to customize a default route for a
specified user. If the software fails to find the forwarding
route, the packet will be forwarded to the nexthop set with
this command.
To use the policy-based routing, you must specify the route
map for it and create the route map. A route map contains
multiple policies, and each policy defines one or more
match rules and the corresponding operations. After
policy-based routing is applied to an interface, the packets
received by the interface will be checked. The packets that
do not match any policy in the route map will be forwarded
through the usual route. The packets that match a policy in
the route map will be processed according to the operation
defined in the policy.
A route-map policy may contain multiple set operations.
The following example forwards the packets from two
different nodes through different routes.
For the messages received on the synchronous interface 1
Examples
from 1.1.1.1, if the software cannot find the forwarding
route, they are forwarded to device 6.6.6.6. For the
messages received from 2.2.2.2, if the software cannot find
the forwarding route, they are forwarded to device 7.7.7.7.
.
1-61
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The other messages will be discarded if the software
cannot find the forwarding route.
DGS-8000(config)#access-list 1 permit 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0
DGS-8000(config)#access-list 2 permit 2.2.2.2 0.0.0.0
DGS-8000(config)#interface async 1
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map equal-access
DGS-8000(config)#route-map equal-access permit 10
DGS-8000(config- route-map)#match ip address 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set
ip
default
next-hop
6.6.6.6
DGS-8000(config)#route-map equal-access permit 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set
ip
default
next-hop
7.7.7.7
DGS-8000(config)#route-map equal-access permit 30
DGS-8000(config- route-map)#set default interface null 0
Related
Command
Description
route-map
Define a route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
set default interface
Set
the
default
outgoing
interface.
commands
set interface
Set the outgoing interface.
set ip next-hop
Set the next hop of the
packets.
set ip precedence
1.1.44
Set the priority of the packets.
set ip dscp
Use this command to specify the DSCP value for the packets that match the
rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to
remove the setting.
set ip dscp dscp-value
no set ip dscp
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
dscp-value
DSCP value
.
1-62
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
guideline
N/A
Examples
N/A
Related
Command
Description
route-map
Define a route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
set default interface
Set
the
default
outgoing
interface.
commands
set interface
Set the outgoing interface.
set ip next-hop
Set the next hop of the
packets.
set ip precedence
1.1.45
Set the priority of the packets.
set ip next-hop
Use this command to specify the next-hop IP address for the packets that meet
the matching rule. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting. This
command is only used to configure policy-based routing.
set ip next-hop ip-address [weight] […ip-address [weight]]
no set ip next-hop [ip-address [weight] […ip-address[weight]]]
.
1-63
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address of the next hop.
weight
Weight of the next hop.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
This command supports two operation modes: WCMP load
balancing mode and non-WCMP load balancing mode. In
the former mode, the system implements WCMP load
balancing according to the weight entered by the user.
Multiple IP addresses may follow set ip next-hop and the
number of addresses should be less than 32.
If weight follows ip address, up to 4 next hop addresses
can be configured.
If weight follows any next-hop, the
operation mode of this command will be
automatically switched to the WCMP load
balancing mode. In the WCMP load
Usage
Caution
guideline
balancing mode, for the nexthop address
without
configuring
the
corresponding
weight, the weight is 1 by default.
This command can be used to set different routes for the
traffic that meets different match rule. If multiple IP
addresses are configured, they can be used in turn.
Policy-based routing is a packet forwarding mechanism
more flexible than the routing based on the target network.
After the policy-based routing is used, the device will decide
how to process the packets that need be routed according to
the route map, which decides the next-hop device of the
packets.
To use the policy-based routing, you must specify the route
map for it and create the route map. A route map contains
.
1-64
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
multiple policies, and each policy defines one or more match
rules and the corresponding operations. After policy-based
routing is applied to an interface, the packets received by
the interface will be checked. The packets that do not match
any policy in the route map will be forwarded to the usual
route. The packets that match a policy in the route map will
be processed according to the operation defined in the
policy.
A route-map policy may contain multiple set operations.
The following example enables policy-based routing on
serial 1/0. When the interface receives the packets from
10.0.0.0/8, they will be sent to 192.168.100.1; when the
interface receives the packets from 172.16.0.0/16, they
will be sent to 172.16.100.1; all other packets will be
discarded.
DGS-8000(config)#interface serial 1/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map load-balance
DGS-8000(config)#access-list
10
permit
10.0.0.0
0.255.255.255
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#access-list
20
permit
172.16.0.0
0.0.255.255
DGS-8000(config)#route-map load-balance permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set
ip
next-hop
192.168.100.1
DGS-8000(config)#route-map load-balance permit 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set ip next-hop 172.16.100.1
DGS-8000(config)#route-map load-balance permit 30
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set interface Null 0
Related
Command
Description
commands
Route-map
Define the route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
set default interface
Set
the
default
outgoing
interface.
set interface
Set the outgoing interface.
set ip default next-hop
Set the default next hop.
.
1-65
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set ip precedence
1.1.46
Set the priority of the packets.
set ip next-hop verify-availability
Use this command to verify the availability of the next hop IP address for the
packets that meet the matching rule. Use the no form of this command to
remove the setting. This command is only used to configure policy-based
routing.
set ip next-hop verify-availability ip-address track track-object-num
no set ip next-hop verify-availability
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address of the next hop
track-object-num
Number of the object to be
tracked
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
guideline
None
The following example verifies the availability of the next
hop IP address being 192.168.1.2 and the number of the
Examples
object to be tracked to 1.
DGS-8000(config)#route-map rmap permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set ip
next-hop
verify-availability 192.168.1.2 track 1
.
1-66
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Related
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
route-map
Define the route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
set default interface
Set
commands
1.1.47
the
default
outgoing
interface.
set interface
Set the outgoing interface.
set ip default next-hop
Set the default next hop.
set ip precedence
Set the priority of the packets.
set ip precedence
Use this command to set the precedence of the IP head of the packet matching
the rule in the route map configuratio mode. Use the no form of this command
to remove the configured precedence setting.
set ip precedence {<0-7> | critical | flash | flash-override | immediate | internet |
network | priority | routine }
no set ip precedence
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
With different precedence values for the IP packet head
configured, the IP packets matching the PBR routing are
Usage
guideline
sent accoding to the different precedence values.
Multiple set ip precedence commands can be executed
in the route map configuration rule, but only the last one
takes effect, and the precedence will be specified for the
head of the IP packet matiched the PBR.
The following example sets the precedence of the packet
with the source IP address 192.168.217.68 received at the
Examples
interface FastEthernet 0/0 as 4:
DGS-8000(config)#access-list 1 permit 192.168.217.68
0.0.0.0
.
1-67
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
DGS-8000(config)#route-map name
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set ip precedence 4
DGS-8000(config)#interface FastEthernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map name
Command
Description
match interface
Match the next-hop interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address in the
ACL.
match ip next-hop
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address in the ACL.
match ip route-source
Match the route source IP
address in the ACL.
Related
commands
match metric
Match the route metric value.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the route tag value.
set metric-type
Set the type of redistributed
route.
Set
set tag
the
tag
value
of
redistributed route.
set ip tos
Set the tos for the IP packet
head.
1.1.48
set ip tos
Use this command to set the tos of the IP head of the packet matching the rule
in the route map configuratio mode. Use the no form of this command to
remove the configured tos setting.
set ip tos
{<0-15> | max-reliability | max-throughput | min-delay |
min-monetary-cost | normal }
no set ip tos
Default
configuration
N/A
.
1-68
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
With different TOS values for the IP packet head
Usage
guideline
configured, the IP packets matching the PBR routing are
transmitted with different service qualities.
The TOS value will be specified for the head of the IP
packet matched the PBR.
The following example sets the TOS value of the packet
with the source IP address 192.168.217.68 received at the
interface FastEthernet 0/0 as 4:
DGS-8000(config)#access-list 1 permit 192.168.217.68
0.0.0.0
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#route-map name
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set ip tos 4
DGS-8000(config)#interface FastEthernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map name
Related
Command
Description
commands
match interface
Match the next-hop interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address in the
ACL.
match ip next-hop
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address in the ACL.
match ip route-source
Match the route source IP
address in the ACL.
match metric
Match the route metric value.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the route tag value.
set metric-type
Set the type of redistributed
route.
Set
set tag
the
tag
value
of
redistributed route.
.
1-69
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set ip precedence
Set the precedence for the IP
packet head.
1.1.49
set ipv6 default next-hop
Use this command to specify the default next-hop IPv6 address for the IPv6
packets that match the rule in the route map configuration mode. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting. This command is only used to
configure policy-based routing.
set
ipv6
default
next-hop
global-ipv6-address
[weight]
[…ipv6-address[weight]]
no
set
ipv6
default
next-hop
glocal-ipv6-address
[weight]
[…ipv6-address[weight]]
Parameter
Description
global-ipv6-address
IPv6 address of the next hop.
Parameter
The next hop router must be
description
the neighbor router.
weight
Weight in the load balancing
mode, in the range of 1 to 8.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-70
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
With the policy-based routing applied to the interface, for the
IPv6 packets matching the corresponding rules, if the usual
route (that is the non default route) with the destination of this
packet is not in the routing table, this packet will be forwarded
to the next hop specified by the set ipv6 default next-hop
command. Otherwise it is forwarded through the usual route.
Noted that the match rule should be the IPv6 corresponded.
Packets select the egress from the policy-based routing and
routing table in following priority.
 set ipv6 next-hop;
 usual route (the non default route)
Usage
 set ipv6 default next-hop
guideline
 default route.
For the switches, this function does not take
effect if the mask length is beyond 64.
If this command and the set ipv6 next-hop
verify-availability are both configured ,the
next hop set by the set ipv6 next-hop
Caution
verify-availability command will take effect
preferentially
The following examle sets the default next hop of the
packet with destination address 2001:0db8:2001:1760::/64
received at the interface fastEthernet 0/0 as
2002:0db8:2003:1::95
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 access-list acl_for_pbr
DGS-8000(config-ipv6-acl)#permit
ipv6
any
2001:0db8:2001:1760::/64
DGS-8000(config)#route-map rm_if_0_0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match
ipv6
address
acl_for_pbr
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set ipv6 default next-hop
2002:0db8:2003:1::95
DGS-8000(config)#interface FastEthernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ipv6 policy route-map rm_if_0_0
.
1-71
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
Description
match ipv6 address
Set the matching rule of
policy-based routing.
Related
commands
ipv6 policy route-map
Use the policy-based routing
on the interface.
set ipv6 next-hop
Set the next hop of the
policy-based routing.
1.1.50
set ipv6 next-hop
Use this command to specify the next-hop IPv6 address for the packets that
meet the matching rule. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
This command is only used to configure policy-based routing.
set ipv6 next-hop [vrf vrf-name | global] global-ipv6-address [weight]
[…global-ipv6-address [weight]]
no set ip next-hop [vrf vrf-name | global] global-ipv6-address [weight]
[…global-ipv6-address [weight]]
Parameter
Description
global-ipv6-address
IPv6 address of the next hop.
The next hop router should be
the neighbor router.
The nexthop belongs to the
Parameter
vrf vrf-name
description
specified VRF which must be
the configured IPv6 address
family multi-protocol VRF.
The nexthop belongs to the
global
global.
weight
Weight of the next hop in the
load balancing mode, in the
range of 1to 8.
Default
configuration
None
.
1-72
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
This command supports two operation modes: WCMP load
balancing mode and non-WCMP load balancing mode. In
the former mode, the system implements WCMP load
balancing according to the weight entered by the user.
Multiple IP addresses may follow set ip next-hop and the
number of addresses should be less than 32.
If weight follows ip address, up to 4 next hop addresses
can be configured.
If the parameter vrf vrf-name is specified, packets
forwarding will be across the VRF. The packets wil be
forwarded from VRF to pubic network with the parameter
global specified. If no [vrf vrf-name | global] is specified,
forwarding the IPv6 packets will inherit the VRF, that is the
nexthop belongs to the VRF that receives this IPv6 packets.
Usage
guideline
If weight follows any next-hop, the
operation mode of this command will be
automatically switched to the WCMP load
balancing mode. In the WCMP load
Caution
balancing mode, for the nexthop address
without
configuring
the
corresponding
weight, the weight is 1 by default.
When the packets select the egress from the policy-based
routing and routing table, the priorities are as bellows.
 set ipv6 next-hop;
 usual route (the non default route)
 set ipv6 default next-hop
 Default route.
The following examle sets the next hop of the packet with
destination address 2001:0db8:2001:1760::/64 received
at the interface fastEthernet 0/0 as 2002:0db8:2003:1::95
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 access-list acl_for_pbr
DGS-8000(config-ipv6-acl)#permit
ipv6
any
2001:0db8:2001:1760::/64
.
1-73
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
DGS-8000(config)#route-map rm_if_0_0
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match
ipv6
address
acl_for_pbr
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set ipv6 next-hop
2002:0db8:2003:1::95
DGS-8000(config)#interface FastEthernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ipv6 policy route-map rm_if_0_0
Command
Description
match ipv6 address
Set the matching rule of
policy-based routing.
Related
commands
Use the policy-based routing
ipv6 policy route-map
on the interface.
Set the next hop of the
set ipv6 next-hop
policy-based routing.
1.1.51
set ipv6 precedence
Use this command to set the precedence of the IPv6 head of the packet
matching the rule in the route map configuratio mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the configured precedence setting.
set ipv6 precedence {<0-7> | critical | flash | flash-override | immediate |
internet | network | priority | routine }
no set ipv6 precedence {<0-7> | critical | flash | flash-override | immediate |
internet | network | priority | routine }
Parameter
critical
、
Description
flash
flash-override
、
The precedence type of the
、
IPv6 head.
Parameter
immediate 、 internet 、
description
network
、 priority
、
routine
0~7
The configurable precedence
range.
.
1-74
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
The following table shows the corresponding relationship
between the value and type.
Usage
Value
Type
0
routing
1
priority
2
network
3
internet
4
immediate
5
flash-override
6
flash
7
critical
guideline
The following example sets the precedence of IPv6 packet
head as 3:

Configure the associated ACL6
DGS-8000(config)#ipv6 access-list aaa
DGS-8000(config-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 2003:1000::10/80
2001:100::/64

Examples
Configure route-map.
DGS-8000(config)#route-map pbr-aaa permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set
ipv6
next-hop
2001:1234::2

Modify the precedence.
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set ipv6 precedence 3
Or
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#
.
set
ipv6
precedence
1-75
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
immediate
Command
Description
match ipv6 address
Configure the ACL used for
matching the packet in IPv6
PBR.
route-map
Use the route map of the
policy-based routing.
set default interface
Set
the
default
next-hop
egress.
Related
commands
set interface
Set the next hop egress.
set ipv6 default
Set
next-hop
address
the
default
for
next-hop
forwarding
packets.
set ipv6 next-hop
Set the next-hop address for
forwarding packet.
show ipv6 policy
Show
the
policy-based
routing
show route-map
Show
the
route
map
configuraiton.
1.1.52
set level
Use this command to set the level of the area where the routes matching the
rule are redistributed in the route map configuration command. Use the no form
of this command to remove the setting.
set level {level-1| level-2 | level-1-2 | stub-area | backbone}
no set level
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-76
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
In the example below, the OSPF routing protocol
redistributes the RIP protocol to the backbone area.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)#
Examples
redistribute
rip
subnets
route-map redrip
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map redrip permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set level backbone
Command
Description
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match ip next-hop
Related
commands
1.1.53
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
set local-preference
Use this command to set the LOCAL_PREFERENCE value for the routes to be
redistributed in the route map configuration mode. Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting. set local-preference number
no set local-preference
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Local priority metric ranging 1
number
to 4294967295
.
1-77
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the local preference for the
guideline
matched routes. Only one local preference can be set.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_PREF permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set local-preference 6800
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_PREF permit 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set local-preference 50
Command
match as-path
1.1.54
Description
Match the AS_PATH
attribute.
Related
match metric
Match the route metric.
commands
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set metric
Use set metric to set the metric for the routes to be redistributed. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting.
set metric
[+ metric-value | - metric-value | metric-value]
no set metric
.
1-78
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Parameter
Increase based on the metric
+
of the original route
Parameter
description
Decrease
-
configuration
based
on
the
metric of the original route
metric-value
Default
Description
Metric for the route to be
redistributed
The default metric for route redistribution varies with the
routing protocol.
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
You should set the metric according to the actual network
topology, because the routing depends on the metric of
routes. Attentions should be paid to the upeer and lower
limits of the routing protocols when you execute the set
metric, + metric or – metric commands. When the RIP
protocol redistributes the routes of other protocols, the
range of the metric after increase or decrease is 1 to 16.
You can redistribute the routes from one routing process
to another routing process. For example, you can
Usage
redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain and then
guideline
advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice versa. The
mutual route redistribution can be implemented between
all the IP routing protocols.
For route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
One or more match or set commands can be executed to
configure a route map. If the match command is not used,
all the routes will be matched. If the set command is not
used, no operation will be performed.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
Examples
to redistribute the RIP routes and sets the default metric to
40.
.
1-79
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)#
redistribute
rip
subnets
route-map redrip
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map redrip permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set metric 40
Command
Description
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match ip next-hop
Related
commands
1.1.55
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
set metric-type
Use set metric-type to set the type of the routes to be redistributed. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting.
set metric-type type
no set metric-type
Parameter
Description
Type of the routes to be
redistributed. At present, you
Parameter
description
can set the type of the routes
type
that
the
OSPF
protocol
redistributes.
type-1: Type-1 external route;
type-2: Type-2 external route.
.
1-80
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
configuration
Type-2
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
Usage
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
guideline
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
to redistribute the RIP route and sets the type as type-1.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)#
Examples
redistribute
rip
subnets
route-map redrip
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map redrip permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set metric-type type-1
Related
Command
Description
commands
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match ip next-hop
.
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
1-81
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.56
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set tag
Set the tag.
set next-hop
Use this command to specify the next-hop IP address for the routes that match
the rule. Use the no form of this command to remove the setting. This command
is only used to configure routing policies.
set next-hop ip-address
no set next-hop
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip-address
IP address of the next hop.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
You can redistribute the routing information from one
routing process to another routing process. For example,
you can redistribute the route in the OSPF routing domain
and then advertise it to the RIP routing domain, and vice
Usage
guideline
versa. The mutual route redistribution can be implemented
between all the IP routing protocols.
In the route redistribution, route maps are usually used to
control the mutual route redistribution between two routing
domains.
In configuring one route map, one or more match or set
commands can be executed. If the match command is not
.
1-82
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
used, all the routes will be matched. If the set command is
not used, no operation will be performed.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
to redistribute the RIP route and sets the next-hop to
Examples
192.168.1.2.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map redrip permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match ip address 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set next-hop 192.168.1.2
Command
Description
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match ip next-hop
Related
commands
1.1.57
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set tag
Set the tag.
set origin
Use this command to set the source of the routes to be redistributed in the route
map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the
setting.
set origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
no set origin {egp | igp | incomplete}
Parameter
Description
egp
Redistribute the routes from
the remote EGP.
Parameter
description
Redistribute the routes from
igp
the local IGP.
Incomplete
Redistribute the routes from
an unknown device.
.
1-83
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the source of the routes to be
guideline
matched. Only one route source attribute can be set.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_ORIGIN 10 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set origin igp
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_ORIGIN 20 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set origin egp
Command
match as-path
Related
commands
Match
the
AS_PATH
attribute.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set local-preference
1.1.58
Description
Set the local priority of
redistributed routes.
set originator-id
Use this command to set the source of the routes to be redistributed in the route
map configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove the
setting.
set originator-id ip-addr
.
1-84
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
no set originator-id [ip-addr]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip-addr
IP address of the originator.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
Usage
Use this command to set the source of the routes to be
guideline
matched.
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_ORIGIN 10 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 1
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set originator-id 5.5.5.5
Examples
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map SET_ORIGIN 20 permit
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# match as-path 2
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set originator-id 5.5.5.6
Command
match as-path
Related
commands
Description
Match
the
AS_PATH
attribute.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match origin
Match the source.
set as-path prepend
Set the AS_PATH attribute.
set metric
Set the metric.
set local-preference
.
Set
the
local
priority
of
redistributed routes.
1-85
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.59
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set vrf
Use this command to forward the IP packets that match the rule according to
the specified VRF routing table. Use the no form of this command to remove the
setting. This command is only used to configure policy-based routing.
set vrf name
no set vrf name
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
name
Name of the VRF instance
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
.
1-86
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
When specify the multi-protocol VRF without the IPv4 address
family configured, the IPv4 PBR takes no effect. With no IPv6
address family configured, the IPv6 PBR is not effective. With
the IPv4 and IPv6 address families configured, the set vrf rule
is valid for the IPv4 PBR and IPv6 PBR.
Use this command to forward the IP packet that match
different rule according to different VRF table.
If the uni-protocol IPv4 VRF is specified, the IPv6 PBR is not
effective.
1,Before configuring the set vrf command, the VRF must
exist. If the specified VRF does not exist, it will prompt the fault
message. The setting that uses the VRF instance will be
removed after removing this VRF instance.
a)
If the VRF specified by this command does not exist,
it will prompt: %route-map:VRF table vrf-name does
not exist.
b)
Usage
guideline
When removing the VRF, the corresponding set vrf
configuration is removed synchronously, it will
prompt: %route-map:set vrf vrf-name configuration
removed from all route-maps.
2. In the same policy of the route map, the commands: set
vrf ,set ip nexthop, set ip next-hop verify-availability could
not be configured altogether,but the command set vrf ,set ip
tos,set ip precedence,set ip dhcp can be configured
altogether. If the set vrf command is executed many times in
the same policy of the route map, the latter configuration will
overwrite the former s without any prompt message.
In the same policy of the route map, if the set ip nexthop
command is set before the set
vrf ,it will prompt :
% route-map:can not set vrf .
% Remove other set clauses to set vrf.
From the version 10.4(3), the set vrf, set ip nexthop and set
ipv6 next-hop commands can be configured in the same
policy of the route map at the same time. The set vrf has the
higher priority than the set ip nexthop and set ipv6 next-hop.
Examples
In the examples below, the policy-based routing is enabled
on serial 1/0 to forward the traffic whose destination
.
1-87
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
address is in the range of 10.0.0.0/8 through the vrf_A
table, and the traffic whose destination address is in the
range of 172.16.0.0/16 through the vrf_B table, and the
remaining traffic through the global routing table.
The example1 defines the ACL
DGS-8000(config)#
access-list
10
permit
10.0.0.0
0.255.255.255
DGS-8000(config)# access-list 20 permit 172.16.0.0
0.0.255.255
The example2 configures the route-map
DGS-8000(config)#route-map PBR permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set vrf vrf_A
DGS-8000(config)#route-map PBR permit 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#match ip address 20
DGS-8000(config-route-map)#set vrf vrf_B
The
example3
configures
the
policy-based
routing on the interface.
DGS-8000(config)#interface serial 1/0
DGS-8000(config-if)#ip policy route-map PBR
Command
Description
route-map
Define a route map.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
match length
Match the length of the IP
packet.
Related
ip vrf receive
Add
the
direct-conneting
route and the host route of
commands
one interface to the specified
VRF routing table.
vrf receive
Import an IPv6/v6 local host
route and direct route of a
interface to the VRF routing
table
specified
by
the
vrf_name.
.
1-88
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.1.60
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
set tag
Use this command to set the tag for the routes to be redistributed. Use the no
form of this command to remove the setting.
set tag tag
no set tag
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
tag
Tag
of
the
route
to
be
redistributed
Default
configuration
The original routing tag remains unchanged.
Command
mode
Usage
guideline
Route map configuration mode
This command can only be used for route redistribution. If
this command is not configured, the default route tag is
used.
The following example enables the OSPF routing protocol
to redistribute the RIP route and sets the tag as 100.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)#
redistribute
rip
subnets
route-map redrip
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map redrip permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set tag 100
Related
Command
Description
commands
match interface
Match the interface.
match ip address
Match the IP address.
.
1-89
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
match ip next-hop
1.1.61
Match
the
next-hop
IP
address.
match ip route-source
Match the source IP address.
match metric
Match the metric.
match route-type
Match the route type.
match tag
Match the tag.
set metric
Set the metric.
set metric-type
Set the metric type.
set weight
Use this command to set the weight for the BGP routes matching filtering rules.
Use the no form of this command to remove the setting.
set weight number
no set weight
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
number
Weight in the range of 0 to
65535
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Route map configuration mode
This command can only be used modify the weight of a
BGP route.
Usage
By default, the weight of the route learned from a
guideline
neighbor is the one configured with the neighbor weight
command. The weight of the locally generated route is
fixed 32768.
Examples
The following example sets the weight for the BGP route
.
1-90
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
learned from the neighbor 1.1.1.1 at the inbound direction
to 100.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 1.1.1.1 route-map
nei-rmap-in in
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# route-map nei-rmap-in permit 10
DGS-8000(config-route-map)# set weight 100
Command
Description
Match
match as-path
Related
the
AS_PATH
attribute.
match community
Match the route community.
match metric
Match the route metric.
match origin
Match the source.
commands
Set
set community
Set
1.2.1
show dampening interface
the
the
metric
of
the
redistributed route.
Set the metric type of the
set metric type
Show Related Command
of
redistributed route.
set metric
1.2
community
redistributed route.
Use this command to show the statistical information of the danmpening
interface.
show dampening interface
Parameter
Parameter
description
Default
Description
-
-
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
.
1-91
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Usage
guidelines
N/A
The following example shows the statistical information of
the dampening interface.
Examples
DGS-8000# show dampening interface
3 interfaces are configured with dampening.
No interface is being suppressed.
Command
dampening
1.2.2
Related
clear
commands
counters
Description
Enable the ip event dampening function
on the interface.
Clear the interface counters.
show
Show the detailed information of the ip
interface
event
dampening
interfaces.
dampening
function
on
all
show interface dampening
Use this command to show the detailed dampening information on all
interfaces.
show interface [interface-id] dampening
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Default
interface-id
Interface name, such as gigabitEthernet
0/1.
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
If the interface-id is specified, only the dampening
guidelines
information of this specified interface is shown.
.
1-92
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
The following example shows the detailed dampening
information on all interfaces.
DGS-8000# show interface dampening Ethernet1/0
Flaps
Penalty
Supp ReuseTm HalfL ReuseV SuppV MaxSTm MaxP
Restart
0
0
FALSE
0
5
1000
2000
20
16000
0
Domain
Description
Flaps
Interface flapping times.
Penalty
The current penalty value on the
interface.
Examples
Supp
Suppressed or not.
ReuseTm
Time to unsuppress the interface, in
seconds.
HalfL
Half-life period, in seconds.
ReuseV
Unsuppressed threshold.
SuppV
Start suppression threshold.
MaxSTm
Maximum suppression time.
MaxP
Maximum penalty value.
Restart
The default penalty value on the
interface.
Command
Description
dampening
Enable the ip event dampening function.
Related
clear
commands
counters
Clear the interface counters.
show
Show the statistical information of the ip
dampening
event
interface
interfaces.
.
dampening
function
on
all
1-93
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
1.2.3
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
show ip community-list
Use show ip community-list command to view the community list.
show ip community-list [community-list-number | community-list-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
community-list-number
Number of the community list.
community-list-name
Name of the community list.
Default
configuration
None
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode
Usage
This command shows the information on the community
guidelines
list.
DGS-8000# show ip community-list
Community-list standard local
Examples
permit local-AS
Community-list standard Red-Giant
permit 0:10
deny 0:20
Related
Command
Description
match community
Match the route community.
commands
set comm-list delete
1.2.4
Delete
the
community
attribute in the BGP routes.
show ip prefix-list
Use show ip prefix-list to view the prefix list or the entries.
show ip prefix-list [prefix-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
prefix-name
Name of the prefix list.
Default
The configuration information of all the prefix lists is
.
1-94
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
configuration
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
displayed by default.
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, interface
configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode,
route map configuration mode.
If no prefix list is specified, the configurations of all the
prefix lists are displayed, otherwise only the configuration
of the specified prefix list is displayed.
DGS-8000# show ip prefix-list
ip prefix-list name : test
Examples
seq pre: 2 entries
seq 5 permit 192.168.564.0/24
seq 10 permit 192.2.2.0/24
1.2.5
show ip route
Use the command to view the configuration of the IP routing table.
show ip route [[vrf vrf_name] [network [mask] | count | protocol [process-id] |
weight ]]
Parameter
vrf vrf_name
(Optional) Show the route information of
the VRF.
(Optional) Show the route information to
network
the network.
(Optional)Show the route information to
mask
the network of this mask.
Parameter
description
Description
(Optional)Show the number of existent
routes. (for the ECMP/WCMP route,
count
show one route)
(Optional) Show the route information of
protocol
specific protocol.
process-id
(Optional) Routing protocol process ID.
(Optional) Show the route information of
weight
non deault weight.
Default
configuration
All routes are displayed by default.
.
1-95
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, interface
configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode,
route map configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command can show route information flexibly.
DGS-8000# show ip route
Codes:
C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external
type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
i - IS-IS, su - IS-IS summary, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 IS-IS level-2
ia - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default
Gateway of last resort is no set
S
20.0.0.0/8 is directly connected, VLAN 1
S
22.0.0.0/8 [1/0] via 20.0.0.1
O E2 30.0.0.0/8 [110/20] via 192.1.1.1, 00:00:06, VLAN
1
Examples
R
40.0.0.0/8 [120/20] via 192.1.1.2, 00:00:23, VLAN 1
B
50.0.0.0/8 [120/0] via 192.1.1.3, 00:00:41
C
192.1.1.0/24 is directly connected, VLAN 1
C
192.1.1.254/32 is local host.
Field
Description
Source routing protocol, which may be:
C: directly connected route
S: static route
O
R: RIP route
B: BGP route
O: OSPF route
I: IS-IS route
Route type, which may be:
E1: OSPF external route type 1
E2: OSPF external route type 2
N1: OSPF NSSA external type 1
N2: OSPF NSSA external type 2
E2
IA: OSPF area internal route
SU: IS-IS summary route
L1: IS-IS level-1 route
L2: IS-IS level-2 route
ia: IS-IS area internal route
.
1-96
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Network address and mask of the destination
20.0.0.0/8
network
[1/0]
Manage metric
Via 20.0.0.1
Next hop IP address.
VLAN 1
Forwarding interface of next hop
DGS-8000# show ip route 30.0.0.0
Routing entry for 30.0.0.0/8
Distance 110, metric 20
Routing Descriptor Blocks:
*192.1.1.1, 00:01:11 ago, via VLAN 1, generated by OSPF,
extern 2
Field
Description
Routing
Descriptor
Blocks
Next hop IP address, source, update time,
forwarding
interface,
source
protocol and type of route information
DGS-8000# show ip route count
--------- route info ---------the num of active route: 5
DGS-8000# show ip route weight
------------[distance/metric/weight]-----------
1.2.6
routing
S
23.0.0.0/8 [1/0/2] via 192.1.1.20
S
172.0.0.0/16 [1/0/4] via 192.0.0.1
show ipv6 prefix-list
Use this command to show the information about the IPv6 prefix list or its
entries.
show ipv6 prefix-list [prefix-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
prefix-name
Name of the IPv6 prefix list.
Default
The configuration information of all the IPv6 prefix lists is
configuration
displayed.
.
1-97
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Command
mode
Usage
guideline
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Privileged EXEC mode, global configuration mode,
interface configuration mode, route protocol configuration
mode, route map configuration mode
If no prefix list is specified, the configurations of all the
prefix lists are displayed, otherwise only the configuration
of the specified prefix list is displayed.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 prefix-list
Examples
Ipv6 prefix-list p6 : 2 entries
permit 13::/20
1.2.7
show ip route summary
Use this command to show the statistical information about one routing table.
show ip route [vrf vrf_name] summary
Use this command to show the statistical information about all routing tables.
show ip route summary all
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vrf-name
VRF name
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Privileged user mode
Usage
1.2.8
guideline
N/A
Examples
N/A
show ipv6 route
Use the command to view the configuration of the IPv6 routing table.
.
1-98
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
show ipv6 route [ vrf vrf-name] [ [network / prefix-length] | summary |
protocol| weight]
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Show the route information to
network
the network.
vrf-name
VRF name.
Parameter
description
(Optional)Show the classified statistics
summary
of the number of ipv6 routes.
((Optional) Show the route information
protocol
of specific protocol.
(Optional) show the non-default-weight
weight
routes only.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
All routes are displayed by default.
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, interface
configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode,
route map configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command can show route information flexibly.
The following is the output of this command:
DGS-8000(config)# show ipv6 route
IPv6 routing table name is Default(0) global scope - 7
entries
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, R - RIP, B
- BGP
I1 - ISIS L1, I2 - ISIS L2, IA - ISIS interarea, IS - ISIS
summary
O - OSPF intra area, OI - OSPF inter area,
Examples
OE1 - OSPF
external type 1, OE2 - OSPF external type 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA external
type 2
[*] - NOT in hardware forwarding table
L
::1/128
via Loopback, local host
C
10::/64
via Loopback 1, directly connected
L
10::1/128
S
20::/64
L
FE80::/10
via ::1, Null0
FE80::/64
via Loopback 1, directly connected
C
L
via Loopback 1, local host
[20/0] via 10::4, Loopback 1
FE80::2D0:F8FF:FE22:33AB/128
.
via Loopback 1, local
1-99
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
host
Field
Description
Source routing protocol, which may be:
C: directly connected route
S: static route
O
R: RIP route
B: BGP route
O: OSPF route
I: IS-IS route
Route type, which may be:
E1: OSPF external route type 1
E2: OSPF external route type 2
N1: OSPF NSSA external type 1
N2: OSPF NSSA external type 2
E2
IA: OSPF area internal route
SU: IS-IS summary route
L1: IS-IS level-1 route
L2: IS-IS level-2 route
ia: IS-IS area internal route
Network
20::/64
Related
commands
address
and
mask
of
destination network
[1/0]
Manage metric
Via 10::4
Next hop IP address.
00:00:06
Survival time of the protocol route
VLAN 1
Forwarding interface of next hop
Command
Description
ipv6 route
Configure
the
ipv6
static
route.
1.2.9
show route-map
Use the command to view the configuration of the route map in the privileged
mode.
show route-map [route-map-name]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
(Optional)
route-map-name
Show
the
configuration
information of the specified the route
map.
.
1-100
the
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 1 Protocol-independent Commands
Default
The configuration information of all the route maps is
configuration
displayed.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, interface
configuration mode, routing protocol configuration mode,
route map configuration mode.
If no route map is specified, the configurations of all the
route maps will be displayed, otherwise only the
configuration of the specified route map is displayed.
DGS-8000# show route-map
route-map AAA, permit, sequence 10
Match clauses:
ip address 2
Set clauses:
metric 10
Examples
Field
Description
route-map
Name of the route map.
The route map contains the
Permit
permit keyword.
sequence 10
Sequence number of the route
map.
Set the matching rule. Whether
Match clauses
to perform the set operation
depends on the permit or deny
keyword in the route map.
Set clauses
.
Set the operation when the rule
is matched.
1-101
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
2
2.1
Chapter 2 RIP
RIP Commands
Configuration Related Commands
2.1.1
address-family (RIP)
Use this command to set the RIP protocol in the address family configuration
sub-mode. The no form of this command removes the address family
sub-mode.
address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name
no address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
vrf vrf-name
Specify the VRF name associated
with the sub-mode command.
Default
configuration
The address family of the RIP protocol is not configured.
Command
mode
Route configuration mode.
You can use the address-family command to enter the
address family configuration sub-mode. The prompt is
(config-router-af)#.
When
you
specify
the
VRF
associated with the sub-mode for the first time, the RIP
Usage
instance corresponding to the VRF will be created. In the
Guidelines
sub-mode, you can configure the VRF RIP routing
settings.
To remove the address family sub-mode and return to the
route
configuration
mode,
execute
the
exit-address-family or exit command.
.
2-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Create a VRF with the name of vpn1 and create its RIP
instance.
DGS-8000(config)# ip vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-vrf)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 1/0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip vrf forwarding
Examples
vpn1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip address
192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config)# router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.1.0
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit-address-family
Command
Related
commands
exit-address-family
Exit the address family
configuration sub-mode.
Create a VRF.
ip vrf
2.1.2
Description
auto-summary (RIP)
Use this command to enable the automatic summary of RIP routes. The no
form of this command disables the function.
auto-summary
no auto-summary
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The automatic RIP route summary means the subnet
routes will be automatically summarized into the routes of
Usage
the classful network when they traverse through the
guidelines
subnet. Automatic route summary is enabled by default for
RIPv1 and RIPv2.
The automatic RIP route summary improves the flexibility
.
2-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
and effectiveness of the network. If the summarized route
exists, the sub-routes contained in the summarized route
cannot be seen in the routing table, reducing the size of
the routing table significantly.
Advertising summarized route is more efficient than
individual routes in light of the following factors:

The
summarized
route
is
always
processed
preferentially in querying the RIP database.

Any sub-route is ignored in querying the RIP
database, reducing the processing time.

Sometimes, there is a need to learn the specific
sub-routes instead of the summarized route. Here it is
required to disable the automatic route summary
function. Only when the RIPv2 is configured,
however, the automatic route summary function can
be disabled. For the RIPv1, the automatic route
summary function is always enabled.
The configuration example below disables the automatic
route summary of the RIPv2.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# version 2
DGS-8000 (config-router)# no auto-summary
Command
Related
commands
Description
Define the RIP software version: v1 or
v2. Both v1 and v2 are supported by
version
default.
2.1.3
bdf all-interfaces
Use this command to enable the BDF on all RIP interfaces. The no form of this
command restores it to the default setting.
bdf all-interfaces
no bdf all-interfaces
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
2-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
With the BFD function enabled on the RIP, one BFD
session will be established for the RIP routing information
source (the source address of the RIP routing for updating
the packets). Once the BFD neighbor fails, the RIP routing
information directly will enter the invalid status and join the
routing forwarding no more.
When establishing the BFD neighbor detection mechanism
Usage
for the RIP protocol, the source addresses of the two
guidelines
devices that join the RIP running must be in the same
segment in order to establish the BFD session between
neighbors.
You can also use the interface configuration mode
command ip rip bfd [disable] to enable or disable the
BFD function on the specified interface, which takes
precedence over the command bfd all-interfaces in the
routing process configuration mode.
Examples
N/A
Command
Description
Create the RIP routing process and
Related
enter
route ip
commands
the
routing
process
configuration mode.
ip
rip
[ disable ]
2.1.4
into
bfd
Enable or disable the BFD on the
specified RIP interfaces.
default-information originate(RIP)
Use this command to generate a default route in the RIP process. The no form
of this command deletes the generated default route.
default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [route-map
map-name]
no default-information originate [always] [metric] [route-map map-name]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
(Optional) Enable RIP to generate the
default route, no matter whether the
always
default route exists or not.
.
2-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
metric
(Optional) The original metric value of
metric-value
the default route, in the range of 1-15.
(Optional) Name of the associated
route-map
route-map.
map-name
Route-map
is
not
associated by default.
Default
No default route is generated by default.
configuration
The metric value of the generated default value is 1.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
By default, RIP will not notify the default route outside, if
there is no default route in the routing table. Use the
default-information
originate
routing
process
configuration command to notify the neighbor of the default
route.
With the parameter always configured, no matter whether
the default route exists in the RIP routing process or not,
the default route will be notified to the neighbor but not
shown in the local routing table. Use the show ip rip
database
command
to
confirm
the
default
route
generation and view the RIP routing information database.
Configure the parameter route-map to control the default
Usage
route. For example, use the set metric rule to set the
guidelines
metric value of the default route.
The route-map set metric rule takes precedence over the
parameter metric value configuration of the default route.
If the parameter metric has not been configured, the
default metric value of the default route will be adopted.
Note:
If the default route can be generated by using this
command, RIP will not learn the default route notified from
the neighbor.
For the default route generated by using the ip
default-network
command,
the
default-information
originate command is still needed to add the default route
to the RIP.
Examples
The configuration example below generates a default route
to the RIP routing table:
.
2-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
DGS-8000(config-router)# default-information originate
always
Command
ip
Related
Description
rip
default-information
commands
Notify the default route on an
interface.
Redistribute the routes from one
redistribute
routing domain to another routing
domain.
2.1.5
default-metric (RIP)
Use this command to define the default RIP metric in the route configuration
mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the default value.
default-metric metric
no default-metric
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Default metric in the range of 1 to 16. If
metric
the metric is greater than or equal to 16,
the route is regarded unreachable.
Default
configuration
The default value is 1.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command needs to work with the command
redistribute. When the routes are redistributed to the RIP
routing process from a routing protocol process, the route
metric cannot be converted due to the incompatibility of the
metric calculation mechanism of different protocols. During
Usage
guidelines
the conversion, therefore, it is required to redefine the
metric of redistributed routes in the RIP routing domain. If
there is no clear definition of metric in redistributing a
routing protocol process, the RIP uses the metric defined
with default-metric. If a clear metric is defined, this value
overwrites the metric defined with default-metric. If this
command is not configured, the default value of
default-metric is 1.
.
2-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
In the configuration example below, the RIP routing
protocol redistributes the routes learned by the OSPF
Examples
routing protocol, whose initial RIP metric is set as 3.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# default-metric 3
DGS-8000 (config-router)# redistribute ospf 100
Command
Description
Related
commands
Redistribute the routes from one
routing domain to another routing
redistribute
domain.
2.1.6
distance
Use this command to set the management distance of the RIP route. The no
form of this command restores it to the default setting.
distance distance [ ip-address wildcard ]
no distance distance [ ip-address wildcard ]
Parameter
Management distance of a RIP route,
distance
an integer in the range of 1 to 255
Parameter
description
Description
ip-address
Prefix of the source IP address of the
route
Comparison bit of the IP address,
where 0 means accurate matching
wildcard
while 1 means no comparison
Default
The default value is 120.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
2-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Use this command to set the management distance of the
RIP route.
You can use this command to create several management
Usage
distances with source address prefix. When the source
guidelines
address of the RIP route is within the range specified by
the prefix, the corresponding management distance is
applied; otherwise, the route uses the management
distance set by the RIP.
Set the management distance of the RIP route to 160, and
specify the management distance of the route learned from
192.168.2.1 to 123.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance 160
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance 123 192.168.12.1
0.0.0.0
2.1.7
distribute-list in (RIP)
Use this command to control route update for filtering in the routing process
configuration mode. The no form of this command removes the configuration.
distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name [gateway
prefix-list-name]} in [interface-type interface-number]
no distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name
[gateway prefix-list-name]} in [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
access-list-number
Parameter
description
prefix
prefix-list-name
Description
ACL number. Only the routes on the
ACL are accepted.
Use the prefix list to filter the routes.
gateway
Use the prefix list to filter the source
prefix-list-name
of the routes.
interface-type
(Optional)
interface-number
distribution list applies to
Interface
that
the
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
2-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
To deny some specified routes, you can process all the
Usage
guidelines
route update packets received by configuring the route
distribute control list.
Without any interface specified, the system will process
the route update packet received on all the interfaces.
In the following configuration example, the RIP controls
and processes the routes received from the Fastethernet
0/0 port, only permitting the routes starting with 172.16.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
Examples
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 200.168.23.0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# distribute-list 10 in
fastethernet 0/0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# no auto-summary
DGS-8000 (config-router)# access-list 10 permit
172.16.0.0 0.0.255.255
Related
commands
2.1.8
Parameter
Description
access-list
Define the ACL.
prefix-list
Define the prefix of the ACL.
distribute-list out (RIP)
Use this command to control route update advertisement for filtering routes in
the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this command removes
this configuration.
distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name} out
[interface | protoco] [process-id | process-name]
no distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name} out
[interface | protocol | process-id | process-name]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
access-list-number
prefix
prefix-list-name
ACL number. Only the routes on the
ACL are permitted.
Use the prefix list to filter the routes.
(Optional) Interface that the route
Interface
update advertisement control applies
to
.
2-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
(Optional) Routing protocol whose
protocol
routes are selectively redistributed
process-id
process-name
(Optional) Set the OSPF process ID
when OSPF is used.
(Optional) Set the ISIS process name
when ISIS is used.
Default
No route update advertisement is configured.
configuration
Command
Routing process configuration mode.
mode
No
optional
parameters
means
the
route
update
advertisement applies to all ports. Interface option means
Usage
the control applies to only the specified port. Protocol
guidelines
option means the route update advertisement control
applies to only the specific route process.
In the following configuration example, the RIP routing
process only advertises the 192.168.12.0/24 route.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 200.4.4.0
Examples
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# distribute-list 10 out
DGS-8000 (config-router)# version 2
DGS-8000 (config-router)#access-list 10 permit
192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
2.1.9
Parameter
Description
Related
access-list
Define the ACL.
commands
prefix-list
Define the prefix of the ACL.
redistribute
Configure route redistribution.
exit-address-family
Use this command to exit the address family configuration mode.
exit-address-family
.
2-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Address family configuration mode.
Use this command to exit the address family configuration
mode.
The abbreviation of this command is exit .
Following example shows how to enter or exit the address
Examples
family configuration mode:
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# exit-address-family
Parameter
Description
Related
commands
2.1.10
address-family
Enter the address family configuration
sub-mode
graceful-restart(RIP)
Use this command to configure the RIP graceful restart (GR) function on a
device. The graceful-restart grace-period command is used to display the
configured GR grace period parameter and enable the RIP GR function. The no
form of this command is used to restore the default configuration.
graceful-restart [grace-period grace-period ]
no graceful-restart [grace-period]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
graceful-restart
Enable the GR function.
grace-period
description
Display
the
configured
grace-period (optional).
Indicate the user-defined GR
grace-period
period (optional).
The default value is the smaller
of either twice the update time
.
2-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
or 60s.
The value is in the range of 1s to
1,800s.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode
The GR function is configured on the basis of RIP
instances. Different GR parameters can be configured for
different RIP instances.
GR period is the longest time from the startup to the end of
RIP GR. During this period, the forwarding table remains
unchanged and the RIP route is restored to the pre-GR
state. When the period is due, the RIP exits the GR state
and starts normal RIP operation. The graceful-restart
grace-period command allows you to explicitly modify the
grace period. Note: Make sure that GR is completed before
the RIP route is validated and after an RIP route update
cycle elapses. If the value is incorrectly configured, you
cannot ensure that data is transferred uninterruptedly
during the GR period. For example, if the grace period is
Usage
longer than the time when the neighbor’s route is
guidelines
unavailable and GR is not completed before the route is
validated, then the neighbor is not reinformed of the route
and forwarding of the neighbor’s route is terminated when
it is validated, which results in network data transmission
interruption. Therefore you are not suggested to change
the grace period unless there is an obvious necessity. If
you need to change it, configure the timers basic
command to make sure the grace period is longer than the
route update cycle and shorter than the time when the
route is unavailable.
During the RIP GR period, keep the
stable network environment.
Caution
Examples
The configuration example below enables the RIP GR
.
2-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
function and configure the grace period of the GR function:.
DGS-8000(config)# router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# graceful-restart grace-period
90
2.1.11
Related
Command
Description
commands
timers basic
Configure RIP timers.
ip rip authentication key-chain
Use this command to enable the RIP authentication and specify the keychain
used for RIP authentication in the interface configuration mode. The no form of
this command is used to delete the specified keychain.
ip rip authentication key-chain name-of-keychain
no ip rip authentication key-chain
Parameter
description
Parameter
name-of-keychain
Description
Name of the keychain used for
RIP authentication
Default
configuration
The keychain is not associated by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
If the keychain is specified in the interface configuration
mode but not defined with the key chain global
Usage
configuration command, the RIP authentication will not be
guidelines
performed.
The RIPv1 does not support authentication but the RIPv2
does.
The configuration example below enables the RIP
authentication on the fastEthernet 0/1 with the associated
Examples
keychain is ripchain.
DGS-8000 (config)#interface fastEthernet 0/0
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)#ip rip
authentication key-chain ripchain
.
2-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
Description
ip
rip
authentication
Define
the
RIP
authentication
mode.
mode
Enable the RIP authentication, and
ip
Related
commands
rip
set the password string of RIP
authentication
plaintext authentication. The RIP
text-password
packets
authentication
is
supported by the RIPv2 only.
ip
rip
receive
received on the interface.
version
ip rip send version
Define the verion of RIP packets
sent on the interface.
Define the keychain and enter into
key chain
2.1.12
Define the version of RIP packets
the keychain configuration mode.
ip rip authentication mode
Use this command to define the RIP authentication mode in the interface
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the
default RIP authentication mode.
ip rip authentication mode {text | md5}
no ip rip authentication mode
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
text
Enable plaintext authentication.
md5
Enable MD5 authentication.
Default
configuration
It is the plaintext authentication by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
.
2-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
To exchange RIP routing information directly, all devices
must have the same RIP authentication mode. Otherwise,
the RIP packet exchange will fail.
If the plaintext authentication is adopted, but the password
string of the plaintext authentication or the associated
Usage
guidelines
keychain is not configured or the associated keychain is
not configured in practice, the authentication is not
performed in this case. In the same way, if the MD5
authentication is adopted, but the associated keychain is
not configured or the associated keychain is not configured
in practice, the authentication is not performed as well.
The RIPv1 does not support RIP authentication but the
RIPv2 does.
The configuration example below configures the RIP
authentication mode on the fastEthernet 0/1 as md5.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000
(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
rip
authentication mode md5
Command
ip
Description
rip
authentication
key-chain
specify the keychain used for the RIP
authentication. Only the RIPv2 supports
authentication.
Related
commands
Enable the RIP authentication and
Enable the RIP authentication, and set
ip
rip
the password string of RIP plaintext
authentication
authentication.
The
RIP
packets
text-password
authentication is supported by the
RIPv2 only.
key chain
2.1.13
Define the keychain and enter into the
keychain configuration mode
ip rip authentication text-password
Use this command to set the password string of RIP plaintext authentication.
The no form of this command is used to remove the password string.
ip rip authentication text-password password-string
no ip rip authentication text-password
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
password-string
Password
.
string
of
the
plaintext
2-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
authentication, in the length of 1-16
bytes.
Default
No password string of RIP plaintext authentication is
configuration
configured by default.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
To enable the RIP plaintext authentication, the password
string can be configured directly by using this command, or
Usage
can be obtained by associating with the key chain. The
guidelines
latter takes the precedence over the former one.
The RIPv1 does not support RIP authentication but the
RIPv2 does.
The configuration example below enables the RIP plaintext
authentication on the fastEthernet 0/1 and sets the
Examples
password string as hello:
DGS-8000(config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip
authentication text-password hello
Command
Description
ip rip
authentication
Related
mode
commands
Enable the RIP authentication and
ip rip
authentication
key-chain
2.1.14
Define the RIP authentication mode.
specify the keychain used for the RIP
authentication. Only the RIPv2 supports
authentication.
ip rip bdf
Use this command to enable or disable the BFD on the specifed RIP interface.
The no form of this command is used to remove the setting on the interface..
ip rip bfd [disable]
no ip rip bfd
.
2-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Parameter
description
Chapter 2 RIP
Parameter
Description
Disable
disable
the
BFD
function
on
the
specified RIP interface.
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The command ip rip bfd in the interface configuration
mode takes precedence over the bfd all-interfaces
command in the routing process configuration mode.
Usage
You can use this command to enable the BFD on the
guidelines
specified interface according to the actual environment,
also can use the command bfd all-interfaces in the RIP
process configuration mode to enanble the BFD function
on all RIP interfaces and use the command ip rip bfd
disable to disable the BFD on the specified interface.
Examples
N/A
Command
Description
Related
commands
Create the RIP routing process and
enter
route ip
into
the
routing
process
configuration mode.
bdf all-interfaces
2.1.15
Enable the BFD on all RIP interfaces.
ip rip default-information
Use this command to notify a specified interface of the RIP default route. The
no form of this command is used to cancel the notification of the default route.
ip rip default-information {only | originate} [metric metric-value]
no ip rip default-information
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Notify the default route, rather than other
only
routes.
.
2-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
originate
Notify the default route and other routes.
metric
Specify the metric value of the default
metric-value
route, in the range of 1-15.
Default
No default route is configured by default. The default
configuration
metric is 1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
After configuring this command on a specified interface, a
default route will be notified through this interface. If the ip
rip
default-information
command
in
the
interface
configuration mode and the default-information originate
command in the RIP process are configured at the same
time, it only notifies the interface of the default route.
Note:
Usage
guidelines
1. RIP will not learn the default route notified by the
neighbor, if the ip rip default-information command
does not configured on an interface. If the default route
has been learned, it will be removed till the timer
expires.
2. The ip rip default-information command configuration
on the interface can not be triggered and updated
immediately, and will be notified on the next timed
update message.
The configuration example below creates a default route
which is notified on the interface ethernet0/1 only:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#interface ethernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-Ethernet 0/1)#ip rip
default-information only
Related
commands
Command
Description
default-information
Originate the default route in the
originate
RIP process.
.
2-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
2.1.16
Chapter 2 RIP
ip rip receive enable
Use this command to receive RIP packets on the interface. The no form of this
command prohibits receiving RIP packets on the interface .
ip rip receive enable
no ip rip receive enable
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
To prevent from receiving RIP packets on the interface,
Usage
guidelines
use the no form of this command in the interface
configuration mode. To this end, you must configure this
command on the interface. The default form of this
command restores it to the default value.
Prohibit from receiving RIP packets on the fastEthernet
0/1.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# no ip rip receive
enable
Related
commands
Parameter
Description
ip rip send
Enable sending RIP packets on the
enable
interface.
passive-interface
2.1.17
Set
the
interface
to a
passive
interface.
ip rip receive version
Use this command to define the version of RIP packets received on the
interface in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is
used to restore it to the default value.
ip rip receive version [1] [2]
.
2-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
no ip rip receive version
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
1
(Optional) Receive only RIPv1 packets.
2
(Optional) Receive only RIPv2 packets.
Default
The default behavior depends on the configuration with
configuration
the version command.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
This command overwrites the default configuration of the
Usage
guidelines
version command. It allows RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets to
be received on the interface at the same time. If there is no
parameter when the command is configured, the receiving
behavior will depend on the configuration of the version.
The configuration example below enables receiving both
RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets on the fastEthernet 0/1 interface.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip receive
version 1 2
Related
commands
2.1.18
Command
Description
Define the default version of the RIP
version
packets received/sent on the interface.
ip rip send enable
Use this command to enable sending RIP packets on the interface. The no form
of this command disables sending RIP packets on the interface.
ip rip send enable
no ip rip send enable
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
.
2-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
To prevent from sending RIP packets on the interface, use
Usage
guidelines
the no form of this command in the interface configuration
mode. To this end, you must configure this command on
the interface. The default form of this command can
restore it to the default value.
Prohibit from sending RIP packets on the fastEthernet 0/1.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# no ip rip send
enable
Related
commands
Parameter
Description
ip
Enable receiving RIP packets on the
rip
receive
interface.
enable
passive-interface
2.1.19
Set
the
interface
to
a
passive
interface.
ip rip send supernet-routes
Use this command to enable sending the RIP supernet-routes on the specified
interface The no form of this command disables sending the RIP
supernet-routes on the specified interface.
ip rip send supernet-routes
no ip rip send supernet-routes
Default
configuration
Enabled
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
.
2-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
When the RIPv1 router is monitoring the response
message from the RIPv2 router, if the supernet routing
information is monitored, an incorrect route is learned
because the RIPv1 ignores the subnet mask of the routing
information. In this case, it needs to use the no form of this
command on the RIPv2 router to disable advertising the
supernet-routes on the corresponding interface. This
Usage
guidelines
command only takes effect on the interfaces with this
command configured.
This command is only valid upon sending
the RIPv2 packets on the interface and it is
used to control sending the
Note
supernet-routes.
The configuration example below disables sending RIP
supernet-routes on the fastEthernet 0/1 interface.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# no ip rip send
supernet-routes
Related
commands
Command
Description
version
Define the RIP version
ip
rip
send
packets on the interface.
enable
2.1.20
Enable or disable sending the RIP
ip rip send version
Use this command to define the version of the RIP packets sent on the interface
in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to
restore it to the default value.
ip rip send version [1] [2]
no ip rip send version
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
1
(Optional) Send only RIPv1 packets.
2
(Optional) Send only RIPv2 packets.
The default behavior depends on the configuration with
.
2-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
configuration
Chapter 2 RIP
the version command.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
This command overwrites the default configuration of the
Usage
guidelines
version command. It allows RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets to
be sent on the interface at the same time. If there is no
parameter when the command is configured, the receiving
behavior will depend on the configuration of the version.
The configuration example below enables sending both
RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets on the fastEthernet 0/1 interface.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip send
version 1 2
Command
Related
commands
Description
Define the default version of the RIP
packets
version
received/send
on
the
interfaces.
2.1.21
ip rip v2-broadcast
Use this command to send RIPv2 pakcets in broadcast form rather than in
multicast form. The no form of this command restores it to the default setting.
ip rip v2-broadcast
no ip rip v2-broadcast
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
The default depends on the configuration of the version
configuration
command.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
.
2-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
This command overwrites the default of the version
command.
Usage
guidelines
This command only affects the behavior of
sending RIP packets on the interface. This command
allows RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets to be sent on the
interface simultaneously. Without parameters specified,
which packets will be received depends on the version
setting.
Send RIPv2 packets in the broadcast mode on the
fastEthernet 0/1 interface.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# no ip rip
split-horizon
Parameter
Related
commands
Description
Define the default version of the RIP
packets received and sent on the
version
interface.
2.1.22
ip rip split-horizon (RIP)
Use this command to enable split horizon in the interface configuration mode.
The no form of this command disables the function.
ip rip split-horizon
no ip rip split-horizon
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
By default, this function is enabled on all interfaces.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When multiple devices are connected to the IP broadcast
network using a distance vector routing protocol, it is
Usage
required to use the split horizon mechanism to prevent
guidelines
loop. The split horizon prevents the device from
advertising some routing information from the interface
that learns that information, which optimizes the routing
.
2-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
information exchange between multiple devices.
For non-broadcast multi-path access network (such as
frame relay and X.25), however, the split horizon may
cause some devices unable to learn all routing information.
The split horizon may need to be disabled in this case. If
an interface is configured the secondary IP address,
attentions shall be paid also for the split horizon issue.
The RIP routing protocol is a distance vector routing
protocol, and the split horizon issue shall be cautioned in
practical applications. If it is unsure whether split horizon is
enabled on the interface, execute the show ip rip
command. This function makes no influence on the
neighbor defined with the neighbor command.
The configuration example below disables the RIP split
Examples
horizon function on the interface fastethernet 0/0.
DGS-8000 (config)# interface fastethernet 0/0
DGS-8000 (config-if)# no ip rip split-horizon
Related
Command
Description
neighbor (RIP)
Define a neighbor.
Enable
commands
validate-update-source
the
source
address
authentication of the RIP route
update message.
2.1.23
ip rip summary-address
Use this command to enable port-level convergence in the interface
configuration mode. The no form of this command disables the convergence of
the specified address or subnet.
ip rip summary-address ip-address ip-network-mask
no ip rip summary-address ip-address ip-network-mask
Parameter
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP addresses to be converged
description
ip-network-mask
.
Subnet mask of the specified IP
address to be converged
2-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Default
The RIP routes are automatically converged to the
configuration
classful network edge.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
This command converges an address or subnet on a
Usage
specified port. RIP routes are automatically converged to
guidelines
the classful network edge. The classful subnet can be
configured through only port convergence.
The following configuration example disables the route
convergence function of the RIPv2. The port convergence
is configured so that the fastEthernet 0/1 advertises the
converged route 172.16.0.0/16.
DGS-8000 (config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip
summary-address 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0
DGS-8000 (config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip address
172.16.1.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 172.16.0.0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# version 2
DGS-8000 (config-router)# no auto-summary
Parameter
Description
Related
commands
2.1.24
auto-summary
Enable the automatic convergence of
RIP routes.
ip rip triggered
Use this command to enable triggered RIP for the link on demand in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to disable
triggered RIP.
ip rip triggered
ip rip triggered retransmit-timer timer
ip rip triggered retransmit-count count
no ip rip triggered
no ip rip triggered retransmit-timer
.
2-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
no ip rip triggered retransmit-count
Parameter
Description
Configure the interval at which the
Update
retransmit-timer
timer
Request
and
Update
Response packets are retransmitted.
The value is in the range of 1s to
Parameter
3600s, and 5s by default.
description
Configure the maximum times that the
Update
retransmit-count
count
Request
and
Update
Response packets are retransmitted.
The value is in the range of 1 to 3600,
and is 36 by default.
Default
Disabled.
configuration
Command
Interface configuration mode.
mode
Triggered RIP (TRIP) is the extension of RIP on the wide area
network (WAN), mainly used for the link on demand.
With the TRIP enabled, RIP no longer sends route updates
regularly and sends route updates to the WAN interface only
if:
Usage
guidelines

Update Request packets are received.

RIP routing information is changed.

Interface state is changed.

The router is started.
As RIP regular update is disabled, the confirmation and
retransmission mechanism is needed to ensure update
packets are sent and received successfully over the WAN.
The retransmit-timer and retransmit-count commands can
be used to specify the retransmission interval and maximum
retransmission times for request and update packets.
.
2-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
2.
The function can be enabled when a)
the interface has only one neighbor, or
b) there are multiple neighbors but
they interact using unicast packets.
You are suggested to enable the
function for link layer protocols such as
PPP, frame relay, and X.25.
3.
You are suggested to enable split
horizon with poison reverse on the
interface enabled with the function;
otherwise invalid routing information
might left.
4.
Make sure the function is enabled on
all routers on the same link; otherwise
the function will be invalidated and the
Caution
routing
information
cannot
be
exchanged correctly.
5.
The function cannot be enabled at the
same time with BFD and RIP
functions.
6.
To enable the function, make sure the
RIP configuration is the same on both
ends of the link, such as RIP
authentication and the RIP version
supported by the interface.
7.
If this function is enabled on this
interface, the source address of
packets on this interface will be
checked no matter whether the source
address
check
function
(validate-update-source) is enabled.
The following configuration example enables triggered RIP
and specifies the retransmission interval and maximum
retransmission times to 10s and 18 respectively for Update
Request and Update Response packets.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip triggered
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip triggered
retransmit-timer 10
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip rip triggered
retransmit-count 18
.
2-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Parameter
Related
commands
Description
show
ip
database
rip
show
ip
interface
rip
ip
rip
split-horizon
2.1.25
Show the summarized routing
information of the RIP database.
Show the RIP interface information.
Configure the RIP split horizon.
neighbor (RIP)
Use this command to define a RIP neighbor in the routing process configuration
mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the neighbor.
neighbor ip-address
no neighbor
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip-address
IP address of the neighbor.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
By default, the RIPv1 works with the IP broadcast address
(255.255.255.255) to advertise routing information, and
RIPv2 works with the multicast address 224.0.0.9 to do so.
If you do not want to allow all the devices on the broadcast
network or non-broadcast multi-path access network to
Usage
receive routing information, execute the passive-interface
guidelines
command in the routing process configuration mode to
configure the related interfaces as passive interface and
then define only some neighbor to be able to receive the
routing information. This command does not affect the
receiving of RIP messages. Once restart, the interface who
is set to passive will not send request message.
Examples
The configuration example below defines two neighbors.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
.
2-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 172.16.0.0
Related
commands
2.1.26
-
network (RIP)
Use this command to define the list of networks to be advertised in the RIP
routing process in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to delete the defined network.
network network-number [wildcard]
no network network-number [wildcard]
Parameter
Description
Number
of
the
directly-connected
network. This network number is a
Parameter
network-number
description
natural network number. All interfaces
whose IP addresses belong to that
natural network can send/receive the
RIP packets.
Define the IP address comparing bit: 0
wildcard
refers to accurate matching, 1 refers to
no comparing.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The network-number and wildcard parameter can be
configured simultaneously to make the IP address for the
Usage
interface within the address range join the RIP running.
guidelines
Only when the IP address of an interface is in the network
list defined for the RIP, the RIP route update messages
can be received and sent on the interface.
The following example defines two network numbers
associated with the RIP process.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 172.16.0.0
.
2-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Related
commands
2.1.27
offset-list(RIP)
Use this command to increase the metric value of receiving or sending route.
The no form of this command deletes the specified offset list.
offset-list access-list-number {in | out} offset [interface-type interface-number]
no
offset-list
access-list-number
{in
|
out}
offset
[interface-type
interface-number]
Parameter
Description
access-list-number
ACL number
Modify the metric of the routes
in
received by ACL.
Parameter
description
Modify the metric of the routes sent
out
by ACL.
offset
Change of the metric value
interface-type
Interface that the ACL applies to
interface-number
Interface that the ACL applies to
Default
configuration
The offset is not specified.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Routing process configuration mode.
If a RIP route matches against both the offset-list of the
specified interface and the global offset-list, it will increase
the metric value of the offset-list of the specified interface.
Increase the metric of the RIP routes by 7 in the range
specified by ACL 7.
DGS-8000 (config-router)# offset-list 7 out 7
Examples
Increase the metric of the RIP routes by 7 in the range
specified by ACL 7 and learned by fastethernet 0/1.
DGS-8000 (config-router)# offset-list 7 in 7
DGS-8000 (config-router)# offset-list 8 in 7 fastethernet
.
2-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
0/1
2.1.28
output-delay
Use this command to modify the delay to send the RIP update packets. The no
form of this command removes the configuration.
output-delay delay
no output-delay
Parameter
Description
delay
Delay to send the RIP update packets
Parameter
description
in the range from 8 ms to 50 ms.
Default
N/A.
configuration
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Normally, the size of a RIP update packet is 512 Kbytes
including 25 routes. If the number of the update routes is
larger than 25, the routes will be sent in several packets as
fast as possible.
Usage
However, when a high-speed device sends a large amount
guidelines
of packets to a low-speed device, the low-speed device
may not process all the packets timely, resulting in packet
loss. In this case, you can use this command to increase
the delay to send packets on the high-speed device so that
the low-speed device can process all the update packets.
Set the delay to send the RIP update packets to 30 ms.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# output-delay 30
2.1.29
passive-interface
Use this command to set an interface to a passive interface. The no form of this
command removes this configuration.
passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-num}
no passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-num}
.
2-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Parameter
description
Chapter 2 RIP
Parameter
Description
Default
Set the interface to a passive interface.
interface-type
Interface type and number
interface-num
Default
configuration
By default, ports are set to the non passive mode.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The
passive-interface
default
command
sets
all
interfaces to the passive mode. You can use no
passive-interface intface-type interface-num to set the
specified interface to the non-passive mode.
When you enable receiving and sending RIP messages on
Usage
the interface with the ip rip send enable and ip rip
guidelines
receive enable commands, this command sets the
interface to the passive mode. Consequently, receiving
RIP update messages rather than sending RIP update
messages is enabled on the interface. However, the ip rip
send enable and ip rip receive enable commands
determine whether the messages can be sent or received.
Set all interfaces to the passive mode and then set
ethernet0/1 to the non-passive mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# passive-interface default
DGS-8000(config-router)#
no
passive-interface
gigabitEthernet 0/1
Related
commands
Command
Description
ip rip receive
Enable receiving RIP packets on the
enable
interface.
ip
rip
send
Enable sending RIP packets on the
interface.
enable
.
2-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
2.1.30
Chapter 2 RIP
redistribute (RIP)
Use this command to redistribute external routes in the route configuration
mode. The no form of this command cancels the redistribution of external
routes.
redistribute {bgp| isis [process-name] |ospf <1-65535>| connected | static}
[metric value ] [route-map route-map-name ][ match internal | external type |
nssa-external type ]
no redistribute {bgp | isis [process-name] | ospf <1-65535> | connected |
static} [metric value ] [route-map route-map-name ][ match internal |
external type | nssa-external type ]
Parameter
Description
bgp | isis |
Specify the route redistribution protocol.
ospf |
connected |
Parameter
description
static
Set the metric of the route to be
metric
redistributed.
route-map
Set the redistribution rule.
match
Redistribute OSPF-type routes.
<1-65535>
Number of an OSPF instance
By default:
All the routes of the sub types of the instance are
redistributed when you configure redistributing OSPF.
The routes of Level-2 sub-types of the instance are
Default
redistributed when you configure ISIS redistribution.
All the routes of the protocol are redistributed for other
routing protocols.
The metric of the redistributed routes is 1 by default.
The route-map is not associated.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
2-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
This command redistributes external routes.
It is not necessary to convert the metric of one routing
protocol into that of another routing protocol for route
distribution, since different routing protocols use different
metric measurement methods. The RIP protocol calculates
metric on hop, the OSPF on bandwidth. So their metrics
are not comparable. However, a symbolic metric must be
set for route redistribution. Otherwise, route redistribution
will fail.
When you configure ISIS routes redistribution without the
level parameter, only level-2 routes are redistributed by
default. If the redistribution configuration is initialize with
Usage
level parameter, then all routes with level configured are
guidelines
redistributed.
When you configure redistributing OSPF routes without the
match parameter, the OSPF routes of all sub types are
redistributed by default. Then the first configured match
parameter is used as the original one. Only the routes
matching the specific type can be redistributed. The no
form of this command restores the setting to the default
value.
Note:
The redistribute command cannot redistribute the default
route of other protocol to the RIP process. To this end,
execute the default-information originate command.
Examples
Redistribute static routes.
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute static
Command
Description
default-metric
Set the default metric of the route to
metric
be redistributed.
Related
commands
2.1.31
router rip
Use this command to create the RIP routing process and enter into the routing
process configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the
RIP routing process.
router rip
no router rip
.
2-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
One RIP routing process must be defined with one network
Usage
number. If a dynamic routing protocol is running on
guidelines
asynchronous lines, execute async default routing on the
asynchronous interface.
The configuration example below describes how to create
Examples
the RIP routing process and enter into the routing process
configuration mode.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
Related
commands
2.1.32
Command
network (RIP)
Description
Define the network number of the RIP
process.
timers basic
Use this command to adjust the RIP clock in the routing process configuration
mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the default.
timers basic update invalid flush
no timers basic
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Route update time, in seconds. The
update keyword defines the period at
which the device sends route update
update
messages. Once an update message is
received, the "Invalid" and "Flush"
clocks reset. By default, a route update
message is sent every 30 seconds.
.
2-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Route
invalid
period,
in
seconds,
starting from the last valid update
message. The "invalid" defines the
period when the route in the routing
table becomes invalid due to no update.
The invalid period of route shall be at
least three times the route update
invalid
period.
If
no
update
message
is
received within the route invalid period,
the related route becomes invalid and
enters into the "invalid" state. If a
update message is received within the
period, the clock resets. By default the
Invalid period is 180s.
Route flushing period, in seconds,
starting when a RIP route enters into
the invalid status. When the flush time
flush
is due, the routes in the invalid status
will be cleared out of the routing table.
The default Flush period is 120 s.
Default
By default, the update time is 30s, invalid time is 180s and
configuration
flushing time is 120 s.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Adjusting the above clocks may speed up the routing
protocol convergence and fault recovery. The devices
Usage
guidelines
connected with the same network must have the same RIP
clock settings. The adjustment of RIP clocks is not
recommended unless otherwise necessary.
To check the current RIP clock parameters, execute the
show ip rip command.
The configuration example below enables the RIP update
message to be sent every 10 seconds. If no update
Examples
message is received within 30s, the related routes become
invalid and enter into the invalid status. When another 90s
elapses, they will be cleared.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
.
2-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
DGS-8000 (config-router)# timers basic 10 30 90
Note that the small settings of clocks on low-speed links
may cause some risks, because numerous update
messages may use up the bandwidth. In general, the
clocks can be configured with smaller values on Ethernet
or the lines of above 2Mbps to reduce the convergence
time of routes.
2.1.33
validate-update-source
Use this command to validate the source address of the received RIP route
update message in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of the
command disables the source address validation.
validate-update-source
no validate-update-source
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
It is possible to validate the source address of the RIP
route update message. The validation aims to ensure the
RIP routing process receives only the route updates from
the same IP subnet neighbor.
Disabling split-horizon on the interface causes the RIP
routing process to enable update message source address
Usage
validation, no matter whether it has been configured with
guidelines
the validate-update-source command in the routing
process configuration mode.
In addition, for the ip unnumbered interface, the RIP
routing process does not implement update message
source address validation, no matter whether it has been
configured
with
the
routing
process
configuration
command validate-update-source.
The configuration example below disables the message
Examples
source address validation.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# no validate-update-source
.
2-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
2.1.34
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
Description
Related
ip split-horizon
Enable split horizon.
commands
ip unnumbered
Define the IP unnumbered interface
neighbor (RIP)
Define a neighbor.
version (RIP)
Use this command to define the RIP version in the routing process configuration
mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the default.
version {1 | 2}
no version
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
1
Define the RIP version 1.
2
Define the RIP version 2.
Default
By default, the route update messages of the RIPv1 and
configuration
RIPv2 are received, but those of the RIPv1 is send only.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command defines the RIP version running on the
Usage
guidelines
device. It is possible to redefine the messages of which
RIP version are processed on every interface by using the
ip rip receive version and ip rip send version
commands.
The configuration example below configures the RIP
Examples
version 2.
DGS-8000 (config)# router rip
DGS-8000 (config-router)# version 2
Related
Command
Description
commands
ip rip receive
Define the version of RIP packets
version:
received on the interface.
ip rip send
Define the version of RIP packets sent
version
on the interface.
.
2-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
show ip rip
2.2
Show RIP information.
Showing Related Command
2.2.1
show ip rip
Use this command to show the RIP information.
show ip rip [vrf vrf-name]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Specify the vrf and display the basic
vrf vrf-name
information of the corresponding RIP
instance.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, routing
mode
process configuration mode.
It is used to show the three timers, routing distribution,
Usage
guidelines
routing re-distribution status, interface RIP version, RIP
interface and network range, metric, distance and so on of
the RIP routing protocol process quickly. If vrf is specified,
display the name of VRF and VRF-id.
In the configuration example below, the basic information
of the RIP routing protocol is displayed, such as the refresh
time, management distance, etc.
DGS-8000#show ip rip
Routing Protocol is "rip"
Sending updates every 10 seconds, next due in 4 seconds
Invalid after 20 seconds, flushed after 10 seconds
Examples
Outgoing update filter list for all interface is: not
set
Incoming update filter list for all interface is: not
set
Default redistribution metric is 2
Redistributing: connected
Default version control: send version 2, receive version
2
Interface
.
Send
Recv
2-40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
FastEthernet 0/1
2
2
FastEthernet 0/2
2
2
Routing for Networks:
192.168.26.0 255.255.255.0
192.168.64.0 255.255.255.0
Distance: (default is 50)
Follwoing
example
specifies
vrf
and
displays
the
corresponding basic information of RIP instance:
DGS-8000(config-router)# sh ip rip vrf 1
VRF 1
VRF-id:1
Routing Protocol is "rip"
Sending updates every 30 seconds, next due in 4 seconds
Invalid after 180 seconds, flushed after 120 seconds
Outgoing update filter list for all interface is: not
set
Incoming update filter list for all interface is: not
set
Default redistribution metric is 1
Redistributing:
Default version control: send version 1, receive any
version
Routing for Networks:
Distance: (default is 120)
2.2.2
show ip rip database
Use this command to show the summary address entries in the RIP routing
database.
show ip rip database [vrf vrf-name] [network-number {network-mask}]
Parameter
Parameter
description
vrf vrf-name
network-number
network-mask
Description
(Optional) Show the RIP routing
information of specified VRF.
(Optional) Network number
Subnet maskIt if the network number is
specified.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, routing
mode
process configuration mode.
Usage
Only when the related sub-routes are converged, the
.
2-41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
guidelines
Chapter 2 RIP
converged address entries appear in the RIP routing
database. When the last sub-route information in the
converged
address
entries
becomes
invalid,
the
converged address information will be deleted from the
database.
In the configuration example below, all converged address
entries in the RIP routing database are displayed.
DGS-8000# show ip rip database
192.168.1.0/24
auto-summary
192.168.1.0/30
directly connected, Loopback 3
192.168.1.8/30
directly connected, FastEthernet 0/1
192.168.121.0/24
auto-summary
192.168.121.0/24
redistributed
[1] via 192.168.2.22, FastEthernet 0/2
192.168.122.0/24
auto-summary
192.168.122.0/24
[1] via 192.168.4.22, Serial 0/1
00:28
permanent
In the configuration example below, the converged
address entries related with 192.168.121.0/24 in the RIP
Examples
routing database are displayed.
DGS-8000#
show
ip
rip
database
192.168.121.0
255.255.255.0
192.168.121.0/24
redistributed
[1] via 192.168.2.22, FastEthernet 0/1
In the configuration example below, show the statistical
information summary of various routes in the RIP routing
database.
DGS-8000# show ip rip database count
All
database
5
auto-summary
5
Valid
5
5
Invalid
0
0
connected
1
1
0
rip
4
4
0
.
2-42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
Related
commands
Description
Show
show ip rip
the
information
currently-running
routing
of
the
protocol
process.
2.2.3
show ip rip external
Use this command to show the information of the external routes redistributed
by the RIP protocol.
show ip rip external [bgp | connected | isis [process-name] |ospf <1-65535>|
static] [vrf vrf-name]
Parameter
Description
bgp |
Parameter
description
connected |
Show the external route redistributed by
isis | ospf |
the specified routing protocol (optional).
static
vrf vrf-name
<1-65535>
Show the RIP external route of the
specified VRF (optional)..
Number of the OSPF instace
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, routing
mode
process configuration mode.
The following is an example showing the direct routes
redistributed by the RIP process.
DGS-8000# show ip rip external connected
Protocol connected route:
[connected] 1.0.0.0/8 metric=0
nhop=0.0.0.0, if=2
Examples
[connected] 3.0.0.0/8 metric=0
nhop=0.0.0.0, if=16391
[connected] 4.4.0.0/16 metric=0
nhop=0.0.0.0, if=16388
[connected] 5.0.0.0/8 metric=0
nhop=0.0.0.0, if=16386
[connected] 192.168.195.0/24 metric=0
nhop=0.0.0.0, if=1
.
2-43
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
Description
Related
commands
2.2.4
Show the information of the currently
show ip rip
running routing protocol process.
show ip rip interface
Use this command to show the RIP interface information.
show ip rip interface [vrf vrf-name] [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
Parameter
vrf vrf-name
description
Description
Show the RIP interface of specified
VRF (optional).
[interface-type
Show the specified interface type and
interface-number]
interface number(optional).
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, routing
mode
process configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
This command is used to show the information about RIP
interfaces. If there is no RIP interface, no information is
shown.
The following is an example showing the RIP interface
information.
DGS-8000# show ip rip interface
FastEthernet 01 is down, line protocol is down
RIP is not enabled on this interface
FastEthernet 1/0 is up, line protocol is up
Routing Protocol: RIP
Examples
Receive RIPv2 packets only
Send RIPv2 packets only
Passive interface: Disabled
Split horizon: Enabled
V2 Broadcast: Disabled
Multicast register: Registed
Interface Summary Rip:
Not Configured
Authentication mode: Text
.
2-44
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Authentication key-chain: ripk1
Authentication text-password:DGS-8000
Default-information: only, metric 5
IP interface address:
192.168.64.100/24
If the BFD has been configured for RIP, the BFD
information is also shown:
DGS-8000# show ip rip interface
Serial 0/1 is up, line protocol is up
Routing Protocol: RIP
Receive RIPv1 and RIPv2 packets
Send RIPv1 packets only
Receive RIP packet: Enabled
Send RIP supernet routes: Enabled
Passive interface: Disabled
Split horizon: Enabled
V2 Broadcast: Disabled
Multicast registe: Registed
Interface Summary Rip:
Not Configured
IP interface address: 2.2.2.111/24
Command
Description
Related
commands
2.2.5
show ip rip
Show the information of the currently
running routing protocol process.
show ip rip peer
Use this command to show the RIP peer information. RIP records a summary
for the RIP routing information source learnt (source addresses of RIP route
update packets) for the convenience of user monitoring. This routing
information source is called RIP peer information.
show ip rip peer [ip-address] [vrf vrf-name]
Parameter
Parameter
vrf vrf-name
description
ip-address
Description
Show the RIP interface of specified
VRF (optional).
Show the specified RIP peer’s address
(optional).
Default
configuration
N/A.
.
2-45
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 2 RIP
Command
Privileged mode, global configuration mode, routing
mode
process configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to show the RIP peer information. If
guidelines
there is no RIP peer, no information will be displayed.
The following is an example showing the RIP peer
information.
DGS-8000# show ip rip peer
Peer 192.168.3.2:
Local address: 192.168.3.1
Examples
Input interface: GigabitEthernet 0/2
Peer version: RIPv1
Received bad packets: 3
Received bad routes: 0
BFD session state up
Command
Description
Related
commands
show ip rip
.
Show the information of the currently
running routing protocol process.
2-46
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3
3.1
3.1.1
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
RIPng Commands
Configuration Related Commands
default-metric(RIPng)
Use this command to define the RIPng default metric value when redistributing
other routing protocols. Use the no form of this command to restore the default
configuration.
default-metric metric
no default-metric
Parameter
Set the default metric value. The
Parameter
description
Description
valid range is 1-16. The routing is
metric
unreachable if the metric value is
larger than or equal to 16.
Default
Settings
1
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command shall be co-used with the redistribute
command. When redistributing the route from one route
process to RIPng, due to the incompatibility of metric
calculation mechanisms of different routing protocols, it
Usage
fails to translate the routing metric values. To this end, the
guidelines
RIPng metric value shall be defined when translating the
metric values. If there is no defined metric value, use the
default-metric command to define one; and the defined
metric value will overwrite the value of the default-metric
command. By default, the default-metric value is 1.
.
3-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
The following example shows how to set the RIPng metric
value as 3 when redistributing OSPF process 100:
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# default-metric 3
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute ospf 100
Command
Related
commands
Description
Redistribute the route from one
redistribute
route domain to another route
domain.
3.1.2
distance(IPv6)
Use this command to set the RIPng route management distance. Use the no
form of this command to restore it to the default value.
distance distance
no distance
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Set the RIPng route management
distance
distance. The valid range is
1-254.
Default
Settings
120.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to set the RIPng route
guidelines
management distance.
The following example shows how to set the RIPng route
management distance as 160:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance 160
3.1.3
distribute-list
Use this command to filter the in/out update route in the prefix-list. Use the no
form of this command to disable this function.
.
3-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
distribute-list prefix-list prefix-list-name {in | out} [interface-type
interface-name]
no distribute-list prefix-list prefix-list-name {in | out} [interface-type
interface-name]
Parameter
Description
prefix-list
Set the prefix list name and use
prefix-list-name
the prefix list to filter the route.
Parameter
description
Specify to filter the in or out
in | out
update route in the distribute-list.
interface-type
(Optional) Apply the distribute-list
interface-name
to the specified interface.
Default
Settings
By default, no distribute-list is defined.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command is used to configure the route distribution
Usage
guidelines
control list to filter all update routes for the purpose of
refusing to receive or send the specified routes. If the
interface is not specified, the update routes on all
interfaces are filtered.
Examples
The following example shows how to filter the received
update route on the interface eth0 (only those update
routes within the prefix-list allowpre prefix list range can
be received)
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)#
distribute-list
prefix-list
allowpre in eth0
3.1.4
Related
Command
Description
commands
redistribute
Set the route redistribution.
ipv6 rip default-information
Use this command to generate a default IPv6 path to the RIPng. Use the no
form of this command to delete the default path.
ipv6 rip default-information{only|originate}[metric metric-value]
.
3-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
no ipv6 rip default-information
Parameter
Description
Advertise the ipv6 default route
only
only.
Not
Parameter
description
originate
only
advertise
the
ipv6
default route, but also other
routes.
Set the metric value for the
metric metric-value
default route. The valid range is
1-15.
Default
By defaut, no default route is configured.
Settings
The default metric value is 1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
With this command configured on an interface, the
interface advertises an IPv6 default route and the route
itself is not to join the device route forwarding table and
Usage
the RIPng route database.
guidelines
To avoid the route loop, once this command has been
configured on the interface, RIPng refuses to receive the
default route update message advertised from the
neighbor.
Examples
The following example shows how to create a default route
to the RIPng routing process on the interface ethernet0/0
and enable this interface to advertise the default route
only:
DGS-8000(config)# interface ethernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 rip default-information only
Command
Description
Show
Related
show ipv6 rip
commands
the
parameters
RIPng
and
process
statistical
information.
show ipv6 rip
database
.
Show the RIPng route.
3-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.5
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
ipv6 rip enable
Use this command to enable the RIPng on the interface. Use the no form of this
command to disable this function.
ipv6 rip enable
no ipv6 rip enable
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Interface configuration mode.
This command is used to set the RIPng interface. Before
the use of this command, if the RIPng is not enabled, use
this command to enable the RIPng automatically.
The following example shows how to enable the RIPng on
the interface 0/0:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface ethernet 0/0
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 rip enable
3.1.6
ipv6 rip metric-offset
Use this command to set the metric value on the interface. Use the no form of
this command to cancel the configurations.
ipv6 rip metric-offset value
no ipv6 rip metric-offset
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
Set the metric value on the
value
interface. The valid range is 1-16.
Default
Settings
1
.
3-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Before the route is added to the routing list, the interface
Usage
metric value shall be upon the route metric. To this end,
guidelines
the interface metric value influences the route usage.
The following example shows how to set the metric value
on the interface ethernet 0/1 as 5:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface ethernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 rip metric-offset 5
3.1.7
ipv6 router rip
Use this command to create the RIPng routing process and enter the routing
process configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete the
RIPng routing process.
ipv6 router rip
no ipv6 router rip
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
-
-
Default
Settings
No RIPng routing process is running.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
Use this command to create the RIPng routing process
guidelines
and enter the routing process configuration mode.
Examples
The following example shows how to create the RIPng
routing process and enter the routing process configuration
mode:
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
Related
commands
Command
ipv6 rip enable
.
Description
Enable the RIPng on the specified
interface.
3-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
3.1.8
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
passive-interface(RIPng)
Use this command to disable the function of the update packet sending on an
interface. Use the no form of this command to enable this function.
passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-num}
no passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-num}
Parameter
Parameter
Description
This parameter sets all interfaces
default
in the passive mode.
description
interface-type
Set the interface type and the
interface-num
interface number.
Default
Settings
No interface is configured in the passive mode.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The passive-interface default command is used to set all
Usage
interfaces in the passive mode. The no passive-interface
guidelines
intface-type interface-num command is used to set some
interface in the non-passive mode.
The following example shows how to set all interfaces in
the passive mode and set the interface ethernet 0/0 in the
non-passive mode:
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# passive-interface default
DGS-8000(config-router)# no passive-interface ethernet
0/0
3.1.9
redistribute
Use this command to redistribute the path in other routing domain to the RIPng.
Use the no form of this command to cancel the redistribution configurations.
redistribute {bgp | connected | isis [area-tag] | ospf process-id | static}
[metric metric-value | route-map route-map-name]
no redistribute {bgp | connected | isis [area-tag] | ospf process-id | static}
[metric metric-value | route-map route-map-name]
.
3-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
Parameter
Description
bgp
BGP redistribution.
connected
Connected route redistribution.
ISIS
isis [area-tag]
redistribution;
redistribute
the specified ISIS instance using
the area-tag.
OSPF redistribution; redistribute
Parameter
description
ospf process-id
the
specified
OSPF
instance
using the process-id with the
range of 1-65535..
static
Static route redistribution.
(Optional) set the metric value of
metric metric-value
path redistributed to the RIPng
domain.
route-map
(Optional) set the redistribution
route-map-name
path filtering.
By default, the path of other routing protocols are not
redistributed.
Default
Settings
If the default-metric command is not configured, the
default metric value is 1;
By default, the route-map is not configured;
By default, all sub-type routes in the specified routing
process are redistributed.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command is used to redistribute the external routing
information to the RIPng.
It is unnecessary to transform the metric of one routing
Usage
protocol into another routing protocol in the process of the
guidelines
route redistribution, for the metric calculation methods of
the different routing protocols are different. The RIP and
OSPF metric calculations are incomparable for the reason
that the RIP metric calculation is hop-based while the
.
3-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
OSPF one is bandwidth-based.
The instance, from where the routing information is
redistributed to the RIPng, must be specified in the
process
of
configuring
the
multi-instance
protocol
redistribution.
The following example shows how to redistribute the static
route, use the routemap mymap to filter and set the metric
value as 8:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute static route-map
mymap metric 8
Command
Description
Define the default RIPng metric
Related
default-metric
commands
value when redistributing other
routing protocols.
Distribute and filter the RIPng
distribute-list
3.1.10
routing update packets.
split-horizon(RIPng)
Use the split-horizon command to enable the RIPng split-horizon function in
the routing process configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to
disable this function. Use the split-horizon poisoned-reverse command to
enable the RIPng poisoned reverse horizontal split function in the routing
process configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to disable this
function.
split-horizon [ poisoned-reverse ]
no split-horizon [ poisoned-reverse ]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
poisoned-reverse
(Optional)
Enable
the
poisoned-reverse horizontal split.
Default
Settings
Enabled
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
3-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
In the process of packet updating, split-horizon function
prevents some routing information from being advertised
through the interface learning those routing information.
The poisoned reverse horizontal split function advertises
Usage
guidelines
some routing information to the interface learning those
routing information, and the metric value is set as 16. The
RIPng routing protocol belongs to the distance vector
routing protocol, so the horizontal split shall be noticed in
the actual application. You can use the show ipv6 riip
command to determine whether the RIPng split-horizon
function is enabled or not.
The following example shows how to disable the RIPng
horizontal split:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# no split-horizon
3.1.11
timers(ipv6)
Use this command to adjust the RIPng timer. Use the no form of this command
to restore it to the default value.
timers update invalid flush
no timers
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Set the routing update time, in
seconds. The update parameter
defines the period of sending the
routing update packets by the
update
device. The invalid and flush
parameter reset once the update
packets are received.
.
3-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
Set the routing invalid time, in
seconds, starting from receiving
the last valid update packet. The
invalid parameter defines the
invalid time for the un-updated
routing in the routing list. The
routing invalid time shall be three
invalid
times larger than the routing
update time. The routing will be
invalid if no update packets are
received within the routing invalid
time, and it will reset if the update
packets are received within the
invalid time.
Set the routing flush time, in
seconds, starting from RIPng
entering to invalid state. The
flush
invalid routing will be removed
from the routing list if the flush
time expires.
Default
The default update time is 30s; the default invalid time is
Settings
180s; and the default flush time is 120s.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Adjusting the above time may speed up the RIPng
convergence time and the troubleshooting time. The
RIPng time must be consistent for the devices connecting
to the same network. You are not recommended to adjust
the RIP time, except for the specific requirement.
Use the show ipv6 rip command to view the current
Usage
RIPng time parameter setting.
guidelines
 Caution
In the low-speed link, with the short time configured, large
amount of the update packets consumes a lot of
bandwidth. Generally, the short time can be configured in
the Ethernet or 2Mbps-higher line to shorten the
convergence time of the network routing.
.
3-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
The following example shows how to send the RIP update
packets every 10 seconds. The routing will be invalid if no
Examples
update packets are received within 30 seconds, and the
routing will be removed after being invalid for 90 seconds.
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers 10 30 90
Command
Description
Show the parameters and the
Related
statistical information of the RIPng
show ipv6 rip
commands
process.
show ipv6 rip
database
3.2
3.2.1
Show the RIPng route.
Showing Related Commands
show ipv6 rip
Use this command to show the parameters and each statistical information of
the RIPng routing protocol process.
show ipv6 rip
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 rip
Examples
Routing Protocol is "RIPng"
Sending updates every 10 seconds with +/-50%, next due
.
3-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
in 8 seconds
Timeout after 30 seconds, garbage collect after 60
seconds
Outgoing update filter list for all interface is:
distribute-list prefix aa out
Incoming update filter list for all interface is: not
set
Default redistribution metric is 1
Default distance is 120
Redistribution:
Redistributing protocol connected route-map rm
Redistributing protocol static
Redistributing protocol ospf 1
Default version control:
send version 1, receive
version 1
Interface
Send
VLAN 1
1
Loopback 1
1
Recv
1
1
Routing Information Sources:
None
Related
Command
Description
show ipv6 rip
Show the parameters and each
commands
statistical information of the
RIPng process.
3.2.2
show ipv6 rip database
Use this command to view the item information in the RIPng routing list.
show ipv6 rip database
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
-
-
Default
Settings
N/A.
.
3-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 3 RIPng Commands
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
Use this command to view the item information in the
guidelines
RIPng routing list.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 rip database
Codes: R - RIPng,C - Connected,S - Static,O - OSPF,B - BGP
sub-codes:n
-
normal,s
-
static,d
-
default,r
-
redistribute,
i - interface, a/s - aggregated/suppressed
S(r)
2001:db8:1::/64, metric 1, tag 0
Loopback 0/::
S(r)
2001:db8:2::/64, metric 1, tag 0
Loopback 0/::
Examples
C(r)
2001:db8:3::/64, metric 1, tag 0
VLAN 1/::
S(r)
2001:db8:4::/64, metric 1, tag 0
Null 0/::
C(i)
2001:db8:5::/64, metric 1, tag 0
Loopback 1/::
S(r)
2001:db8:6::/64, metric 1, tag 0
Null 0/::
Related
Command
Description
show ipv6 rip
Show the parameters and each
commands
statistical information of the
RIPng process.
.
3-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4
4.1
4.1.1
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
OSPFv2 Commands
Configuration Related Commands
area
Use this command to configure the specified OSPF area. The no form of this
command removes the specified OSPF area.
area area-id
no area area-id
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Number
area-id
of
the
area
where
authentication is enabled, a decimal
integer or an IP address
Default
configuration
No OSPF area is configured by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Use the no form of this command to remove the specified
OSPF area and its configuration, including the removal of
the
area-based
configuration
commands
of
area
authentication、area default-cost、area filter-list、area
nssa, ect.
Usage
guidelines
Users can not remove the OSPF configuration under the
following conditions:
1. It fails to remove all configurations for the backbone
area with the virtual link configured. Now the virtual link
configuration must be removed before removing the
backbone area.
2. The corresponding network area command exists in
.
4-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
any area. Now all commands added to the area must
be removed before removing this OSPF area.
The following example removes the configuration of the
Examples
OSPF area 2:
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 2
DGS-8000(config-router)# no area 2
Related
commands
4.1.2
Command
Description
Define the OSPF on the interface
network area
and the OSPF area.
area authentication
Use this command to enable authentication in the OSPF area in the routing
process configuration mode. The no form of this command disables
authentication in the OSPF area.
area area-id authentication [message-digest]
no area area-id authentication
Parameter
Description
Number
Parameter
area-id
of
the
area
where
authentication is enabled, a decimal
description
integer or an IP address
message-digest
(optional) MD5 (message digest 5)
authentication mode
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
There
are
three
authentication
types:
1)
0,
no
authentication; when this command is not executed to
Usage
guidelines
enable OSPF authentication, the authentication type in the
OSPF packet is 0; 2) 1, plaintext authentication mode;
when this command is configured, the message-digest
option is not used; 3) 2, MD5 authentication mode; when
this command is configured, the message-digest option is
.
4-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
used.
All devices in the same OSPF area must have the same
authentication type. If the authentication is enabled,
authentication password must be configured on the
interfaces
connecting
authentication-key
neighbors.
command
The
in
ip
the
ospf
interface
configuration mode can be used to configure the plaintext
authentication
password.
message-digest-key
command
The
in
ip
the
ospf
interface
configuration mode can be used to configure the MD5
authentication password.
In the following configuration example, MD5 authentication
is used in the OSPF routing process area 0 (backbone
area), with authentication password "backbone".
DGS-8000(config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip address
192.168.12.1
255.255.255.0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf
message-digest-key 1 md5 backbone
Configure OSPF routing protocol.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
0.0.0.255 area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 0 authentication
message-digest
4.1.3
Command
Description
ip ospf
Define the OSPF plaintext
Related
authentication-key
authentication password.
commands
ip ospf
Define the OSPF MD5
message-digest-key
authentication password.
area virtual-link
Define a virtual link.
area default-cost
Use this command to define the cost of the default aggregate route that will be
advertised to the stub area or NSSA area (OSPF metric) in the routing process
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the
default value.
area area-id default-cost cost
no area area-id default-cost
.
4-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Description
area-id
Number of the stub area or NSSA area
Cost of the default aggregate route that
description
will be advertised to the stub area or
cost
NSSA area
Default
The default value is 1.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command can be configured only on the area border
device (ABR) and the ABR must be connected with a stub
area or a NSSA area. The so-called ABR means that the
device must be connected to at least one area in addition
to connecting the backbone area.
Usage
There are three commands to configure an OSPF area as
guidelines
a stub or NSSA area : area stub, area nssa and area
default-cost. All the devices connecting to the stub area
must be configured with the area stub command, those
connecting to the NSSA area must be configured with the
area nssa command. However, the area default-cost
command can be executed only on the ABR.
Set the cost of the default aggregate route to 50.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.0.0 0.0.255.255
Examples
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)#network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 stub
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 default-cost 50
Related
commands
4.1.4
Command
Description
area stub
Set an OSPF area as a stub area.
area nssa
Set an OSPF area as a NSSA area.
area filter-list
Use this command to configure the inter-area route filtering on the ABR.
.
4-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
area area-id filter-list {access acl-name| prefix prefix-name} {in | out}
no area area-id filter-list {access acl-name | prefix prefix-name} {in | out}
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
area-id
Area ID
acl-name
ACL name
prefix-name
Prefix-list name
access | prefix
Associated prefix list or ACL
Apply the ACL rule to the routes
in | out
Default
incoming/outgoing the area.
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Usage
This command can be configured only on an Area Board
guidelines
Device (ABR) to configure inter area route filtering
Set area 1 to learn only the inter-area routes of
172.22.0.0/8.
Examples
DGS-8000 # configure terminal
DGS-8000(config)# access-list 1 permit 172.22.0.0/8
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 filter-list access 1 in
4.1.5
area nssa
Use this command to set an OSPF area as an NSSA area in the routing process
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the NSSA
area or the configuration of the NSSA area.
area area-id nssa [ no-redistribution] [default-information-originate [metric
<0-16777214> | metric-type <1-2>]] [no-summary]
no area area-id nssa [ no-redistribution] [default-information-originate]
[no-summary]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
area-id
NSSA area number
.
4-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
(Optional) Import the routing
information to common areas other
than the NSSA area through the
no-redistribution
redistribute command when the
device is an ABR of the NSSA area.
(Optional) Generate and import the
default-information
default type 7 LSA to the NSSA
originate
area. This option takes effect only
on the NSSA ABR or ASBR.
(Optional) Prevent the ABR of the
NSSA area from sending types 3
no-summary
and 4 LSAs into the NSSA area.
Default
No NSSA area is defined by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The parameter default-information-originate is used to
generate the default Type-7 LSA. This option is slightly
different on the NSSA ABR and ASBR. On the NSSA ABR,
the default Type-7 LSA will be generated, no matter
whether there are default routes in the routing table. On the
ASBR (which is not an ABR at the same time), the default
Type-7 LSA is generated only when the default route exists
in the routing table.
The parameter no-redistribution prevents the OSPF from
Usage
guidelines
advertising
the
external
routes
imported
with
the
redistribute command to the NSSA area on the ASBR.
This option is generally used when the NSSA device is
both an ASBR and an ABR.
To further reduce the number of LSAs sent to the NSSA
area, you can configure the no-summary parameter on
the ABR to prevent it from advertising summary LSAs
(Type-3 LSA) to the NSSA area.
In addition, the area default-cost command is used on the
ABR of the NSSA area to configure the cost of the default
route sent to the NSSA area. By default, the cost of the
default route sent to the NSSA area is 1.
Examples
Sets area 1 as the stub area on the devices in that area.
DGS-8000(config)#router ospf 1
.
4-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-router)#network 172.16.0.0 0.0.255.255
area 0
DGS-8000 (config-router)#network 192.168.12.0 0.0.0.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 nssa
Command
Related
commands
Define the cost (OSPF metric) of the
area
default-cost
4.1.6
Description
default aggregate route advertised to
the NSSA area.
area range
Use this command to configure the route aggregation between OSPF areas in
the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this command is used
to delete the configured route aggregation. The no form with the cost
parameter can restore the default metric of the aggregated route, but not
remove route aggregation.
area area-id range ip-address net-mask [advertise | not-advertise] [cost cost]
no area area-id range ip-address net-mask [cost cost]
Parameter
Description
ID of the area the aggreate route is
area-id
injected into, a decimal integer or an IP
address.
Parameter
description
ip address
Network segment whose routes are to
be aggregated
advertise |
Whether to advertise the aggreagate
not-advertise
range, advertise by default.
cost cost
Set the metric of the aggregated route.
No aggregate route is configured between areas by
default.
The default metric of aggregated route depends on
Default
whether the device is compatible with RFC1583 or not. If
so, the default metric is the smallest cost of the
aggregated route. If not, the default metric is the largest
cost of the aggregated route.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
This command can be executed only on the ABR to
aggregate multiple routes of an area to a route and then
advertise it to other areas. Route combination occurs only
on the border of an area. The devices within an area see
the specific routing information, but the devices outside the
area only one aggregate route. The advertise and
Usage
not-advertise options can be used to set whether to
guidelines
advertise the aggregate route, which functions as the
filtering and masking purpose. The aggregate route is
advertised by default.
You can define route aggregate in multiple areas to
simplify the routes in the whole OSPF routing area. This
improves the network forwarding performance, especially
in large networks.
Aggregate the routes of area 1 into a route 172.16.16.0/20.
DGS-8000(config)#router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)#network 172.16.0.0 0.0.15.255
Examples
area 0
DGS-8000((config-router)#network 172.16.17.0 0.0.15.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)#area 1 range 172.16.16.0
255.255.240.0
4.1.7
area stub
Use this command to set an OSPF area as a stub area or full stub area in the
routing process configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to
delete the configuration of stub area or full stub area.
area area-id stub [no-summary]
no area area-id stub [no-summary]
Parameter
Description
area-id
STUB area number
Parameter
(Optional)
description
advertising network summary link to
no-summary
Prevent
the
ABR
from
the stub area. Here the stub area is
called the full stub area. Only the ABR
needs this parameter.
Default
No stub area is defined by default.
.
4-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
All devices in the OSPF stub area must be configured with
the area stub command. The ABR only sends three types
of link state advertisement (LSA) to the stub area: 1) type
1, device LSA; 2) type 2, network LSA; 3) type 3, network
summary LSA. From the aspect of the routing table, the
devices in the stub area can learn only the routes inside
the OSPF routing domain, including the internal default
routes generated by the ABR. The devices in the stub area
cannot learn the routes outside the OSPF routing domain.
Usage
To configure a full stub area, execute area stub command
guidelines
with the no-summary keyword on the ABR. The devices in
the full stub area can learn only the routes in the local area
and the internal default routes generated by the ABR.
There are two commands to configure an OSPF area as a
stub area: area stub and area default-cost. All devices
connected to the stub area must be configured with the
area stub command, but the area default-cost command
can be executed only on the ABR. The area default-cost
command defines the initial cost (i.e. metric) of the internal
default route.
Set area 1 as the stub area on the devices in that area.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.0.0 0.0.255.255
Examples
area 0
DGS-8000 (config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
0.0.0.255 area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 stub
Command
Related
commands
Define the cost (OSPF metric value) of
area
default-cost
4.1.8
Description
the default aggregate route advertised
to the stub area.
area virtual-link
To define the OSPF virtual link, execute the area virtual-link command in the
routing process configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to
delete the virtual link.
.
4-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
area area-id virtual-link router-id [authentication [message-digest |null]]
[dead-interval seconds] [hello-interval seconds] [retransmit-interval seconds]
[transmit-delay seconds] [[authentication-key key] | [message-digest-key
key-id md5 key]]
no area area-id virtual-link router-id
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
OSPF transition area number, a
area-id
decimal integer or an IP address.
Identifier of the router neighboring
to the virtual link. The router
router-id
identifier can be viewed through
the show ip ospf command.
(Optional)
dead-interval
seconds
Define
the
time
to
declare neighbor loss (in second),
40
seconds
by
default.
This
parameter must be consistent with
the neighbor.
(Optional)Define the interval at
which the HELLO message is sent
hello-interval
by the OSPF to the virtual link (in
seconds
seconds), 10 s by default This
parameter must be consistent with
the neighbor.
(Optional) OSPF LSA resend time
retransmit-interval
seconds
(in second), 5 seconds by default.
The setting of the time must
consider the trip time of messages
on the link.
(Optional) OSPF LSA send delay
(in second), 1 second by default.
transmit-delay
This value adds the LSA live
seconds
period. When the LSA live period
reaches a certain value, the LSA
will be refreshed.
(Optional)
Define
the
OSPF
plaintext authentication key. The
plaintext
authentication
key
authentication-key
between neighbors must be the
key
same.
The
password-encryption
service
command
enables the key to be displayed in
encrypted manner.
.
4-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
(Optional) Define the OSPF MD5
authentication key identifier and
key. The MD5 authentication key
message-digest-key
identifier
key-id md5 key
neighbors must be the same. The
service
and
key
between
password-encryption
command enables the key to be
displayed in encrypted manner.
authentication
message-digest
Set the authentication type to
plaintext.
Set the authentication type to MD5.
Set the authentication type to no
null
authentication
dead-interval: 40s
hello-interval: 10s
Default
retransmit-interval: 5s
transmit-delay: 1s
authentication: no authentication
N/A values for the other parameters
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode
In the OSPF routing domain, all areas must be connected
with the backbone area. If an area disconnects from the
backbone area, it requires to configure virtual links to
connect the backbone area. Otherwise, the network
communication will become abnormal. The virtual link
requires the connection between two ABRs. The area that
belongs to both ABRs is called the transition area. A stub
Usage
guidelines
Area or NSSA area cannot act as a transition area. Virtual
links can also be used to connect other non-backbone
areas.
The router-id is the identifier of OSPF neighbor router. If
you are unsure of the router-id, check it with the show ip
ospf neighbor command. You may configure the
Loopback address as the router identifier.
The area virtual-link command defines only the
authentication key for virtual link. To enable the OSPF
message authentication for the areas connected with the
.
4-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
virtual link, execute the area authentication command in
the routing process configuration mode.
Set area 1 as the transition area to establish virtual link
with neighbor 2.2.2.2.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.0.0 0.0.15.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.17.0 0.0.15.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 virtual-link 192.1.1.1
Examples
Set area 1 as the transition area to establish virtual link
with neighbor 1.1.1.1. This virtual link connects area 10
and backbone area, and works with the OSPF message
authentication of MD5.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.17.0 0.0.15.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.252.0 0.0.0.255
area 10
DGS-8000(config-router)#
area
0
authentication
message-digest
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 virtual-link 1.1.1.1
message-digest-key 1 md5 hello
Command
Related
commands
Enable the OSPF area message
area
authentication
show ip ospf
4.1.9
Description
authentication and define the
authentication mode.
Show the OSPF process information,
including the router identifier.
auto-cost
Use this command to enable the automatic cost calculating function and set the
reference bandwidth. According to the reference bandwidth, you can configure
the cost of the specified interface automatically.
auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw]
no auto-cost [reference-bandwidth]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Reference bandwidth, in the range of 1
ref-bw
to 4294967 Mbps.
.
4-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
100Mbps by default.
Default
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This
command
sets
the
reference
bandwidth
for
automatically generating interface cost. No parameter with
it enables the automatic cost function with a default for the
reference bandwidth. A parameter with it enables the
Usage
guidelines
automatic cost calculation function with a specified
reference bandwidth. Note that the "default auto-cost" and
the "no auto-cost" are different: the former restores it to the
default and enables the automatic cost function while the
latter disables the automatic cost calculation function.
If you use ip ospf cost command to set the cost of the
interface, the cost will replace the auto-cost.
The configuration example below configures the reference
bandwidth as 10M.
DGS-8000(config)# router
Examples
ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# auto-cost reference-bandwidth
10
Related
commands
4.1.10
Command
show ip ospf
Description
Show the OSPF global configuration
information
bdf all-interfaces(OSPF)
Use this command to enable the BDF on all OSPF interfaces. The no form of
this command restores it to the default setting.
bdf all-interfaces
no bdf all-interfaces
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
The OSPF protocol dynamically discovers the neighbors
through the Hello packets. With the BFD function enabled,
one BFD session will be established for the neighbors that
match the FULL rules and the status of the neighbors will
be detected through the BFD mechanism. Once the BFD
Usage
neighbor fails, the OSPF will perform the network
guidelines
convergence immediately.
You can also use the interface configuration mode
command ip ospf bfd [disable] to enable or disable the
BFD function on the specified interface, which takes
precedence over the command bfd all-interfaces in the
routing process configuration mode.
Examples
N/A
Command
router
ospf
Related
process-id
commands
vrf-name]
ip
Description
ospf
[vrf
enter
into
the
routing
process
configuration mode.
bfd
[ disable ]
4.1.11
Create the OSPF routing process and
Enable or disable the BFD on the
specified OSPF interfaces.
clear ip ospf process
Use this command to clear and restart the OSPF instance.
clear ip ospf (process-id) process
Parameter
OSPF instance ID
Parameter
description
Description
process-id
When no process ID is specified, the
command clears and restarts all the
running OSPF instances.
Default
Use the rule recommended in RFC 1583 by default.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
.
4-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Examples
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
The command below clears and restarts OSPF instance 1.
DGS-8000#clear ip ospf 1 process
4.1.12
compatible rfc1583
When the routing table includes several routes to the same destination out of
the AS, you must determine the best route. Use this command to decide which
rule will be taken in RFC 1583 or RFC 2328.
commpatible rfc1583
no commpatible rfc1583
Default
Use the rule recommended in RFC 1583 by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The configuration example below determines the best
Examples
route with the rfc 2328 rule.
DGS-8000(config)# router
ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# no commpatible rfc1583
Related
commands
4.1.13
Command
show ip ospf
Description
Show the OSPF global configuration
information
default-information originate (OSPF)
Use this command to generate a default route to the OSPF routing domain in
the routing process mode. The no form of this command disables the default
route.
default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [metric-type type]
[route-map map-name]
no default-information originate [always] [metric metric]
[metric-type type] [route-map map-name]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
(Optional) Generate the default route
unconditionally, no matter whether the
Always
default route exists locally or not.
.
4-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
metric metric
(Optional) Initial metric value of the
default route, 1 by default
(Optional) Type of the default route.
There are two type of OSPF external
routes: type 1, different metrics seen on
metric-type
different devices; type 2, the same
type
metric seens on different devices.
External route of type 1 is more
trustworthy than that of type 2. By
default, it is type 2.
Default
route-map
Associated route map name, no
map-name
associated route map by default
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
When the redistribute or default-information command
is executed, the OSPF-enabled device automatically turns
into the autonomous system border device (ASBR). But
the ASBR cannot generate default route automatically or
advertise it to all the devices in the OSPF routing domain.
The ASBR generates default routes by default. It is
required
to
configure
with
the default-information
originate routing process configuration command.
If the always parameter is used, the OSPF routing process
advertises an external default route to the neighbors, no
matter whether the default route exists or not. However,
Usage
the local device does not show the default route. To make
guidelines
sure whether the default route is generated, execute show
ip ospf database to observe the OSPF link state
database. The external link identified with 0.0.0.0 indicates
the default route. The execution of the show ip route
command on the OSPF neighbor will display the default
route.
The metric of the external default route can be defined only
with the default-information originate command instead
of the default-metric command.
There are two types of OSPF external routes: type 1
external routes have changeable routing metrics, while
type 2 external routes have constant routing metrics. For
.
4-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
two parallel routes with the same route metric to the same
destination network, type 1 takes precedence over type 2.
As a result, the show ip route command shows only the
type 1 route.
The devices in the stub area cannot generate external
default routes.
The configuration example below generates an external
default route to the OSPF routing domain, with type as 1
and metric as 50.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)#router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)#network 172.16.24.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)#default-information originate
always metric 50 metric-type 1
Command
Related
show ip ospf
commands
database
show ip route
4.1.14
Description
Show OSPF link state database.
Show the IP routing table.
default-metric
Use this command to configure the default metric of OSPF redistributed route in
the routing process mode. The no format of this command is used to restore it
to the default.
default-metric metric
N/A-metric
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
metric
Metric of the OSPF redistributed route
Default
The default value is 20.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The default-metric command must work with the
Usage
redistribute command in the routing process configuration
guidelines
mode to modify the initial metric of all redistributed routes.
The configuration result of the default-metric command
.
4-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
does not take effect for the external routes to the OSPF
routing domain via default-information originate.
The configuration example below configures the initial
metric of the OSPF redistributed route as 50.
Switch(config)# router rip
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
Switch(config-router)# version 2
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# exit
DGS-8000(config)# router
ospf
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.10.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
Switch(config-router)# default-metric 50
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute rip subnets
Command
Related
redistribute
commands
show ip ospf
4.1.15
Description
Redistribute the routes of other routing
processes.
Show the OSPF global configuration
information.
discard-route
Use this command to enable adding the discard route into the kernel routing
table. The no format of this command is used to disable this function .
discard-route { internal | external }
no discard-route { internal | external }
Parameter
Parameter
Description
Enable
internal
adding
the
discard
route
generated by area range command
description
Enable
external
adding
the
discard
route
generated by the summary-address
command.
Default
Enabled
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Usage
After the routing converging, the range may be beyond the
guidelines
actual network range of the routing table. Sending the data
.
4-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
to the nonexistent network within the converging range
may cause the routing loop or increase the processing
load of the routing device. To prevent it, a discard route is
required adding to the routing table on the ABR or the
ASBR. This route is generated automatically and will not
be transmitted.
The configuration example below disables adding the
Examples
discard routes generated by the area range command.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# no discard-route internal
Command
Related
Description
Configure the route aggregation
area range
between OSPF areas
commands
summary-address
4.1.16
Configure the converge route out of
the OSPF routing domain
distance ospf
Use this command to set the management distance of different types of routes.
distance {distance | ospf intra-area distance | inter-area distance | external
distance }
no distance ospf
Parameter
Set the route management distance,
distance
110 default, in the range of 1 to 255.
intra-area
Parameter
distance
inter-area
distance
inner-area route, 110 default, in the
Set the management distance of the
inter-area route, 110 default, in the
range of 1 to 255.
Set the management distance of the
external
external route, 110 default, in the range
distance
Command
Set the management distance of the
range of 1 to 255.
description
Default
Description
of 1 to 255.
The default value is 110.
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
mode
Usage
This command is used to specify different management
guidelines
distances for different types of OSPF routes.
In the configuration below, the OSPF external route
management distance is set as 160.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance ospf external 160
4.1.17
distribute-list in
Use this command to configure LSA filtering.
distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name [gateway
prefix-list-name]
|
route-map
route-map-name
}
in
[interface-type
interface-number]
no distribute-list {[access-list-number | name] | prefix prefix-list-name
[gateway prefix-list-name] | route-map route-map-name } in [interface-type
interface-number]
Parameter
access-list-number
| name
gateway
Parameter
description
prefix-list-name
prefix
prefix-list-name
route-map
route-map-name
Default
Description
Use the acl filtering rule.
Use the gateway filtering rule.
Use the prefix-list filtering rule.
Use the route-map filtering rule.
interface-type
Configure the LSA route filtering on
interface-number
the interface.
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This configuration filters the received LSAs, and only those
Usage
matching the filtering conditions are involved in the SPF
guidelines
calculation to generate the corresponding routes. It does
not affect the link status database or the routing table of
.
4-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
the neighbors. It only affects the routing entries calculated
by the local OSPF. This function is generally used for the
ABR or ASBR, where it can control the routes leaving the
area.
The following route-map rules will be supported if the
route-map parameter is configured:
match interface
match ip address
match ip address prefix-list
match ip next-hop
match ip next-hop prefix-list
match metric
match route-type
match tag
DGS-8000(config)#
access-list
3
permit
172.16.0.0
0.0.127.255
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 25
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute rip metric 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# distribute-list 3 in ethernet
0/1
4.1.18
distribute-list out
Use this command to configure filtering re-distribution routes, similar to the
redistribute command.
distribute-list {listname | gateway plist-name | prefix plist-name} out [bgp |
connected | isis area-tag |ospf process-id | rip | static]
no distribute-list {listname | gateway plist-name | prefix plist-name } out [bgp
| connected | isis area-tag |ospf process-id| rip | static]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
listname
Use the acl filtering rule.
Gateway
plist-name
prefix
plist-name
.
Use the gateway filtering rule.
Use the prefix-list filtering rule.
4-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
[bgp |
connected |
isis area-tag |
Source of the routes to be filtered.
ospf process-id
|rip | static]
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The distribute-list out and the redistribute route-map
commands are similar. Both filter the routes that other
Usage
guidelines
protocols redistribute to the OSPF. However, it does not
perform route redistribution by itself. Instead, it works with
the redistribute command in most cases. The ACL
filtering rule and the prefix-list filtering rule cannot coexist
in the configuration.
The example below filters the redistributed static routes.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config)# redistribute static subnets
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# distribute-list 22 out static
DGS-8000(config-router)# distribute-list prefix jjj out
static
% There already has filter configured. Please
re-configure.
4.1.19
enable mib-binding
Use this command to bind the MIB with the specified OSPFv2 process. Use the
no form of this command to restore it to the default value.
enable mib-binding
no enable mib-binding
Parameter
description
Default
N/A.
By default, the MIB is binded with the OSPFv2 process in
the smallest number.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
OSPFv2 MIB has no OSPFv2 process information, so the
user operates a sole OSPFv2 process by SNMP. By
default, OSPFv2 MIB is binded with the OSPFv2 process
Usage
in the smallest number. The user operations take effect for
guidelines
this process.
If the user wants to operate the specified OSPF process by
SNMP, use this command to bind the MIB with this
process.
The example below operates the OSPFv2 process 100 by
Examples
SNMP:
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# enable mib-binding
Command
Related
show ip ospf
commands
enable traps
4.1.20
Description
Show the OSPF global configuration
information.
Configure the OSPF TRAP function.
enable traps
OSPFv2 process supports 16 kinds of TRAP messages, which are classified
into 4 categories. Use this command to enable to send the specified TRAP
messages. Use the no form of this command to disable to send the specified
TRAP messages.
enable traps [error [ifauthfailure | ifconfigerror | ifrxbadpacket |
virtifauthfailure
|
virtifconfigerror
|
virtifrxbadpacket]
|
lsa
[lsdbapproachoverflow | lsdboverflow | maxagelsa | originatelsa] |
retransmit [iftxretransmit | virtiftxretransmit] | state-change [ifstatechange
| nbrstatechange | virtifstatechange | virtnbrstatechange]]
no enable traps [error [ifauthfailure | ifconfigerror | ifrxbadpacket |
virtifauthfailure
|
virtifconfigerror
|
virtifrxbadpacket]
|
lsa
[lsdbapproachoverflow | lsdboverflow | maxagelsa | originatelsa] |
retransmit [iftxretransmit | virtiftxretransmit] | state-change [ifstatechange
| nbrstatechange | virtifstatechange | virtnbrstatechange]]
.
4-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
description
Description
Set all traps switches related to the error.
Use this parameter to set the following
specified error traps switches:
ifauthfailure
Interface
authentication
error
ifconfigerror
Interface
parameter
configuration
error
ifrxbadpacket
error
Error messages
are received on
the interface
virtifauthfailure
Authentication
erroe on the
virtual interface
virtifconfigerror
Parameter
configuration
error on the
virtual interface
virtifrxbadpacket
Error messages
are received on
the virtual
interface
Set all traps switches related to the isa.
Use this parameter to set the following
specified isa traps switches:
lsdbapproachoverflow
External LSA
amount has
reached the
90% of the
upper limit.
isa
lsdboverflow
External LSA
amount has
reached the
upper limit.
maxagelsa
LSA reaches
the aging
time
originatelsa
Generates
new LSA
.
4-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Set all traps switches related to the
retransmit. Use this parameter to set the
following specified retransmit traps
switches:
iftxretransmit
retransmit
Packet
retransmission
occurs on the
interface
virtiftxretransmit
Packet
retransmission
occurs on the
virtual interface
Set all traps switches related to the
state-change. Use this parameter to set
the following specified state-change
switches:
ifstatechange
state-change
nbrstatechange
virtifstatechange
Interface state
change
Neighbor state
change
State change on
the virtual
interface
virtnbrstatechange
State change on
the virtual
neighbor
Default
By default, all TRAP switches are disabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The snmp-server enable traps ospf command must be
configured before configuring this command, for this
Usage
command is limited by the snmp-server command.
guidelines
This command is not limited by the binding of process and
MIB, allowing to enable the TRAP switch for different
processes simultaneously.
The example below enables all TRAP switches of the
Examples
OSPFv2 process 100:
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 100
.
4-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-router)# enable traps
Command
Related
Description
show ip ospf
commands
enable
mib-binding
4.1.21
Show the OSPF global configuration
information.
Bind the OSPFv2 process with MIB.
graceful-restart
Use this command to enable the graceful restart function for the OSPF. The no
form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
graceful-restart [graceful-period grace-period]
no graceful-restart [graceful-period ]
Parameter
Description
grace-period
Parameter
(optional)
Explicitly
configure
the
grace-period.
User-set GR interval,in the range of 1
description
grace-period
to 1800 seconds, it is the longest time
between the OSPF invalidation and the
OSPF graceful restart.
Default
By default, the GR function is disabled. And the default
value of the grace-period is 120 seconds.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The graceful restart function is configured based on the
OSPF instance. According to the actual condition, different
instances could be configured with different parameters
according to the actual situation.
The graceful restart interval is the longest time between
Usage
performing the OSPF restart and the graceful restart. In
guidelines
this period, perform the link status reconstruction to restore
status of the OSPF to the original. With the interval running
out, the OSPF will exit from the GR status and perform the
usual OSPF operations.
The
GR
interval
graceful-restart
.
is
120
command;
seconds
the
set
by
the
graceful-restart
4-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
grace-period command allows users changing the interval
explicitly.
The configuration example below enables the GR function
for the OSPF instance 1 and sets the restart interval for the
GR function.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# graceful-restart
DGS-8000(config-router)# graceful-restart grace-period
60
Related
commands
4.1.22
Command
Description
graceful-restart
Enable the OSPF graceful-restart
helper
helper.
graceful-restart helper
Use this command to enable the graceful restart helper function. The no form of
this command restores it to the default setting.
graceful-restart
helper
{disable
|
{strict-lsa-checking
|
internal-lsa-checking}}
no
graceful-restart
helper
{disable
|
{strict-lsa-checking
|
internal-lsa-checking}}
Parameter
Description
Disable
disable
the
graceful
restart
helper.
Check the change of the LSA
Parameter
strict-lsa-checking
description
whose types is 1-5,7 to judge the
network whether changes. If so,
the GR helper will be disabled.
Check the change of the LSA
internal-lsa-checking
whose types is 1 -3 to judge the
network whether changes. If so,
the GR helper will be disabled.
By default, the GR helper is enabled.
Default
With the GR helper enabled, the device dose not check
the change of LSA by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Use this command to enable the GR helper function. When
one neighbor device performs the graceful restart, it sends
the Grace-LSA to advertise the all neighbor device. If this
device with the GR helper function enabled receives the
Grace-LSA, it will become the GR Helper to help the
neighbors perform the graceful restart. The disable option
means that it is not allowed to perform the GR helper
function for any device that performs the graceful restart.
After being the GR helper, the device dose not check the
Usage
network change by default. The convergence is not
guidelines
performed again until the GR is implemented even if the
network
changes.
Use
the
strict-lsa-checking
or
internal-lsa-checking command to enable the fast check
for the changed network during the GR. The former checks
any LSA (types 1-5,7) that stands for the network
information, the latter checks the LSA that stands for the
AS inner-area route. In the large scale network, it is not
recommended to enable the LSA check option because
the local network changes trigger the ending of the GR,
resulting in the entire network convergence decreased.
The configuration example below disables the GF helper
and modifies the checking policy of the network changing.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# graceful-restart helper
Examples
disable
DGS-8000(config-router)# no graceful-restart helper
disable
DGS-8000(config-router)# graceful-restart helper
strict-lsa-checking
Related
commands
4.1.23
Command
gracful-restart
Description
Enable the graceful restart function
on the device.
ip ospf authentication
Use this command to configure the authentication type. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default type.
ip ospf authentication [message-digest | null]
no ip ospf authentication
.
4-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
message-digest
Enable MD5 authentication on the
interface.
Enable no authentication.
null
No authentication mode is configured on the interface by
Default
default. Here, the authentication type of the local area
applies on the interface.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Plaintext authentication applies when no option is used
with the command. Note that the no form of this command
restores the setting to the default value. Whether
Usage
guidelines
authentication
is
used
actually
depends
on
the
authentication mode configured for the area of the
interface. If the authentication mode is configured as null,
this enables no authentication. When both the interface
and its area are configured with authentication, the one for
the interface takes priority.
The
configuration
example
below
configures
MD5
authentication for the OSPF on interface fastEthernet 0/1.
DGS-8000 (config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
Examples
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.1.1
255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
authentication
message-digest
Command
Description
Enable authentication and define
area authentication
Related
commands
the authentication mode in the
OSPF area.
ip
ospf
Configure
the
plaintext
authentication-key
authentication key
ip
Configure the MD5 authentication
ospf
message-digest-key
.
key
4-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.24
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
ip ospf authentication-key
Use this comand to configure the OSPF plaintext authentication key in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete
the plaintext authentication key.
ip ospf authentication-key key
no ip ospf authentication-key
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
Key of at most 8 characters or
key
numerals.
N/A.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The ip ospf authentication-key command configures the
key that will be inserted in all OSPF message headers. As
a result, if the keys are inconsistent, the OSPF neighbor
relationship cannot be established between two devices
directly connected, and thus route information exchange is
impossible.
The keys can be different for different interfaces, but the
Usage
guidelines
devices that are connected to the same physical network
segment must be configured with the same key.
To enable the OSPF area authentication, execute the area
authentication
command
in
the
routing
process
configuration mode.
The authentication can be enabled separately on an
interface by executing the ip ospf authentication
command in the interface configuration mode. When both
the
interface
and
the
area
are
configured
with
authentication, the one for the interface takes priority.
The configuration example below configures the OSPF
authentication key "ospfauth" for the interface fastEthernet
0/0.
Examples
DGS-8000 (config)#interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.1.1
255.255.255.0
.
4-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
authentication-key ospfauth
Command
Related
commands
4.1.25
Description
Enable authentication in the OSPF
area
authentication
area and define the authentication
mode
Ip ospf
Enable authentication on the interface
authentication
and define the authentication mode
ip ospf bdf
Use this command to enable or disable the BFD on the specifed OSPF interface.
The no form of this command is used to remove the setting on the interface..
ip rip bfd [disable]
no ip ospf bfd [disable]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
Disable
disable
the
BFD
function
on
the
specified OSPF interface.
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The command ip ospf bfd in the interface configuration
mode takes precedence over the bfd all-interfaces
command in the routing process configuration mode.
Usage
You can use this command to enable the BFD on the
guidelines
specified interface according to the actual environment,
also can use the command bfd all-interfaces in the RIP
process configuration mode to enanble the BFD function
on all OSPF interfaces and use the command ip rip bfd
disable to disable the BFD on the specified interface.
Examples
N/A
.
4-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
Description
router ospf
Create the OSPF routing process and
Related
process-id [vrf
enter
commands
vrf-name]
configuration mode.
Enable
bdf all-interfaces
4.1.26
into
the
the
routing
BFD
on
process
all
OSPF
interfaces.
ip ospf cost
Use this command to configure the cost (OSPF metric) of the OSPF interface
for sending a packet in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to restore it to the default.
ip ospf cost cost
no ip ospf cost
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
Cost
OSPF interface cost
Default
The default cost of the interface is 108/Bandwidth.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
By default, the OSPF interface cost is 108/Bandwidth,
where Bandwidth is the interface bandwidth configured
with
the
bandwidth
command
in
the
interface
configuration mode.
The default costs of different types of lines are as follows:
Usage

64K serial line: 1562
guidelines

E1 line: 48

10M Ethernet: 10

100M Ethernet: 1
The OSPF cost configured with the ip ospf cost command
will overwrite the default configuration.
The configuration example below configures the OSPF
Examples
cost of the interface fastEthernet 0/1 as 100.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf cost 100
.
4-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
Description
Specify the interface bandwidth. This
Related
bandwidth
commands
does
not
affect
the
data
transmission rate.
show ip ospf
4.1.27
setting
Show the OSPF global configuration
information
ip ospf database-filter all out
Use this command to configure not to advertise LSA messages on the interface,
that is, the LSA update messages are not sent on the interface. The no form of
the command restores it to the default.
ip ospf database-filter all out
no ip ospf database-filter
Default
This function is disabled by default. Any LSA update
message can be sent on the interface.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
To disable sending LSA update messages on the
guidelines
interface, enable this function on the interface.
The configuration example below prevents the LSA update
messages from being sent on the interface fastEthernet
0/1.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.10.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
database-filter all out
4.1.28
ip ospf dead-interval
Use this command to configure the interval to judge the death of interface
neighbor in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is
used to restore it to the default.
ip ospf dead-interval seconds
no ip ospf dead-interval
.
4-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Default
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Description
Interval to judge the neighbor death (in
Seconds
seconds)
By default it is 4 times the interval configured with the ip
ospf hello-interval command.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The OSPF death time is included in the Hello message. If
the OSPF does not receive the Hello message from its
neighbor within the death interval, it declares the
neighbor's death and deletes its entry in the neighbor list.
By default the death interval is 4 times the interval of the
Hello message. The modification of the Hello interval will
Usage
automatically change the death interval.
guidelines
This command can be used to manually change the
interval to judge the death of OSPF neighbor. Note that:

The death interval cannot be less than the interval of
Hello messages.

The death intervals of all devices in the same network
segment must be the same.
The configuration example below configures the interval of
judging the death of the OSPF neighbor on the interface
fastEthernet 0/1 as 30s.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.10.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
dead-interval 30
Related
commands
Command
Description
ip ospf
Specify the interval at which the OSPF
hello-interval
sends Hello messages
.
4-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.29
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
ip ospf disable all
Use this command to specify the interface not to generate the OSPF messages.
ip ospf disable all
no ip ospf disable all
Default
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The interface with this command configured will ignore
whether the network area matches or not. After this
Usage
command is configured, even if the interface belongs to
guidelines
the network, it will not generate OSPF datagram any more.
So, it does not receive or send any OSPF message or
participate in the OSPF calculation.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.10.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf disable all
4.1.30
ip ospf hello-interval
Use this command to configure the interval to send Hello messages in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it
to the default.
ip ospf hello-interval seconds
no ip ospf hello-interval
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
Interval to send Hello messages (in
Seconds
seconds)

10s for Ethernet

10s for PPP or HDLC encapsulated interfaces

10s for frame relay PTP interfaces

30s for non-frame relay PTP sub-interface and X.25
.
4-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
interfaces
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The interval of sending the Hello messages is included in
the Hello message. A shorter interval means OSPF
detects the topological change at a faster pace, which will
Usage
aggravate network traffic. The Hello message intervals for
guidelines
all the devices in the same network segment must be the
same. To further manually modify the interval to judge
neighbor death, ensure the Hello message interval cannot
be greater than the neighbor death interval.
The configuration example below configures the interval of
sending the Hello message on the interface fastEthernet
0/1 as 15.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.10.1 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf
hello-interval 15
Related
commands
4.1.31
Command
Description
ip ospf
Set the interval of judging the death of
dead-interval
the OSPF neighbor.
ip ospf message-digest-key
Use this command to configure the MD5 authentication key in the interface
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the MD5
authentication key.
ip ospf message-digest-key key-id md5 key
no ip ospf message-digest-key
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
Key
Key of up to 16 characters or numerals
key-id
Key identifier in the range of 1 to 255
N/A.
.
4-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The ip ospf message-digest-key command configures
the key that will be inserted in all OSPF message headers.
As a result, if the keys are inconsistent, the OSPF neighbor
relationship cannot be established between two devices
directly connected, and thus route information exchange is
impossible.
The keys can be different for different interfaces, but the
devices that are connected to the same physical network
segment must be configured with the same key. For
neighboring devices, the same key identifier must
correspond to the same key.
To enable authentication in the OSPF area, execute the
Usage
guidelines
area authentication command in the routing process
configuration mode. The authentication can be enabled
separately on an interface by executing the ip ospf
authentication command in the interface configuration
mode. When both the interface and the area are
configured with authentication, the one for the interface
takes priority.
The MD5 authentication keys shall be added before
deleted. When an MD5 authentication key of the device is
added, the device will regard other devices have not had
new keys and thus send multiple OSPF messages by
using different keys, till it confirms the neighbors have
been configured with new keys. When all devices have
been configured with new keys, it is possible to delete the
old key.
The configuration example below adds a new OSPF
authentication key "hello5" with key ID 5 for the
fastEthernet 0/1.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
address
172.16.24.2 255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
0/1)#
ip
ospf
authentication message-digest
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
.
4-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
message-digest-key 10 md5 hello10
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
message-digest-key 5 md5 hello5
When all neighbors are added with new keys, the old keys
shall be deleted for all devices.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
no
ip
ospf
message-digest-key 10 md5 hello10
Command
Related
commands
Description
Enable authentication in the OSPF
area
authentication
ip
ospf
authentication
4.1.32
area and define the authentication
mode.
Enable authentication on the interface
and define the authentication mode.
ip ospf mtu-ignore
Use this command to disable the MTU check when an interface receives the
database description message. The no form of this command is used to
restore it to the default.
ip ospf mtu-ignore
no ip ospf mtu-ignore
Default
Enabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
After receiving the database description message, the
device will check whether the MTU of neighbor interface is
Usage
the same as its own MTU. If the received database
guidelines
description message indicates an MTU greater than the
interface’s MTU, the neighbor relationship cannot be
established. This can be fixed by disabling the MTU check.
The configuration example below disables the MTU check
function on the interface fastEthernet 0/1.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf mtu-ignore
.
4-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.33
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
ip ospf network
Use this command to configure the OSPF network type in the interface
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it to the
default.
ip ospf network {broadcast | non-broadcast |
point-to-multipoint [non-broadcast]| point-to-point}
no ip ospf network
Parameter
broadcast
Description
Set the OSPF network type as the
broadcast type.
Set the OSPF network type as the
non-broadcast
non-broadcast
multi-path
access
type, i.e. NBMA network.
Parameter
Set the OSPF network type as the
description
point-to-multipoint type.
point-to-multipoint
[non-broadcast]
By default it is the point-to-multipoint
broadcast
type.
non-broadcast
point-to-multipoint
The
option
means
non-broadcast
type.
point-to-point

Set the OSPF network type as the
point-to-point type.
PTP network type: PPP, SLIP, frame relay PTP
sub-interface, X.25 PTP sub-interface encapsulation

NBMA network type: frame relay (except for PTP
sub-interface), X.25 encapsulation (except for PTP
Default
sub-interface)

Broadcast network type: Ethernet encapsulation

By default, the network type is the point-to-multipoint
network type.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Networks are divided into three types according to the
Usage
guidelines
transmission feature of media:

Broadcast network (Ethernet, token ring and FDDI)
.
4-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands

Non-broadcast network (frame relay and X.25)

PTP network (HDLC, PPP and SLIP)
The non-broadcast network is further divided into two
sub-types by the OSPF operation mode:

Non-broadcast
multi-path
access
(NBMA)
type.
NBMA requires all interconnected devices can directly
communicate to each other, and only full mesh type
connection can meet this requirement. There is no
problem in case of the SVC (such as X.25)
connections, but it is difficult in case of networking
with PVC (such as frame relay). The OSPF on the
NBMA network operates similarly to that on the
broadcast network, where the Designated Device
shall be elected to advertise the link state of the
NBMA network.

The second is the point-to-multipoint network type. If
the
network
topology
is
not
a
mesh
type
non-broadcast network, the OSPF requires the
network
type
point-to-multipoint
to
be
network
configured
type.
as
the
In
the
point-to-multipoint network type, the OSPF regards all
inter-device connections as PTP links and do not
participate in the election of the designated device.
The point-to-multipoint network type is further divided
into broadcast type and non-broadcast type. For the
non-broadcast type, it is required to manually
configure the static neighbor.
Whatever the default network type of the interface, you
must set it to the broadcast network type. For example, the
non-broadcast multi-path access network (frame relay and
X.25) can be configured as broadcast network, so that the
configuration of neighbors can be omitted during the OSPF
routing process configuration. The X.25 map and
frame-relay map commands may enable the X.25 and
frame relay networks with broadcasting capability, so that
the OSPF can regard such networks as X.25 and frame
relay as broadcast network.
The interface of the point-to-multipoint network can be
configured with one or more neighbors. When the OSPF is
configured as the point-to-multipoint network type, multiple
host routes may be generated. In contrast to the broadcast
network type, the point-to-multipoint network type features
the following benefits:
.
4-40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands

Easy configuration without configuration of neighbors
or election of designated device

Small cost, without needing the fully meshed topology
For the dial-up network, frame relay and X.25 network, to
manually configure the IP address mapping table, the
keyword "broadcast" must be specified to support
broadcast.
The configuration example below configures the frame
relay interface network as the broadcast type, which is
applicable for the full mesh type frame relay connections.
DGS-8000(config)# interface Serial1/0
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip address 172.16.24.4
255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# encapsulation
frame-relay
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip ospf network broadcast
The configuration example below configures the frame
relay interface network as the point-to-multipoint type,
which is applicable for the non-full-mesh type frame relay
connections.
DGS-8000(config)# interface Serial1/0
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip address 172.16.24.4
255.255.255.0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# encapsulation
frame-relay
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip ospf network
point-to-multipoint
The configuration example below configures the frame
relay interface network as the broadcast type, with
DR/RDR specified, which is applicable for the full or partial
mesh type frame relay connections. The configuration
below needs to be done on all branch node devices and
non-designated devices (limited to become DR/BDR).
DGS-8000(config)# interface Serial1/0
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip address 172.16.24.4
255.255.255.0
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# encapsulation
frame-relay
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip ospf network broadcast
DGS-8000(config-if-Serial 1/0)# ip ospf priority 0
Related
Command
commands
dialer map ip
.
Description
Define the map between IP address and
dialing number.
4-41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
frame-relay
Define the map between IP address and
map
frame DLCI.
Define the IP address of neighbor
neighbor
applicable for NBMA network type and
(OSPF)
point-to-multipoint non-broadcast type
only.
Define the map between IP address and
X25 map
4.1.34
X.25 network address.
ip ospf priority
Use this command to configure the priority in the interface configuration mode.
The no form of this command is used to restore it to the default.
ip ospf priority priority
no ip ospf priority
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
Priority
Set the priority of the interface.
Default
The default priority is 1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The interface priority is included in the Hello message.
When DR/BDR (designated device/backup designated
device) election occurs in the OSPF broadcast type
network, the device with higher priority will become the DR
or BDR. If the devices have the same priority, the one with
Usage
guidelines
higher ID will become the DR or BDR. The device with
priority 0 cannot become DR or BDR. This command is
valid for only OSPF broadcast and non-broadcast network
types.
Note: If the DR and BDR exist in the network, the
modification of the interface priority will not take effect
immediately. The new priority will not be used until the next
DR and BDR election occurs.
The configuration example below configures the priority of
Examples
the interface fastethernet 0/1 as 0.
Switch(config)#interface fastethernet 0/1
.
4-42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet 0/1)# ip ospf priority 0
Related
commands
Command
ip
Description
ospf
interface.
network
4.1.35
Configure the network type of the
ip ospf retransmit-interval
Use this command to define the interval to send the link state update message
on the interface in the interface configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to restore it to the default.
ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds
ip ospf retransmit-interval
Parameter
Description
Interval to send the link state update
Parameter
description
message. This interval must be greater
seconds
than the trip delay of packets between
two
neighbors.
The
default
is
5
seconds.
Default
The default is 5 seconds.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When the device sends an LSU message completely, the
LSU message stays in the send buffer queue. If no
confirmation from the neighbor is obtained in the interval
Usage
guidelines
defined with the ip ospf retransmit-interval command,
the LSA will be sent once again.
In serial lines or virtual links, the resend interval shall be
slightly larger. The LSU message resend interval of virtual
link is defined through the area virtual-link command
followed with the keyword retransmit-interval.
The configuration example below configures the LSU
message resend interval on the interface fastEthernet 0/1
Examples
as 10 seconds.
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
.
4-43
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
retransmit-interval 10
Related
commands
Command
Description
area
Define an OSPF virtual link.
virtual-link
4.1.36
ip ospf transmit-delay
Use this command to define the LSU message transmission delay in the
interface configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to restore it
to the default.
ip ospf transmit delay seconds
no ip ospf transmit delay
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
LSU message transmission delay ( in
Seconds
seconds). The default is 1 second.
The default is 1 second.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Before the LSU message is transmitted, the Age field in all
the LSAs of the message will be increased by the value
defined in the interface configuration command ip ospf
transmit-delay. The configuration of this parameter shall
consider the send and line transmission delay of the
Usage
guidelines
interface. For low-rate lines, the transmission delay of the
interface shall be slightly larger. The LSU message
transmission delay of virtual link is defined through the
area virtual-link command followed with the keyword
retransmit-interval.
the LSA is resent or requested resending with Age up to
3600. If no refresh is obtained in time, the aged LSA will be
cleared from the link state database.
Examples
The
configuration
example
below
configures
the
transmission delay of fastEthernet 0/1 as 5.
.
4-44
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config)# interface fastEthernet 0/1
DGS-8000(config-if-FastEthernet
0/1)#
ip
ospf
transmit-delay 10
Related
commands
Command
area
virtual-link
4.1.37
Description
Define an OSPF virtual link.
log-adj-changes
Use this command to enable the logging of the neighbor state changes. The no
or default form of the command is used to disable it.
log-adj-changes [detail]
no log-adj-changes [detail]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
LSU message transmission delay ( in
Seconds
seconds). The default is 1 second.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
detail
Record the detail of changes.
Enabled. Without the detail parameter, the system
Default
records the logs that the neighbor enters the full state or
leaves the full state.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The configuration example below logs the neighbor status
Examples
change.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# log-adj-changes
Related
commands
Command
show ip ospf
.
Description
Show the OSPF global configuration
information.
4-45
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.38
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
max-concurrent-dd
Use this command to specify the maximum number of DD messages that can
be processed (initiate or accept) at the same time.
max-concurrent-dd <1-65535>
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
<1-65535>
Maximum number of DD messages
Default
The default value is 5.
Command
Interface configuration mode.
mode
When a routing device is exchanging data with multiple
neighbors, its performance will be affected. This command
Usage
is configured to limit the maximum number of DD
guidelines
messages that each OSPF instance can have at the same
time.
In the configuration example below, the maximum number
of DD messages is set as 4.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 10
DGS-8000(config-router)# max-concurrent-dd 4
4.1.39
max-metric
Use this command to set the maximum metric of the router-lsa, so that this
routing device will not firstly be used as the transmission node by other devices
in SPF computing. The no form of this command is used to cancel the
maximum metric.
max-metric
router-lsa
[external-lsa
[max-metric-value]]
[include-stub]
[on-startup [seconds]] [summary-lsa [max-metric-value]]
no max-metric router-lsa [external-lsa [max-metric-value]] [include-stub]
[on-startup [seconds]] [summary-lsa [max-metric-value]]
Parameter
Parameter
description
router-lsa
Description
Set the maximum metric (0XFFFF) of
non-stub links in the Router LSA.
Use the maximum metric instead of
external-lsa
the external-lsa metric. (including the
Type-5 and Type-7)
.
4-46
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Maximum metric value of the LAS,
max-metric-value
16711680 by default, in the range of 1
to 16777215.
include-stub
on-startup
Set the maximum metric of the stub
links in the Router LSA.
Advertise the maximum metric when
the routing device starts up.
Interval of advertising the maximum
seconds
metric, 600s by default, within the
range of 5 to 86400.
Use the maximum metric instead of
summary-lsa
the summary LSA metric. (including
the Type-3 and Type-4)
Normal metric LSAs.
Default
Command
Routing process configuration mode.
mode
With
the
command
max-metric
router-lsa
enabled,
maximum metric of non-stub links in the Router LSA
generated by the routing device is set. The link’s normal
metric is restored after canceling this configuration or
reaching the timer.
By default, with this command enabled, the normal metric of
the stub links is still advertised, which is the output interface
cost. If the include-stub parameter is configured, the
maximum metric of the stub links will be advertised.
When the device acts as an ABR, if no interval flow
Usage
guidelines
transmission is expected, use the summary-lsa parameter to
set the summary LSA as the maximum metric.
When the device acts as an ASBR device, if no external flow
transmission is expected, use the external lsa parameter to
set the external LSA as the maximum metric.
the max-metric router-lsa command is usually used in the
following scenes:

Restart the device, which generally makes the IGP
protocol converged faster, so that other devices attempt
forwarding the dataflow through the new started-up
device. If current device remains establishing a BGP
routing table, the packets sent to these networks will be
discarded due to some BGP routings have not been
.
4-47
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
learned. In this case, use the on-startup parameter to
set certain delay, so that this device can be servers as a
transmission node after restarting.

The device is added into the network without being used
for dataflow transmission. If the backup path exists, the
current device is not used for the dataflow transmission.
Otherwise, this device is still used to transmit the
dataflow.

Remove the device from the network gracefully. With
this command enabled, the current device advertises the
maximum metric to all devices, as that the other devices
in this network can choose the backup path to for the
dataflow transmission before it closes.
For the OSPF implementation in the old
version (RFC 1247 or earlier versions), the
links with maximum metric in the LSA will
not anticipate the SPF calculation, that is,
Note
no dataflow will be sent to these LSAs
router.
The configuration example below sets to advertise the
maximum metric as 100 seconds after starting the device.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)#
max-metric
router-lsa
on-startup 100
4.1.40
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip ospf
Show the ospf related configurations.
neighbor
Use this command to define the OSPF neighbor in the routing process
configuration mode. The no form of this command is sued to delete the
specified neighbor.
neighbor ip-address [poll-interval seconds] [priority priority] [cost cost]
no neighbor ip-address
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip address
IP address of the neighbor
.
4-48
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
(Optional) Specify the interval of polling
poll-interval
seconds
neighbors (in seconds), 120 s by
default.
Only the non-broadcast (NBMA)
network type supports this option.
(Optional) Configure the priority of
non-broadcast network neighbors, 0 by
priority priority
default.
Only the non-broadcast (NBMA)
network type supports this option.
(Optional) Configure the cost to each
neighbor in point-to-multipoint network,
not defined by default, where the cost
Cost cost
configured on the interface will be used.
Only the point-to-multipoint
[ non-broadcast ] network type supports
this option.
Default
N/A.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
.
4-49
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
You must explicitly configure the neighbor information for
every non-broadcast network neighbor. The IP address of
a neighbor must be the master IP address of that neighbor
interface.
In the NBMA network, if the neighbor device becomes
inactive, in other words, the Hello message is not received
within the device death interval, the OSPF will send more
Hello messages to the neighbor. The interval at which the
Hello messages are sent is called the polling interval.
Usage
guidelines
When the OSPF starts to work for the first time, it sends
Hello messages only to the neighbor whose priority is not
0, so that the neighbor whose priority is set as 0 will not
participate in the DR/BDR election. When the DR/BDR is
generated, the DR/BDR sends the Hello messages to all
neighbors to establish the neighbor relationship.
Since the point-to-multipoint non-broadcast network has
no broadcast capability, neighbors cannot be found
dynamically. So, it is required to use this command to
manually configure neighbor. In addition, it is possible to
configure the cost to each neighbor through the "cost"
option for the point-to-multipoint network type.
The configuration example below declares an OSPF
non-broadcast
network
neighbor,
with
IP
address
172.16.24.2, priority 1 and polling interval 150s.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.24.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 172.16.24.2 priority 1
poll-interval 150
Related
commands
Command
Description
ip ospf priority
Set the interface priority.
ip ospf
Set the network type
network
4.1.41
network area
Use this command to define which interfaces run OSPF and the OSPF areas
they belong to in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to delete the OSPF area definition of the interface.
network ip-address wildcard area area-id
.
4-50
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
no network ip-address wildcard area area-id
Parameter
Description
ip addres
IP address of the interface
Define the comparison bits in the IP
wildcard
address, 0 for exact match and 1 for no
Parameter
comparison
description
OSPF area identifier. An OSPF area is
always associated with an address
area-id
range. For easy of management, a
subnet can be used as the OSPF area
identifier.
Default
There is no OSPF area configured by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The parameters ip-address and wildcard allow associating
multiple interfaces with one OSPF area. To run OSPF on
an interface, it is required to include the primary IP address
and secondary IP address of the interface in the IP
Usage
address range defined by network area. Only secondary
guidelines
IP address is not enough to enable OSPF on the interface.
If the IP address of the interface matches the IP address
ranges defined by the network command in multiple
OSPF processes, you can determine the OSPF process
that the interface takes part in by the means of best match.
The configuration example below defines three areas: 0, 1
and
172.16.16.0.
Define
the
interfaces
whose
IP
addresses fall into the 192.168.12.0/24 range to area 1,
define the interfaces whose IP addresses fall into the
172.16.16.0/20 range to area 2, and define the remaining
interface to area 0.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.16.0
0.0.15.255 area 172.16.16.0
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 192.168.12.0
0.0.0.255 area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 0.0.0.0
255.255.255.255 area 0
.
4-51
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.42
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Related
Command
Description
commands
router ospf
Create OSPF routing process
overflow database
Use this command to configure the maximum number of LSAs supported by the
current OSPF instance.
overflow database <1-4294967294> [hard | soft]
no overflow database
Parameter
Description
<1-4294967294>
Maximum number of LSAs
Parameter
hard: Shut down the OSPF instance
description
when the number of LSAs exceeds
hard | soft
that number.
soft: Issue an alarm when the number
of LSAs exceeds that number.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Routing process configuration mode.
To shut down the OSPF instance when the number of
LSAs exceeds that number, use the "hard" parameter;
otherwise, use the "soft" parameter.
In the configuration below, when there are more than 10
LSAs, OSPF instance 10 will be shut down.
Examples
DGS-8000# config terminal
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 10
DGS-8000(config-router)# overflow database 10 hard
4.1.43
overflow database external
Use this command to configure the maximum number of external LSAs and the
waiting time from overflow status to normal status.
overflow database external max-dbsize wait-time
no overflow database external
.
4-52
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Description
Maximum number of external LSAs (the
Parameter
max-dbsize
description
devices in the same AS)
Waiting time of the routing device from
wait-time
Default
value shall be the same for all routing
the overflow status to normal status.
By default the max-dbsize is -1 and the wait-time is 0
second.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
In the configuration below, the maximum number of
external LSAs is configured as 10, and it turns to the
overflow status upon timeout, and the time interval
Examples
attempting to restore from the overflow status to the normal
status is 3 seconds.
DGS-8000# config terminal
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 10
DGS-8000(config-router)# overflow database external 10 3
4.1.44
overflow memory-lack
Use this command to allow the OSPF to enter the OVERFLOW state when the
memory lacks. Use the no form of this command to disabe this function.
overflow memory-lack
no overflow memory-lack
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Disable the function of entering the
OVERFLOW state when the memory
no
lacks.
Default
By default, OSPF is allowed to enter the OVERFLOW
state when the memory lacks..
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Usage
The action of OSPF entering the OVERFLOW state is to
.
4-53
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
guidelines
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
discard the newly-learned external route and prevent the
memory from being increased effectively.
It is possible that enabling this function causes the route
loop in the whole network. To reduce that occurance
possibility, OSPF will generate a default route directing to
the NULL port and this default route will exist in the
OVERFLOW state.
Use the clear ip ospf process command to reset the
OSPF and remove the OSPF OVERFLOW state.
Use the no form of this command to disallow the OSPF to
enter the OVERFLOW state when the memory lacks,
which may result in the constantly consume of the memory
resources. If the memory is exhausted to some degree, the
OSPF instance will stop and all learned routes will be
removed.
The configuration example below disallows the OSPF to
Examples
enter the OVERFLOW state when the memory lacks.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
1
DGS-8000(config-router)# no overflow memory-lack
Command
Related
commands
clear ip ospf
process
show ip
protocols ospf
4.1.45
Description
Reset the OSPF instances.
Show the OSPF information.
passive-interface
Use this command to configure the specified network interface or all interface
as the passive interfaces. The no format of this command is used to restore it to
the default.
passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-number}
no passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-number}
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
interface-type
The interface to be set as a passive
interface-number
one.
Set all the interfaces as passive
default
interfaces.
.
4-54
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
By default, no interface is configured as passive interface. All
interfaces are allowed to receive/send OSPF messages.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
To prevent other devices in the network from dynamically
Usage
learning the routing information of the device, specify the
guidelines
specified network interface of this device as passive
interface.
The configuration example below configures fastEthernet
0/1 as passive interface.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf
30
DGS-8000(config-router)# passive-interface fastEthernet
0/1
Related
commands
4.1.46
Command
Description
show ip ospf
Show the configuration information of
interface
the interface.
redistribute
Use this command to redistribute the external routing information.
redistribute {bgp | ospf process-id | rip | connected | static}[metric value |
match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2 | nssa-external |
nssa-external 1 | nssa-external 2}metric-type {1|2} | route-map map-tag | tag
<0-4294967295> | subnets ]
no redistribute {bgp | ospf process-id | rip | connected | static}[metric value |
match {internal | external | external 1 | external 2 | nssa-external |
nssa-external 1 | nssa-external 2}metric-type {1|2} | route-map map-tag | tag
<0-4294967295> | subnets ]
Parameter
Parameter
description
bgp | ospf
Description
process-id| rip |
Redistribute the routes of the specified
connected |
routing protocol.
static
Set the metric of OSPF extern2 LSA.
metric
.
4-55
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Redistribute the specific OSPF routes.
By default, all the OSPF routes are
match
redistributed.
metric-type
route-map
E-2.
Redistribution filter rule.
Set the tag value of the routes
tag
redistributed to the OSPF.
Redistribute the routes of non standard
subnets
Default
Set the external routing type as E-1 or
networks.
N/A
Command
mode
Route configuration mode.
After the command is configured, the routing device will
turn to ASBR, the related routing information is imported
into the OSPF domain and broadcasted to other OSPF
routing device through type-5 LSAs.
For redistribution, the default metric of BGP routes is 1; the
default metric of the LSAs generated by other types of
routes is 20.
When you configure redistributing OSPF routes without
Usage
guidelines
the match parameter, the OSPF routes of all sub types are
redistributed by default. Then the first configured match
parameter is used as the original one. Only the routes
matching the specific type can be redistributed. The no
form of this command restores the setting to the default
value.
When you filter routes for redistribution by following the
route-map rule, the match rule of the route-map rule is
specific for the original redistribution parameters. It is only
when the redistributed OSPF routes follow the match rule
that the route-map rule works.
The following command redistributes static routes to the
OSPF domain.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute static subnets
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute ospf 2 subnets
.
4-56
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute ospf 2 match
external 1 internal
The following is the results of the show run command.
router ospf 1
redistribute ospf 2 match external 1 internal subnets
4.1.47
router ospf
Use this command to create the OSPF routing process in the global
configuration mode. The no form of this command is used to delete the defined
OSPF routing process.
router ospf process-id [vrf vrf-name]
no router ospf [process-id]
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
process-id
OSPF process ID
vrf-name
VRF name
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Global configuration mode.
Different OSPF instances are mutually independent and
can be approximately considered as two routing protocols
without mutual interference.
The following example creates the OSPF routing process
Examples
10 within the specified vrf: vpn_1
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 10 vrf: vpn_1
Command
Related
show ip
commands
protocols
show ip ospf
4.1.48
Description
Show the routing protocol informatin.
Show the OSPF information.
router ospf max-concurrent-dd
Use this command to specify the maximum number of DD messages that can
be processed (initiate or accept ) at the same time.
.
4-57
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
router ospf max-concurrent-dd number
no router ospf max-concurrent-dd
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
Maximum number of DD messages, in
number
the range of 1 to 65535.
The default value is 10.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
When a routing device is exchanging data with multiple
Usage
guidelines
neighbors, its performance will be affected. This command
is configured to limit the maximum number of DD
messages that each OSPF instance can have (initiate or
accecpt) at the same time.
In the configuration example below, the maximum number
Examples
of DD messages is set as 4.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 10
DGS-8000(config-router)# router ospf max-concurrent-dd 4
Command
Related
commands
Description
Set the maximum number of the
max-concurrent-dd
neighbor concurrent with the OSPF
routing process
4.1.49
router-id
Use this command to set the router ID. Use the no form of this command to
delete the setting or restore it to the default.
router-id router-id
no router-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
router-id
Router ID in IP address form
Default
By default, the OSPF routing process will select the
configuration
maximal interface IP address as the router ID.
.
4-58
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
You can configure any IP address as the router ID.
However, the router ID should be unique. Note that once
the router ID changes, the OSPF protocol will do a large
number of works. It is not recommended to change the
Usage
router ID. The device can be changed only when no LSA is
guidelines
generated. To configure the OSPF protocol, you should
execute this command to specify the ID of a device.
Certainly, you can also specify it by the loopback. At this
time, you should configure the router ID before configuring
the OSPF protocol.
The following example modifies the router ID to 0.0.0.36
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# router-id 0.0.0.36
Command
Description
Related
commands
show
ip
protocols
4.1.50
Show the routing protocol information.
summary-address
Use this command to configure the converge route out of the OSPF routing
domain in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to delete the converged route.
summary-address ip-address net-mask [not-advertise | tag <0-4294967295>
|]
no summary-address
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
Description
ip address
IP address of the converged route
net-mask
Network mask of the converged route
not-advertise
Do not advertise the converged route.
No converged route is configured by default.
.
4-59
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
When routes are redistributed by another routing process
into the OSPF routing process, every route is advertised to
the OSPF-enabled device separately in the form of
external link state. If the incoming routes are continuous
addresses, the autonomous border device can advertise
only one converged route, reducing the scale of routing
Usage
guidelines
table greatly.
Unlike the area rang command, the former involves the
convergence of routes between OSPF areas, while the
latter involves the convergence of external routes of the
OSPF routing domain.
For the NSSA area, the summary-address command is
valid only on the ABR of the NSSA now, and causes the
convergence for only redistributed routes.
The configuration command below generates an external
converged route 100.100.0.0/16.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# summary-address 100.100.0.0
Examples
255.255.0.0
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute static subnets
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 200.2.2.0 0.0.0.255
area 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 172.16.24.0 0.0.0.255
area 0
DGS-8000(config-router)# area 1 nssa
Related
commands
4.1.51
Command
area-range
Description
Configure route convergence on the
OSPF area border device.
timers lsa arrival
Use this command to configure the time delay for the same LSA recieved. The
no form of the command restores it to the default.
timers lsa arrival arrival-time
.
4-60
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
no timers lsa arrival
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Configure
arrival-time
the
time
delay
when
receiving the same LSA, in the range of
0 to 600000.
Default
1000 milliseconds.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Usage
When the same LSA is received within the specified time,
guidelines
no action will be done.
The configuration example below configures the time delay
for the same LSA as 2s.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers arrival-time 2000
4.1.52
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip ospf
Show the OSPF information.
timers pacing lsa-group
Use this command to configure the LSA grouping and then refresh the whole
groups as well as the update interval for aged link state. The no form of the
command restores it to the default.
timers pacing lsa-group seconds
no timers pacing lsa-group
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
This parameter is used for LSA pacing,
checksum
seconds
calculation,
and
aging
interval.
The range is 10 to1800s.
Default
240 seconds.
.
4-61
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The updated information in the pacing switch (LSA),
checksum calculation, and aging interval are for more
efficient switch use. The default is 4 minutes. This
parameter needs not to be adjusted often. The optimum
group pacing interval is inversely proportional to the
Usage
number of LSAs that need to be calculated. For example, if
guidelines
you have approximately 10,000 LSAs in the database,
decreasing the pacing interval would be better. If the
switch has a small database (40 to 100 LSAs), increasing
the pacing interval to 10 to 20 minutes might be better. To
configure OSPF LSA pacing, follow these steps in the
privileged mode:
The configuration example below configures the pacing
Examples
time as 120s.
DGS-8000(config)# device ospf
20
DGS-8000 (config-router)# timers paing lsa-group 120
4.1.53
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip ospf
Show the OSPF information.
timers pacing lsa-transmit
Use this command to transmit the LSA grouping updating. The no form of the
command restores it to the default.
timers pacing lsa-transmit transmit-time transmit-count
no timers pacing lsa-transmit
Parameter
Parameter
description
transmit-time
transmit-count
Default
Description
Set the interval of sending the LSA
grouping, in the range of 10 to 1000.
Set the number of LS-UPD packets per
group, in the range of 1 to 200.
Transmit-time: 40 milliseconds.
Transmit-count: 10
.
4-62
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
In the environment that there are a large number of LSAs
and the load on the system is too much, you can properly
Usage
guidelines
use the transmit-time and transmit-count to inhibit the
flooding LS-UPD packets number in the network. While the
CPU and network bandwidth loads are not too much,
reduce the transimi-time and increase the transimit-count
to quicken the environment convergence.
The configuration example below sets the interval of
sending the LS-UPD packets as 50ms, the packets number
Examples
as 20.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers pacing lsa-transmit 50 20
4.1.54
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip ospf
Show the OSPF information.
timers spf
Use this command to configure the delay for SPF calculation after the OSPF
receives the topology change as well as the interval between two SPF
calculations in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command restores it to the default.
timers spf spf-delay spf-holdtime
no timers spf
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Define the SPF calculation waiting
period, in seconds. After receiving the
topology change, the OSPF routing
spf-delay
process must wait for the specified
period to start the SPF calculation.
Range: 0-2147483647.
.
4-63
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Define the interval between two SPF
calculations, in seconds. When the
waiting time is up but the interval
spf-holdtime
between
two
calculations
is
still
elapsing, the SPF calculation cannot
start.
Range: 0-2147483647.
The default values are: spf-delay: 5s; spf-holdtime: 10s.
Default
By default, the timers spf command takes no effect.
Spf-delay depends on the default configuration of the
timers throttle spf command.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Shorter values of spf-delay and spf-holdtime mean OSPF
adapts to the topology change faster, and the network
convergence period is shorter, but this will occupy more
Usage
guidelines
CPU of the device.
Note:
The configurations of the timers spf command and the
timers throttle spf command are overwritten.
The configuration example below configures the delay and
holdover period of the OSPF as 3 and 9 seconds
Examples
respectively.
DGS-8000(config)# device ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers spf 3 9
Related
commands
4.1.55
Command
show ip ospf
Description
Show the configuration information of
the ospf.
timers throttle lsa all
Use this command to configure the exponential backoff algorithmin for the LSA
in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this command
restores it to the default.
timers throttle lsa all delay-time hold-time max-wait-time
.
4-64
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
no timers throttle lsa all
Parameter
Description
Configure the time delay of generating
delay-time
the LSA first, in the range of 1 to
600000.
Set the minimum interval of refreshing
Parameter
description
the LSA between the first time and
hold-time
second time, in the range of 1 to
600000.
Set the maximum interval of successive
max-wait-time
refreshing the LSA in the range of 1 to
600000, which determines whether the
LSA is refreshed successively.
Delay-time: 0 millisecond,
Default
Hold-time: 5000 milliseconds,
Max-wait-time: 5000 milliseconds.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
If the high convergence perfermance for the link change is
demanded, the delay-time can be relatively small. if you
expect to reduce the CPU consumption, increase
Usage
appropriately sevel values.
guidelines
The hold-time cannot be smaller than the
delay-time, and the max-wait-time cannot
Caution
smaller thant he hold-time.
The configuration example below configures the first delay
as 10ms, hold-time as 1s and the longest delay as 5s.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers throttle lsa all 10 1000
5000
Related
commands
Command
show ip ospf
.
Description
Show the configuration information of
the ospf
4-65
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
4.1.56
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
timers throttle spf
Use this command to configure the topology change information for OSPF,
including the delay for SPF calculation as well as the interval between two SPF
calculations in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command restores it to the default.
timers throttle spf spf-delay spf-holdtime spf-max-waittime
no timers throttle spf
Parameter
Description
Define the SPF calculation waiting
period, in milli-seconds. After receiving
spf-delay
the topology change, the OSPF routing
process must wait for the specified
period to start the SPF calculation.
Parameter
Define the interval between two SPF
description
calculations, in seconds. When the
waiting time is up but the interval
spf-holdtime
between
two
calculations
is
still
elapsing, the SPF calculation cannot
start.
Define the maximum interval between
spf-max-waittime
two SPF calculations, in milli-seconds,
with the valid range from 1 to 600000.
Default
spf-delay:
1000ms;
spf-holdtime:
5000ms;
spf-max-waittime: 10000ms.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
Spf-delay refers to the delay time of the topology change
to the SPF calculation. Spf-holdtime refers to the minimum
interval between two SPF calculations. Then, the interval
of the consecutive SPF calculations is at least twice as the
Usage
guidelines
last interval till it reaches to spf-max-waittime. If the interval
between two SPF calculations has exceeded the required
value, the SPF calculation will re-start from spf-holdtime.
Smaller spf-delay and spf-holdtime value can make the
topology faster. Greater spf-max-waittime value can
reduce the SPF calculation. Those configurations can be
flexible according to the actual stability of the network
.
4-66
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
topology.
Compared with the timers spf command, this command is
more flexible. It not only speeds up the SPF calculation
convergence, but also reduces the system resources
consumption of SPF calculation due to the topology
change. To this end, the timers throttle spf command is
recommended.
Note:
1. The spf-holdtime cannot be smaller than spf-delay, or
the spf-holdtime will be set to be equal to spf-delay;
2. The
spf-max-waitime
cannot
be
smaller
than
spf-holdtime, or the spf-max-waittime will be set to be
equal to spf-holdtime automatically;
3. The configurations of the timers spf command and the
timers throttle spf command are overwritten.
4. Without neither timers spf command and timers
throttle spf command configured, the default value is
the one of the timers throttle spf command.
The configuration example below configures the delay and
holdtime and the maximum time interval of the OSPF as
5ms, 1000ms and 90000ms respectively. If the topology
Examples
changes consecutively, the SPF calculations are: 5ms,1s,
3s,7s,15s,31s,63s,89s,179s,179+90 ……
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers spf 5 1000 90000
Related
commands
4.1.57
Command
show ip ospf
Description
Show the configuration information of
the ospf
two-way-maintain
Use this command to enable the OSPF two-way-maintain function. The no form
of this command disables this function.
two-way-maintain
no two-way-maintain
.
4-67
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Default
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Description
-
-
Enabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
In the large-scale network, partial packets delay or
dropped may exist due to much CPU and memory are
occupied
caused
by
large
numbers
of
packets
transmission. If the Hello packets are handled over the
Usage
dead
guidelines
disconnected. In this case, enable the two-way-maintain
interval,
the
corresponding
adjacency
will
function for the packets such as DD, LSU, LSR and LSAck
packets from certain neighbor in the network (except for
the Hello packets), avoiding the neighbor invalidation
caused by the Hello packets delay or dropped.
The configuration example below disables the OSPF
two-way-maintain function.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config-router)# no two-way-maintain
Related
commands
4.2
4.2.1
Command
show ip ospf
Description
Show the configuration information of
the ospf
Showing Related Commands
show ip ospf
Use this command to show the OSPF information in the privileged user mode.
show ip ospf [process-id]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
process-id
OSPF process ID
.
4-68
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
N/A.
Default
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command shows the information of the OSPF routing
guidelines
process.
The output results of the show ip ospf command are as
follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf
Routing Process "ospf 1" with ID 1.1.1.1
Process uptime is 4 minutes
Process bound to VRF default
Conforms to RFC2328, and RFC1583Compatibility flag isenabled
Supports only single TOS(TOS0) routes
Supports opaque LSA
This device is an ASBR (injecting external routing information)
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs
LsaGroupPacing: 240 secs
Number of incomming current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Number of outgoing current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Number of external LSA 4. Checksum 0x0278E0
Number of opaque AS LSA 0. Checksum 0x000000
Number of non-default external LSA 4
Example
External LSA database is unlimited.
s
Number of LSA originated 6
Number of LSA received 2
Log Neighbor Adjency Changes : Enabled
Number of areas attached to this device: 1
Area 0 (BACKBONE)
Number of interfaces in this area is 1(1)
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area is 1
Area has no authentication
SPF algorithm last executed 00:01:26.640 ago
SPF algorithm executed 4 times
Number of LSA 3. Checksum 0x0204bf
Area 1 (NSSA)
Number of interfaces in this area is 1(1)
Number of fully adjacent neighbors in this area is 0
Number of fully adjacent virtual neighbors through this area
is 0
Area has no authentication
SPF algorithm last executed 02:09:23.040 ago
SPF algorithm executed 4 times
.
4-69
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Number of LSA 6. Checksum 0x028638
NSSA Translator State iselected
The fields in the displayed results are described as follows:
Field
Description
Router id
Router id
Effective time of the current OSPF
Process uptime
process (the process does not take
effect when the device-id is 0.0.0.0)
Bound to VRF
The VRF of the current OSPF
Conforms to RFC2328
The same as the RFC2328
Whether the RFC1583 or RFC2328
is adopted for the calculation of
RFC1583Compatibility flag
external route.
This policy is used in the selection
of best ASBR and in the route
comparison.
Support Tos
Only TOS0 is supported.
Supports opaque LSA
Supporting opaque-LSA
Device Type
OSPF device type, including
normal, ABR, and ASBR
Delay before the SPF calculation is
invoked after the topology change is
SPF Delay
received
SPF-holdtime
Minimum holdtime between two
SPF calculations
This parameter is used for LSA
LsaGroupPacing
pacing, checksum calculation, and
aging interval.
Number of neighbors under
Incomming current DD
interaction. The incoming neighbors
exchange neighbors
are those entering the exstart status
for the first time.
Number of neighbors under
Outgoing current DD
exchange neighbors
interaction. The outgoing neighbors
are those exiting from the higher
status to the exstart status for
re-interaction.
Number of external LSA
.
Number of external LSAs stored in
the database
4-70
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
External LSA Checksum
Checksum sum of external LSAs
Sum
stored in the database
Number of opaque LSA
Number of external LSAs stored in
the database
Opaque LSA Checksum
Checksum sum of external LSAs
Sum
stored in the database
Number of non-default
Number of external LSAs with
external LSA
non-default routes
External LSA database
limit
Exit database overflow
state interval
Database overflow state
Limit of external LSA number
Time of exiting the overflow status
Whether the current OSPF process
is in the overflow status
Number of LSA originated
Number of LSAs generated
Number of LSA received
Number of LSAs received
Log Neighbor Adjency
Whether the record switch for
Changes
neighbor status change is enabled
Number of areas attached
Total number of areas on the
to this device
devices
Area type, including normal, stub,
Area type
and nssa
Number of interfaces in
this area
Number of interfaces in this area
Number of fully adjacent
Number of Full neighbors of the
neighbors in this area
area
Number of fully adjacent
virtual neighbors through
this area
Number of Full neighbors with
virtual connections in the area. It is
effective only in the non-backbone
default-type areas.
Area authentication
Authentication mode of the area
SPF algorithm last
Time from the previous SPF
executed
calculation to the current time
SPF algorithm executed
times
Number of LSA
Checksum Sum
.
Times of SPF calculations
Total number of LSAs in this area
Checksum sum of the LSAs in the
area
4-71
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Whether to convert the NSSA LSA
to External LSA. It is effective on
NSSA Translator State
the ABR OSPF process in the
NSSA area.
4.2.2
show ip ospf border-routers
Use this command to show the OSPF internal routing table on the ABR/ASBR in
the privileged user mode.
show ip ospf [process-id] border-mrouters
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
process-id
OSPF process ID
Command
mode
Privileged user mode.
This command shows the OSPF internal routes from the
local routing device to the ABR or ASBR. The OSPF
Usage
internal routing table is different from the one displayed
guidelines
with the show ip route command. The OSPF internal
routing table has destination address of the router id
instead of destination network.
The output results of the show ip ospf border-mrouters
command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf border-devices
OSPF internal Routing Table
Codes: i - Intra-area route, I - Inter-area route
i 1.1.1.1 [2] via 10.0.0.1, FastEthernet 0/1, ABR, ASBR,
Examples
Area 0.0.0.1 select
The fields in the displayed results are described as
follows:
Field
Description
Route
Codes
type
code,
where
“i”
means intra-area routes, while “I”
means inter-area routes.
I
Intra-area routes
.
4-72
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
1.1.1.1
Show the OSPF ID of the border
device.
Show the cost to the border
[2]
device.
via 10.0.0.1
FastEthernet 0/1
Show the next-hop gateway to
the border device.
Show the interface to the border
device.
Show the type of the border
ABR, ASBR
device, including ABR, ASBR, or
both
Area 0.0.0.1
Show the area that learns the
route
When there are multiple paths to
the ASBR, the select indicates
select
the currently selected optimal
path.
4.2.3
show ip ospf database
Use this command to show the OSPF link state database information in the
privileged user mode.
Different formats of the command will display different LSA information.
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [adv-device ip-address]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [self-originate | max-age]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [device] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [device] [adv-device
ip address
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [device] [self-originate]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [network][link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [network] [link-state-id]
[adv-device ip-address]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [network] [link-state-id]
[self-originate]
.
4-73
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id]
[adv-device ip-address]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [summary] [link-state-id]
[self-originate]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [asbr-summary]
[link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [asbr-summary]
[link-state-id] [adv-device ip-address]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [asbr-summary]
[link-state-id] [self-originate]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [external] [link-state-id]
show
ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [external] [link-state-id]
[adv-device ip-address]
show
ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [external] [link-state-id]
[self-originate]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [nssa-external]
[link-state-id]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id] database [nssa-external]
[link-state-id] [adv-device ip-address]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id]database [nssa-external] [link-state-id]
[self-originate | maxage]
show ip ospf [process-id area-id]database [database-summary]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
area-id
(Optional) Area ID displayed
description
(Optional) Show the LSA
adv-device
information generated by the
specified advertising device.
(Optional) Show the LSA
link-state-id
information of the specified OSPF
link state identifier.
(Optional) Show the LSA
self-originate
information generated by the device
itself.
.
4-74
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
(Optional) Display the LSAs aged.
maxage
(Optional) Show the OSPF device
device
LSA information.
(Optional) Show the OSPF network
network
LSA information.
(Optional) Show the OSPF
summary
summary LSA information.
(Optional) Show the ASBR
asbr-summary
summary LSA information.
(Optional) Show the OSPF external
external
LSA information.
(Optional) Show the category 7
nssa-external
OSPF external LSA information.
opaque-area
(Optional) Show type 10 LSAs.
opaque-as
(Optional) Show type 11 LSAs.
opaque-link
(Optional) Show type 9 LSAs.
database-summary
Default
(Optional) Show the statistics of
LSAs of the link state database.
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
When the OSPF link state database is very large, you
Usage
should show the information on the link state database in
guidelines
many ways. Proper use of these commands may help
OSPF troubleshooting.
The output results of the show ip ospf database
command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Device Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Examples
Link ID
ADV Device
Age
Seq#
CkSum Link
count
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.1
2
0x80000011 0x6f39 2
3.3.3.3
3.3.3.3
120
0x80000002 0x26ac 1
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID
ADV Device
.
Age
Seq#
CkSum
4-75
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
192.88.88.27
1.1.1.1
120
0x80000001 0x5366
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link ID
ADV Device
Age
Seq#
CkSum
1.1.1.1
2
0x80000003 0x350d
1.1.1.1
2
0x8000000c 0x1ecb
Route
10.0.0.0
10.0.0.0/24
100.0.0.0
100.0.0.0/16
Device Link States (Area 0.0.0.1 [NSSA])
Link ID
ADV Device
Age
Seq#
CkSum Link
count
1.1.1.1
1.1.1.1
2
0x80000001 0x91a2 1
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1 [NSSA])
Link ID
ADV Device
Age
Seq#
CkSum
1.1.1.1
2
0x80000001 0x52a4
1.1.1.1
2
0x80000001 0xbb2d
Route
100.0.0.0
100.0.0.0/16
192.88.88.0
192.88.88.0/24
NSSA-external Link States (Area 0.0.0.1 [NSSA])
Link ID
ADV Device
Route
Age
Seq#
CkSum
Tag
20.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
20.0.0.0/24
0
100.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
100.0.0.0/28
1
0x80000001 0x033c E2
1
0x80000001 0x9469 E2
Age
Seq#
380
0x8000000a 0x7627 E2
620
0x8000000a 0x0854 E2
0
AS External Link States
Link ID
ADV Device
Route
CkSum
Tag
20.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
20.0.0.0/24
0
100.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
100.0.0.0/28
0
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device with ID
Router id
Device Link States
Net Link States
Show
the
device
LSA
network
LSA
information.
Show
the
information.
Summary Net Link
Show the summary network
States
LSA information.
NSSA-external Link
Show the type 7 autonomous
States
external LSA information.
AS External
Show the type 5 autonomous
.
4-76
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Link States
external LSA information.
Link ID
Link ID
ID of the device that advertises
ADV Device
the LSAs
Show the live period of the
Age
LSA.
Show the sequentce number
of the LSA, which is used to
Seq#
check aged or duplicate LSA.
Show the checksum of the
Cksum
LSAs.
Show the number of links in
Link-Count
the device LSA information.
Show the device information
Route
included in the LSA.
Tag
Show the tag of the LSA
The output results of the show ip ospf database
asbr-summary command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database asbr-summary
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.35) (Process ID 1)
ASBR-Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.1)
LS age: 47
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: ASBR-summary-LSA
Link State ID: 3.3.3.3 (AS Boundary Device address)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0xbe8c
Length: 28
Network Mask: /0
TOS: 0 Metric: 1
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database asbr-summary command are described as
follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device with ID
Router id
AS
Show
Summary
States
Link
the
summary
LSA
information in the AS.
Show the live period of the
LS age
LSA.
Options
.
Option
4-77
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising Device
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the device advertising
the LSA.
Show the sequentce number
of the LSA.
Show the checksum of the
LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of
Length
the LSA.
Show the network mask of the
Network Mask
route corresponding to the
LSA.
TOS value, which can be 0
TOS
only now.
Show the metric of the route
Metric
corresponding to the LSA.
The output results of the show ip ospf database
external command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database external
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.35) (Process ID 1)
AS External Link States
LS age: 752
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: AS-external-LSA
Link State ID: 20.0.0.0 (External Network Number)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 8000000a
Checksum: 0x7627
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)
TOS: 0
Metric: 20
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 0
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database external command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device with ID
Router id
Type-5 AS External
Show
Link States
LSA information.
.
autonomous
external
4-78
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Show the live period of the
LS age
LSA.
Options
Option
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising Device
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the device advertising
the LSA
Show the sequentce number
of the LSA.
Show the checksum of the
LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of
Length
the LSA.
Show the network mask of the
Network Mask
route corresponding to the
LSA.
Metric Type
Indicate the external link type.
TOS value, which can be 0
TOS
only now.
Show the metric of the route
Metric
corresponding to the LSA.
IP
address
through
which
traffic is forwarded to the
destination network. If this
Forward Address
address is 0.0.0.0, the data
traffic will be forwarded to the
device that generates the link
state.
External
route
tag.
Each
external route has a 32-byte
route tag. The OSPF does not
External Route Tag
use the route tag by itself, but it
will be used in redistributing
OSPF routes by other routing
process.
The output results of the show ip ospf database
network command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database network
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Network Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
.
4-79
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
LS age: 572
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: network-LSA
Link State ID: 192.88.88.27 (address of Designated
Device)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x5366
Length: 32
Network Mask: /24
Attached Device: 1.1.1.1
Attached Device: 3.3.3.3
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database network command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device with ID
Router id
Network Link States
Show
the
network
LSA
information.
Show the live period of the
LS age
LSA.
Options
Option
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising Device
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the device advertising
the LSA.
Show
the
sequentce
number of the LSA.
Show the checksum of the
LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes)
Length
of the LSA.
Show the network mask of
Network Mask
the network corresponding
to the LSA.
Attached Device
Show the device that is
connected with the network.
The output results of the show ip ospf database device
command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database device
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Device Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 322
.
4-80
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
Flags: 0x3 : ABR ASBR
LS Type: device-LSA
Link State ID: 1.1.1.1
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000012
Checksum: 0x6d3a
Length: 48
Number of Links: 2
Link connected to: Stub Network
(Link ID) Network/subnet number: 100.0.1.1
(Link Data) Network Mask: 255.255.255.255
Number of TOS metrics: 0
TOS 0 Metric: 0
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database device command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device
with ID
Device Link
States
Router id
Show the device LSA information.
LS age
Show the live period of the LSA.
Options
Option
Flag
Flag
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising
Show the device advertising the
Device
LSA.
LS Seq
Show the sequentce number of the
Number
LSA.
Checksum
Show the checksum of the LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of the
Length
LSA.
Number of
Show the number of links associated
Links
with the device.
Link connected
Show what the link is connected to
to
and the network type.
(Link ID)
Link identifier
(Link Data)
Link data
.
4-81
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Number of TOS
metrics
TOS 0 Metrics
TOS value; support TOS0 only
TOS0 metric
The output results of the show ip ospf database
summary command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database summary
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
Summary Link States (Area 0.0.0.0)
LS age: 499
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: summary-LSA
Link State ID: 10.0.0.0 (summary Network Number)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000004
Checksum: 0x330e
Length: 28
Network Mask: /24
TOS: 0 Metric: 11
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database summary command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF Device
with ID
Router id
Summary Net
Show the summary network LSA
Link States
information.
LS age
Show the live period of the LSA.
Options
Option
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising
Show the device advertising the
Device
LSA.
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the sequentce number of
the LSA.
Show the checksum of the LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of the
Length
LSA.
Network Mask
Show the network mask of the
route corresponding to the LSA.
TOS value, which can be 0 only
TOS
now.
.
4-82
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Show the metric of the route
Metric
corresponding to the LSA.
The output results of the show ip ospf database
nssa-external command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database nssa-external
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
NSSA-external Link States (Area 0.0.0.1 [NSSA])
LS age: 1
Options: 0x0 (*|-|-|-|-|-|-|-)
LS Type: AS-NSSA-LSA
Link State ID: 20.0.0.0 (External Network Number For NSSA)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 80000001
Checksum: 0x033c
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)
TOS: 0
Metric: 20
NSSA: Forward Address: 100.0.2.1
External Route Tag: 0
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database nssa-external command are described as
follows:
Field
Description
OSPF
Device
with ID
Router id
NSSA-external
Show the type 7 autonomous
Link States
external LSA information.
LS age
Show the live period of the LSA.
Options
Option
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising
Show the device advertising the
Device
LSA.
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the sequential number of the
LSA.
Show the checksum of the LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of the
Length
LSA.
Network Mask
.
Show the network mask of the
route corresponding to the LSA.
4-83
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Metric Type
Show the metric type.
TOS value, which can be 0 only
TOS
now.
Show the metric of the route
Metric
corresponding to the LSA.
IP address through which traffic is
forwarded to the destination
NSSA:Forward
network. If this address is 0.0.0.0,
Address
the data traffic will be forwarded to
the device that generates the link
state.
External route tag. Each external
route has a 32-byte route tag. The
External
Route
Tag
OSPF does not use the route tag
by itself, but it will be used in
redistributing OSPF routes by
other routing process.
The output results of the show ip ospf database external
command are as follows:
RDGS-8000# show ip ospf database external
OSPF Device with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process ID 1)
AS External Link States
LS age: 1290
Options: 0x2 (*|-|-|-|-|-|E|-)
LS Type: AS-external-LSA
Link State ID: 20.0.0.0 (External Network Number)
Advertising Device: 1.1.1.1
LS Seq Number: 8000000a
Checksum: 0x7627
Length: 36
Network Mask: /24
Metric Type: 2 (Larger than any link state path)
TOS: 0
Metric: 20
Forward Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 0
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
database external command are described as follows:
Field
Description
OSPF
Device
with ID
.
Router id
4-84
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Type-7
AS
External
Show the type 7 autonomous
external LSA information.
Link States
LS age
Show the live period of the LSA.
Options
Option
LS Type
Show the type of the LSA.
Link State ID
Show the link ID of the LSA.
Advertising
Show the device advertising the
Device
LSA.
LS Seq Number
Checksum
Show the sequentce number of
the LSA.
Show the checksum of the LSAs.
Show the length (in bytes) of the
Length
LSA.
Network Mask
Metric Type
Show the network mask of the
route corresponding to the LSA.
Show the metric type.
TOS value, which can be 0 only
TOS
now.
Show the metric of the route
Metric
corresponding to the LSA.
IP address through which traffic is
forwarded to the destination
Forward Address
network. If this address is 0.0.0.0,
the data traffic will be forwarded to
the device that generates the link
state.
External route tag. Each external
route has a 32-byte route tag. The
External
Route
Tag
OSPF does not use the route tag
by itself, but it will be used in
redistributing OSPF routes by
other routing process.
Following is the display result of show ip ospf database
database-summary command:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf database database-summary
OSPF process 1:
Device Link States
: 4
Network Link States
: 2
Summary Link States
: 4
.
4-85
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
ASBR-Summary Link States : 0
AS External Link States
: 4
NSSA-external Link States: 2
The description of the fields displayed with the command
show ip ospf database database-summary is as below:
Field
Description
OSPF Process
OSPF process ID
Device Link
Number of device LSAs in the area
Network Link
Summary Link
area
Number of summary LSAs in the
area
ASBR-Summary
Number of ASBR summary LSAs
Link
in the area
AS External Link
Number of NSSA LSAs in the area
NSSA-external
Link
4.2.4
Number of network LSAs in the
Number of NSSA LSAs in the area
show ip ospf interface
Use this command to show the OSPF-associated interface information in the
privileged user mode.
show ip ospf interface [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
Parameter
description
interface-type
interface-number
Default
Description
(Optional)
type
of
the
specified
interface
(Optional) number of the specified
interface
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command shows the OSPF information on the
guidelines
interface.
Examples
The output results of the show ip ospf interface
fastEthernet 0/1 command are as follows:
.
4-86
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
DGS-8000# show ip ospf interface fastEthernet 0/1
FastEthernet 0/1 is up, line protocol is up
Internet
Address
192.88.88.27/24,
Ifindex
4,
Area
0.0.0.0, MTU 1500
Matching network config: 192.88.88.0/24
Process ID 1, Router ID 1.1.1.1, Network Type BROADCAST,
Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1, BFD enabled
Designated
Router
(ID)
1.1.1.1,
Interface
Address
192.88.88.27
Backup Designated Router (ID) 3.3.3.3, Interface Address
192.88.88.72
Timer
intervals
configured,Hello
10,Dead
40,Wait
40,Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:03
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1
Crypt Sequence Number is 70784
Hello received 1786 sent 1787, DD received 13 sent 8
LS-Req received 2 sent 2, LS-Upd received 29 sent 53
LS-Ack received 46 sent 23, Discarded 1
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
interface serial 1/0 command are described as follows:
Field
Description
FastEthernet
0/1
State
State of the network interface;
UP means normal working
and Down means faults.
Internet Address
Interface IP address
Area
OSPF area of the interface
MTU
Corresponding MTU
Matching
network
Network area configured for
config
the corresponding OSPF
Process ID
Corresponding process ID
Router id
OSPF router id
Network Type
OSPF network type
Cost
OSPF interface cost
Transmit Delay is
OSPF interface transmit delay
State
DR/BDR state ID
.
4-87
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Priority
Priority of the interface
Designated
DR ID of the interface
Device(ID)
DR's
Interface
address
interface
Backup designated
Router id of the BRD of the
device(ID)
interface
BDR's
Interface
address
Time
intervals
is sent
neighbor
count
Sequence
Number
Hello received send
DD received send
LS-Req received send
LS-Upd received send
LS-Ack received send
Discard
Retransmit intervals of the
Time when the previous Hello
Neighbor count
Crypt
The Hello, Dead, Wait, and
interface
Hello due in
Adjacent
Address of the BDR of the
interface
configured
4.2.5
Address of the DR of the
Total number of neighbors
Number of Full neighbors
The
corresponding
md5
authentication number of the
interface
Statistics on the Hello packets
sent and received
Statistics on the DD packets
sent and received
Statistics on the LS request
packets sent and received
Statistics on the LS update
packets sent and received
Statistics on the LS response
packets sent and received
Statistics on the discarded
OSPF packets
show ip ospf neighbor
Use this command to show the OSPF neighbor list in the privileged user mode.
show ip ospf [process-id] neighbor [[detail] | [[interface-type
interface-number] [neighbor-id]]]
.
4-88
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Parameter
description
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Description
Detail
(Optional) Show the neighbor details.
interface-type
(Optional)
interface-number
information of the specified interface
neighbor-id
Default
Show
the
neighbor
(Optional) Show the information of the
specified neighbor
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command shows neighbor information usually used to
guidelines
check whether the OSPF is running normally.
The output results of the show ip ospf neighbor
command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf neighbor
Neighbor 3.3.3.3, interface address 192.88.88.72
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface FastEthernet 0/1
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 11 state changes
DR is 192.88.88.27, BDR is 192.88.88.72
Options is 0x52 (*|O|-|EA|-|-|E|-)
Dead timer due in 00:00:32
Neighbor is up for 05:11:27
Examples
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
Crypt Sequence Number is 0
Thread Inactivity Timer on
Thread Database Description Retransmission off
Thread Link State Request Retransmission off
Thread Link State Update Retransmission off
Thread Poll Timer on
Graceful-restart helper disabled
.
4-89
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
BFD session state up
The fields in the displayed results of the show ip ospf
neighbor command are described as follows:
Field
Description
Neighbor ID
Neighbor ID
Neighbor priority (for selection of
Pri
DR)
State
Neighbor status
Dead Time
Address
Interface
interface address
In the area
via interface
Neighbor priority
Remaining time for the neighbor
to enter the Dead status
The
corresponding
interface
address of the neighbor
The corresponding interface of
the neighbor
The interface address of the
neighbor device
Show the area that learns the
neighbor.
Show the interface that learns the
neighbor
Priority of the neighbor OSPF
OSPF neighbor connection state.
FULL means the stable state; DR
indicates that the neighbor is the
designated
device;
BDR
indicates that the neighbor is the
State
backup
designated
device;
DROTHER indicates that the
neighbor
is
not
a
DR/BDR.
Point-to-point network type has
no DR or DBR.
State changes
times
Dead Time
Times of state changes
Dead time of the neighbor
Interface address of the DR
elected of the neighbor device
DR
(that is, the DR field of the Hello
packet)
.
4-90
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Interface address of the BDR
elected of the neighbor device
BDR
(that is, the BDR field of the Hello
packet)
Hello packet E-bit option, where 0
Options
indicates that the area is a STUB
area; 2 indicates that the area is
not a STUB area.
Dead timer due in
Neighbor up time
Period from when the device is
discovered till now
Database
Statistics on the neighbor DD
Summary List
packets
Link State
Statistics on the neighbor LS
Request List
request packets
Link State
Retransmission
List
Crypt Sequence
Number
Thread Inactivity
Timer
Thread Database
Description
Retransmission
Thread Link State
Request
Retransmission
Thread Link State
Update
Retransmission
Thread Poll Timer
4.2.6
Dead time of the neighbor device
Statistics
on
the
neighbor
re-transmit packets
Area MD5 authentication code
Status of invalid neighbor timer
Status of DD packet timer of the
interface
Status of LS request packet timer
of the interface
Status of LS update packet timer
of the interface
Poll Timer start status of the static
neighbor
show ip ospf route
Use this command to show the OSPF routes.
show ip ospf [process-id] route [count]
.
4-91
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
Parameter
Parameter
Description
OSPF process ID. All OSPF routes
process-id
description
will be shown without an ID specified.
Show the statistics of various OSPF
Count
routes.
Command
Privileged mode.
mode
DGS-8000# show ip ospf route
OSPF process 1:
Codes: C - connected, D - Discard, O - OSPF,
IA - OSPF inter area
N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 -
OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2
E2 100.0.0.0/24 [1/20] via 192.88.88.126, FastEthernet 0/1
Examples
C
192.88.88.0/24 [1] is directly connected,FastEthernet
0/1,Area 0.0.0.1
The description of every field shown via command show ip
ospf routeis as below:
Field
Description
Route type and correspond abbreviation
codes
4.2.7
and description
100.0.0.0/24
Route prefix
[1]
Route cost
via
Route next hop and interface
show ip ospf spf
Use this command to show the routing count in the OSPF area.
show ip ospf [process-id] spf
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
process-id
OSPF process ID.
Command
mode
Privileged User mode.
.
4-92
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
This command is used to show the routing counts within
Usage
the latest 30 minutes in the OSPF area and current routing
guidelines
total counts.
DGS-8000# show ip ospf 1 spf
OSPF process 1:
Area_id
Examples
30min_counts
0
32
1
6
1235
356
The description of every field shown via command show ip
ospf [process-id] spf as below:
Field
Description
Area_id
OSPF area ID.
30min_counts
Total_counts
4.2.8
Total_counts
The OSPF routing counts within the latest
30 minutes.
Total counts of the OSPF routing till now.
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip ospf
Show the OSPF summary.
show ip ospf summary-address
Use this command to show the converged route of all redistributed routes in the
privileged user mode.
show ip ospf summary-address
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
This command is valid only on the NSSA ABR, and shows
guidelines
only the routes with local convergence operation.
The
output
results
of
the
show
ip
ospf
summary-address command are as follows:
Examples
DGS-8000#show ip ospf summary-address
Summary Address Summary Mask
Advertise
Status
Aggregated subnets
------------- ------------- ------------- -------.
4-93
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
-------------202.101.0.0
255.255.0.0
advertise
Inactive 0
DGS-8000#
Parameter
Description
Summary Address
IP address to be converged
Summary Mask
Mask to be converged
Advertise
Whether
to
advertise
the
converged route
The convergence range takes
Status
effect or not
Number of external routes
Aggregated subnets
included in the converged
route
4.2.9
show ip ospf virtual-link
Use this command to show the OSPF virtual link information in the privileged
user mode.
show ip ospf [process-id] virtual-link
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
If no virtual link is configured, the command only shows the
Usage
neighbor status as well as other related information. The
guidelines
show ip ospf neighbor command does not show the
neighbor of virtual link.
The output results of the show ip ospf virtual-links
command are as follows:
DGS-8000# show ip ospf virtual-links
Virtual Link VLINK0 to device 1.1.1.1 is up
Transit area 0.0.0.1 via interface FastEthernet 0/1
Local address 10.0.0.37/32
Examples
Remote address 10.0.0.27/32
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State Point-To-Point,
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40,
Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:05
Adjacency state Full
The fields in the displayed results are described as
.
4-94
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 4 OSPFv2 Commands
follows:
Field
Description
Virtual Link VLINK0
Show
the
virtual
link
to device
neighbors and their status.
Virtual Link State
Show the virtual link state.
Show the transit area of the
Transit area
virtual link.
Show the associated interface
via interface
of the virtual link.
Local address
Local interface address
Remote Address
Peer interface address
Transmit Delay
State
Show the transmit delay of
the virtual link.
Interface state
Time
intervals
configured
Adjacency State
.
The Hello, Dead, Wait, and
Retransmit interval of the
interface
Neighbor state, where FULL
means the stable state
4-95
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5
5.1
5.1.1
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
OSPFv3 Commands
Configuration Related Commands
area default-cost
Use this command to set the cost of the default route for the ABR in the stub
area. Use the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
area area-id default-cost cost
no area area-id default-cost
Parameter
Parameter
area-id
description
cost
Description
Area ID of the stub area.
It can be an integer or an IPv4 prefix.
Cost of the default route of the stub
area in the range 1 to 16777214.
Default
configuration
By default, the cost of the default route is 1.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
Usage
This command can only work in the ABR connected to the
guidelines
stub area.
The following example sets the cost of the default route of
stub area 50 to 100.
Examples
ipv6 router ospf 1
area 50 stub
area 50 default-cost 100
Related
Command
Description
commands
area stub
Set a stub area.
5-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
show ipv6
ospf area
5.1.2
Show the OSPFv3 area information.
area-range
Use this command to set the range of the converged inter-area addresses. Use
the no form of this command to remove the setting or restore it to the default
setting.
area area-id range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length [advertise|not-advertise]
no area area-id range ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Parameter
Description
ID of the area in which the
addresses are converged.
area-id
It can be an integer or an IPv4
prefix.
Parameter
description
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Range
of
the
converged
addresses.
The range of the converged
addresses is not advertised.
not-advertise
By
default,
the
function
is
enabled.
Default
configuration
No converged inter-area address range is defined.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
This command applies only to ABR. Use this command to
converge multiple routes of an area into one route and
Usage
advertise it to other areas. In this way, the number of the
guidelines
routes in the OSPF AS is reduced.
Use no area area-id to delete the area including all the
configuration of the area.
The following example converges the routes in area 1.
Examples
ipv6 router ospf 1
area 1 range 2001:abcd:1:2::/64
Related
Command
Description
5-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Add the discard route generated by
discard-route
the OSPF process to the core routing
table.
summary-prefix
5.1.3
Set the range of the external routes to
be converged.
area stub
Use this command to create a stub area or set its attributes. Use the no form of
this command to restore the stub area to an ordinary area or delete its
configuration.
area area-id stub [no-summary]
no area area-id stub [no-summary]
Parameter
area-id
Description
ID of the stub.
It can be an integer or an IPv6 prefix.
Parameter
This option applies only to the ABR in
description
the stub area, indicating that the ABR
no-summary
only
advertises
the
type
3
LSA
indicating the default route to the stub
area, not other type 3 LSAs.
Default
configuration
None.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
Use no area area-id stub command to restore the area as
a common area.
Use no area area-id to delete the area including all the
configuration of the area.
Usage
By default, the ABR in the stub area only generates and
guidelines
then advertises the type 3 LSA indicating the default route
to the stub area. While the ABR in the NSSA area
generates and then advertises the type 3 LSA indicating
the default route to the NSSA area only after no-summary
is used.
Examples
The following example enables the ABR in stub area 10 to
5-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
advertise the default route to the stub area.
ipv6 router ospf 1
area 10 stub
area 10 stub no-summary
Related
commands
Command
Description
area
Set the cost of the default route in the
default-cost
stub area.
show ipv6 ospf
area
5.1.4
Show the OSPFv3 area information.
area virtual-link
Use this command to create a virtual link or set its parameters. Use the no form
of this command to delete the virtual link or restore it to the default setting.
area area-id virtual-link router-id [hello-interval seconds] [dead-interval
seconds] [retransmit-interval seconds] [transmit-delay seconds] [instance
instance-id]
no
area
area-id
virtual-link
router-id
[hello-interval]
[dead-interval][retransmit-interval] [transmit-delay] [instance]
Parameter
Description
ID of the area in which the virtual link
area-id
is located.
It can be an integer or an IPv6
prefix.
Router-id
Neighbor router ID of the virtual link.
Set the interval to send the hello
hello-interval
message on the local virtual link
seconds
interface in the range from 1 to
65535s. The default value is 10s.
Parameter
Interval for the local interface of the
description
virtual link to wait before considering
dead-interval
that the neighbor fails.
seconds
Its range is 1 to 65535s, and the
default value is four times the value
of hello-interval.
Specify the interval for the local
retransmit-interval
seconds
interface
of
the
virtual
link
to
retransmit LSA.
The range is from 1 to 65535s, and
the default value is 5s.
transmit-delay
Specify the delay for the local
5-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
seconds
interface of the virtual link to wait
before sending LSA.
The range is from 1 to 65535s, the
default value is 1s.
instnace
Specify the instance corresponding
instance-id
to the virtual like.
Default
configuration
No virtual link is defined.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
In the OSPF AS, all the areas must be connected with the
backbone area to ensure that they can learn the routes of
the whole OSPF AS. If an area cannot be directly
connected with the backbone area, it can connect it
through a virtual link.
Note:
Usage
guidelines

The virtual link shall not be in the stub or NSSA area.

hello-interval, dead-interval and instance shall be
configured consistently on both sides of the virtual
link, otherwise neighboring relationship cannot be set
up between the virtual neighbors.

Use no area area-id to delete the area including all
the configuration of the area.
The following example configures a virtual link.
Examples
ipv6 router ospf 1
area 1 virtual-link 192.1.1.1
Command
show ipv6 ospf
Related
commands
Description
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
information.
show ipv6 ospf
Show the OSPFv3 neighbor
neighbor
information.
show ipv6 ospf
Show the OSPFv3 virtual link
virtual-links
information.
5-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.5
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
auto-cost
The metric of the OSPF protocol is the interface-based bandwidth. Use this
command to enable the bandwidth-based interface metric calculation or modify
the reference bandwidth. Use the no form of this command to disable the
bandwidth-based interface metric calculation or restore it to the default
reference bandwidth.
auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw]
no auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
reference-bandwidth
ref-bw
Specify the reference bandwidth
In the range 1 to 4294967 Mbps.
The default value is 100Mbps.
Default
The interface metric is calculated based on the reference
configuration
bandwidth, which is 100Mbps.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
Use no auto-cost reference-bandwidth to restore it to
the default reference bandwidth.
Usage
You can use ipv6 ospf cost in the interface configuration
guidelines
mode to set the cost of the specified interface, and it takes
precedence over the metric calculated based on the
reference bandwidth.
The following example changes the reference bandwidth to
Examples
10M.
ipv6 router ospf 1
auto-cost reference-bandwidth 5
Command
Description
Related
ipv6 ospf cost
Set the cost of the interface.
commands
show
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
ospf
ipv6
information.
5-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.6
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
bdf all-interfaces(OSPFv3)
Use this command to enable the BDF on all OSPFv3 interfaces. The no form of
this command restores it to the default setting.
bdf all-interfaces
no bdf all-interfaces
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The OSPFv3 protocol dynamically discovers the neighbors
through the Hello packets. With the BFD function enabled,
one BFD session will be established for the neighbors that
match the FULL rules and the status of the neighbors will
be detected through the BFD mechanism. Once the BFD
Usage
neighbor fails, the OSPFv3 will perform the network
guidelines
convergence immediately.
You can also use the interface configuration mode
command ipv6 ospf bfd [disable] to enable or disable the
BFD function on the specified interface, which takes
precedence over the command bfd all-interfaces in the
routing process configuration mode.
Examples
N/A
Command
Related
commands
Description
ipv6 router ospf
process-id
ipv6
ospf
and enter into the routing process
configuration mode.
bfd
[ disable ]
5.1.7
Create the OSPFv3 routing process
Enable or disable the BFD on the
specified OSPFv3 interfaces.
clear ipv6 ospf process
Use this command to clear and restart the OSPF process.
clear ipv6 ospf {process | process-id]
Parameter
description
Parameter
process-id
Description
OSPF process ID ranging from 1 to
65535
5-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
In normal case, it is not necessary to use this command.
The example below restarts the OSPF process.
Examples
en
clear ipv6 ospf process
5.1.8
default-information originate
Use this command to generate a default route to the OSPF routing domain in
the routing process mode. The no form of this command disables the default
route.
default-information originate [always] [metric metric] [metric-type type]
[route-map map-name]
no default-information originate [always] [metric] [metric-type] [route-map
map-name]
Parameter
Description
(Optional) Generate the default route
always
unconditionally, no matter whether the
default route exists locally or not.
(Optional) Initial metric value of the
metric metric
default route, with the valid range of 0 to
16777214, 1 by default
Parameter
(Optional) Type of the default route.
settings
There are two type of OSPF external
routes: type 1, different metrics seen on
metric-type
different routers; type 2, the same
type
metric
sees
on
different
routers.
External route of type 1 is more
trustworthy than that of type 2. By
default, it is type 2.
Default
route-map
Associated
route-map
name,
map-name
associated route-map by default
no
None
5-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode
When the redistribute or default-information command
is executed, the OSPF-enabled router automatically turns
into the autonomous system border router (ASBR). But the
ASBR cannot generate default route automatically or
advertise it to all the routers in the OSPF routing domain.
The ASBR generates default routes by default. It is
required
to
configure
with
the
default-information
originate routing process configuration command.
If the always parameter is used, the OSPF routing process
advertises an external default route to the neighbors, no
matter whether the default route exists or not. However,
the local router does not show the default route. To make
sure whether the default route is generated, execute show
ipv6 ospf database to observe the OSPF link state
Usage
database. The external link identified with 0.0.0.0 indicates
guideline
the default route. The execution of the show ipv6 route
command on the OSPF neighbor will display the default
route.
The metric of the external default route can be defined only
with the default-information originate command instead
of the default-metric command.
There are two types of OSPF external routes: type 1
external routes have changeable routing metrics, while
type 2 external routes have constant routing metrics. For
two parallel routes with the same route metric to the same
destination network, type 1 takes precedence over type 2.
As a result, the show ipv6 route command shows only the
type 1 route.
The routers in the stub area cannot generate external
default routes.
The configuration example below generates a default
Examples
route.
default-information originate always
Related
Command
Description
commands
redistribute
Redistribute routes.
5-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Show the OSPFv3 route
show ipv6 ospf
information.
5.1.9
show ipv6 ospf
Show OSPFv3 link state
database
database
default-metric
Use this command to set the default metric for the routes to be redistributed.
Use the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
default-metric metric-value
no default-metric
Parameter
Default metric for the routes to be
Parameter
description
Description
metric-value
redistributed.
Its range is 1 to 16777214, and the
default value is 20.
Default
configuration
20.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
This command can be used with redistribute together to
set the default metric for the routes to be redistributed. But
this command does not appliy to two types of routes:
Usage
guidelines
1.
The default route generated with default-information
originate;
2.
The redistributed direct route, which always uses 20
as the default metric value.
The following example sets the default metric for the routes
Examples
to be redistributed to 10.
default-metric 10
Related
Command
Description
5-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
redistribute
show ipv6 ospf
5.1.10
Redistribute the routes.
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
information.
distance
Use this command to set the management distance of different types of
OSPFv3 routes. The no form of this command restores it to the defualt setting.
distance {distance | ospf { intra-area distance | inter-area distance | external
distance }}
no distance [ospf]
Parameter
intra-area
distance
Parameter
description
inter-area
distance
Description
Set the management distance of the
inner-area route, in the range of 1 to
255.
Set the management distance of the
inter-area route, in the range of 1 to
255.
external
Set the management distance of the
distance
external route, in the range of 1 to 255.
distance
Set the management distance of the
route, in the range of 1 to 255.
The default value is 110.
Default
Management distance of the inner-area route :110,
Management distance of the inter-area route :110
Management distance of the external-area route :110
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
This command is used to specify different management
Usage
guideline
s
distances for different types of OSPF routes. The
management distance of the route is used for the comparison
of routing priority, the smaller the management distance is, the
higher the routing priority.
5-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
The priority of the route generated by
different OSPFv3 processes must be
compared
using
the
management
distance.
Caution
Setting the management distance as 255
indicates the routing entry is untrusted
and it will not join the packet forwarding.
In the configuration below, the OSPFv3 external route
Examples
management distance is set as 160.
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance ospf external 160
Related
commands
Command
ipv6
router
ospf
5.1.11
Description
Start the OSPFv3 routing process .
ipv6 ospf area
Use this command to enable the interface to participate in the OSPFv3 routing
process. Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf process-id area [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Description
process-id
OSPF process ID.
OSPFv3 area in which the interface
Parameter
description
area area-id
participates in.
It can be an integer or an IPv6 prefix.
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
5-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Use this command to enable the interface to participate in
the OSPFv3 routing process. If ipv6 router ospf is not
used to start the OSPFv3 routing process, it will be
automatically started after this command is used.
Use no ipv6 ospf area to disable the specified interface
from participating in the OSPFv3 routing process.
Usage
guidelines
Use no ipv6 router ospf to disable all the interfaces from
participating in the OSPFv3 routing process.
Only the routers with the same instance ID can establish
neighbor relationship one another.
After this command is configured, all the prefix information
on the interface will be used in the operation of the
OSPFv3.
The following example starts the OSPFv3 process on int
fastethernet 0/0 for the specified area of the specified
Examples
instance.
int fastethernet 0/0
ipv6 ospf 1 area 2 instance 2
Related
commands
5.1.12
Command
Description
ipv6 ospf
Set the prefix information not to be
prefix-filter
advertised on the interface.
ipv6 router ospf
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
passive-interface
Set the passive interface.
show ipv6 ospf
Show
interface
information.
the
OSPFv3
interface
ipv6 ospf bdf
Use this command to enable or disable the BFD on the specifed OSPFv3
interface. The no form of this command is used to remove the setting on the
interface..
ipv6 ospf bfd [disable] [ instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf bfd [ instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
disable
description
instance
instance-id
Description
Disable
the
BFD
function
on
the
specified OSPF interface.
Configure
the
specified
OSPFv3
instance on the interface, in the range
5-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
of 0 to 255.
Default
configuration
N/A
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The command ipv6 ospf bfd in the interface configuration
mode takes precedence over the bfd all-interfaces
command in the routing process configuration mode.
You can use this command to enable the BFD on the
Usage
guidelines
specified interface according to the actual environment,
also can use the command bfd all-interfaces in the
OSPFv3 process configuration mode to enanble the BFD
function on all OSPF interfaces and use the command ip
v6 ospf bfd disable to disable the BFD on the specified
interface.
Examples
N/A
Command
Related
commands
Description
Create the OSPFv3 routing process
ipv6 router ospf
and enter into the routing process
process-id
configuration mode.
Enable the BFD on all OSPFv3
bdf all-interfaces
5.1.13
interfaces.
ipv6 ospf cost
Use this command to set the cost of the interface. Use the no form of this
command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf cost cost[instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf cost[instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Cost of the interface.
Cost
Its range is 1 to 65535, and the default
value is 10.
5-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
Default
configuration
10.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
By default, the cost of the interface is automatically
Usage
guidelines
calculated based on the bandwidth of the interface.
You can also use this command to modify the cost of the
interface, and it takes precedence over the metric value
based on the reference bandwidth.
Examples
The following example sets the cost of the interface to 1:
ipv6 ospf cost 1
Command
Related
commands
5.1.14
show
Description
ipv6
Show
the
OSPFv3
interface
ospf interface
information.
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
ipv6 ospf dead-interval
Use this command to set the interval for the interface to consider that the
neighbor fails. If the interface does not receive the hello message from the
neighbor, it considers that the neighbor fails. Use the no form of this command
to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf dead-interval [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
seconds
description
Description
Interval of the neighbor fails.
Its range is 1 to 65535(s).
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
5-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Default
configuration
Four times the value of ip ospf hello-interval.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
The dead time of neighbors shall be the same. Otherwise
they cannot establish normal adjacency.
By default, the dead interval is four times the hello interval.
If the hello interval changes, the dead interval changes
Usage
accordingly.
guidelines
It’s not recommended to modify the parameters directly. If
needed, note that:
1.
The dead interval shall be larger than the hello
interval sent by the neighbor.
2.
The same dead interval shall be set for the neighbors.
The following example sets the dead interval of the local
Examples
interface to 60s.
ipv6 ospf dead-interval 60
Command
Description
ipv6 ospf
Set the interval for the interface to send
hello-interval
the Hello message.
show ipv6 ospf
Show
interface
information.
instance
Configure
instance-id
instance on the interface
Related
commands
5.1.15
the
the
OSPFv3
specific
interface
OSPFv3
ipv6 ospf hello-interval
Use this command to set the interval for the interface to send the Hello
message. Use the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf hello-interval seconds [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf hello-interval [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
seconds
Description
Interval for sending the Hello message.
Its range is 1-65535(s).
5-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Default
configuration
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
The broadcast network and point-to-point network :10
seconds. The point-to-multipoint network and NBMA
network :30 seconds.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
The same hello interval must be set for the neighbors,
guidelines
otherwise they cannot establish normal adjacency.
The following example sets the interval for the interface to
Examples
send the Hello message to 20s.
ipv6 ospf hello-interval 20
Command
Description
ipv6 ospf
Set the interval for the interface to
dead-interval
consider that the neighbor fails.
show ipv6 ospf
Show
interface
information.
instance
Configure
instance-id
instance on the interface.
Related
commands
5.1.16
the
the
OSPFv3
specific
interface
OSPFv3
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
Use this command to disable the MTU check when an interface receives the
database description message. The no form of this command is used to restore
it to the default.
ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
instance
instance-id
Default
Description
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
on the interface, in the range of 0 to
255.
Enabled.
5-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
After receiving the database description message, the
device will check whether the MTU of neighbor interface is
Usage
the same as its own MTU. If the received database
guidelines
description message indicates an MTU greater than the
interface’s MTU, the neighbor relationship cannot be
established. This can be fixed by disabling the MTU check.
The configuration example below disables the MTU check
Examples
function on the interface ethernet 1/0.
DGS-8000(config)# interface ethernet 1/0
DGS-8000(config-if)# ipv6 ospf mtu-ignore
Command
Related
ipv6 router
commands
ospf
ipv6 mtu
5.1.17
Description
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
Set the MTU of the IPv6.
ipv6 ospf neighbor
Use this command to set the OSPFv3 neighbor manually. Use the no form of
this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf neighbor ipv6-address [[cost <1-65535>] [poll-interval
<0-2147483647> | priority <0-255>]] [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf neighbor ipv6-address [[cost <1-65535>] [poll-interval
<0-2147483647> | priority <0-255>]] [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
(Optional) Configure the cost to each
neighbor
in
point-to-multipoint
network. It is not defined by default,
cost <1-65535>
where the cost configured on the
interface will be used.
Only
the
point-to-multipoint
type
network supports this option.
5-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
(Optional) Interval to poll the neighbors
poll-interval
(in seconds), 120 s by default.
<0-2147483647>
Only the non-broadcast (NBMA) type
network supports this option.
(Optional) Configure the priority of
non-broadcast network neighbors, 0
priority <0-255>
by default.
Only the non-broadcast (NBMA) type
network supports this option.
instance
Configure
instance-id
instance on the interface.
the
specific
OSPFv3
Command
5.1.18
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
You can set relevant parameters for the neighbors
guidelines
depending on the actual network type.
ipv6 ospf network
Use this command to set the network type of the interface. Use the no form of
this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf network {broadcast | non-broadcast | point-to-point |
point-to-multipoint [non-broadcast]} [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf network [broadcast | non-broadcast | point-to-point |
point-to-multipoint [non-broadcast]] [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Description
broadcast
Specify the broadcast network type.
non-broadcast
point-to-point
Parameter
description
point-to-multipoint
Specify the non-broadcast network
type.
Specify the point-to-point network
type.
Specify
the
point-to-multipoint
network type.
point-to-multipoint
Specify
non-broadcast
non-broadcast network type.
instance
instance-id
Configure
the
the
point-to-multipoint
specific
OSPFv3
instance on the interface with the
valid id range of 0-255.
5-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Point-to-point network type: PPP, SLIP, frame relay
point-to-point
sub-interface
and
X.25
point-to-point
sub-interface encapsulation.
Default
configuration
NBMA
network
type:
frame
relay(except
for
the
point-to-point sub-interface) and X.25 encapsulation
(except for the point-to-point sub-interface)
Broadcast network type: Ethernet encapsulation.
The default network type is none point-to-multipoint
network type.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
You can set the network type of the interface according to
guidelines
the actual link type and the topology.
The following example sets the network type of the
Examples
interface that participates in the OSPFv3 to point-to-point.
ipv6 ospf network point-to-point
Command
ipv6 ospf
priority
Description
Set the interface priority.
Related
commands
5.1.19
show ipv6
Show
the
OSPFv3
interface
ospf interface
information.
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
ipv6 ospf priority
Use this command to set the interface priority. Use the no form of this command
to restore the default setting.
ipv6 ospf priority number-value [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf priority [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
description
number-value
Description
The priority of the interface.
Its range is 0 to 255.
5-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
instance
instance-id
Configure
the
specific
OSPFv3
instance on the interface. Its range is 0
to 255.
Default
configuration
1.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
In the broadcast type, it is necessary to elect the DR/BDR.
In electing the DR/BDR, the device of the highest priority is
preferred. If several devices are of the same priority, the
one with the largest router-ID is preferred.
Usage
The device with the priority level of 0 does not participate
guidelines
in the election of DR/BDR.
If the DR and BDR are available in the network, modifying
the interface priority will not take effect immediately. The
interface will participate in the election of the DR/BDR at
the next time.
The following example disables the interface from being
Examples
elected as the DR/BDR.
ipv6 ospf priority 0
Command
ipv6 ospf
network
5.1.20
Description
Set the network type of the interface.
Related
router-id
Set the ID of the router.
commands
show ipv6
Show
ospf interface
information.
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
the
OSPFv3
interface
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval
Use this command to set the interval for the interface to retransmit the LSA. Use
the no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval seconds [instance instance-id]
5-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
no ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
seconds
description
Description
Interval for retransmitting the LSA.
Its range is 1 to 65535(s).
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface.
Default
configuration
5 seconds.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
To ensure the reliable transmission of routing information,
the LSA sent to the neighbor shall be acknowledged by the
Usage
neighbor. You can use this command to set the interval for
guidelines
waiting for the acknowledgement from the neighbor. If no
acknowledgement is received within the specified period,
the LSA information will be retransmitted.
The following example sets the interval for retransmitting
Examples
the LSA to 10s.
ipv6 ospf retransmit-interval 10
Related
commands
5.1.21
Command
Description
show ipv6 ospf
Show
interface
information.
instance
Configure
instance-id
instance on the interface.
the
the
OSPFv3
specific
interface
OSPFv3
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay
Use this command to set the delay for the interface to sending the LSA. Use the
no form of this command to restore it to the default setting.
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay seconds [instance instance-id]
no ipv6 ospf transmit-delay [instance instance-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
seconds
The delay time for sending LSA.
description
5-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Its range is 1 to 65535(s).
instance
Configure the specific OSPFv3 instance
instance-id
on the interface,0-255.
Default
configuration
1 second.
Command
mode
Interface configuration mode.
Usage
Use this command to set the delay for the interface to
guidelines
transmit the LSA.
The following example sets the delay for the interface to
Examples
transmit the LSA.
ipv6 ospf transmit-delay 2
Command
Description
show ipv6
Show
ospf interface
information.
Related
commands
5.1.22
the
OSPFv3
interface
ipv6 router ospf
Use this command to start OSPFv3 routing process. Use the no form of this
command to disable the OSPFv3 routing process.
ipv6 router ospf [process-id]
no ipv6 router ospf process-id
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
OSPF process number. Without the
process-id
process number configured, it indicates
the process 1 is started.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
5-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
After the OSPFv3 process is started, the OSPFv3
Usage
configuration mode is entered.
guidelines
At present, our products support up to 32 OSPFv3
processes.
The following example starts the OSPFv3 process.
Examples
ipv6 router ospf 1
Command
Related
Description
ipv6 ospf area
commands
show
ipv6
ospf
5.1.23
Configure the interface to participate in
the OSPFv3 routing process.
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
information.
log-adj-changes
Use this command to enable the logging of the neighbor state changes. The no
or default form of the command is used to disable it.
log-adj-changes
no log-adj-changes
Parameter
settings
None
Default
By default, Disabled
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode
The configuration example below turns on the log for
Examples
neighbor status change.
DGS-8000(config)# router ospf 1
DGS-8000(config)# log-adj-changes detail
Command
Description
Related
commands
show ipv6 ospf
Show the OSPF global
configuration information
5-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.1.24
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
max-concurrent-dd
Use this command to set the maximum number of DD packets that can be
processed simultaneously.
max-concurrent-dd number
no max-concurrent-dd
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Maximum number of DD packets that
number
can
be
processed
simultaneously,
1-65535.
Default
configuration
5
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
The following example set max-concurrent-dd to 4,
allowing exchanging DD packet with 4 neighbors at the
Examples
same time:
router ipv6 ospf 1
max-concurrent-dd 4
5.1.25
passive-interface
Use this command to set the passive interface. Use the no form of this
command to remove the configuration .
passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-number }
no passive-interface {default | interface-type interface-number }
Parameter
Description
Parameter
default
Set all the interfaces to passive ones.
description
interface-type
Set the specified interface to passive
interface-number
one.
Default
configuration
None.
5-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
After an interface is set to passive one, it no longer
Usage
receives or sends the hello message.
guidelines
This command applies to the interfaces participating in the
OSPF but not to the virtual links.
The following example enables only VLAN1 to participate
Examples
in the OSPFv3 process.
passive-interface default
no passive-interface vlan 1
Command
ipv6 ospf area
Description
Configure the interface to participate in
the OSPFv3 routing process.
Related
commands
5.1.26
show ipv6
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
ospf
information.
show ipv6
Show
ospf neighbor
information.
the
OSPFv3
neighbor
redistribute
Use this command to start the route redistribution in order to import the routing
information of other routing protocols to the OSPFv3 routing process. Use the
no form of this command to disable this function or modify the redistribution
parameters.
redistribute {bgp | connected | isis [area-tag] | ospf process-id | rip | static}
[{level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2} | match {internal | external [1|2]} | metric
metric-value | metric-type {1|2} | route-map route-map-name | tag tag-value]
no redistribute {bgp | connected | isis [area-tag] | ospf process-id | rip |
static} [{level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2} | match {internal | external [1|2]} | metric
| metric-type {1|2} | route-map route-map-name | tag tag-value]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
bgp
The bgp protocol is redistributed.
connected
The
directly
connected
route
is
redistributed.
5-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
isis[area-tag]
The isis is redistributed. The area-tag
specifies the isis instance.
The
ospf process-id
ospf
is
redistributed.
The
process-id specifies the ospf instance
within the range of 1-65535.
rip
The rip is redistributed.
static
The static route is redistributed.
It
is
used
in
the
IS-IS
route
level-1|
redistribution only and redistributes the
level-1-2|
specified level route.
level-2
By
default,
the
level-2
route
is
redistributed.
metric
metric-value
metric-type
{1|2}
Specify the metric for the OSPFv3
external 2 LSA.
Its range is 0 to 16777214.
Set the metric type for the external
route to E-1 or E-2.
The default type is E-2.
Specify the routing policy for route
redistribution.
route-map
map-map-name
The name of map-tag can be up to 32
characters.
No route-map is associated by default.
Tag value redistributed to the OSPFv3
tag tag-value
inner route, in the range of 0 to
4294967295.
Redistribute the OSPF routes of the
specific type:
internal:
match
inter-area
and
intra-area
routes.
external [1|2]: E1, E2 or all external
routes.
All
sub-type
OSPFv3
routes
are
redistributed by default.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
5-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
When a device supports multiple routing protocols, the
coordination between these protocols becomes an
important task. The device can run the protocols at the
same time, so it should redistribute the protocols. This is
applicable to all IP routing protocols.
When redistributing OSPF routes, you can configure
Usage
guidelines
match to redistribute the corresponding routes. All types of
OSPF routes are redistributed by default.
The match parameter of route-map is specific the source
of routes. The parameters tag, metric and metric-type of
the set rule of route-map take precedence over the ones
configured for the redistribute command.
Caution: The metric value of the route-map associated
should be in the range of 0 to 16777214. If the metric value
is not in this range, the route can not be introduced.
The following example redistributes the direct route and
Examples
associates route-map test (the corresponding rule is match
metric 20 and set metric 20).
redistribute connect metric 10 route-map test
Command
Description
default-information
Set the default route to be
originate
redistributed.
default-metric
Set the default metric for the route
to be redistributed.
Related
commands
summary-prefix
show ipv6 ospf
show ipv6 ospf
database
5.1.27
Set the converged address range of
the external route.
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
information.
Show the OSPFv3 LSA information.
router-id
Use this command to set the router ID (device ID). Use the no form of this
command to remove the setting or restore it to the default router ID.
5-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
router-id router-id
no router-id
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
ID of the device in the IPv4 address
router-id
format.
Default
The best interface address is automatically selected as
configuration
the router ID.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
Each device that runs the OSPFv3 process shall be
identified with a router ID. Router ID is in the format of IPv4
address.
Unlike
the
OSPFv2,
the
OSPFv3
process
will
automatically acquire an IPv4 address to use it as the
router ID. After the device starts the OSPFv3 process, a
user must use the router-id command to configure the
router ID for the OSPFv3 process. Otherwise, the OSPFv3
process will not be able to start.
Usage
guidelines
The router ID shall be unique.
At present, after the OSPFv3 routing process starts, the
Router ID shall be set before the interface participates in
the OSPFv3. That is to say, after the interface runs
OSPFv3 routing process, the router ID cannot be modified.
Otherwise the OSPFv3 routing process and the whole
OSPF AS will be greatly affected.
If the router ID needs to be reconfigured, shut down and
restarts the OSPFv3 process, and then configure router
ID.
The following example sets the ID of the device that
Examples
participates in the OSPFv3 process to 1.1.1.1.
router-id 1.1.1.1
Related
Command
commands
ipv6 ospf
priority
Description
Set the interface priority.
5-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
show
ipv6
information.
ospf
5.1.28
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
summary-prefix
Use this command to configure the converged route out of the OSPFv3 routing
domain in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command is used to restore it to the default setting.
summary-prefix
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
[not-advertise
|
tag
<0-4294967295> ]
no
summary-prefix
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
[not-advertise
|
tag
<0-4294967295> ]
Parameter
ipv6-prefix/prefix-length
Parameter
description
Description
Address range of the converged
route
Tag value redistributed to the
tag<0-4294967295>
OSPFv3 inner route, in the range
of 0 to 4294967295.
not-advertise
Default
Do not advertise the converged
route.
No converged route is configured by default.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
When routes are redistributed by another routing process
into the OSPFv3 routing process, every route is advertised
to the OSPFv3-enabled device separately in the form of
external link state. If the incoming routes are continuous
addresses, the autonomous border device can advertise
Usage
only one converged route, reducing the scale of routing
guidelines
table greatly.
Unlike the area range command, the former involves the
convergence of routes between OSPFv3 areas, while the
latter involves the convergence of external routes of the
OSPFv3 routing domain.
5-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
The summary-address command is valid only on the
ASBR now, and causes the convergence for only
redistributed routes.
The configuration command below configures the external
Examples
route within the 2001:DB8::/64 to the converged route
2001:DB8::/64 to advertise it.
DGS-8000(config-router)# summary-prefix 2001 :DB8 : : /64
Command
Related
commands
area-range
redistribute
5.1.29
Description
Configure route convergence between
the OSPFv3 areas.
Redistribute the route of other routing
process.
timers spf
Use this command to set the delay and interval for the OSPFv3 to calculate
SPF after receiving the topology change. The no format of this command is
used to restore it to the default.
timers spf delay holdtime
no timers spf
Parameter
Description
Delay from determining the topology
delay
Parameter
change to calculating SPF.
Its range is 0 to 214748364s, and the
default value is 5s.
description
Delay from determining the topology
holdtime
change to calculating SPF.
Its range is 0 to 214748364s, and the
default value is 5s.
Default
spf-delay: 5 seconds.
configuration
spf-holdtime: 10 seconds.
Command
mode
OSPFv3 configuration mode.
5-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
The smaller the spf-delay and spf-holdtime, the shorter
time the OSPF takes to adapt to the topology change, but
the more system space will be occupied.
timers spf 2 4
Command
Description
Related
clear ipv6 ospf
Restart part function of the OSPFv3.
commands
show
Show the OSPFv3 routing process
ipv6
information.
ospf
5.1.30
timers throttle spf
Use this command to configure the topology change information for OSPFv3,
including the delay for SPF calculation as well as the interval between two SPF
calculations in the routing process configuration mode. The no form of this
command restores it to the default.
timers throttle spf spf-delay spf-holdtime spf-max-waittime
no timers throttle spf
Parameter
Description
Define the SPF calculation waiting
period, in milli-seconds, with the valid
range from 1 to 600000. After receiving
spf-delay
the topology change, the OSPF routing
Parameter
process must wait for the specified
description
period to start the SPF calculation.
Define the minimun interval between
spf-holdtime
two SPF calculations, in milli-seconds,
with the valid range from 1 to 600000.
Define the maximum interval between
spf-max-waittime
two SPF calculations, in milli-seconds,
with the valid range from 1 to 600000.
Default
spf-delay:
1000ms;
spf-holdtime:
5000ms;
spf-max-waittime: 10000ms.
Command
mode
Routing process configuration mode.
5-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Spf-delay refers to the delay time of the topology change
to the SPF calculation. Spf-holdtime refers to the minimum
interval between two SPF calculations. Then, the interval
of the consecutive SPF calculations is at least twice as the
last interval till it reaches to spf-max-waittime. If the interval
between two SPF calculations has exceeded the required
value, the SPF calculation will re-start from spf-holdtime.
Smaller spf-delay and spf-holdtime value can make the
topology faster. Greater spf-max-waittime value can
reduce the SPF calculation. Those configurations can be
flexible according to the actual stability of the network
topology.
Compared with the timers spf command, this command is
more flexible. It not only speeds up the SPF calculation
convergence, but also reduces the system resources
consumption of SPF calculation due to the topology
change. To this end, the timers throttle spf command is
Usage
recommended.
guidelines
1. The spf-holdtime cannot be smaller
than spf-delay, or the spf-holdtime will
be set to be equal to spf-delay;
2. The
spf-max-waitime
cannot
be
smaller than spf-holdtime, or the
spf-max-waittime will be set to be
equal to spf-holdtime automatically;
3. The configurations of the timers spf
Note
command and the timers throttle spf
command are overwritten.
4. Without neither timers spf command
and timers throttle spf command
configured, the default value refers to
the one of the timers throttle spf
command.
The configuration example below configures the delay and
Examples
holdtime and the maximum time interval of the OSPFv3 as
5ms, 1000ms and 90000ms respectively. If the topology
changes consecutively, the SPF calculations are: 5ms,1s,
5-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
3s,7s,15s,31s,63s,89s,179s,179+90 ……
DGS-8000(config)# ipv6 router ospf 20
DGS-8000(config-router)# timers spf 5 1000 90000
Command
Related
commands
show ipv6 ospf
clear ipv6 ospf
timers spf
5.2
5.2.1
Description
Show the routing process information
of the OSFPv3
Restarts part OSPFv3 function.
Configure the SPF calculation delay
period.
Show Related Commands
show ipv6 ospf
Use this command to show the information of the OSPFv3 process.
show ipv6 ospf [process-id]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
process- id
OSPF process number, 1-65535.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following example shows the information about the
OSPFv3 process.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf
Routing Process "OSPFv3 (1)" with ID 1.1.1.1
Process uptime is 24 minutes
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between SPFs 10 secs
Minimum LSA interval 5 secs, Minimum LSA arrival 1 secs
Number of incomming current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Number of outgoing current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Examples
Number of external LSA 0. Checksum Sum 0x0000
Number of AS-Scoped Unknown LSA 0
Number of LSA originated 11
Number of LSA received 4
Log Neighbor Adjency Changes : Enabled
Number of areas in this device is 2
Area BACKBONE(0)
Number of interfaces in this area is 1(1)
SPF algorithm executed 4 times
Number of LSA 3.
Checksum Sum 0x1DDF1
5-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Number of Unknown LSA 0
With the BFD for OSPFv3 configured, the content of “BFD
is enabled” is added to the displaying information of the
command show ipv6 ospf. For example:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf
Routing Process "OSPFv3 (1)" with ID 1.1.1.1
Process uptime is 24 minutes
SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between SPFs 10 secs
Minimum LSA interval 5 secs, Minimum LSA arrival 1 secs
Number of incomming current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Number of outgoing current DD exchange neighbors 0/5
Number of external LSA 0. Checksum Sum 0x0000
Number of AS-Scoped Unknown LSA 0
Number of LSA originated 11
Number of LSA received 4
Log Neighbor Adjency Changes : Enabled
Number of areas in this device is 2
BFD is enabled
Area BACKBONE(0)
Number of interfaces in this area is 1(1)
SPF algorithm executed 4 times
Number of LSA 3.
Checksum Sum 0x1DDF1
Number of Unknown LSA 0
Command
Description
ipv6 router ospf
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
default-information
Set the default route to be
originate
redistributed.
Related
commands
default-metric
router-id
Set the default metric for the route
to be redistributed.
Router ID
Set the delay and interval for the
timers spf
OSPFv3 to perform SPF calculation
after receiving the topology change.
5.2.2
show ipv6 ospf database
Use this command to show the database information of the OSPFv3 process
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] database [lsa-type [adv-router router-id] ]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
process- id
OSPF process number, 1-65535
lsa-type
LSA type. There are the following types:
5-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
external, link, inter-prefix, inter-router,
intra-prefix, network, router, te
If this parameter is not specified, all
LSA information will be shown.
adv-router
Show the LSA information generated by
router-id
the specified router.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following example shows the information about the
OSPFv3 process database.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf database
OSPFv3 Router with ID (1.1.1.1) (Process 1)
Link-LSA (Interface FastEthernet 1/0)
Link State ID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
CkSum
Prefix
0.0.0.2
1.1.1.1
197 0x80000001 0x7cd8
2.2.2.2
206 0x80000001 0x8c86
0
0.0.0.5
0
Link-LSA (Interface Loopback 1)
Link State ID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
CkSum
Prefix
0.0.64.1
1.1.1.1
82 0x80000001 0xb760
0
Router-LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)
Examples
Link State ID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
CkSum
Link
0.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
0.0.0.0
2.2.2.2
17 0x80000006 0x62a1
1
156 0x80000003 0x8653
1
Network-LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)
Link State ID
0.0.0.5
ADV Router
2.2.2.2
Age
Seq#
CkSum
157 0x80000001 0xf8f6
Router-LSA (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link State ID
ADV Router
Age
Seq#
CkSum
Link
0.0.0.0
1.1.1.1
17 0x80000002 0x0529
0
Inter-Area-Prefix-LSA (Area 0.0.0.1)
Link State ID
0.0.0.1
ADV Router
1.1.1.1
Age
Seq#
CkSum
77 0x80000002 0x83b4
AS-external-LSA
Link State ID
0.0.0.1
ADV Router
1.1.1.1
Age
Seq#
CkSum
1 0x80000001 0x6035 E2
5-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Command
Description
Related
commands
ipv6
router
ospf
5.2.3
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
show ipv6 ospf interface
Use this command to show the OSPFv3 interface information.
show ipv6 ospf interface [interface-type interface-number]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
description
interface-type
interface-number
Interface type and interface number.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following commands show the information about the
OSPFv3 interface.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf interface
FastEthernet 1/0 is up, line protocol is up
Interface ID 2
IPv6 Prefixes
fe80::2d0:22ff:fe22:2223/64 (Link-Local Address)
OSPFv3 Process (1), Area 0.0.0.0, Instance ID 0
Router ID 1.1.1.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 2.2.2.2
Interface Address fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c
Backup Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.1
Examples
Interface Address fe80::2d0:22ff:fe22:2223
Timer interval configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40,
Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:02
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1
Hello received 26 sent 26, DD received 5 sent 4
LS-Req received 1 sent 1, LS-Upd received 3 sent 6
LS-Ack received 6 sent 2, Discarded 0
If the BFD has been enabled for the neighbor on the
interface, the content of “BFD enabled” is added to the
displaying information of the command show ipv6 ospf
interface. For example:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf interface
FastEthernet 1/0 is up, line protocol is up
5-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
Interface ID 2
IPv6 Prefixes
fe80::2d0:22ff:fe22:2223/64 (Link-Local Address)
OSPFv3 Process (1), Area 0.0.0.0, Instance ID 0
Router ID 1.1.1.1, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1, BFD enabled
Designated Router (ID) 2.2.2.2
Interface Address fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c
Backup Designated Router (ID) 1.1.1.1
Interface Address fe80::2d0:22ff:fe22:2223
Timer interval configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40,
Retransmit 5
Hello due in 00:00:02
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1
Hello received 26 sent 26, DD received 5 sent 4
LS-Req received 1 sent 1, LS-Upd received 3 sent 6
LS-Ack received 6 sent 2, Discarded 0
Command
Related
commands
ipv6
router
ospf
ipv6 ospf area
5.2.4
Description
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
Enable the interface to participate in the
OSPFv3 process.
show ipv6 ospf neighbor
Use this command to show the neighbor information of the OSPFv3 process.
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] neighbor [interface-type interface-number
[detail]| neighbor-id |detail]
Parameter
Description
process- id
OSPFv3 process number, 1-65535
Parameter
detail
Show details about the neighbor.
description
interface-type
interface-number
neighbor-id
Interface type And interface number
Neighbor ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following command shows the brief information about
Examples
the OSPF neighbor.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf neighbor
5-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
OSPFv3 Process (1), Neighbores, 1 is Full:
Neighbor ID
Pri
State
Dead Time
Full/DR
00:00:33
Interface
Instance ID
2.2.2.2
FastEthernet 1/0
1
0
The following command shows the details of neighbors:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf neighbor detail
Neighbor 2.2.2.2, interface address
fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface FastEthernet 1/0
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes
DR is 2.2.2.2 BDR is 1.1.1.1
Options is 0x000013 (-|R|-|-|E|V6)
Dead timer due in 00:00:36
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
If the BFD detection has been enabled for the forwarding
path of neighbor on the interface, the content of “BFD
session state up” is added to the displaying information of
the command show ipv6 ospf neighbor detail. For
example:
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf neighbor detail
Neighbor 2.2.2.2, interface address
fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c
In the area 0.0.0.0 via interface FastEthernet 1/0
Neighbor priority is 1, State is Full, 6 state changes
DR is 2.2.2.2 BDR is 1.1.1.1
Options is 0x000013 (-|R|-|-|E|V6)
Dead timer due in 00:00:36
Database Summary List 0
Link State Request List 0
Link State Retransmission List 0
BFD session state up
Command
ipv6 router
ospf
Related
ipv6 ospf area
commands
area
virtual-link
Description
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
Enable the interface to participate in the
OSPFv3 process.
Configure the OSPFv3 virtual link.
show ipv6 ospf
Show
the
interface
information.
OSPFv3
interface
5-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
5.2.5
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
show ipv6 ospf route
Use this command to show the OSPFv3 route information.
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] route [count]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
process- id
OSPFv3 process number, 1-65535.
count
Number of OSPFv3 routes
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following example shows the information about OSPF
routes.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf route
OSPFv3 Process (1)
Codes: C - connected, D - Discard, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter
area, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type
Examples
2
Destination
Metric
Next-hop
E2 2222::/64
1/20
via fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c, FastEthernet 1/0
O
3333::/64
11
via fe80::c800:eff:fe84:1c, FastEthernet 1/0, Area
0.0.0.0
Command
Description
Related
commands
ipv6
router
ospf
5.2.6
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
show ipv6 ospf summary-prefix
Use this command to show the external rouitng convergence information of
OSPFv3.
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] summary-prefix
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
process- id
OSPFv3 process number, 1-65535
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
5-40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
The following command shows the external routing
convergence information of OSPFv3.
Examples
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf summary-prefix
OSPFv3 Process 1, Summary-prefix:
2001:db8::/64,Metric 16777215,Type0,Tag0,Match
count0,advertise
Related
Command
Description
ipv6 router ospf
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
commands
Configure the converge route out of
summary-prefix
5.2.7
the OSPFv3 routing domain.
show ipv6 ospf topology
Use this command to show the topology of each area of OSPFv3.
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] topology [area area-id]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
process- id
OSPFv3 process number, 1-65535
area-id
Area ID
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following command shows the topology of each area
of OSPFv3.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf topology
OSPFv3 Process (1)
OSPFv3 paths to Area (0.0.0.0) routers
Router ID
Bits
Metric
Next-Hop
Interface
Examples
1.1.1.1
EB
--
2.2.2.2
E
1
2.2.2.2
FastEthernet 1/0
OSPFv3 paths to Area (0.0.0.1) routers
Router ID
Bits
Metric
Next-Hop
Interface
Related
1.1.1.1
B
--
Command
Description
ipv6
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
commands
router
5-41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Chapter 5 OSPFv3 Commands
ospf
area range
5.2.8
Configure the address range of the
OSPF area.
show ipv6 ospf virtual-links
Use this command to show the virtual link information of the OSPFv3 process.
show ipv6 ospf [process- id] virtual-links
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
process- id
OSPFv3 process number, 1.65535
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
The following command shows the information about the
OSPFv3 virtual link.
DGS-8000# show ipv6 ospf virtual-links
Virtual Link VLINK1 to router 2.2.2.2 is down
Transit area 0.0.0.1 via interface FastEthernet 1/0,
instance ID 0
Examples
Local address *
Remote address 3333::1/128
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State Down,
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40,
Retransmit 5
Hello due in inactive
Adjacency state Down
Command
ipv6
router
ospf
Description
Start the OSPFv3 routing process.
Related
commands
area
virtual-link
Configure the OSPFv3 virtual link.
show ipv6 ospf
Show
neighbor
information.
the
OSPFv3
neighbor
5-42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6
6.1
Chapter 6 BGP4
BGP4 Commands
Configuration Related Commands
6.1.1
address-family ipv4
Use this command to enter " address-faimly IPv4" to configure the BGP
configuration mode. Use the exit-address-family command to exit the BGP
address configuration mode.
address-family ipv4 [unicast]
no address-family ipv4 [unicast]
Parameter
description
Parameter
unicast
Description
Optional, detailed IPv4 unicast address
prefix
Default
configuration
Unicast address prefix.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
In the BGP address configuration mode, the standard IPv4
Usage
address can be used for the configuration.
guidelines
To exit to the BGP configuration mode, run the command
exit-address-family
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4
Related
Command
Description
commands
exit-address-family
Exit the mode.
6-1
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.2
Chapter 6 BGP4
address-family ipv4 vrf
Use this command to enter the address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode to
configure BGP and enable the exchange of route information of a VRF. Use the
no form of this command to disable the exchange function or the
exit-address-family command to exit the BGP address configuration mode.
address-family ipv4 vrf vrf-name
no address-family vrf vrf-name
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vrf-name
VRF name
Default
configuration
No vrf is defined by default.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
You can execute this command to configure or exit the
Usage
exchange of route information between PEs and CEs.
guidelines
To exit to the BGP configuration mode, run the
exit-address-family command.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
6.1.3
Related
Command
Description
commands
exit-address-family
Exit the configuration mode.
address-family ipv6
Use this command to enter " address-faimly IPv6" of the BGP configuration
mode and enable the exchange of IPv6 route information. The no form of this
command disables this function. Use the exit-address-family command to exit
the BGP address-family configuration mode.
address-family ipv6 [unicast | multicast]
no address-family ipv6 [unicast | multicast]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
unicast
Optional,
enter
the
IPv6
unicast
6-2
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
address-family configuration mode.
multicast
Optional,
enter
the
IPv6
multicast
address-family configuration mode.
Default
configuration
Unicast address prefix.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
You can use this command not only to enter the IPv6
address-family configuration mode of the BGP to configure
the IPv6 neighbors ,but also activate neighbors in the IPv6
address-family configuration mode after configuring the
Usage
IPv6 neighbors in the BGP configuration mode.
guidelines
You can enter the multicast mode to configure the BGP of
the multicast topology, which is used for the RPF detection
of the IPv6 multicast routing protocol.
The exit-address-family command is used to exit to the
BGP configuration mode.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv6
6.1.4
Related
Command
Description
commands
exit-address-family
Exit the mode.
address-family vpnv4
Use this command to enter the address-family VPN configuration mode and
enable the exchange of VPN route information between PE peers. Use the
exit-address-family command to exit the BGP address configuration mode.
address-family vpnv4 [unicast]
no address-family vpnv4 [unicast]
Parameter
description
Default
Parameter
unicast
Description
Optional, detailed IPv4 unicast address
prefix
No VPN address family is defined by default.
6-3
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
configuration
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Execute this command to enter the address-family VPN
Usage
guidelines
configuration mode and enable the exchange of VPN route
information between PE peers.
To exit to the BGP configuration mode, run the command
exit-address-family
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family vpnv4
6.1.5
Related
Command
Description
commands
exit-address-family
Exit the mode.
aggregate-address (IPv4)
Use this command to set the aggregate IPv4 route. The no form of the
command is used to disable this function.
aggregate-address ip-address mask [as-set] [summary-only]
no aggregate-address ip-addres mask [as-set] [summary-only]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
ip address
IP address of the aggregate route
mask
Mask of the aggregate route
description
Keep the AS path information of the
as-set
path in the aggregate address range.
summary-only
Advertise only the aggregate route.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
N/A.
BGP
configuration
configuration
mode,
mode,
address-family
address-family
IPv4
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
6-4
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
By default, the BGP-enabled device will advertise all path
Usage
information both before and after aggregation. If you only
guidelines
hope
to
advertise
the
aggregate
route,
use
the
aggregate-address summary-only command.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# aggregate-address 10.0.0.0
255.0.0.0 as-set
6.1.6
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
aggregate-address (IPv6)
Use this command to set the aggregate IPv6 route. The no form of the
command is used to disable this function.
aggregate-address ipv6-network / length [as-set] [summary-only]
no aggregate-address ipv6-network / length [as-set] [summary-only]
Parameter
Description
ipv6-network
Parameter
description
length
IP address prefix of the aggregate
route
Length of the aggregate route
Keep the AS path information of the
as-set
path in the aggregate address range.
summary-only
Advertise only the aggregate route.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
BGP IPv6 address-family configuration mode
Usage
information both before and after aggregation. If you only
guidelines
hope
By default, the BGP-enabled device will advertise all path
to
advertise
the
aggregate
route,
use
the
aggregate-address summary-only command.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
6-5
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv6
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# aggregate-address 2008::/90
as-set
6.1.7
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
bgp always-compare-med
Use this command to compare Multi Exit Discriminator (MED) all the time. You
can use the no form of the command to disable this function.
bgp always-compare-med
no bgp always-compare-med
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
By default, the MED of the peer path from the same AS is
configuration
compared.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
By default, the MED value is compared for the path of the
peer from the same AS. If you hope to allow comparing
MED values for the paths from different ASs, this
Usage
guidelines
command can be used. If there are multiple valid paths to
the same destination, the one with lower MED value has
higher priority.
Unless you are sure that the different ASs are using the
same IGP and routing method, this command is not
recommended.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp always-compare-med
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
6-6
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp bestpath med
confed
bgp bestpath med
missing-as-worst
bgp
deterministic-med
6.1.8
Compare the MED value of the path
of the peer from different ASs while
selecting the optimal path.
Set the priority of the path without
MED attribute as the lowest while
selecting the optimal path.
Compare the path of the peer from
the same AS while selecting the
optimal path.
bgp asnotation dot
Use this command to modify the showing mode of the 4-byte AS notation and
the matching type of the regular expression as the dot mode( that is, two dotted
decimal numbers). You can use the no form of the command to disable this
function.
bgp asnotation dot
no bgp asnotation dot
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
N/A.
By default, the 4-byte AS notation is shown in decimal
digit, and the regular expression matches the 4-byte AS
notation with decimal digit too.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Our devices support two modes of representing the 4-byte AS
notation. One is decimal digit, and another is dot mode which
represents the 65536 with 1.0. The decimal format is same as
the default format, which represents the 4-byte AS notation
with decimal digits. The dot mode shows the 4-byte AS
Usage
notation in the format of ([two high bytes.] two low bytes). If the
guideline
[two high bytes.] is zero, it will not be shown. That is, the AS
s
notation represented as 65536 in decimal is 1.0 in the dot
mode. Such as another example, the AS notation is 65534
represented in decimal, while it is represented as 65534 in the
dot mode without the zero in front.
No matter which mode will be adopted to show the 4-byte AS
notation, both the two modes can be used when entering the
6-7
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
configuration commands. But the representation and showing
mode of the 4-byte AS notation in the regular expression must
be the same. Otherwise, the matching will fail.
After executing the bgp asnotation command, you must use
the clear ip bgp * perform the resetting, so as to re-match
the filtering condition of the regular expression.
The AS notation is represented as 1 to 65535 no
matter using decimal or dot mode.
Caution
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 1.0
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp asnotation dot
Related
commands
Command
show
ip
Description
bgp
summsry
6.1.9
Show the related information of BGP
neighbor.
bgp bestpath as-path ignore
Use this command to disregard the length of the AS path. You can use the no
form of the command to disable this function.
bgp bestpath as-path ignore
no bgp bestpath as-path ignore
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
By default, the AS path length is considered in choosing
configuration
the optimal path.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The BGP will not take the length of the AS path into
account when it selects the optimal path as specified in
Usage
guidelines
RFC1771. In general, the shorter the length of the AS
path, the higher the path priority is. Hence, we take the
length of the AS path when we select the optimal path.
You can determine whether it is necessary to take the
length of the AS path into account when you select the
6-8
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
optimal path according to the actual condition.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp bestpath as-path ignore
6.1.10
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath
Use this ocmmand to compare the AS path length of the confederation from the
same external routes during selecting the optimal path, with smaller AS path in
the confederation for higher path priority. You can use the no form of the
command to disable this function.
bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath
no bgp bestpath compare-confed-aspath
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
N/A.
By default, the AS path of the ebgp peer routes inside the
same confederation is not compared during selecting the
optimal path. Instead, the routing method is implemented.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
By default, during the selection of the same routing
information from the peer of the internal EBGP, the AS
Usage
guidelines
path of the confederation is not compared. This command
is used to compare the AS path of the confederation.
Note that if a route does not contain the AS path of the
confederation, it is not possible to implement the AS path
comparison for that route.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp bestpath
compare-confed-aspath
Related
Command
Description
6-9
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.11
Chapter 6 BGP4
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
bgp router-id
Set the BGP Device ID.
bgp bestpath compare-routerid
Use this command to compare the router ID of the same external routes during
selecting the optimal path, with smaller router ID for higher path priority. You
can use the no form of the command to disable this function.
bgp bestpath compare-routerid
no bgp bestpath compare-routerid
Parameter
description
Default
configuration
N/A.
By default, if two paths received from different EBGP
peers have the same path, the first one is considered with
higher priority.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
By default, if two paths with full identical path attributes are
received from different EBGP Peers during the selection of
Usage
the optimal path, we will select the optimal path according
guidelines
to the sequence of receiving the paths. You can select the
path with smaller Device ID as the optimal path by
configuring the following commands.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp bestpath compare-routerid
Related
commands
6.1.12
Command
Description
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
bgp router-id
Set the BGP Device ID.
bgp bestpath med confed
Use this command to compare the MED value of the path of the internal peer
from AS confederation during selecting the optimal path. You can use the no
form of the command to disable this function.
6-10
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp bestpath med confed [missing-as-worst]
no bgp bestpath med confed [missing-as-worst]
Parameter
description
Parameter
missing-as-worst
Description
Set the priority of the path without
MED attribute as the lowest.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
BGP configuration mode.
The MED attribute of the path is transferred between the
ASs inside the confederation. You may set always
comparing this value.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp bestpath med confed
Command
Description
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
Compare the MED value of the
bgp
path of the peer from different
always-compare-med
ASs while selecting the optimal
Related
path.
commands
bgp bestpath med
missing-as-worst
bgp
deterministic-med
6.1.13
Set the priority of the path without
MED attribute as the lowest while
selecting the optimal path.
Compare the path of the peer
from the same AS while selecting
the optimal path.
bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst
Use this command to set the priority of the path without MED attribute as the
lowest while selecting the optimal path. You can use the no form of the
command to disable this function.
bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst
no bgp bestpath med missing-as-worst
6-11
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
description
N/A.
By default, if a path without MED attribute is received, the
Default
MED value of the path is considered as 0. This kind of
configuration
routes has the highest priority according to the known
rule.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
By default, if the path whose MED attribute is not set is
received, the MED value of this path will be taken as 0. For
Usage
guidelines
the smaller the MED value, the higher the priority of the
path is, the MED value of this path reaches the highest
priority. If you hope the path without MED attribute
configured has the lowest priority, this command can be
used.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp bestpath med
missing-as-worst
Command
Description
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
Compare the MED value of the
bgp
always-compare-med
Related
commands
bgp
bestpath
med
confed
bgp
deterministic-med
6.1.14
path of the peer from different ASs
while selecting the optimal path.
Set the priority of the path without
MED attribute as the lowest while
selecting the optimal path.
Compare the path of the peer
from the same AS while selecting
the optimal path.
bgp client-to-client reflection
Use this command to enalbe the route reflection function between clients on the
device. The no form of the command disables the route reflection function
between clients.
bgp client-to-client reflection
6-12
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
no bgp client-to-client reflection
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled without the client for route reflection
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
In general, it is not necessary to establish the connection
relationship between the clients of the route reflector within
the cluster, and the route reflector will reflect the route
Usage
among clients. However, if the full connection relationship
guidelines
is established for all clients, the function for the route
reflector to reflect the client route can be disabled.
To disable the route reflection function, use the command
no bgp client-to-client reflection.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# no bgp client-to-client
reflection
Command
Related
bgp cluster-id
commands
neighbor
route-reflector-client
6.1.15
Description
Configure the cluster ID of the
route reflector.
Configure the client of the route
reflector and configure itself as the
route reflector.
bgp cluster-id
Use this command to configure the cluster ID of the route reflector. Use the no
form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
bgp cluster-id cluster-id
no bgp cluster-id
Parameter
description
Parameter
cluster-id
Description
Cluster ID of the route reflector, an
IP address of up to four bytes or an
6-13
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
integer (must be entered in form of
IP address).
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
In general, one group is only configured with one route
reflector. In this case, the Device ID of the route reflector
Usage
guidelines
can be used to identify this cluster. To increase the
redundancy, you can set more than one route reflector
within this cluster. In this case, you must configure the
cluster ID, so that one route reflector can identify the route
update from other route reflectors of this cluster.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp cluster-id 10.0.0.1
Related
Command
Description
bgp client-to-client
Configure
reflection
between clients.
commands
neighbor
route-reflector-client
6.1.16
the
route
reflection
Configure the client of the route
reflector and configure itself as the
route reflector.
bgp confederation identifier
Use this command to configure the AS confederation identifier. Use the no form
of the command to restore it to the default setting.
bgp confederation identifier as-number
no bgp confederation identifier
Parameter
description
Parameter
as-number
Description
AS confederation identifier in the range of 1
to 65535
Default
configuration
N/A.
6-14
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The confederation is a measure to reduce the connections
of the IBGP peer within the AS.
One AS is divided into several sub ASs and one unified
confederation ID (namely, confederation AS number) is set
to constitute these sub ASs into a confederation. For the
external confederation, the whole confederation is still
Usage
guidelines
considered as one AS, and only the confederation AS
number is visible for the external network. Within the
confederation, the full IBGP peer connection is still
established among the BGP Speakers within the sub AS,
and the EBGP connection is established among the BGP
Speakers within the sub AS. Despite of the EBGP
connections established between the BGP speakers in an
AS, the next-hop, MED and local priority information
remains unchanged in exchanging the information.
Examples
Related
commands
6.1.17
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp confederation identifier
65000
Command
Description
bgp confederation
Add
peers
confederation.
member
AS
of
the
AS
bgp dampening
Use this command to enable the routing attenuation and set the attenuation
paramters in the address-family or routing configuration mode. The no form of
this command is used to remove the setting.
bgp dampening [half-life [reusing supressing duration] | route-map name]
no bgp dampening [half-life [reusing suppressing duration] | route-map
[name]]
Parameter
Parameter
description
half-life
Description
Half-life period, in minute, ranging
from 1 to 45 minutes.
6-15
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
When the penalty value reaches
this
reusing
value,
the
routing
suppression is cancelled. The
value ranges from 1 to 20000.
When the penalty value reaches
this
suppressing
value,
the
routing
suppression is performed. The
value ranges from 1 to 20000.
The maximum time for routing
duration
suppresion, ranging from 1 to 255
minutes.
Route-map
routing
name
name,
apply
attenuation
specified
route
the
to
the
through
the
route-map.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP configuration mode, BGP IPv4 address-family
configuration mode, BGP IPv4 VRF address-family
configuration mode
The bgp dampening command is used to suppress the
unstable BGP routing. The BGP uses the penalty value to
Usage
describe the routing suppression intensity. The penalty
guidelines
value increases 1000 when the routing oscillation is
performed once. The suppressed routes will not be used
during the BGP routing election.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp dampening 30 1500 10000 120
Command
clear
Related
ip
Description
bgp
dampening
ip
cancel the suppression for the
routes.
commands
show
Clear the BGP suppression and
bgp
dampening
dampened-paths
Show
the
suppressed
route
information.
6-16
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.18
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp confederation peers
Use this command to configure the member AS of the AS confederation. The
no form of the command deletes the configured member AS.
bgp confederation peers as-number […as-number]
no bgp confederation peers as-number […as-number]
Parameter
Description
Member AS in the confederation In
the range of 1 to 65535.
In the 10.4(3) or later versions, the
Parameter
description
as-number
4-byte AS notation is supported,
namely, the new range of the new AS
notation is 1 to 4294967295, which is
represented as 1 to 65535.65535 in
dot mode.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The confederation is a measure to reduce the connections
of the IBGP peer within the AS.
One AS is divided into several sub ASs and one unified
confederation ID (namely, confederation AS number) is set
to constitute these sub ASs into a confederation. For the
external confederation, the whole confederation is still
considered as one AS, and only the confederation AS
number is visible for the external network. Within the
Usage
confederation, the full IBGP peer connection is still
guidelines
established among the BGP Speakers within the sub AS,
and the EBGP connection is established among the BGP
Speakers within the sub AS. Despite of the EBGP
connections established between the BGP speakers in an
AS, the next-hop, MED and local priority information
remains unchanged in exchanging the information.
This command is used to specify the member AS of a
confederation.
Note: This command can configure up to 15 members of a
6-17
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
confederation at one time. For more members, enter them
for several times.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp confederation peers 65000
65100
Command
Related
bgp
commands
confederation
identifier
6.1.19
Description
Configure
the
confederation
identifier.
bgp default ipv4-unicast
Use this command to set the IPv4 unicast address as the default address family.
The no form of the command removes the configuration.
bgp default ipv4-unicast
no bgp default ipv4-unicast
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
By default, the IPv4 unicast address is the default address
configuration
family.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to set the default address family of
guidelines
BGP as the IPv4 unicast address.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# default ipv4-unicast
Related
commands
Command
address-family
ipv4
6.1.20
Description
Enter the IPv4 address mode.
bgp default local-preference
Use this command to set the default local-preference attribute value. Use the
no form of the command to restore the defaults.
6-18
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp default local-preference value
no bgp default local-preference
Parameter
description
Parameter
value
Description
Local priority attribute in the range 0 to
4294967295
Default
configuration
100.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The BGP takes the local preference as the foundation to
compare with the priority of the path learned from the IBGP
Usage
peers. The larger the local preference value, the higher the
guidelines
priority of the path is.
The BGP speaker sends the external route received to the
IBGP peers to add the local priority value.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp default local-preference
200
Command
Description
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
In electing the optimal path, allow
bgp
comparing the MED value of the
always-compare-med
path of the peer from different
ASs.
Related
commands
In electing the optimal path, allow
bgp bestpath med
comparing the MED value of the
confed
path of the internal peer from AS
community.
In electing the optimal path, allow
bgp bestpath med
setting the priority of the path
missing-as-worst
without MED attribute as the
lowest.
6-19
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.21
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp default route-targe filter
Use this command to enable the route-targe filtering. For the VPNV4 routes,
filter the community attributes of the route-targe by default. Use the no form of
the command to disable this function.
bgp default route-targe filter
no bgp default route-targe filter
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
After receiving the VPNV4 route, use the community
attributes list of the route-targe to implement the filtering
and distribute to different VRFs. With the no form of this
command used, the BGP will receive all VPNV4 routes no
Usage
guidelines
matter whether these filtered VPNV4 routes will be
received by route-targe of local VRF.
With the PE route-reflector-client configured for the BGP,
the handling to the VPNV4 route is executed by the way
without the route-targe filtering. In this case, whether the
BGP is enabled, the actions are the same without the
route-targe filtering.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# no bgp default route-targe
filter
Command
Related
commands
neighbor
route-reflector-client
6.1.22
Description
Configure
route-reflector-client,
the
and
set
itself as the route reflector.
bgp deterministic-med
This command sets comparing preferentially the MED values of peer paths from
the same AS. By default, the comparison is based on the received order, and
6-20
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
the one received the last is compared first. The no format of the command turns
off it.
bgp deterministic med
no bgp deterministic med
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
By default, the function is disabled.
configuration
Command
mode
BGP CONFIGURATION MODE.
By default, they will be compared with each other
Usage
guidelines
according to the sequence the paths are received when
the optimal path is selected. If you hope to compare with
the path of the peers from the same AS firstly, execute the
following operations in the BGP configuration mode:
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp deterministic med
Command
Description
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
bgp
always-compare-med
Related
commands
bgp bestpath med
confed
bgp bestpath med
missing-as-worst
6.1.23
Compare the MED value of the
path of the peer from different ASs
while selecting the optimal path.
Set the priority of the path without
MED attribute as the lowest while
selecting the optimal path.
Compare the path of the peer
from the same AS while selecting
the optimal path.
bgp enforce-first-as
Use this command to reject the UPDATE messages whose first AS_PATH path
section is not the neighbor-configured AS number. The no format of the
command disables the function.
bgp enforce-first-as
6-21
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
no bgp enforce-first-as
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled
Command
mode
6.1.24
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
By default, the AS number of the device is put into the path
guidelines
section for updating the update message.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp enforce-first-as
Related
Command
Description
commands
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
bgp fast-external-fallover
When the network interface that is used in establishing the connection of the
directly-connected EBGP peer fails, this command is used to establish the BGP
session connection quickly. You can use the no form of the command to disable
this function.
bgp fast-external-fallover
no bgp fast-external-fallover
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
This command takes effect only for the directly-connected
guidelines
EBGP neighbor.
6-22
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.25
Chapter 6 BGP4
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp faster-external-fallover
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enabled the BGP protocol.
bgp graceful-restart
Use this command to enable the graceful restart function of the globla BGP. The
no form of the command is used to disable this function.
bgp graceful-restart
no bgp graceful-restart
Default
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The ability of the BGP is advertised and negotiated
through the ability field of the Open message. The
negotiation of the ability is implemented during initially
setting up the connection. So both sides must reach the
consistency of the ability. Not supported by any side will
lead to this router device performing the GR incorrectly.
With the GR function enabled, the connected Open
message will carry the GR ability field to perform the
negotiation of the GR ability. To implement the GR
correctly, the GR function must be enabled on the both
Usage
sides of the neighbors. This command does not take effect
guidelines
immediately on all BGP connections that are set up
successfully. So if you want these BGP connections to
negotiate the GR ability immediately, you need to restart
the BGP connection forcibly to make the local device
negotiate the GR ability with the Peer again.
The BGP graceful-restart is used to implement the
continuous data forwarding of the whole network, it
requires the device to keep the BGP routing entry valid
and go on performing the data forwarding when restarting
the BGP protocol. Supporting the continuous forwarding
during the restarting is related to the hardware ability.
6-23
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 500
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp graceful-restart
Related
commands
6.1.26
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
bgp graceful-restart
Configure the restart time of the
restart-time
BGP graceful-restart.
bgp graceful-restart restart-time
Use this command to configure the restart time of the BGP graceful-restart. The
no form of the command restores it to the default value.
bgp graceful-restart restart-time restart-time
no bgp graceful-restart restart-time
Parameter
Description
GR Restarter-hoped longest waiting
Parameter
description
time
restart-time
before
re-establishing
connection between the
the
GR Helper
and the GR Restarter, in the range of 1
to 3600 seconds.
Default
120 seconds.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The restart time is advertised by the GR Restarter to the
GR Helper, it is the GR Restarter-hoped longest waiting
time before re-establishing the connection between the
GR Helper and the GR Restarter. After this time, if the
Usage
guidelines
BGP connection with the GR Restarter has not been the
Established status, the GR Helper will consider this BGP
session fails and perform the normal BGP restoring.
The restart time is advertised in the GR ability field of the
BGP Open message. The GR restart time of the two ends
of the session is not required to be the same ,but it is
recommended.
6-24
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 500
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp graceful-restart
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)#
bgp
graceful-restart
restart-time 150
DGS-8000(config-router)# no bgp graceful-restart
restart-time
6.1.27
Related
Command
Description
commands
bgp graceful-restart
Enable the BGP graceful-restart.
bgp graceful-restart stalepath-time
Use this command to confugre the time to help the device keep the route valid
when executing the BGP graceful-resatart. The no form of the command
restores the stalepath-time to the default value.
bgp graceful-restart stalepath-time stalepath-time
no bgp graceful-restart stalepath-time
Parameter
Longest time used to keep the stale
Parameter
description
Description
time
route
valid
after
restoring
the
connection with the neighbors, in the
range of 1 to 3600 seconds.
Default
360 seconds.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
This command is configured for the parameters of the GR
Helper. The stalepath-time is the longest time of the GR
Helper waiting to receive the EOR mark of the Restarter
after restoring the connection with the GR Restarter. When
Usage
guidelines
the GR Helper detects that the connection with the GR
Restarter breaks, the original route of the Restarter is
marked as the “Stale”, however these routes are still used
for the routing calculation and forwarding.
The GR Helper updates the routes and cancels the “Stale”
mark according to route updating information received
from the GR Restarter. If these routes with the “Stale”
6-25
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
mark are not updated in the stalepath-time period, they will
be deleted. This mechanism is used to avoid the unable
convergence of routes when the GR Helper does not
receive the EOR mark of the GR Restarter for a long time.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 500
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp graceful-restart
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp graceful-restart
stalepath-time 240
DGS-8000(config-router)# no bgp graceful-restart
stalepath-time
6.1.28
Related
Command
Description
commands
bgp graceful-restart
Enable the BGP graceful-restart .
bgp log-neighbor-changes
Use this command to log the BGP status changes without turning on debug.
You can use the no form of the command to disable this function.
bgp log-neighbor-changes
no bgp log-neighbor-changes
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
BGP configuration mode.
The debug command can also be used to log the BGP
status changes. But this command may consume a great
deal of resources.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp log-neighbor-changes
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enabled the BGP protocol.
6-26
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.29
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp nexthop trigger delay
Use this command to configure the delay time of updating the routing table
when the nexthop of the BGP route changes . You can use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
bgp nexthop trigger delay delay-time
no bgp nexthop trigger delay
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Delay time of updating the routing table
delay-time
when the nexthop changes, in the
range of 0 to 100 seconds.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
5 seconds.
BGP configuration mode, address-family IPv4/IPv6/VPNv4
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
This command is used to configure the delay time of
Usage
updating the routing table when the nexthop changes, it
guidelines
takes effect with the bgp nexthop trigger enable
configured.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp nexthop trigger delay 30
Command
Description
Related
commands
bgp nexthop trigger
enable
6.1.30
Enable the nexthop trigger.
bgp nexthop trigger enable
Use this command to enable the nexthop trigger update function. You can use
the no form of the command to disable this function.
bgp nexthop trigger enable
no bgp nexthop trigger enable
6-27
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Enabled.
BGP configuration mode, address-family IPv4/IPv6/VPNv4
configuration
mode,
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to enable the nexthop trigger
guidelines
update function.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp nexthop trigger enable
Command
Description
Related
commands
Bgp
Set the delay time of updating the
nexthop
routing
trigger delay
6.1.31
address-family
table
when
the
nexthop
changes.
bgp redistribute-internal
Use this command to control the BGP whether to allow to redistribute the routes
learned from the IBGP to the IGP protocol,such as RIP, OSPF, ISIS,etc.
bgp redistribute-internal
no bgp redistribute-internal
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
By default, the IBGP route is allowed to be redistributed to
configuration
the IGP protocol.
Command
mode
Usage
BGP
configuration
configuration
mode,
mode,
address-family
address-family
IPv4/IPv6
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
This command is used to control the IBGP route whether
6-28
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
guidelines
to be allowed to be redistributed to the IGP protocol.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp redistribute-internal
Related
commands
6.1.32
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
redistribute
Description
Redistribute the routes learned from
other protocols.
bgp router-id
Use this command to configure the ID-IP address of the device. The no form of
the command restores it to the default IP address.
bgp router-id ip-address
no bgp router-id
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
ip address
IP address
Default
configuration
By default, the loop-back interface of the device is
selected preferentially. If it does not exist, the device ID of
the device is used.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
This command is used to configure the ID-IP address of
guidelines
the device used in running the BGP protocol.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp router-id 10.0.0.1
Command
show ip bgp
Related
dampening
commands
dampened-paths
bgp dampening
Description
Show
the
suppressed
routing
information.
Enable the route dampening function
and set the dampening parameters.
6-29
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.33
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp scan-rib disable
Use this command to configure the the timely scan for the BGP protocol to
update the routing table. The no form of this command cancels the timely scan.
bgp scan-rib disable
no bgp scan-rib disable
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP configuration mode, address-family IPv4/IPv6/VPNv4
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
Usage
guidelines
N/A
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp scan-rib disable
Related
commands
6.1.34
Command
bgp scan-time
Description
Configure the interval of the BGP
timely scan.
bgp scan-time
Use this command to configure the interval of the BGP timely scan.
bgp scan-time time
no bgp scan-time [time]
Parameter
description
Parameter
time
Description
Interval of the timely scan, in the range
of 5 to 60 seconds.
Default
configuration
60 seconds.
6-30
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Related
commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
BGP configuration mode, address-family IPv4/IPv6/VPNv4
configuration
address-family
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
This command is used to configure the interval of the BGP
timely scan; it takes effect when the bgp scan-rib enable
is configured.
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp scan-time 30
Command
Description
bgp
Enable
scan-rib
enable
6.1.35
mode,
the
BGP
updating
the
routing table with the timely scan..
bgp update-delay
Use this command to set the maximum delay time of the BGP Speaker first
sending the updating information to neighbors. The no form of the command
restores it to the default value. During the BGP graceful-restart, this command is
used to update the delay time.
bgp update-delay delay-time
no bgp update-delay
Parameter
Description
Maximum delay time of the BGP
Speaker sending its route updating
information, in the range of 0 to 3600
Parameter
description
delay-time
seconds, 120 seconds by default. For
the BGP graceful-restart, it is the
maximum time of waitng to receive the
EOR message of all neighbors, in the
range of 1 to 3600 seconds.
Default
configuration
120 seconds.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
6-31
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
With the BGP starting up, it first waits some time to
establish the connection with its neighbors, and then
sends the updating message to these neighbors. After
connecting with neighbors, the BGP does not send the
updating message to them immediately, but waits some
time to fully receive the updating routing message from all
neighbors and then performs the routing optimization
calculation and finally advertises the route updating
message
to
convergence
its
neighbors,
time
and
which
reduces
improves
the
the
calculation
consumption. If the software sends the route updating
Usage
information to its neighbors immediately, it may send the
guidelines
information again due to receiving the more optimized
routes from other neighbors.
The bgp update-delay command is used to adjust the
software’s the initial waiting time, which is the maximum
time, from establishing the connection with the first
neighbor to performing the routing optimization calculation
and sending the route advertisement. When the BGP
graceful-restart is enabled, this command is also used to
set the maximum time of waiting to receive the EOR
messages from all neighbors. This value could be set
properly larger if the neighbors are too many or the routing
information of the neighbors is too much.
The following example sets the update-delay time as 200
seconds.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 500
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp graceful-restart
DGS-8000(config-router)# bgp update-delay 200
Related
commands
6.1.36
Command
bgp graceful-restart
Description
Enable
the
BGP
graceful-restart.
clear bgp all
Use this command to reset all BGP adderss-families. The content to be reset
depends on the parameters behind.
clear bgp all [ as number ]
6-32
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
clear bgp all peer-group peer-group-name [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Description
Reset
none parameter
peer
sessions
in
all
address-family.
Reset the sessions with all members in
as number
Parameter
the
the specified AS.
peer-group
Reset the specified peer group.
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group.
Perform soft resetting for the received
in
routing information.
description
Perform soft resetting for the
out
redistributed routing information.
Perform soft resetting for all routing
information received/sent from/to the
soft
specified peer
Perform soft resetting for the received
soft in
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the
soft out
distributed routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to reset the sessions of all
Usage
guidelines
supported address-families, also including the vrf session
in every address-family. This command is used to reset the
sessions of all supported address-families, also including
the vrf session in every address-family.
Examples
Related
commands
N/A
Command
clear
unicast
bgp
Description
ipv4
Perform the resetting for the IPv4
unicast address-family.
6-33
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.37
Chapter 6 BGP4
clear bgp ipv4 mdt
Use this command to reset the IPv4 mdt address-family of BGP. This command
has the similar function with the clear bgp ipv4 unicast command except for the
operation address family.
Parameter
Description
Parameter
Refer to the clear
description
bgp ipv4 unicast
command.
Refer to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast
command.
Default
configuration
Refer to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast command.
Command
mode
Privileged mode.
Usage
guidelines
Refer to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast command.
Examples
N/A
Related
commands
Command
clear
bgp
unicast
6.1.38
Description
ipv4
Perform the resetting for the IPv4
unicast address-family.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast
Use this command to reset the BGP.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast {* |address | as number } [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Parameter
description
*
address
as number
in
out
Description
Reset all the current BGP sessions, and
the BGP OVERFLOW state.
Reset the BGP session with the
specified peer.
Reset the sessions with all members in
the specified AS.
Without soft, reset the session of the
peer to establish active connection.
Without soft, reset the session of the
6-34
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
local BGP speaker to establish active
connection.
Perform soft resetting for all routing
soft
information received/sent from/to the
specified peer
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the distributed
routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Privileged mode.
This command is used to reset the sessions of all
supported address-families, also including the vrf session
in every address-family.
DGS-8000# clear bgp ipv4 unicast *
Command
Related
neighbor
commands
soft-reconfiguration
inbound
show ip bgp
6.1.39
Description
(Optional)
session
Restart
and
the
BGP
reserve
the
unchanged route information sent
by the BGP peer (group).
Show the BGP route entry.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast dampening
Use this command to clear the dampening information and de-suppress the
suppressed routes.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast dampening [address [ mask]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
address
IP address
mask
Mask
6-35
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to clear the BGP route dampening
Usage
information and de-suppress the suppressed routes. This
guidelines
command can be used to restart the BGP route
dampening.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp dampening 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0
Command
Description
show ip bgp
dampening
commands
dampened-paths
bgp dampening
6.1.40
Show
Related
the
suppressed
routing
information.
Enable the route dampening function
and set the dampening parameters.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast external
Use this command to reset all EBGP connections.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast external [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
in
Description
Without soft, reset the session of the
peer to establish active connection.
Without soft, reset the session of the
Parameter
out
description
local BGP speaker to establish active
connection.
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the distributed
routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
6-36
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to reset the specified external BGP
guidelines
connection.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp external in
Related
commands
Command
Description
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
show ip bgp
neighbors
6.1.41
Show the neighbor information.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast flap-statistics
Use this command to clear the unsuppressed routes.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast flap-statistics [address[ mask]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
address
IP address
mask
Mask
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command can be used only to clear the statistics of
Usage
guidelines
unsuppressed routes. It does not de-suppress the
suppressed routes. If you hope to clear all route statistics
and de-suppress the suppressed routes, run the clear ip
bgp dampening command.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp flap-statistics
Related
Command
Description
6-37
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.42
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp
Enable the route dampening function
dampening
and set the dampening parameters.
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast peer-group
Use this command to reset the session with all members in the peer group.
clear bgp ipv4 unicast peer-group peer-group-name [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Description
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group.
in
Without soft, reset the session of the
peer to establish active connection.
Without soft, reset the session of the
out
Parameter
local BGP speaker to establish active
connection.
description
Perform soft resetting for all routing
soft
information received/sent from/to the
specified peer
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform
soft
resetting
for
the
distributed routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command resets the BGP session with all members
guidelines
in the peer group.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp peer-group my-group in
Related
commands
Command
Description
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
6-38
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.43
Chapter 6 BGP4
clear bgp ipv6 unicast
Use this command to reset the BGP IPv6 unicast address-family.
This command is similar to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast except that it is
executed in different addess-family.
Parameter
Description
Parameter
Please refer to the
description
clear
bgp
Please refer to the clear bgp
ipv4
ipv4 unicast command.
unicast command.
Default
configuration
Please refer to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast command.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Examples
N/A
Related
commands
Command
clear
bgp
unicast
6.1.44
Description
ipv4
Perform the resetting for the IPv4
unicast address-family.
clear bgp vpnv4 unicast
Use this command to reset the BGP VPNV4 unicast address-family.
This command is similar to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast except that it is
executed in different addess-family.
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
Please refer to the clear bgp ipv4 unicast command.
6-39
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
guidelines
Examples
Related
commands
N/A
Command
clear
bgp
unicast
6.1.45
Description
ipv4
Perform the resetting for the IPv4
unicast address-family.
clear ip bgp
Use this command to reset the BGP session.
clear ip bgp {* |ipv4 unicastaddress | as number } [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Description
*
Reset all the current BGP sessions.
ipv4
address
as number
Parameter
in
description
out
Reset the peer of the specified IPv4
address family.
Reset the BGP session with the
specified peer.
Reset the sessions with all members in
the specified AS.
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the
redistributed routing information.
Perform soft resetting for all routing
soft
information received/sent from/to the
specified peer
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the distributed
routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
Note: All connected BGP devices must support the route
6-40
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
guidelines
Chapter 6 BGP4
refresh function to execute this command. This product
supports the route refresh function.
At any time, once the routing policy or BGP configuration
changes, an effective way must be available to implement
the new routing policy or configuration. Traditional
measure is to close it and reestablish new BGP
connection.
This product supports implementing new routing strategy
without the close of the BGP session connection by the
configuration of the soft reset for BGP effectively.
For the peer that does not support the route refresh
function, you may run the neighbor soft-reconfiguration
inbound command to keep a copy of original routing
information of every specified BGP peer on the local BGP
speaker. This will consume some resources.
You can judge whether the BGP peer supports the route
refresh function by the show ip bgp neighbors command.
If it is supported, you need to execute the neighbor
soft-reconfiguration
inbound
command
when
the
inbound routing strategy changes.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear bgp ipv4 unicast *
Command
Related
commands
neighbor
soft-reconfiguration
inbound
show ip bgp
6.1.46
Description
(Optional)
session
Restart
and
the
BGP
reserve
the
unchanged route information sent
by the BGP peer (group).
Show the BGP route entry.
clear ip bgp dampening
Use this command to clear the dampening information and de-suppress the
suppressed routes.
clear ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] dampening [address mask]
Parameter
Description
Parameter
ipv4 unicast
IPv4 unicast
description
address
IP address
mask
Mask
6-41
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command is used to clear the BGP route dampening
Usage
information and de-suppress the suppressed routes. This
guidelines
command can be used to restart the BGP route
dampening.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp dampening 192.168.0.0 255.255.0.0
Command
Description
show ip bgp
dampening
commands
dampened-paths
bgp dampening
6.1.47
Show
Related
the
suppressed
routing
information.
Enable the route dampening function
and set the dampening parameters.
clear ip bgp external
Use this command to reset all EBGP connections.
clear ip bgp external [ipv4 unicast] [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Description
ipv4 unicast
IPv4 unicast session
Without soft, reset the session through
in
which the peer establishes active
connection.
Parameter
description
Without soft, reset the session through
out
which the local BGP speaker
establishes active connection.
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the distributed
routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
6-42
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to reset the specified external BGP
guidelines
connection.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp external in
Related
commands
Command
Description
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
show ip bgp
neighbors
6.1.48
Show the neighbor information.
clear ip bgp flap-statistics
Use this command to clear the unsuppressed routes.
clear ip bgp flap-statistics [address[ mask]]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
address
IP address
mask
Mask
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
This command can be used only to clear the statistics of
Usage
guidelines
unsuppressed routes. It does not de-suppress the
suppressed routes. If you hope to clear all route statistics
and de-suppress the suppressed routes, run the clear ip
bgp dampening command.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp flap-statistics
Related
Command
Description
6-43
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.49
Chapter 6 BGP4
bgp
Enable the route dampening function
dampening
and set the dampening parameters.
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
clear ip bgp peer-group
Use this command to reset the session with all members in the peer group.
clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name [ipv4 unicast] [[soft] [in | out]]
Parameter
Description
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group.
ipv4 unicast
ipv4 unicast session
Without soft, reset the session through
in
which the peer establishes active
connection.
Parameter
description
Without soft, reset the session through
out
which the local BGP speaker
establishes active connection.
Perform soft resetting for all routing
soft
information received/sent from/to the
specified peer
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform
soft
resetting
for
the
distributed routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command resets the BGP session with all members
guidelines
in the peer group.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp peer-group my-group in
Related
Command
Description
commands
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
6-44
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
show ip bgp
6.1.50
Show the BGP route entry.
clear ip bgp table-map
Use this command to clear the application of the table-map route information.
clear ip bgp [vrf vrf-name] table-map
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vrf-name
vrf name.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command is used to clear the application of the
guidelines
table-map route information.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp table-map
Related
commands
6.1.51
Command
Description
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
clear ip bgp vrf
Use this command to reset the BGP sessions of all the members of the VRF.
clear ip bgp vrf vrf-name [* address }[soft [in | out]]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
vrf-name
VRF name
*
Reset all the current BGP sessions.
ipv4 unicast
address
in
Reset the BGP session of the peer of
the IPv4 unicast address family.
Reset
the
BGP
session
with
the
specified peer.
Without soft, reset the direct session
with the specific peer.
6-45
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Without soft, reset the direct session
out
with the BGP speaker.
Perform soft resetting for all routing
information received/sent from/to the
soft
specified peer.
soft in
soft out
Perform soft resetting for the received
routing information.
Perform soft resetting for the distributed
routing information.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Privileged EXEC mode.
Usage
This command resets the BGP sessions of all the
guidelines
members of the VRF.
Examples
DGS-8000# clear ip bgp vrf my-vrf in
Related
commands
6.1.52
Command
Description
clear ip bgp
Reset the BGP session.
show ip bgp
Show the BGP route entry.
default-information originate
Use this command to
distribute the default route. The no form of this
command is used to disable the distribution of the default route.
default-information originate
[no] default-information originate
Parameter
description
N/A
Default
configuration
Disabled
6-46
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
BGP configuration mode, BGP IPv4/IPv6 address family
mode
configuration mode, BGP IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
This command is used to control whether the redistributed
default route is effective, and this command needs to be
configured with the redistribute command at the same
time. It takes effect only when the routes to be redistributed
has the default one.
Usage
This default-information originate command is similar to
guidelines
the network command. The difference is that in the
process of configuring the former, the redistribute
command must be configured explicitly to redistribute the
default route, only in this case, the redistributed default
route are effective. For the later command, the IGP must
have the default route.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# default-information originate
Command
Related
network
commands
redistribute
6.1.53
Description
Configure
the
routes
to
be
advertised.
Redistribute the routes of other
protocol.
default-metric
Use this command to set the metric for route redistribution. The no form of this
command is used to remove the configuration and restore it to the default value.
default-metric number
no default-metric
Parameter
Parameter
description
number
Description
Metric number in the range of 1 to
4294967295
Default
configuration
No metric is set by default.
6-47
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
BGP configuration mode and various address-family
mode
configuration modes
This command sets the metric of the routes to be
redistributed for integrity.
Usage
guidelines
Note that:
The metric set with the command cannot cover the metric
value set with the redistribute metric command.
The value is 0 when the default metric applies to the
redistributed connected routes.
Examples
Related
commands
6.1.54
DGS-8000(config-router)# default-metric 45
Command
redistribute
Description
Redistribute the routes of other
protocol.
distance bgp
Use this command to set different management distances for different types of
BGP routes. The no command is used to restore it to the default.
distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance
no distance bgp
Parameter
Description
Route management distance learned
external-distance
from the EBGP peers in the range: 1
to 255
Route management distance learned
internal-distance
from the IBGP peers in the range 1 to
Parameter
255
description
The management distance of route
learned from the peers. However, the
optimal one can be learned from the
local-distance
IGP. In general, these routes are
indicated by the Network Backdoor
command.
Range: 1 to 255
Default
The parameter defaults are as follows:
6-48
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
configuration
external-distance - 20
internal-distance - 200
local-distance - 200
Command
BGP configuration mode.
mode
It is not recommended to change the management
distance of the BGP route. If it is definitely necessary,
observe the following points:
1. "external-distance" shall have a lower management
Usage
distance than the other IGP routing protocols (OSPF,
guidelines
RIP, etc.);
2. internal-distance and local-distance shall have higher
management distance than the other IGP routing
protocols.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# distance bgp 20 20 200
Command
Related
commands
neighbor
soft-reconfiguration
inbound
show ip bgp
6.1.55
Description
Restart the BGP session and
reserve
the
unchanged
route
information sent by the BGP peer
(group).
Show the BGP route entry.
exit-address-family
Use this command to exit the BGP address-family configuration mode.
exit-address-family
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
BGP address-family configuration mode.
6-49
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Usage
guidelines
Examples
Related
commands
6.1.56
Chapter 6 BGP4
This command can be used to exit from various
address-family
modes
of
the
BGP
to
the
BGP
configuration mode.
DGS-8000(config-router-af)#exit-address-family
Command
Description
address-family
Enter
ipv4
configuration mode.
the
address-family
ipv4
ip as-path access-list
Use this command to specify the regular expression based AS path filtering rule.
The no command is used to delete the rule.
ip as-path access-list path-list-num {permit | deny}
regular-expression
no ip as-path access-list path-list-num
Parameter
Description
Name of the AS path control list
path-list-num
the range of 1 to 500
Parameter
description
based on the regular expression in
permit
Permit the accesses
deny
Deny the accesses
regular-expression
Regular expression
Range: 1 to 255 characters.
Default
configuration
N/A.
Command
mode
Global configuration mode.
Usage
For the regular expression, see BGP Configuration in the
guidelines
configuration guide.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# ip as-path access-list 1 deny
^123$
6-50
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Related
commands
6.1.57
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
Description
neighbor
Apply the AS-path access control list
filter-list
on the specified peer.
neighbor
Apply the distribution list on the
distribute-list
specified peer.
maximum-prefix
Use this command to limit the maximum number of prefix in the routing
database in the address family. Use the no form of this command to restore it to
the default value.
maximum-prefix maximum
no maximum-prefix [maximum]
Parameter
Description
The maximum number of prefix in the
Parameter
description
maximum
routing database in the address
family,
in
the
range
of
1
to
4294967295.
no
Returns to the default value.
In different addrses families, the default maximum
numbers of prefix in the routing database are different:
Default
The default number in the IPv4 VRF, IPv4 Multicast, IPv6
configuration
Mulitcast, IPv4 MDT address family is 10000;
The default number in the other address family is
4294967295.
BGP configuration mode, BGP IPv4 address family
Command
configuration mode, BGP IPv4 VRF configuration mode,
mode
BGP VPNv4 configuration mode, BGP IPv4 MDT address
family mode.
In a BGP address family, the routing prefix may be
introduced through the redistribute or the neighbor
learning, or other VRFs. Once the routing prefix in the BGP
Usage
address family reaches the maximum number, this
guidelines
address family will enter to the overflow state.
Use the show bgp { addressfamily | all } summary
command to show the state of routing database.
It is necessary to reconfigure the BGP for state clearing, or
6-51
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
use the clear bgp { addressfamily | all } * command to
reset the address family.
Note:
When the address family is overflow, it fails to use this
command for modification.
Caution:
The maximum-prefix will not filter the routing information
generated by the network and aggregate commands.
For the IPv4 unicast routes, even though in the Overflow
state, they may still receive the routing prefix in the
following conditions:
1. The same routing prefix has existed in the address
database.
2. One route that overwrites this prefix (except for the
default route) has existed in the address database and the
next hop of this route is different from that of the newly
received routing prefix.
The following example shows how to set the maximum
number of prefix in the BGP routing database in the ipv4
multicast address family:
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 unicast
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# maximum-prefix 65535
Command
clear bgp
Related
commands
{ addressfamily | all } *
show bgp
{ addressfamily | all }
summary
6.1.58
Description
Reset the BGP address-family.
Show the summary of BGP
address-family.
neighbor activate
Use this command to activate the neighbor or peer group in the current address
mode. Use the no form of the command to restore it tothe default setting.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} activate
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} activate
6-52
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 address
or IPv6 address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Enabled in address-family IPv4 configuration mode
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
Command
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode, and
address-family VPNv4 configuration mode,
Usage
You need to set this command in other address-family
guidelines
configuration modes for exchaning routes.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family vpnv4
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 activate
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.59
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor advertisement-interval
Use this command to set the time interval to send the BGP route update
message. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
Parameter
description
peer-group-name
seconds
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Time interval to send the route update
message in the range of 0 to 600
6-53
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
seconds
Default
IBGP connection: 15seconds
configuration
EBGP connection: 30seconds
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
guidelines
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
advertisement-interval 10
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.60
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor allowas-in
Use this command to allow the PE to receive the messages of the same AS
number as itself. The no form restores the setting to the default value.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in
Parameter
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
peer-group-name
description
number
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Number of the AS number duplication
in the range of 1 to 10, 3 by default.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
6-54
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Command
mode
Chapter 6 BGP4
BGP
configuration
configuration
mode,
mode,
address-family
address-family
IPv4
IPv4
VRF
configuration mode.
A typical application is spoke-hub mode. Execute this
command on the PE to enable it to receive and then send
the advertised address prefix. For example, configure two
Usage
VRFs on the PE. One VRF receives the routes of all PEs
guidelines
and advertises them to the CE; the other VRF receives the
routes advertised by the CE and advertises them to all
PEs.
This command applies to IBGP peers or EBGP peers.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 allowas-in
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.61
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor as-override
Use this command to allow the PE to override the AS number of a site. The no
form restores the setting to the default value.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} as-override
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} as-override
Parameter
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
description
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
6-55
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
In general, the BGP will not receive the messages of the
same AS number as its AS. This command can override
the AS number, so that the BGP can receive the
messages of the same AS number.
Usage
guidelines
A typical application is in a VPN where two CEs have the
same AS number. Usually the CEs cannot receive the
messages from each other. Executing this command on a
PE will override the AS number of one CE it connects. As a
result, the other CE can receive the peer’s route
messages.
This command applies only to EBGP peers.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 100
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.1.1.1
as-override
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.62
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor default-originate
Use this command to allow the BGP speaker to advertise the default route to
the peer (group). The no form of the command remove the ocnfiguration.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map
map-tag]
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map
map-tag]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
peer-group-name
description
map-tag
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Name of the route-map of up to 32
characters
6-56
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
This command requires to redistribute the default route
only when the default route exists locally.
Usage
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
guidelines
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command. If
you set the command for a member in the peer, this
command will overwrite the settings on the peer group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 80
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1
default-originate
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.63
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor description
Use this command to set a descriptive sentence for the specified peer (group).
The no form of the command removes the setting.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} description text
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} description
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
Parameter
description
peer-group-name
text
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Text for describing the peer (group) of
up to 80 characters
Default
configuration
Disabled.
6-57
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
BGP configuration mode.
This command is used to add descriptive characters for
the peer (group). This may help remember the features
and characteristics of the peer (group).
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 80
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 description
xyz.com
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
Configure the BGP peer.
remote-as
6.1.64
neighbor distribute-list
Use this ocmmand to configure the ACL based on which the routing policy is
implemetned to receiving/transmitting routing information from/to the BGP peer.
The no form of the command removes the ACL configured.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list access-list-number
{in | out}
no
neighbor
{peer-address
|
peer-group-name}
distribute-list
access-list-number {in |out}
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
peer-group-name
Parameter
description
access-list-number
in
out
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
ACL number
Specify the ACL for filtering the
incoming routes.
Specify the ACL for filtering the
outgoing routes.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
6-58
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
Command
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode, and
address-family VPNv4 configuration mode .
For the in rule or out rule, this command cannot exist at
the same time with the neighbor prefix-list command.
That is, only one of them takes effect.
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
Usage
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command. If
guidelines
you set the neighbor distribute-list command for a
member in the peer, this command will overwrite the
settings on the peer group.
You can set different filtering policies in different
address-family configuration modes to control routes.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 80
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1
distribute-list bgp-filter in
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
Related
neighbor
commands
remote-as
ip access-list
6.1.65
Configure the BGP peer.
Create a standard IP ACL or extended
IP ACL.
neighbor ebgp-multihop
Use this command to allow the BGP connection established between the EBGP
peers that are not directly connected. The no form of the command removes
the setting.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl]
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl]
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
peer address
IP address of the peer
peer-group-name
ttl
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Maximum hops in the range 1 to 255
6-59
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
The BGP connection is allowed to establish only with the
Default
EBGP peer that is directly connected.
configuration
If no parameter is used with the "ebgp-multihop", the
TTL uses 255.
Command
mode
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
To prevent routing loop and dampening, non-default
routes that can reach the peer must exist between the
EBGP peers where the BGP connection must be
Usage
established via multiple hops.
guidelines
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as
Examples
65100
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
ebgp-multihop
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.66
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor filter-list
When this command is set to specify the BGP peer to receive/transmit routing
information, the same route filtering is used. The no form of the command
cancels the filtering.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} filter-list access-list-number {in |
out}
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} filter-list access-list-number
{in | out}
6-60
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 address
peer address
Parameter
description
or IPv6 address
peer-group-name
access-list-numbe
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
ACL number
as-path list is applied on the received
in
routing information.
as-path
out
list
is
applied
on
the
distributed routing information.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
Command
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode, and
address-family VPNv4 configuration mode .
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If the neighbor
Usage
filter-list command is set for a member of the peer, the
guidelines
setting will overwrite the setting for the group.
You
can
set
different
filter
policies
in
different
address-family configuration modes to control routes.
DGS-8000(config)# ip as-path access-list 1 deny _123_
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as
65100
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 filter-list 1
out
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
ip as-path
access-list
match as-path
Configure the BGP peer.
Create an AS_PATH list.
Match the AS_PATH list.
6-61
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.67
Chapter 6 BGP4
neighbor local-as
Use this command to configure the local AS number for the BGP peer, in this
case, this AS could be used as its Remote AS to establish the connection with
local router. The no form of this command deletes the local AS.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} local-as as-number [no-prepend
[replace-as [dual-as]]]
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} local-as
Parameter
peer address
peer-group-name
as-numbe
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 address
or IPv6 address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Local AS number,in the range of 1 to
65535.
The
Parameter
no-prepend
description
AS-PATH
of
the
routing
information received from the peer
dose not append the Local AS. This
option is disabled by default.
The
replace-as
AS-PATH
of
the
routing
information sent to the peer uses the
Local AS to replace the BGP AS. This
option is disabled by default.
Use the BGP AS or Local
dual-as
AS
to
establish the BGP connection with the
device. This option is disabled by
default.
The Local AS is not configured for the peer. If the Local
AS is configured, any options are not configured by
default that the peer could only use the Local AS to
Default
establish the BGP connection with local device, and adds
configuration
the Local AS into the AS-PATH of the received routing
information, inserts the Local AS to the corresponding
AS-PATH before sending the routing information to the
peer.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
Command
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode, and
address-family VPNv4 configuration mode .
6-62
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
The Local AS could be configured on the EBGP peer only,
and if the attributes of the peer change, such as the EBGP
converts to the IBGP or union EBGP, the Local AS and the
corresponding options will be deleted. The Local AS could
Usage
not be the same with BGP AS and this peer’s Remote AS
guidelines
and the union ID (if the union is configured). If you have
specified the BGP peer group, all members of this peer
group will inherit the settings of this command. You can not
set the Local AS for the specified member of the peer
group separately.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as
Examples
65100
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 local-as 23
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.68
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor maximum-prefix
Use this command to limit the number of prefixes received from the specified
BGP peer. The no form of the command removes the limitation configured.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum
[threshold] [warning-only]
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum
Parameter
peer-address
Peer-group-name
Parameter
description
maximum
threshold
warning-only
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Upeer limit of the number of the
received route entries
Percentage of the maximum when the
alarm starts to be generated.
Do not determine the BGP connection
when the route entries reaches the
6-63
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
upeer limit but produce a log entry.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
By default, the BGP connection will be torn down when the
received routes exceeds the upeer limit. If you do not hope
to tear down the connection, set the "warning-only" to
Usage
control that.
guidelines
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
maximum-prefix 1000
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.69
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor next-hop-self
Use this command to set the next-hop of the route to the local BGP speaker
while specifying the routes that the BGP peer redistributes. Use the no form of
the command to remove the configuration.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-self
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
6-64
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
This command is mostly used in the non-full-mesh-type
network, such as the Frame Relay and X.25, where the
Usage
BGP speakers within the same subnet cannot completely
guidelines
be accessed mutually.
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
next-hop-self
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.70
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor next-hop-unchanged
Use this command to unchange the next-hop while sending the routes to the
peer(group). Use the no form of the command to remove the configuration.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-unchanged
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} next-hop-unchanged
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or
IPv6 address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Unchange
next-hop-unchanged
sending
the
the
next-hop
routes
to
while
the
peer(group).
6-65
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
By default, the next-hop will be changd while sending the
configuration
routes to the EBGP peer.
Command
BGP
mode
configuration mode, BGP VPN configuration mode.
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
This command is used to control to unchange the next-hop
route that is transmitting between the multi-hop EBGP peer
sessions. This command could not be configured on the
route reflector. And for the client of the route reflector, if
this function is enabled, the neighbor next-hop-self
command could not be used to change the next-hop of
routes. This function is mainly applied to the cross-domain
VPN. In the implementation with the Option C adopted, to
reduce the complete connectivity between the PEs of the
cross-domain CPN, a route reflector could be set in every
autonomous domain to establish the Multihop MP-EBGP
Usage
guidelines
connection to implement the VPN route interaction. As the
next-hop route is changed while sending routes to the
EBGP peer by default, this may cause the PE stations of
other autonomous domains consider the final next-hop of
the VPN route to be the route reflector when receiving the
VPN route at last, which results in all cross-domains VPN
flow going through the reflector. However, usually this is
not the optimal forwarding path, and the requirement for
the forwarding performance of the RR is higher. To avoid
this condition, use the neighbor next-hop-unchanged
command in the address-family VPNv4 configuration mode
to unchange the next-hop of the VPNv4 route that sent to
the BGP peer when establishing the cross-domain
Multihop MP-EBGP connection on the router reflector.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-f00000000amily vpnv4
DGS-8000(config-router-af)# neighbor 10.1.1.1
next-hop-unchanged
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
6-66
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.71
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor password
When the BGP connection with the BGP peer is established, use this command
to enable the TCP MD5 authentication and set the password. The no form of
the command disables MD5 authentication.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} password [0 | 7 ]string
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} password
Parameter
peer-address
Parameter
description
peer-group-name
0
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Display the password with encryption.
Display the password without
7
encryption.
Password for MD5 authentication in the
string
range of up to 80 characters
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP configuration mod, address-family IPv4 configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv6
configuration
mode,
address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
This command will enable the MD5 authentication of the
TCP. The BGP peers must have the same password
configured; otherwise, the neighbor relationship cannot be
established. When this command is set, the local BGP
speaker will re-establish the BGP connection with the BGP
Usage
peer.
guidelines
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
A neighbor has only one password, not one for every
address family, no matter in which mode it is configured.
6-67
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 password
DGS-8000
.Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.72
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor peer-group (assigning members)
Use this command to configure the specified peer as the member of the BGP
peer group. Use the no form of this command to delete the specified BGP peer
from the peer group.
neighbor peer-address peer-group peer-group-name
no neighbor peer-address peer-group peer-group-name
Parameter
Parameter
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
peer-address
address
description
Name of the peer group of up to 32
peer-group-name
characters
Default
configuration
No peer exists in the peer group.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
The
members
of
the
peer
group
can
inherit
all
configurations of the peer.
It is allowed to configure an individual member of the peer
group to take the place of the universal configuration for the
Usage
guidelines
peer group, but such separate configuration does not
contain the configuration information that may affect the
output update. In other words, every member in the peer
group will always inherit the following configurations of the
peer group:
remote-as, update-source,
local-as,reconnect-interval ,times,
6-68
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
advertisemet-interval, default-originate, next-hop-self,
remove-private-as, send-community, distribute-list out,
filter-list out, prefix-list out, route-map out,
unsuppress-map, route-reflector-client.
Do not place the neighbors in different address families into
the same peer group, and also do not place the IBGP and
EBGP neighbors in the same peer group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor Red-Giant peer-group
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 peer-group
Red-Giant
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
Related
remote-as
commands
neighbor
peer-group
Configure the BGP peer.
Create the BGP peer group.
(creating)
show ip bgp
peer-group
6.1.73
Show the information of the BGP peer.
neighbor peer-group (creating)
Use this command to create the BGP peer group. The no form of the command
deletes the specified peer group and all its members.
neighbor peer-group-name peer-group
no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group
Parameter
description
Parameter
peer-group-name
Description
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
No BGP peer group is created.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
If multiple BGP peers use the same update policy, those
6-69
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
guidelines
Chapter 6 BGP4
peers can be configured in the same peer group, so as to
simplify the configuration and boost operation efficiency.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor Red-Giant peer-group
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
Related
commands
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor
peer-group
Configure the specified peer as the
(assigning
member of the BGP peer group.
members)
6.1.74
show ip bgp
Show the information of the BGP
peer-group
peer.
neighbor prefix-list
Use this command to implement the routing policy based on the prefix list to
receive/transmit routes from/to the BGP peer. The no form of the command
removes the prefix-list configured.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} prefix-list prefix-list-name {in |
out}
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} prefix-list prefix-list-name {in
|out}
Parameter
peer address
peer-group-name
Parameter
description
prefix-lis-name
in
out
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Name of the prefix-list of up to 32
characters
Apply the prefix list to the received
routes.
Apply the prefix list to the redistributed
routes.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
6-70
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Command
mode
Chapter 6 BGP4
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
For the "in" rule or "out" rule, this command cannot exist at
the
same
time
with
the
neighbor
distribute-list
command. That is, only one of them takes effect.
Usage
guidelines
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If the neighbor
prefix-list in command is set for a member of the peer, the
setting will overwrite the setting for the group.
You
can
set
different
filter
policies
in
different
address-family configuration modes to control routes.
DGS-8000(config)# ip prefix-list bgp-filter deny
10.0.0.1/16
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 prefix-list
bgp-filter in
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
ip prefix-list
6.1.75
Configure the BGP peer.
Create the prefix lists.
neighbor remote-as
Use this command to configure the BGP peer (group). The no form of the
command deletes the configured peer (group).
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} remote-as as-number
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} remote-as
Parameter
peer-address
Parameter
description
peer-group-name
as-number
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
BGP peer (group) autonomous system
number in the range of 1 to 65535
6-71
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Default
configuration
Command
mode
No BGP peer is configured.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
Usage
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
guidelines
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 80
6.1.76
Related
Command
Description
commands
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor remove-private-as
Use this command to delete the private AS number recorded in the AS path
attribute in the route sent to the specified EBGP peer. Use the no form of the
command to remove the configuration.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Usage
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
This command takes effect only on the EBGP peers.
6-72
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
guidelines
Chapter 6 BGP4
If the AS path contains the private AS number that is the
AS number of the EBGP peer to be sent, the AS number is
not deleted.
Private AS number range: 64512 - 65535
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
remove-private-as
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.77
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor route-map
Use this command to enable route match for the received/sent routes. You can
use the no form of the command to disable this function.
neighbor {peer-address|peer-group-name } route-map map-tag {in | out}
no neighbor {peer-address|peer-group-name } route-map map-tag {in | out}
Parameter
peer-address
Parameter
peer-group-name
description
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
map-tag
Name of the match rule
in
Apply the rule to the incoming routes.
out
Apply the rule to the outgoing routes.
Default
configuration
N/A.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
Command
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode and
address-family IPv4 VPNv4 cofiguration mode.
Usage
This command can be used to filter the incoming and
guidelines
outgoing routes for different neighbors by using different
6-73
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
incoming/outgoing rules. This can reach the results of
purifying routes and controlling routes.
You
can
set
different
filter
policies
in
different
address-family configuration modes to control routes.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor ip-address route-map
map-tag in
Command
Related
commands
neighbor
soft-reconfiguration
inbound
show ip bgp
6.1.78
Description
Store the routing information sent
from the BGP peer.
Show the BGP route entry.
neighbor route-reflector-client
Use this command to configure the local device as the route reflector and
specifies its client. The no form of the command removes the client configured.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name } route-reflector-client
no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name } route-reflector-client
Parameter
Parameter
Description
ip-address
IP address of the peer
description
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group of no more
than 32 characters
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
By default, all IBGP speakers in the autonomous system
must establish neighbor relationship one another. The
BGP speaker does not forward the routes learned from an
Usage
IBGP peer to the other IBGP peers to avoid route loop.
guidelines
This command can be used to set route reflector, so that
there is no requirement for all IBGP speakers to establish
the full neighboring relationship between each other. This
will allow the route reflector to forward the learned IBGP
6-74
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
route to the other IBGP peers.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
route-reflector-client
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
Related
commands
remote-as
bgp cluster-id
bgp
client-to-client
reflection
6.1.79
Configure the BGP peer.
Configure the cluster ID of the route
reflectors.
Cancel the route reflection between
clients
neighbor send-community
Use this command to transmit the community attributes to the specified BGP
neighbor. Use the no form of the command to disable this function.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} send-community [both |
standard | extended]
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} send-community [both |
standard | extended]
Parameter
peer-addres
peer-group-name
Parameter
description
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Transmit both standard and extended
both
communities.
standard
extended
Transmit
the
standard community
only.
Transmit the extended community
only.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
6-75
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
mode
Chapter 6 BGP4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode and
address-family IPv4 VPNv4 configuration mode.
Usage
This command transmits the community to the neighbor or
guidelines
neighbor group.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1
send-community both
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
Related
neighbor
commands
remote-as
Configure the BGP peer.
ip
Create the community list.
community-list
6.1.80
neighbor send-label
Use this command to specify to carry the MPLS label of the route whren
sending the route to the a neighbor. Use the no form of the command to disable
this function.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} send-label
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} send-label
Parameter
Parameter
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
peer-addres
address
description
peer-group-name
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
configuration
mode
mode,
and
address-family
address-family
IPv4
VPNv4
configuration mode.
Usage
Use this command to allow the BGP sending the routes
guidelines
with MPLS label requiring two ends of the peer should be
6-76
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
configured this command. The configuration of this
command takes effect only after restarting the neighbor.
This command is configured in the BGP configuration
mode and takes effect on the ipv4 unicast address-family
only by default. For the AS border routers, only when this
command is configured, the MPLS label forwarding on the
AS border could be implemented.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.0.1 remote-as
Examples
101
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 192.168.0.1
send-label
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.81
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor shutdown
Use this command to disconenct the BGP connection established with the
specified BGP peer. The no form of the command reconnects the BGP peer
(group).
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} shutdown
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} shutdown
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
6-77
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
This command is used to disconnect the valid connection
established with the specified peer (group), and delete all
associated routing information. However, this command
Usage
guidelines
still keeps the configuration information of that specified
peer (group).
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 60
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 shutdown
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
Related
neighbor
commands
remote-as
show ip bgp
summary
6.1.82
Configure the BGP peer.
Show the BGP connection status.
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound
Use this command to sotre the routing information sent from the BGP peer. Use
the no form of the command to disable them.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration inbound
Parameter
Parameter
peer-address
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
6-78
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
This command restarts the BGP session, and keeps the
unchanged routing information sent from the BGP peer
(group).
Executing this command will consume more memories. If
both parties support the route refresh function, this
Usage
command becomes unnecessary. You may run the show
guidelines
ip bgp neighbors command to judge whether the peer
can support the route refresh function.
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
soft-reconfiguration inbound
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
show ip bgp
neighbors
clear ip bgp
6.1.83
Configure the BGP peer.
Show the information of the BGP peer.
Reset the BGP peer session.
neighbor soo
Use this command to set the SOO value of the neighbor. Use the no form of the
command to remove the configuration.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} soo soo-value
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} soo soo-value
Parameter
peer-addres
Parameter
peer-group-name
description
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
SOO value. There are two forms of
soo-value
SOO value:
as_number:nn:
as_number
is
the
public AS number and nn is defined by
6-79
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
yourself.
ip_address:nn: IP address must be
global and nnis defined by yourself.
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
Usage
guidelines
Address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode
In the CE dual-home mode, execute this command to
prevent the routes that a CE sends to the PEs from being
sent back to the CE.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 remote-as 100
DGS-8000(config-router)# address-family ipv4 vrf vpn1
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 soo 100:100
Related
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
commands
timers bgp
6.1.84
Configure the keepalive and holetime
values globally.
neighbor timers
In specifying the BGP peer to establish the BGP connection, use this command
to set the keepalive and holdtime time values used for establishing the BGP
connection. Use the no form of the command to restore it to the default setting.
neighbor [peer-address | peer-group-name] timers keepalive holdtime
no neighbor [peer-address | peer-group-name] timers
Parameter
Parameter
description
peer-address
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Time interval to send the KEEPALIVE
keepalive
message to the BGP peer.
Range: 0-65535 seconds.
6-80
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Time interval to consider the BGP
holdtime
peer alive.
Range: 0-65535 seconds.
keepalive: 60 seconds
Default
configuration
holdtime: 180 seconds.
minimum-holdtime: 0 second
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
A reasonable keepalive value cannot be greater than
one-third of the holdtime value.
If the time is configured for an individual peer or a peer
Usage
guidelines
group, that peer or peer-group will use its time to replace
the global time configuration and connect the peer.
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1 80 240
Related
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
commands
timers bgp
6.1.85
Set the keepalive and holdtime values
globally.
neighbor unsuppress-map
Use this command to selectively advertise the routing information that has been
suppressed with the aggregate-address command. Use the no form of the
command to restore it to the default setting.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} unsuppress-map map-tag
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} unsuppress-map map-tag
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
peer-address
IP address of the peer
6-81
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
peer-group-name
map-tag
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Name of the route-map of up to 32
characters
Default
configuration
Disabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
This command advertises the specified routes that has
been suppressed.
Usage
If the BGP peer group is specified, all members of the peer
guidelines
group inherit the settings of this command. If this
command is set for a member of the peer, the setting will
overwrite the setting for the group.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
unsuppress-map unspress-route
6.1.86
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
Related
neighbor
commands
remote-as
Configure the BGP peer.
aggregate-address
Configure the aggregate address.
route-map
Configuring route-map
neighbor update-source
In specifying the BGP peer to establish the BGP connection, use this command
to set the network interface used for establishing the BGP connection. The no
form of the command automatically matches the optimal local interface.
neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface-type
interface-index
no neighbor {peer-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface-type
interface-index
6-82
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
peer-address
Parameter
description
peer-group-name
Description
IP address of the peer, IPv4 or IPv6
address
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
interface-type
Interface type
interface-index
Interface index
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Use the optimal local interface as the output interface.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
This command enables using the loopback interface to
establish the BGP connection with the BGP peer.
Usage
guidelines
If you have specified the BGP peer group, all members of
the peer group will inherit the settings of the command.
If the connection is initiated by the opposite, it does not
check which interface is used to establish the TCP
connection.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.0.0.1
update-source lookback 1
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.87
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor version
Use this command to show the number of the BGP protocol version used by the
specific BGP neighbor. The no form of the command uses the default version
number.
neighbor {ip-address|peer-group-name} version number
no neighbor {ip-address|peer-group-name} version number
6-83
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Parameter
Description
peer-address
IP address of the peer
Parameter
description
Name of the peer group of up to 32
peer-group-name
characters
Version Number. Now only version 4
number
is supported.
Default
configuration
The default version number is 4.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
Usage
When the command is used, the BGP will lose the version
guidelines
negotiation function.
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 version 4
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.88
Configure the BGP peer.
neighbor weight
Use this command to set the weight for the specific neighbor. The no form of
the command removes the setting.
neighbor {ip-address|peer-group-name} weight number
no neighbor {ip-address|peer-group-name} weight number
Parameter
description
Parameter
Description
peer-address
IP address of the peer
peer-group-name
number
Name of the peer group of up to 32
characters
Weight in the range of 0 to 65535.
Default
No weight is configured for the specific neighbor by
configuration
default. In this case, the learned neighbor weight is 0 and
6-84
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
the locally generated weight is 32768 initially.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
When the command is used, the routes from the neighbor
Usage
guidelines
use this value as the initial weight value. The higher the
weight, the higher the priority is.
Executing the set weight command in the route map of
the neighbor will overwrite this value.
Examples
Related
commands
DGS-8000(config-router)# neighbor 10.1.1.1 weight 73
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
neighbor
remote-as
6.1.89
Configure the BGP peer.
network(BGP)
Use this command to configure the network information to be advertised by the
local BGP speaker. The no form of the command deletes the configured
network information.
network network-number mask mask [route-map map-tag] [backdoor]
no network network-number mask mask [route-map] [backdoor]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
network-number
Network number
mask
Subnet mask
description
map-tag
backdoor
Name of the route-map of up to 32
characters
The route is a backdoor route.
Default
configuration
The network information is not specified.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
6-85
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
This command allows injecting the IGP route into the BGP
Usage
guidelines
routing table. The network information advertised can be
direct route, static route and dynamic route.
The "route-map" can be used to modify the network
information.
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# network 10.0.0.1 mask
255.255.0.0
Related
commands
Command
Description
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
redistribute
Configure the route redistribution.
Network
synchronization
6.1.90
Enalbe network synchronization.
network synchronization
Use this command to advertise the network information after the local BGP
speaker is synchronized with the local device. The no form of the command
directly advertises the network information.
network synchronization
no network synchronization
Parameter
description
N/A.
Default
configuration
Enabled.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
This command is used to modify the behavior of the
Usage
network during the process of advertisement. It is not
guidelines
recommended to turn off this switch lest route black hole is
caused.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
6-86
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
DGS-8000(config-router)# network synchronization
6.1.91
Command
Description
Related
router bgp
Enable the BGP protocol.
commands
redistribute
Configure the route redistribution.
network(BGP)
Configure the route to be distributed.
overflow memory-lack
Use this command to allow the BGP to enter the OVERFLOW state when the
memory lacks. Use the no form of this command to disable this function.
overflow memory-lack
no overflow memory-lack
Parameter
Parameter
description
Description
Disallow
no
the
BGP
to
enter
the
OVERFLOW state when the memory
lacks.
Default
Allow the BGP to enter the OVERFLOW state when the
configuration
memory lacks.
Command
mode
BGP configuration mode.
In the BGP OVERFLOW state, the newly-learned routes
are discarded, which prevents the memory from being
increased.
With this function enabled, if the BGP address family is in
the OVERFLOW state, the newly-learned routes will be
discarded, which may results in the loop in the network. To
Usage
guidelines
prevent that from happening and reduce the propability,
BGP generates a default route directing to the NULL
interface, and the default route will always exist in the
OVERFLOW state.
Use the clear bgp {addressfamily|all} * command to reset
the BGP and clear the OVERFLOW state in the BGP
address family.
Use the no option to disallow the BGP to enter the
OVERFLOW state when the memory lacks, which is
6-87
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
possible to lead to the continuous exhausion of the
memory resources. When the meory has been exhausted
to a certain degree, BGP will break down all neighbors and
delete all learned routes.
Examples
DGS-8000(config)# router bgp 65000
DGS-8000(config-router)# no memory-lack overflow
Command
Description
clear bgp
Related
commands
Reset the BGP address family.
{ addressfamily|all }
*
show bgp
Show the summary of the BGP
{ addressfamily|all }
address family.
summary
6.1.92
redistribute
Use this is to redistribute routes between the other routing protocol and the BGP.
The no form of the command disables the function.
redistribute protocol-type [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value]
no redistribute protocol-type [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value]
Parameter
Description
The
Parameter
protocol-type
source
redistributing
protocol
routes,
types
for
including
connected, static, RIP.
description
route-map
map-tag
Specify the route map.
No route map is associated with by
default.
metric
Set the default metric of the routes to
metric-value
be redistributed, null by default.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
6-88
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
When a switch supports multiple routing protocols, the
coordination between these protocols becomes an
important task. The switch may run multiple routing
protocols at the same time, so it should redistribute the
protocols. This is applicable to all IP routing protocols.
Usage
guidelines
Note that when you configure the no form of this command
with
parameters,
the
corresponding
parameter
configuration will be removed. The no form removes
redistribution without any parameters configured.
The route metric generated by the route-map command
takes precedence over the one generated by the metric
option of this command. If both are not available, the
redistributed one is used.
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute static route-map
static-rmap
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# no redistribute static
route-map static-rmap
DGS-8000(config-router)# no redistribute static
Related
commands
Command
show ip
protocol
6.1.93
Description
Show the protocol configuration.
redistribute ospf
Use this is to redistribute routes between the OSPF and the BGP. The no form
of the command disables the function.
redistribute process-id [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value] [match
internal external [1 | 2 ] nssa-external [1 | 2 ]]
no redistribute process-id [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value] [match
internal external [1 | 2 ] nssa-external [1 | 2 ]]
Parameter
Parameter
Description
description
process-id
OSPF process ID to be redistributed
route-map
map-tag
Specify the route map.
No route map is associated with by
default.
metric
Set the default metric of the routes to
metric-value
be redistributed, null by default.
match
Match the sub type of OSPF routes.
6-89
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
Chapter 6 BGP4
Match the internal OSPF routes, the
internal
default configuration.
Match the external OSPF rotues. You
external [1 | 2 ]
can specify the concrete type (v1 or v2)
or v1 and v2 without indication.
Match the NSSA-external type of
nssa-
external
OSPF routes. You can specify the
concrete type (v1 or v2) or v1 and v2
[1 | 2 ]
without indication.
Default
configuration
Command
mode
Disabled.
BGP
configuration
mode,
address-family
IPv4
configuration mode, address-family IPv6 configuration
mode, address-family IPv4 VRF configuration mode.
When a switch supports multiple routing protocols, the
coordination between these protocols becomes an
important task. The switch may run multiple routing
protocols at the same time, so it should redistribute the
protocols. This is applicable to all IP routing protocols.
Usage
guidelines
Note that when you configure the no form of this command
with
parameters,
the
corresponding
parameter
configuration will be removed. The no form removes
redistribution without any parameters configured.
The route metric generated by the route-map command
takes precedence over the one generated by the metric
option of this command. If both are not available, the
redistributed one is used.
DGS-8000(config-router)# redistribute ospf 2 route-map
static-rmap
Examples
DGS-8000(config-router)# no redistribute ospf 4 match
external rotue-map ospf-rmap
DGS-8000(config-router)# no redistribute ospf 78
Related
commands
Command
show ip
protocol
Description
Show the protocol configuration.
6-90
DGS-8000 CLI Reference Guide
Commands
6.1.94
Chapter 6 BGP4
redistribute isis
Use this is to redistribute routes between the ISIS and the BGP. The no form of
the command disables the function.
redistribute isis [isis-tag] [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value] [level-1 |
level-1-2 | level-2]
no redistribute isis [isis-tag] [route-map map-tag] [metric metric-value]
[level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2]
Parameter
(Optional)ISIS
isis-tag
description
process
ID
to
be
redistributed
route-map
Parameter
Description
map-tag
Specify the route map.
No route map is associated with by
default.
metric
Set the default metric of the routes to
metric-val